Home

Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual(Basic)

1. ELISA SSL IAN LE A setting n 1 H L Send n 2 H L receive data to n setting data H L k ____length Maximum of 508 words 1 word 2 bytes Example n 1 124 344 n 2 56H 784 F 36H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 304 32H 31H 32 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H 38H H to L H to L Subheader Data length 5 End codes For more details on the end codes added to a response when communicating using the fixed buffers see Section 11 3 1 End codes are stored in the complete status area in the control data of the BUFSND and BUFRCV instructions as well as the communication status storage area of the buffer memory 7 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE PROCEDURE EXIST CONTROL METHOD 7 5 Programming MELSEC Q This section explains the programming method when the Ethernet module and an external device communicate using the fixed buffers and the procedure exist control method 7 5 1 Precautions when creating programs 1 7 In order to communicate using the fixed buffer the initial processing and the connection open processing must be completed The contents of the parameter settings have been loaded into the Ethernet module when the Ethernet module open completion signal address 5000h corresponding bit switches from off to on The data length in word count is designated stored using the dedicated instruct
2. 0 Ethernet 1 PLC No 1 2 PLC No 2 1 2 3 4 a2 4 PLC No 4 3 PLC No 3 1 Module used for routing controlled by PLC No 1 MELSECNET H T Ethernet module controlled by Station to be accessed PLC No 1 1 2 3 4 2 2 Module used for routing controlled by PLC No 2 Module for routing MELSECNET H Network module The QnA compatible 3E frame should be used for access to non control PLCs when communicating using the MC protocol Note however that the available functions differ depending on the QCPU to be accessed whether it is a control PLC or a non control PLC See the Reference Manual for the available functions and accessible range The modules used for routing are indicated the following when accessing other stations e MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 network module e Q series C24 e Ethernet module x If there is a module of function version A among the modules for routing it is possible to access the control PLC of module used for routing only In addition it is possible to access other stations via a module controlled by the same control PLC 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 8 Remote password check function Details are explained in Chapter 5 of the Reference Manual a b c The remote password check function of the Ethernet module prevents improper access to the
3. c ccsceeseeeseeeeees A 13 Remote password Check cceseeeee 5 68 Remote password mismatch notification accumulated Count 5 85 Response format Fixed buffer communication procedure exiSt asessessesresrernsrerrenens 7 13 Communication using the random access buffer sssssssssnsssnssnnssnnsrresrneernees 9 6 Router IP address 2 cccceeeeeeeseeeeteeees 5 20 Router relay function cccceeeeeeeeeeees 5 17 Router relay parameter cccseeeeeee 5 16 S Setting the number of cards 4 13 4 16 Settings and procedures prior to Starting the operation ee eeeeeeeeteereeeeees 4 3 Index 3 Simultaneous broadcasting cceeeee 8 11 SMIP 3 iiinhos aA hee ea 1 15 Specification 0 ce ceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeteeees Chapter 3 Starting O NO ccecceceseeeeeeeceeteeeeeeeeneeeees 4 17 Station Nosr a a i 4 18 Subheader Fixed buffer communication procedure exist s sosssssneesneenesnnseneen 7 14 Communication using the random ACCESS puffer eene iainih 9 7 Sub net AddreSs cececseseeseeseeeseeeeeees 5 18 Sub net mask pattern cccccceeseeseeteeees 5 17 System configuration c cccceeesee Chapter 2 T ARG EEEE E ATETEA 1 14 5 37 Test Self refrain test 00 cccccsecesseeseceseeeseees 4 22 Hardware test H W test 0 0 cee 4 23 LOOP Pack TeSt derr 5 29 PING command teSt c ccccccceseeeseeees
4. Ethernet module random access buffer Physical address H L Logical address 2680 H 9856 OH 0 ae 2681 H 9857 2682 H 9858 2H 2 to to to 2689 H 9865 9H 9 lt 10 words to to 3E7F H 15999 17FF H 6143 2 Response format Ethernet module to the external device Subheader End code 454 32H 30H 304 2 2 Response format Ethernet module to the external device Subheader End code Text 10 words L H O H L H L H E1H 00H 34H 12H 78H 56H BCH QAH teretes BCH 9AH Ethernet module random access buffer Physical address H L Logical address 2680H 9856 OH 0 to to to 2694H 9876 12H 34H 14H 20 L 2695H 9877 56H 78H 15H 21 2696H 9878 9AH BCH 16H 22 to to to 269DH 9885 9AH BCH 1DH 29 to to to 10 words 3E7FH 15999 17FFH 6143 9 COMMUNICATION USING THE RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER MELSEC Q Reading from the random access buffer by a read request from an external device a 1 Communication using binary code Command format external device to the Ethernet module Subheader Head address Data length x or 00H 14H OOH OAH OOH H L H 9 COMMUNICATION USING THE RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER MELSEC Q a Communication using ASCII code 1 Command format external device to the Ethernet module Subheader Head address Data length H a D
5. Check the operation of the external device Correct the TCP ULP timeout value and execute the initial processing again Send after an arbitrarily selected time has elapsed because packets may be congested on the line Check that the connection cable is not dislocated HAW Information t Stop monitor Displays e Module The following information is displayed Model name the model name of the module installed Starting I O No the starting input output signal number of the target module Mounting position the slot position where the module is mounted Product information Product information The function version of the module is shown at the end of the product information Example A B at the end of the product information indicates this is a module of function version B Unit access Module access Displays access permissions when the WDT error signal X1F is turned off e Status of I O Address Verify Displays whether or not the module for which the user has set the parameters matches the module installed e Remote password setting status Displays the remote password setting status e Present Error Displays the error code of the latest error occurred 11 8 11 8 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q e Error Display Displays the error codes stored in the error log area address E5n EEH 16CH of the buffer memory e Error details corrective action Displays the error detai
6. Ethernet B station GX Developer Ethernet Network No 2 Network No 3 Ethernet E 0 O O Station 2 1 1 Station 2 2 1 2 Station 3 1 1 Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet QCPU QCPU QCPU module module module module fit EP al C station D station i i i i i i i i i l i l i i i i i i i i i i l i module i i i i i i l i i i l i i i I i i i I I i i i i i I I i i Request destination Applicable PLC station Request source QCPU QCPU QCPU QCPU QCPU QCPU aoe Aston o o eo o xterna Bsttin OF Oo oO oOo Oo oOo Oe M a 2 Oa a ee at er 2 C station bea d O ol 707 te Ge i 20 _ af 36 E E i Stations that can be accessed form the external device after the remote password unlock processing Stations that can be accessed from the external device without performing the remote password unlock processing 2 A station can access the stations after the remote password unlock processing for the module 1 of station 1 1 is completed The stations can be accessed if the communication line is open B station C station and D station can access the stations if the communication line to those stations is open 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q Example 2 When a remote password and the remote password check are set in multiple QCPU s
7. SYN ACK FIN ACK 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q After communicating the parameter settings confirm the normal completion of the Ethernet module initial processing Initial normal completion signal X19 ON Start the open processing using the dedicated OPEN instruction Open request signal address 5002 b0 ON The Ethernet module executes the open processing e Sends the open request SYN When the open processing completes normally e Open completion signal address 5000H b0 ON e OPEN instruction complete device ON e OPEN instruction complete device 1 OFF e OPEN instruction complete status area 1 OOOOH Data communication is enabled When the open processing completes abnormally 2 Open completion signal OFF e OPEN instruction complete device ON e OPEN instruction complete device 1 ON e The open error code is stored in the buffer memory 73 e OPEN instruction complete status area 1 Value other than 0000H Open abnormal detection signal X18 ON Start the close processing using the dedicated CLOSE instruction Open request signal OFF The Ethernet module executes the close processing e Sends the close request FIN 7 When the close processing completes normally e Open completion signal OFF e CLOSE instruction complete device ON e CLOSE instruction complete device 1 OFF e CLOSE instruction complete status area 1
8. IR 31H 30H 30H 00H OOH 31H 34H OOH OOH OOH 41H 2 Response format Ethernet module to the external device Subheader End code 45H 31H 30H 30H Text 20 words A oo oo EE Se EA ee 2 eo E Hues ae E l 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H 38H 39H 41H 42H 43H eeeeeeeeee 39H 41H 42H 43H PE AAA EE ae O O E ANOA T EE E E E EE oes fe ET lS cogs ae 2B Ree a A e a eae eV Re SIR A ant eee Ethernet module random access buffer Physical address H L Logical address 2680H 9856 OH 0 2694H 9876 12H 34H 14H 20 2695H 9877 56H 78H 15H 21 2696H 9878 9AH BCH 16H 22 269DH 9885 9AH BCH 1DH 29 to to 10 words to 3E7FH 15999 17FFH 6143 9 COMMUNICATION USING THE RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER MELSEC Q 9 3 Physical and Logical Addresses of the Random Access Buffer This section explains the head address of the Ethernet random access buffer no battery backup which is designated with the commands used for the random access buffer communication The designated addresses of the random access buffer are shown below Note that when designating the head address of the random access buffer the address designated by an external device is different from that designated with the FROM TO instructions in the sequence program Physical address Address designated with the FROM TO instructions of the sequence program
9. Operational settings Communication data code For more details see Section 4 7 Operational Settings 1 Format a Communication using binary code Application data area command message Maximum of 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 1017 words A A A A a v NG Y eer Text Communications Subheader Head address Pata length command request source side setting none at read On 00H L H L H request P Text Communication Subheader End code response request destination side none at write request Ke a A v A y J 1 byte 1 byte Maximum of 1017 words Ba Application data area response b Communication using ASCII code Application data area command message Maximum of 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 1016 words A A A A VY y ks N OSE Text communication Subheader Head address Pta length command request source side setting none at read H L B030 H ILIH IL request rete Text Communication Subheader End code response request destination side none at write H L H L request x AW A J M Y Y 2 byte 2 byte Maximum of 1016 words So Application data area response 9 COMMUNICATION USING THE RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER 2 Subheader MELSEC Q The format of the subheader is as shown below The user does not need to set the subheader when using the Ethernet module since the Ethernet module adds a
10. P 1 Review the specified device Device error Invalid device specification 7 2 Does not access any non existent device Check whether or not the PLC CPU with the think rtor The CPU module of the request destination is disconnected from the station number set as PC number is disconnected ink Remove the cause of disconnection and connect again One of the following hardware is faulty the PLC F Cannot access the memory of the intelligent function module Aare A Intelligent function CPU base unit intelligent function module or 1 The control bus to the intelligent function module is faulty module bus error i j Ethernet module Please consult your nearest 2 The intelligent function module is faulty dealer 1 Change the PC number to FF of the local station or a station number set in the link parameter and communicate again 1 Communicate again If an error occurs again check noise etc and replace the Ethernet module then communicate again Mode error Intelligent function module designation error 11 24 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 3 Error codes stored in the buffer memory When an error occurs at each data communication processing between the Ethernet module and an external device the error code abnormal code is stored in the buffer memory of the Ethernet module This section explains the contents of this type of errors and error handling procedures The Storage destinat
11. Check the operation of the external device Check that the connection cable is not dislocated Check that connections to the transceiver and terminator are not faulty Check the operation of the external device Send after an arbitrarily selected time has elapsed because packets may be congested on the line Check that the connection cable is not dislocated Check that connections to the transceiver and terminator are not faulty Correct the IP assembly timer value of the external device existence timer timeout Check the operation of the external device Send after an arbitrarily selected time has elapsed because packets may be congested on the line Check that the connection cable is not dislocated Check that connections to the transceiver and terminator are not faulty Correct the IP assembly timer value and execute the initial processing again Send the same data again and check that the response is received Review the data length Review the text size length so that the text data becomes less than the receive buffer memory size Select binary code communication in the operational settings and restart the Ethernet module Correct the data sent from the external side and send again Correct the number of read write points and send to the Ethernet module again Correct the number of read write points or byte points and send to the Ethernet module again Correct the head address or the number of rea
12. GX Developer setting Setting data Data item screen Setting value Remark FTP functi tti Do not use nction settings ie g Pose O Login name Default QJ71E71 Ethernet FTP parameter settings ee para S E E Password Command input monitoring timer _ Commandinput mororo mer O O O Unit Setting value x 500ms ee MESNY tmar OOO App 58 App 58 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Recording sheet 7 Module number GX Developer setting Z n ae data Data item screen Settingvaue OOOO O value Remark Oe oo a fis Check of received mail fal Check received mails Check Check mark Set interval value to check received mail Select unit for interval to check received mail Network parameters ae Ethernet e mail settings EA w o Decimal Send setting IP address input format e IP address Adjust to input format Server name Eo Mo a i Decimal IP address input format Hexadecimal IP address Adjust to input format News setting TE Interval of inquiry Mail address settings News setting News setting News setti ng No execute W i li Execute news No as No execute f News setting Ethernet send mail Ses App 59 App 59 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Recording sheet 8 Module number GX Developer setting Setting data Data item screen Setting value Remark Nosetings O Normal STOP Module error module system error Medium Major level disorder Warning STOP
13. Setting example 3 When the network addresses of the local station Ethernet module and target device are the same Network address Local station Ethernet module IP address Class B Subnet mask Target device 3 81H 05H 29H 024 IP address Class B 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 Sk Set the subnet address of the target device 3 Subnet address Subnet address set value 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE 5 MELSEC Q Router information Router IP address Address 207H 208H and later Set the IP addresses of the routers to be used when the QU71MT91 communicates with the target devices on other Ethernets via other than the default router Set the value that satisfies the following conditions e Condition 1 The IP address class is any of A B and C e Condition 2 The sub net address of the router is the same as that of the local station Ethernet module Condition 3 The host address bits are not all 0 or all 1 POINT When the Ethernet module communicates with the external device via the router in Passive open TCP IP status communication can be made without use of the router relay function The router relay function is not needed in a system that uses the Proxy router 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 5 4 Confirming the Completion of the Initial Processing The initial processing of the Ethernet module completes by savi
14. Storage destination Error code abnormal Description of error Error handling code Connection Error code E mail log Dedicated instruction m a A reading operation was executed Execute the MRECV instruction when the while no receiving e mail was stored mail receiving flag of the mail information in the mail buffer data area is yes The RECV instruction was executed Review the execution condition of the for the channel that had not received RECV instruction data Review the channel number The OPEN instruction cannot be executed for the specified Review the connection number connection A dedicated instruction was Do not execute any dedicated executed while in the initialization instructions until after the initial uncompleted status processing is completed The target station CPU type is Review the value specified for the target C1BBu gt wrong station CPU type Thereisanetrorinihe remot Review the remote password then C200n perform the remote password unlock lock O password y processing again The remote password status of the Tan Unlock the remote password then C2011 port used for communication is in eto perform communication the lock status When accessing another station do not When another station was set a remote password in the relay C202 accessed the remote password station or station to be accessed or set could not be unlocked so they are not subject to the remote
15. 11 24 11 3 3 Error codes stored in the buffer MeMOTy ecceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeesaeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeteneeeataes 11 25 11 4 Troubleshooting FIOWChart se cesscusanua naaa AAE IAA TAAA ERA RTEA 11 42 11 4 1 Sending errors during fixed buffer communication common to procedure exist and no PrOCECUIE ceecceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeceaeeeaeeeaeeeateaeeeaeenatenas 11 45 11 4 2 Receiving errors during fixed buffer communication common to procedure exist and no PrOCECUIE ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeateaeeeatenaeesas 11 47 11 4 3 Errors during random access buffer communication ce eeeeeeeeeeeteteeeteeeteeeeeeeteeseeeteeeeeeteneeaaes 11 50 11 4 4 Errors in communication using the MC protocol cecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeececeeeaeeaeseeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeeeaee 11 52 11 4 5 Sending errors during e mail COMMUNICATION cececceteeee cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaesaeseeeeaeeaesaeseeeeaeeaes 11 54 11 4 6 Receiving errors during e mail COMMUNICATION cece eeeeeeeeeeeeteeeseeeeeeeseeeseteeeseeeteneteneeeeeeeaes 11 56 11 4 7 Error in redundant Syston cecceesceeeeesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeaeeseeeaeeeeeeeeeseeesaeseeeseeeseenseeeeeeetees 11 58 Appendix 1 Function Upgrade for the Ethernet Module cee eeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeseeeaeeeaeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeateeaeeeas App 1 Appendix 1 1 A comparison of functions of the Ethernet MOdUIe ee eeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeas App
16. 3 Item QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 B2 Base band Transmission specifications Cascade Cascade Maximum number of nodes connection connecion Onne Ron 100 units segment 30 units segment Maximum 2 Maximum 4 stages stages Interval between the minimum nodes a ee 2 5 m 8 20 ft 0 5 m 1 64 ft Number of simultaneously open ee 16 connections Connections usable by the sequence program me eeo allowed Transmission data Fixedbuffer DO tkwordsx te storage memory Random access buffer 6 k words x 1 Attached file 6 k words x 1 4 E mail 960 d 1 x 4 Number of I O points occupied 32 points 1 slot I O assignment intelligent 5 V DC internal current consumption 0 50 A 0 50 A 0 60 A 3 12V DC extemal power supply capacity Transceiver TS 98 3 86 in H x 27 4 1 08 in W x 90 3 54 in D mm 1 Length between the Hub and nobe x2 It is necessary to apply a transceiver or a device that meets AUI cable specifications Refer to Section 2 2 3 The product with first 5 digits of serial number 05049 or earlier is different as follows e 5V DC internal current consumption 0 70A e Weight 0 14kg 0 31lb x4 The following table outlines the specifications of the e mail transmission and reception function The e mail transmission and reception function of the PLC CPU and the random access buffer communication function cannot be used together only one of the functions can be used at a time The e mail
17. Do not wait for OPEN communications impossible at STOP time is selected from GX Developer the open processing close processing is performed as explained below Since open processing close processing is executed by a Sequence program an external device can be changed while the connection is established lt lt Open processing for connection No 1 using the dedicated OPEN instruction gt gt direction E Set the control data to DO to D9 When setting the application of GX Developer in the Open settings Control data DO HO ZP OPEN UO K1 DO MO When setting the application of OPEN instruction in the Control data D0 H8000 Set D1 to D9 according to the application Mo M Sa Processing for normal completion H H Processing for abnormal completion H lt lt Close processing for connection No 1 using the dedicated CLOSE instruction gt gt M direction ZP CLOSE Uo K1 D100 M100 M100 M101 l Processing for normal completion H M101 Processing for abnormal completion H Parameter communication Power on completed i Open status Open allowed status closed i gt 1 Active open acknowledge mani enabled roe Closed status i m Initial normal completion X19 i i 2 OPEN instruction gt One scan OPEN instruction complete device OPEN instruction complete device 1 Ope
18. MessageBox szMessage LL 2K AK K K OK OK K K K K KK K ok KK Ok ok K K Disconnection IL 2K K K K K OK K K K K K K K K K K K K K K void CVCDIg OnOpen long IRet CString szMessage Disconnection IRet m_actEasylF Close if IRet 0 MessageBox The disconnection was successful else szMessage Format Disconnection Error x IRet MessageBox szMessage App 50 App 50 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 10 Differences between the Ethernet and the IEEE802 3 The following shows the Ethernet header in the data link layer supported by the Ethernet module Ethernet data link layer header arene module Ethernet frame V 2 0 specification IEEE802 3 ISO IEC8802 3 frame specification R 1 Ethernet Destination address Source address Data 46 to 1500 byte FCS 2 IEEE802 3 Destination address Source address Data 46 to 1500 byte FCS Appendix 11 ICMP Protocol Supported by the Ethernet Module The following table outlines the types of ICMP supported by the Ethernet module and the processing performed by the Ethernet module ICMP Type ICMP name description Processing by the Ethernet module Echo Reply Upon receiving an Echo Request the Ethernet module Result of IP packet loopback sends this message The Ethernet module sends this message when it receives data corresponding to a UDP connection that has not been opened If destination existence confirmation is
19. No error Check the setting values for the following parameters The initial processing for the target Ethernet module e Network parameters setting the number of has not been completed normally MNET 10H Ethernet cards e Operational setting e Initial setting There is an error in the line connection to the target Ethernet module Cable disconnection breakage etc Check the cable e Check the transceiver 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q Display contents of Status of the target 3 Cause Corrective action loop back test results Ethernet module IP address for the target Ethernet module is incorrect Class or sub net address differs from the Ethernet module setting 3 operation setting The same IP address has been set to multiple target Ethernet modules Perform a PING test for the No response module The same network number or station number has If the test has been completed normally No response been set to multiple target Ethernet modules check the parameter setting value for the network parameters setting the number of MNET 10H Ethernet cards Check the parameter setting values for the No error The Ethernet line is in the high load status including a case in which an error equivalent to the error code C030H C0314 is occurring Perform another test when the load on the Ethernet line is low Check the setting value for the routing parameter See Chapter 3 of User s Manual Applicat
20. The test result can be determined from the LED displays on the front of the Ethernet module Status of LED Description of operation Li rez Ee Connect the Ethernet module to the line 1 See Section 4 4 CANT eee Stop QCPU Select Setting the Number of MNET 10H Ethernet Cards Mode to choose 3 A refrain test and save the parameter values in the PLC CPU See Section Eao a QCPU Test starts a e 5 Check status of each LED after 5 seconds Enr o o Select Setting the Number of MNET 10H Ethernet Cards Mode change the mode to Online or another test mode and save the parameter values in the PLC CPU See Section 4 6 7 Reset CPU eee Lit O Off 1 For QJ71E71 100 when the line is not connected the self refrain test is not performed and end normally The following are probable causes of errors e Ethernet module hardware error e Ethernet line error e External power supply 12 V DC error only 1OBASE5 An error code is stored in the error log area address E5x in the buffer memory of the Ethernet module the error content can then be checked from GX Developer See Sections 11 2 and 11 3 POINT There will be no hardware interference even if the self refrain test is conducted while an external device is online If the packets are congested over the line packet collisions may occur and the test may not finish with the error end or within the expected 5 second time fr
21. This section explains the main functions for accessing the PLC CPUs using the MC protocol On the PLC side the Ethernet module sends and receives data based on commands from the external devices Thus the PLC CPU side does not require sequence programs for data communication 1 Data read write This function reads writes data from to the PLC CPU device memory of the local station or another station on the MELSECNET H MELSECNET 110 as well as the intelligent function module buffer memory By reading and writing data the PLC CPU operation monitoring data analysis and production management can be performed on the external device side Also production instructions can be executed from the external device side 2 File read write This function reads and writes files such as sequence programs and parameter files that are stored in the PLC CPU By reading and writing these files the file management for the QCPU and the QnACPwUs of other stations can be performed on the external station side Also execution programs can be changed replaced from the external device side 6 COMMUNICATION USING THE MC PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 3 Remote control of the PLC CPU This function executes remote RUN STOP PAUSE atch clear reset operations Remote operations of the PLC CPU can be performed from the external device side using the PLC CPU remote control function Re OO Communication using binary code Device memory monitoring Device memory r
22. Turns off the COM ERR LED on the front of the Ethernet module 2 System monitor See Section 11 2 2 The module status of an Ethernet module can be checked from the system monitor a Module s detailed information The function version and error code can be checked b H W information LED on off status connection status and parameter status of an Ethernet module can be checked 3 Buffer memory batch monitor See Section 11 2 4 The buffer memory of an Ethernet module is monitored See Section 11 2 3 for the buffer memory that can be checked on the Ethernet diagnostics screen and System monitor screen 11 5 11 5 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 1 Ethernet diagnostics Purpose The module status of an Ethernet module parameter settings communication status error log and others can be checked using the Ethernet diagnostic function of GX Developer Operating procedure GX Developer gt Diagnostics Ethernet diagnostics Ethernet diagnostics screen Ethernet diagnosis 1 gt Target module setting 1 J Module No 1st module v gt t Number of mails remained on server g Number of attached file 0 receives Number of normal end of dedicated 0 Number of server inquires 0 instructions Number of error end of dedicated 0 Number of server transfer 0 instructions errors Number of normal receives 0 Clear information 1 0 Error log Number of Error log
23. b Inthe following cases a dedicated instruction is required to execute an open close processing e When Do not wait for OPEN is selected in the initial timing settings If the Open settings are not performed for a connection e If TCP Active is selected in the Open settings for a connection For detail on the open close processing see Section 5 6 Open Processing Close Processing of the Connection 3 IP Address settings Input format a Select the IP address input format decimal or hexadecimal 4 IP Address settings IP address address OH to 1H a Set the IP address of the local station according to the specified input format decimal or hexadecimal It should be set so that the local station Ethernet module and the communicating external device have the same class and sub net address two words IP address NS OC he Waid Sot aN he WEEE Sy Sr Values bits 7 to 0 to Values bits 31 to 24 b Itis necessary to use the router relay function in order to communicate with an external device on another Ethernet different sub net address For more details see Section 5 3 Router Relay Parameter c Setthe IP address after consulting a network administrator the person who plans the network and manages IP addresses 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 5 Send frame setting a Select the frame of the Ethernet header for the data link layer to be sent by the Ethern
24. connection numbers 9 to 16 addresses 5826H to 586Bn a These addresses store end codes returned from an external device as a response during the fixed buffer communication using the applicable connection b Determine how to handle the end codes in the responses by arranging with the particular external device 11 14 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 5 Error log area address EOH to 1FFH This area stores the following errors e Errors whose source cannot be confirmed e Errors that occurred during communications using the random access buffer e Errors that occurred during communications using the MC protocol a Number of error occurrences address E3h 1 This address stores the number of errors registered in the error log block area 2 When errors occur more than 65536 times the count is stopped at FFFFH 65535 b Error log write pointer address E4n 1 This address stores the error log block number where the latest error logging is registered 0 No error No registration of error log 1 or more Error log block number where the latest error logging is registered If the pointer value is 16 it means that the latest error logging is registered in the error log block 16 area 2 When 17 or more errors occur the registration of error logging starts from error log block 1 area again POINT 1 An error log block area consists of sixteen error log blocks that have the same data order 2 T
25. 1 x1 Use a transceiver with a function that is generally called SQETEST or heart beat a transceiver function that emits signals to notify whether the transceiver is operating normally at the end of communication CAUTION e Do not connect the AUI cable while the power to the module installed station is on 1 When the network connection is performed using the 1OBASE5 and preventing high frequency noise is required in the installation environment of the Ethernet module attach a ferrite core to the AUI cable to eliminate the effect of noises See POINT in Section 2 2 a 2 2 See Section 2 2 2 b for the device and system configration explanation that is required for 1OBASE5 connection 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 4 3 Connecting to the 1OBASE2 network This section explains how to connect the Ethernet module to the 10BASE2 network Object module for the explanation QU71E71 B2 The following shows the 10BASE 2 coaxial cable connection diagram lt Operating procedure gt Step 1 Push in the connector by aligning the groove 1 and tab 2 as shown above Step 2 While pushing in the connector rotate it clockwise a 1 4 turn Step 3 Turn until the connector locks Step 4 Check that the connector is locked See 3 in Section 2 2 for the device and system configuration example that is required for 10BASE2 connection 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION
26. 119 77H Local station group number Group No 120 7814 Local station Port No Local station Port No Open system Connection No 2 to 8 Initial error code IP address Ethernet address Module information as a ae Destination IP address Destination IP address 123 7Bx __ Connection No 1 Connection No 1 Status of each 124 7C erection 125 7Dn Fixed buffer sending error code i 126 7E 130 to 199 Connection No 2 to 8 824 to C7 same as connection No 1 Connection Ne 2808 INIT JLED b0 INIT OPENJLED b1 OPEN 200 C8 LED display status Caa ERR JLED 63 LED status pa COM ERR LED b4 COM ERR Switch status operational mode setting Drive mode Check on the System monitor screen Fixed buffer transfer error code 236 8 Ht Destination IP address Destination Port No 238 to 372 EE nto 174 Error log block 2 to 16 same as error log block 1 376 to 377 1784 to 1794 378 to 379 17An to 17Bu 380 to 381 17C to 17D x 408 to 409 410 to 411 19C H to 19D x 414 to 415 poe 416 to 417 418 to 419 11 10 Received IP packet count Received IP packet count discarded due to sum check error Sent IP packet total count Received ICMP packet count Received ICMP packet count discarded due to sum check error Sent ICMP packet total count Echo request total count of received ICMP packets ICMP packets ICMP packets Status for each Latest Destin
27. CLOSE instruction 5 44 10 11 Close PrOCESSING ecceseeeeeeteeteeeeeeeeeeeaes 5 44 Communication by e mailS cceeeee 1 4 Index 1 Communication data COde ccceeeee 4 19 Communication method setting PEP DP herien aa IA EA REN 5 37 Communication parameter 3 14 5 36 Communication procedure ceeeee 5 1 Communication status storage area 3 15 Communication using the MC protocol Chapter 6 Communication using the random ACCESS buffer eee eeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeaeeees Chapter 9 Communication while the PLC CPU is in the STOP status 0 0 cccecseeseeteneeees 4 20 Connection of connector for the coaxial Cable ic2 aievsdih neal ae ie 4 11 D Data communication using the MELSEC Communication protocol 1 2 Data format Fixed buffer communication procedure exist eee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeteees 7 12 Fixed buffer communication MO PLOCECUIE ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeteeees 8 10 Communication using the random ACCESS DUMP EN ieena ia 9 5 Data length Fixed buffer communication E procedure exist s es 7 15 Communication using the random ACCESS buffer eee eeeesseeeeestseeessseeeesseeees 9 8 Dedicated instruction list ceseeeee 3 8 Default router IP address ceeeeees 5 18 Destination IP address 000 5 40 5 42 Destination Port NO sssssnnsnsnnnsnnessennnnenna 5 41 DNS s
28. Check at communication time Specify the response wait time for the loop back test for each station Input range 1 to 99 s default 10 s Result Results of the loop back test are displayed 1 The IP address for the Ethernet module that has completed the loop back test normally is displayed x If the same IP address or station number has been set to multiple stations due to a parameter setting error on the loop back test target module side only the results for the station that issued a response first will be displayed 2 No response or an error code will be displayed for an Ethernet module in which the loop back test is completed abnormally X No response is not shown with GX Developer Version 6 03D or former products 3 Ifthe local station is specified as a loop back test target station station performing a loop back test No response will be displayed as the loop back test results for the local station X No response is not shown with GX Developer Version 6 03D or former products Corrective action when the test is completed abnormally The table below shows the display contents status of the target Ethernet module causes and corrective actions when the loop back test has been completed abnormally Display contents of Status of the target t Cause Corrective action loop back test results Ethernet module Initial processing normal INIT LED ON status IP address No response completion status
29. Error code ooo a 1 The Set by column indicates the following User Data set by the user before executing a dedicated instruction e System The PLC CPU stores the execution results of a dedicated instruction 2 For details on the error codes at abnormal completion see Section 11 3 Error Code List Functions 1 This instruction reads the error code and information in the error log of the module designated by Un Target item Target designation S1 2 Function designation S1 Error formation tobe dearer buffer memory 0000n Initial abnormal code address 69x Open pale code for applicable 10 17 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MO MELSEC Q 2 Whether or not the ERRRD instruction has been completed can be checked by the complete bit devices D1 0 and D1 1 a Complete bit device D1 0 Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the ERRRD instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Complete bit device D1 1 Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the ERRRD instruction e Normal completion Stays off and does not change Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the ERRRD instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing Operation when the ERRRD instruction is being executed END END END ERRRD instruction Instruction execution Complete device Salton Se
30. FLAG_ON ShutdownflagB FLAG_OFF Shutdown flag OFF if shutdown socketnoB 2 SOCK_Ok Send receive inhibit processing System B Sockerror ERROR_NO_ERROR ERROR_SHUTDOWN Error handling return SOCK_NG CloseflagA FLAG_OFF Connection end flag OFF if closesocket socketnoA SOCK_Ok Close processing System A Sockerror ERROR_CLOSE ERROR_NO_ERROR Error handling return SOCK_NG App 37 App 37 APPENDIX MELSEC Q CloseflagB FLAG_OFF Connection end flag OFF if closesocket socketnoB SOCK_Ok Close processing System B Sockerror ERROR_NO_ERROR ERROR_CLOSE Error handling return SOCK_NG WSACleanup Winsock DLL release printf nQJ_test End n nNormally completed n printf Program is closed Press any key n Dmykeyin getchar Waiting for key input return SOCK_Ok BOOL DataRecv int socketno unsigned char pR_buf int size_max Receive processing function int length Communication data length int rouf_idx Receive data storage starting index int recv_size Number of received data Performs receive processing while simultaneously making size check rouf_idx 0 Receive data storage starting index initialization recv_size 0 Initializes the number of received data while 1 length recv socketno pR_buf rbuf_idx BUF_SIZE rbuf_idx 0 Response data receive if length 0 Has connect
31. GX Developer setting 3 Setting data Data item screen Setting value Remark one ees Lone ae Remote password settings Password active Model name QJ71E71 module setings 7 sw TY coment comeston2 f comestons f comestons fk conmecions commecions O comosion comestons f User connection No comeing f i lt a Connection 10 Remote password f x Connection 11 Select the object connection detail settings Connection 12 i Connection 13 Connection 14 Connection 15 Connection 16 Auto open UDP port FTP transmission port TCP IP System connection GX Developer transmission port TCP IP GX Developer transmisstion port UDP IP App 64 App 64 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Recording sheet 13 Module number GX Developer setting Setting data Data item screen Setting value Remark Stationnumber Station number and po ine mode setting P ting System B Settoopbacktest PP test ree a Pats tomar IP address settings ______tesseert__ SystemB Issue system switch in cable Issue system switch in cable disconnection timeout Issue Check mark e cine caea timeout Cable disconnection timeout Cable disconnection timeout setting Default 2 0s Issue system switch in communication bor Issue system switch in communication error Issue Check mark O e A A A S a A Redundant settings a E A
32. Receive data length The head address area of the target fixed address Receive data Area beginning from the head address of the target fixed buffer 1 e Fixed buffer receive status signal address 5005H b0 ON 4 Execute the dedicated BUFRCV instruction to read the receive data length and receive data from the fixed buffer No 1 5 When the receive data length and reception data are read the following processing is performed At normal completion e Return Response to communication destination e BUFRCV instruction complete device ON e BUFRCV instruction complete device 1 OFF e BUFRCV instruction complete status area 1 OOOOH At abnormal completion e Return Response to communication destination e BUFRCYV instruction complete device ON e BUFRCYV instruction complete device 1 ON e BUFRCYV instruction complete status area x1 Value other than 0000H 6 End the receive processing x1 The status at completion is stored in the complete status area of the dedicated instructions For details on the dedicated instructions see Chapter 10 Dedicated Instructions The destination setting see Section 5 5 for a connection whose parameters are set with GX Developer becomes valid when the open completion signal address 5000H corresponding bit of the Ethernet module switches from off to on Execute the BUFRCV instruction when the corresponding connection s bit in the fixed buffer receive status
33. Refer to the QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System for Network module redundant group settings The system switches when both of the grouped Ethernet modules become faulty Make the redundant setting of GX Developer to set whether a system switching request will be issued or not from the Ethernet module at detection of a communication error or disconnection Refer to Section 5 11 3 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Available functions The following functions are available when the Ethernet module is mounted on the main base unit of the Q12PRH Q25PRHCPU Function Availability Communication using the MC protocol A Communication using the fixed buffer Communication using the random access buffer Sending receiving of e mail A A A Communication using the data link instruction A File transfer FTP server function A Communication using the Web function O MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communication A Router relay communication Router relay function O O O O A O External device existence confirmation Pairing open communication Communication via automatic open UDP port Simultaneous broadcast Support for the QCPU remote password function Setting the Ethernet parameters through GX Developer Access to QCPU with GX Developer TCP IP or UDP IP QO Available A Available with restriction 1 X Unavailable x1 Refer to Section 5 11 5 for the
34. allowable radius is required For information regarding the coaxial cables allowable bending radius please consult the cable manufacturer e Do not bundle the control wires and the communication cables with the main circuit and the power wires and do not install them close to each other They should be installed at least 100 mm 3 94 in away from each other Failure to do so may generate noise that may cause malfunctions e Do not connect the AUI cables while the power to the module installed station is on e Make sure to place the communication and power cables to be connected to the module in a duct or fasten them using a clamp If the cables are not placed in a duct or fastened with a clamp their positions may be unstable or moved and they may be pulled inadvertently This may damage the module and the cables or cause the module to malfunction because of faulty cable connections e When disconnecting the communication and power cables from the module do not pull the cables by hand When disconnecting a cable with a connector hold the connector to the module by hand and pull it out to remove the cable When disconnecting a cable without a connector loosen the screws on the terminal block first before removing the cable If a cable is pulled while being connected to the module it may cause the module to malfunction or damage the module and the cable 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 4 1 Con
35. area Send data length The head address area of the target fixed address 1 Send data Area beginning from the head address of the target fixed buffer 1 1 The send data length is expressed by a byte count 4 Only the size of the send data in the fixed buffer No 1 designated by the send data length is sent to the designated external device set in the open processing 5 The Ethernet module terminates the data transmission At normal completion e BUFSND instruction complete device ON e BUFSND instruction complete device 1 OFF e BUFSND instruction complete status area 2 0000H At abnormal completion e BUFSND instruction complete device ON e BUFSND instruction complete device 1 ON e BUFSND instruction complete status area 2 Value other than 0000H After the data transmission is abnormally completed execute the dedicated BUFSND instruction again to repeat the transmission processing x2 The status at completion is stored in the complete status area of the dedicated instructions For details on the dedicated instructions see Chapter 10 Dedicated Instructions POINT The following precaution should be observed when communicating using UDP IP e When the Ethernet module s internal processing is normally completed data send processing ends even if the communication line between the PLC CPU and an external device is disconnected because of cable disconnection etc It is recommend
36. break case ERROR_BIND printf Bind could not be executed System B n break case ERROR_CONNECT printf Connection could not be established System B n break case ERROR_SHUTDOWN printf Shutdown could not be executed System B n break case ERROR_CLOSE printf Normal close could not be executed System B n break App 39 App 39 APPENDIX MELSEC Q printf Error code is d n nErrorStatus if ShutdownflagA FLAG_ON nErrorStatus shutdown socketnoA 2 Shutdown processing System A ShutdownflagA FLAG_OFF Shutdown flag OFF System A if ShutdownflagB FLAG_ON nErrorStatus shutdown socketnoB 2 Shutdown processing System B ShutdownflagB FLAG_OFF Shutdown flag OFF System B if CloseflagA FLAG_ON nErrorStatus closesocket socketnoA Close processing System A CloseflagA FLAG_OFF Connection end flag OFF System A if CloseflagB FLAG_ON nErrorStatus closesocket socketnoB Close processing System B CloseflagB FLAG_OFF Connection end flag OFF System B printf Program is closed Press any key n Dmykeyin getchar Waiting for key input WSACleanup Winsock DLL release return App 40 App 40 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 8 3 Program example of communication using the MC Protocol 3 This section explains an example of an external device program that reads writs data from to the PLC CPU
37. command message _A_ Maximum of 2 bytes 2 bytes 1017 words A A A yY yY Subheader Data length Text setting command L H L H Communication request destination sid Subheader End code L y y 1 byte 1 byte Application data section response b Communication using ASCII code Application data section command message A a Maximum of 4 bytes 4 bytes 1016 words A A A Communication Data length Text request Subheader 7 f setting command source side H IL H j j jL Communication request Subheader End code destination side H L H j L 5 b bi 4 2 byte 2 byte Ne YY Application data section response 7 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE PROCEDURE EXIST CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q 2 Subheader The format of the subheader is as shown below The user does not need to set the subheader when using the Ethernet module since the Ethernet module adds and deletes it b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 11111010 0 0 0 Command response type The bit status indicated in the figure shows that communication using fixed buffers is being performed Command response flag At command 0 At response 1 Command Response Communication using binary code 60H 00H E0u __ _ Subheader Subheader b7 to bO b7 to bO 0 0 0 Tote Tite O a o a a o o o 0 1 O ar 6n a Nee O ar O Communication
38. e GX Developer transmission port UDP IP HTTP port b Station that the remote password and remote password check are set 1 Inthe case of single network system Accessing source external device Ethernet GX Developer g parameter setting e Remote password Applicable connection for the remote password check See 3 Poca Stan Ethernet jm module 2 Inthe case of multiple network system Set in the QCPU station that serves as the entrance to the PLC system as viewed from the external device the local station QCPU in the diagram below Accessing source external device Tl _ 8 Ethernet Remote password Remote 1 os password check Local station Ethernet Ethernet QcPU module module foe Poe eo Ethemet cieinemet 6 NR f Set in the local station to allow O o i prohibit access from the external j F i device to the network system 1 i acpu Ethernet Ethernet Relay ocpy Ethernet Station to i module module station module be accessed woah Se es bat ued Re Shee eee SSS SEE tied Fag oe A Do not set in the relay station or station to be accessed e i t Network system 1 2 22 22 222228 e Ee aea e ee a r eee Ee E ed Setting in a station other than the QCPU station that serves as the e
39. station Too many devices points to C0714 read write for other than the Q QnACPU The content of a request is incorrect Corak Requested read write in bit units to word devices Request was not supported by the Ethernet module of the target PLC CPU Fora Double word address points was designated for other than Q QnACPU etc 11 30 Storage destination Error handling Connection 7Eu e Review and correct the content of the text area or the request data length of Qn header and send to the Ethernet module again e Review and correct the content of the text area or the request data length of Qn header and send to the Ethernet module again Hn BEA e Examine the device to be read written e Correct the content of the request and send to the Ethernet module again Correction of subcommand etc m e Increase the CPU monitoring timer value Check whether or not the PLC CPU operates normally Correct the network number and PC number Correct the content of the read write request Correct the content of the request and send to the Ethernet module again Correction of data etc Review and correct the content of the text area or the request data length of the Qn header and send it to the Ethernet module again When performing write operation to the remote I O station via the MC protocol QnA compatible 3E frame enable the online correction setting of the operation setting Read write
40. 1 Appendix 1 2 Precautions when updating the module from function version A to function version B or later ceeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeesaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeatenas App 3 Appendix 2 The QnA A Series MOdUle ccccecceseseeeeeceeeeseeseceeceeeeaeeaecaeseesaesaeseeeaesaesaeseeeeaesaeeaeseneateaes App 4 Appendix 2 1 Functional comparisons between the Ethernet modules and QnA A series modules App 4 Appendix 2 2 Using the programs designed for QnA A series modules cesceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeteeaes App 6 Appendix 3 Installing the Ethernet Module on Existing Systems ccccsseeseeeteeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeseeeeeeeateaes App 9 Appendix 4 Processing Time ceeccesceseeseeseeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeesaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeesaeeeaeeeaeenaeeeeesaeseaeeeaeenatenas App 9 Appendix 5 ASCII Code List hysa ested testa dancedk haste bids cceeishastesbassnaseishestacbasen scaaeishagtitee App 17 Appendix 6 Referent Senerara aieri iii irii iiri iia App 17 Appendix 7 External Dimensions mostier a a A A T O App 18 Appendix 8 Program Examples e saria a A A S AA App 20 Appendix 8 1 Program example for communication using the MC protocol 1 ssessseseseeseeeeseeeseee App 21 Appendix 8 2 Program example of communication using the MC Protocol 2 sesseseseeseseeseeeee App 30 Appendix 8 3 Program example of communication using the MC Protocol 3 ccccseeseseeteeees App 41 Appendix 9 Communication Suppo
41. 1 _ Physical layer 1 TCP Transmission Control Protocol This protocol guarantees data credibility or reliability in a communication between a personal computer work station and the PLC that are connected via network and provides the following functions e Creates a logical connection by establishing a connection logical line as if a dedicated line was created between external devices A maximum of 16 connections can be established and communication to multiple buffers can be performed at the same time in the Ethernet module e Data reliability is maintained by the sequence control using the sequence numbers the data retransmission function and the check sum e The communication data flow can be controlled by operations using Windows e Supports the Maximum Segment option The Maximum Segment option can be made valid for TCP transmission or TCP re transmission The data reception side must check the length of received data before processing the message 1 14 1 14 1 OVERVIEW 2 MELSEC Q UDP User Datagram Protocol This protocol may not guarantee data credibility and reliability in a communication between a personal computer work station and the PLC that are connected via network Thus even if the data does not reach the target node it will not be retransmitted e Because it is connectionless high speed transmission is possible e A check sum is used to increase the reliability of the communic
42. 1A0 to 1A1H 418 to 419 1A2 to 1A3x 420 to 421 1A4 to 1A5n 422 to 439 Ener togarea Status for each 1A6 to 1B7H protocol 440 to 441 1B8 to 1B9x 442 to 443 1BA to 1BBx 444 to 445 1BC to 1BD 446 to 471 1BE to 1D7x 472 to 473 1D8 to 1D9x 474 to 475 1DA to 1DBx 476 to 477 1DC to 1DDx 478 to 481 1DE to 1E14 482 to 491 1E2 to 1EB 492 to 493 1EC to 1EDu 494 to 495 1EE to 1EF 496 to 497 1FO to 1F 1H 498 to 511 1F2 to 1FFu MELSEC Q Continued from the previous page ot GX Developer Initial value Name setting H imal Hexad cimal applicability S Reference section Section 11 3 Section 11 4 POINT 3 Continues on the next page eceived IP packet count ent IP packet total count Simultaneous transmission error detection count Received ICMP packet count Received ICMP packet count discarded due to sum check error Sent ICMP packet total count Echo request total count of received ICMP packets Echo reply total count of sent ICMP packets Echo request total count of sent ICMP packets Received TCP packet count discarded due to sum check error Sent TCP packet total count Received UDP packet count Received UDP packet count discarded due to sum check error Sent UDP packet total count Overflow count crc error count Ee x Ee Ee 3 SPECIFICATIONS Application Hexadecimal 200 to 2011 202 to 2031 516 205 to 2061 207 to 2081 209 to 20
43. 2 Access 2 Ethernet module Ethernet Ethernet module module password check 1 1 1 Eaa e a ka J Ethernet module password check Local station Password Local station Ethernet module Ethernet x1 The remote password unlock processing and lock processing are possible for the local station The remote password unlock processing and lock processing cannot be performed for the relay station and station to be accessed 2 The unlock processing and lock processing are not need for the Ethernet module sending a communication request to another Ethernet even if it has been set as a target of the remote password check Relay station Ethernet O Ethernet Station to be accessed module 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 1 The remote password unlock processing and lock processing are performed for the only Ethernet module in the local station directly connected to the external device The remote password unlock processing and lock processing cannot be performed for an Ethernet module in any other station relay station and station to be accessed 2 The remote password unlock processing and lock processing are performed from the external device using dedicated instructions for MC protocol communication They are performed with dedicated FTP commands when using the file transfer FTP server function The remote password is input with the dialog bo
44. 20993 switching request Cable disconnection timeout setting 4 52011 at disconnection Set time set value x 500ms setting range 0 to 60 i 20994 detection status Syl 5202h storage area ysiem area x Reference section 3 e log b Same as the error log block 1 log b Same as the error log block 1 m m 3 3 fe fo 9 9 og b S Same as the error log block 1 og b 2 mja Sh 3 Same as the error log block 1 Same as the error log block 1 a pjr pjo PS fo fe fo Q z Q og b 2 Same as the error log block 1 og b 9 Same as the error log block 1 og b a Same as the error log block 1 ony 5 F 3 Q ox fa Same as the error log block 1 Section 5 11 Section 5 10 70999 Disconnection detection count 52031 20996 to 21007 pon 5204 to 520F Use prohibited System area System switching settings when communication error occurs Connection for user 0 Not set eet Section 5 11 Connection No 1 b0 5 X Connection No 2 b1 System to ore settings Connection No 16 b15 gs System switching settings when communication error occurs communication iA Connection for system error occurs 0 Not set status storage ares 1 Set Auto open UDP port settings Section 5 11 GX Developer UDP port b1 GX Developer TCP port b2 FTP port b3 e HTTP port b4 x MELSOFT connection included aaa erwe fom dC dC 5820n
45. 3 2 Remote Station PLC Accessible Range and Stations 3 3 Settings for Accessing Other Stations 3 4 Procedure for Accessing Other Stations 3 5 Precautions for Accessing Other Stations 4 WHEN THE QCPU ACCESSES THE OTHER STATION PLC USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION 4 1 Other Station Access with the Data Link Instruction 4 2 Precautions for Accessing Other Stations 4 3 Using the Data Link Instructions 4 4 Data Link Instructions 4 5 Data Sending Receiving 4 6 Reading Writing Word Devices of Other Stations READ WRITE 4 7 Reading Writing Word Devices of Other Stations ZNRD ZNWR 4 8 Reading Writing Clock Data Remote RUN Remote STOP REQ 4 9 Error Codes for Data Link Instructions 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER 5 1 File Transfer Functions 5 2 File Transferable Range 5 3 FTP Parameter Settings for File Transfer from GX Developer 5 4 Procedure and Required Processing on the External Device Side FTP Client A 13 SH 080010 G 5 5 Precautions when Using the File Transfer Functions 5 6 FTP Commands 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 6 1 Dedicated Instruction List 6 2 MRECV Instruction 6 3 MSEND Instruction 6 4 READ Instruction 6 5 RECV Instruction for the Main Program 6 6 RECVS Instruction for Interrupt Programs 6 7 REQ Instruction Remote RUN STOP 6 8 REQ Instruction Clock Data Read Write 6 9 SEND Instruction 6 10 SREAD Instruction 6 11 SWRITE Instruction 6 12 WRITE Instruction 6 13 ZNRD Instru
46. Appendix 1 Function Upgrade for the Ethernet Module The Ethernet module of function version B or later contains several functions not included in the earlier product function version A This section gives a comparison of functions of the Ethernet module based on the function change or addition and explains program utilization and incorporation into an existing system Appendix 1 1 A comparison of functions of the Ethernet module 1 A comparison of functions of the Ethernet module The following shows the comparison of functions of the Ethernet module Data transmission rate Function 100 Mbps QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 B2 10 Mbps Initial processing Sequence program GX Developer network parameter setting Re initial processing Sequence program Dedicated instruction Open processing Sequence program GX Developer network parameter setting Communication using the MC protocol QnA compatible 3E frame A compatible 1E frame Communication using the fixed buffer Procedure exist No procedure Communication using the random access buffer OJOIOJOJOJOJOIE E O O O O OJOIOJ OJOJOsOsOsOlO O O x OLOJOJOJO OC OI PL gt OIOI x Sending receiving e mail Sending receiving by PLC CPU Sending by the PLC monitoring function automatic notification function O G O Sending files in CSV format as attachment Sending main text Su
47. Error Code List N a D 10 20 10 20 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 10 21 MELSEC Q Functions 1 2 This instruction performs the open processing for a connection specified by S1 for the module designated by Un The selection of the setting values to be used for the open processing is designated by S2 0 Whether or not the OPEN instruction has been completed can be checked by the complete bit devices D1 0 and D1 1 a Complete bit device D1 0 Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the OPEN instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Complete bit device D1 1 Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the OPEN instruction e Normal completion Stays off and does not change e Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the OPEN instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing Operation when the OPEN instruction is being executed END END END Sequence program processing processing processing OPEN instruction Complete device Instruction execution fe eae ae ean A See m A Complete device 1 4 4 Abnormal completion L__________ 1 3 POINT Never execute the open close processing using input output signals and the The ZP OPEN is executed when the open instruction switches from off to on open close processing using the OPEN
48. Jun 2004 SH NA 080009 I Addition of the description of function version D Correction About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 1 1 7 Section 1 3 Chapter 2 entire Section 3 6 Section 3 8 Section 4 5 Section 4 6 Section 5 3 Section 5 5 Section 5 6 2 POINT Section 5 8 POINT Section 6 1 4 Section 10 9 Appendix 1 Appendix 4 Appendix 11 Appendix 12 Addition Section 1 1 9 Section 5 10 Section 5 11 Section 11 3 3 Section 11 4 7 Appendix 8 2 Japanese Manual Version SH 080004 N This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 1999 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the MELSEC Q series PLC Before using the equipment please read this manual carefully to develop full familiarity with the functions and performance of the Q series PLC you have purchased so as to ensure correct use Please forward a copy of this manual to the end user CONTENTS This manual SAFETY PRECAUTION Skta a buen ate cf nents pees ods cfs sbecdsbusnids decbacg tesnecesdasticd e a denice A 1 REVISIONS a tans iin Se a aa a a ala att a tn alae E A 5 CONTENTS Fr aeeseeetasecaact testes ti
49. Logical address Address designated by the external device as the head address item in the command Physical address 680H 1664 267FH 9855 2680H 9856 to 3E7FH 15999 Buffer memory Fixed buffer Random access buffer Logical address 9 COMMUNICATION USING THE RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER MELSEC Q 9 4 Precautions when Creating Programs This section explains an outline of the precautions that should be observed when creating programs for data communications between the Ethernet module and external devices using the random access buffer 1 In order to communicate using the random access buffer the initial processing and the connection open processing must be completed 2 The PLC CPU cannot issue a send request when communicating using the random access buffer Also receive completion is not confirmed to the PLC CPU When it is necessary to synchronize data sending receiving between the PLC CPU and an external device use the fixed buffer communication function 3 The address designated for the random access buffer by an external device and the address designated with the FROM TO instructions of the sequence program are different For more detail see Section 9 3 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Dedicated instructions are used to simplify programming for using the functions of the intelligent function module This chapter explains the dedicated in
50. MELSEC Q This section explains the procedure for opening and closing a connection with an external device from the Ethernet module direction SI Set the control data to DO to D8 lt lt Open processing for connection No 1 using the dedicated OPEN instruction gt gt ZP OPEN Uo K1 DO Mo Open status Open allowed status closed Closed status Initial normal completion X19 OPEN instruction OPEN instruction complete device OPEN instruction complete device 1 Open abnormal detection signal X18 CLOSE instruction CLOSE instruction complete device CLOSE instruction complete device 1 Open completion signal Address 5000n Open request signal Address 5002h direction man l Processing for normal completion H M Processing for abnormal completion H lt lt Close processing for connection No 1 using the dedicated instruction CLOSE gt gt e ZP CLOSE M100 Power on uo Ki D100 M100 M101 Processing for normal completion M101 Processing for abnormal completion H Parameter communication completed 1 When setting the application of GX Developer in the Open settings Control data DO HO When setting the application of OPEN instruction in the Control data D0 H8000 Set D1 to D9 according to the application gt One scan
51. Minor disorder STOP Normal RUN O Warning RUN Minor disorder RUN fea PAUSE Send attached file Send method of Sendtextmal O Pot Binary Attached file format ASCII Adjust to input format ln a CSV Interval of CPU inquiry numeric value setting Condition for PLC inspection PLC inquiry Interval Ue eae ce ee sae Monitoring vaueinpttomat__ estat _ Monitoring value input format Monitoring vaueinpttomat__ estat _ Monitoring value input format ie E ee O e mn O e Ces O ee A me o e Ce o o C o e a 2 E Ethernet news settings App 60 App 60 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Recording sheet 9 Module number GX Developer setting Setting data Data item screen Setting value Remark ee einai setina val So mioma M eco Fp 00 Pevencede SS T E O D ating tr Word device setting value Setting not required Board No Input format Decimal Interrupt SI No Input format Decimal Device No Po Setting nt require Detection method Automatic setting Interrupt condition Automatic setting Word device setting value Setting not required Device code SAANS O O isi ieee Network parameters Ethernet interrupt settings Iiterrupt Sa O O O Iput eee RECVinstruction O of Fixe butter O Device No ooo Setting not require Detection method Automatic setting Interrupt condition Automatic setting Word device setting value Setting not required
52. OOOOH When the close processing completes abnormally 4 Open completion signal OFF e CLOSE instruction complete device ON e CLOSE instruction complete device 1 ON e CLOSE instruction complete status area 1 Value other than 0000H 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q This example uses connection number 1 for explanation Use the corresponding signals and bits for other connection numbers x1 The end code at completion is stored in the dedicated instruction complete status area For details on the dedicated instructions see Chapter 10 Dedicated Instructions x2 Processing when the open processing is abnormally completed TCP When opening from the Ethernet module under a normal situation if the Ethernet module sends a SYN the external device returns an ACK and a SYN However if the Ethernet module sends a SYN and then the external device returns a RST the open abnormal completion X18 is immediately turned on and open processing ends 3 The open status and error code at abnormal end can be confirmed with the following buffer memory e Each connection open abnormal code area of the communication status storage area Connection numbers 1 to 8 addresses 78H to C7H Connection numbers 9 to 16 addresses 5020H to 586FH e Error log area addresses EOH to 177n Error codes stored in the open abnormal code area are cleared n gt 0 when the dedicated OPEN instruction is executed again x4 Processing
53. PORES O O iad Oa alle des Su Si Lo aa nee eae RECViinstruction O Fixed buffer O Device No Po Setting not require Detection method Automatic setting Interrupt condition Automatic setting Word device setting value Setting not required pee i e oe ae eee nee ae be tT ORU pinat Decal Device code Device code a App 61 App 61 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Recording sheet 10 GX Developer setting 4 Setting data Data item screen Setting value Remark d al PEG OPY Stan No Input format Decimal side Interrupt pointer No of module module side Start SI No Interrupt pointer Input format Decimal PLC CPU start No side Interrupt pointer No of module No module side Start SI No erupt pointe Input format Decimal PLC CPU start No side Interrupt pointer No of module module Tere painter Input format Decimal PLC CPU start No side Interrupt pointer No of module Intelligent function module interrupt pointer setting module side Start SI No Input format Decimal App 62 App 62 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Recording sheet 11 GX Developer setting 3 Setting data Data item screen Setting value Remark eee o r o ee O p re O reee O ee re O routing information settings Transfer to network No Intermediate network No Intermediate station No ed a O we es O re e es O App 63 App 63 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Recording sheet 12
54. REMARK 5 2 3 Section 7 5 1 Section 10 9 Section 11 3 1 Table 11 3 3 REMARK 11 4 2 Figure Appendix 1 1 2 Table Appendix 2 2 2 a Appendix 8 Addition Section 11 3 3 error code C1BAn 11 4 2 Appendix 4 4 pr 2003 SH NA 080009 F Additional model QJ71E71 B5 Deleted model QJ71E71 Correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 1 2 1 5 6 1 3 1 4 1 Section 2 1 2 2 2 5 2 6 2 7 Section 3 1 3 4 3 8 Section 4 1 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 Section 5 2 2 REMARK 5 5 2 3 REMARK 5 3 5 4 2 1 c 5 4 3 5 5 6 5 6 2 POINT 5 9 1 5 9 6 3 6 Section 6 2 Section 10 8 10 9 Section 11 1 1 11 2 2 2 11 3 11 4 5 Figure Appendix 1 1 Appendix 2 Appendix 4 Appendix 7 Appendix 10 Appendix 11 Addition Section 11 2 1 POINT 11 3 3 error code COB2H COEOH to COEF C171H to C17FH Appendix 9 Jul 2003 SH NA 080009 G Correction The Manual s Usage and Structure Section 1 4 1 Section 2 2 1 2 7 Section 3 8 Section 4 7 Section 5 2 2 REMARK 5 5 POINT 5 6 1 5 6 2 Section 7 5 2 Section 8 6 2 Section 11 4 Appendix 2 Appendix 8 1 Appendix 11 Appendix 12 x The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Manual Number Revision Sep 2003 SH NA 080009 H Correction Section 1 4 1 Section 3 8 Section 5 2 3 Appendix 2 1 Appendix 8
55. See Section 4 6 e Network type Ethernet e Head I O No 0000 e Network No 1 Group No 1 Station No 2 5 The Operational settings parameters are assumed to have been set with GX Developer as follows Ethernet operations Communication data code Initial timing Binary code c Do not wait for OPEN Communications impossible at STOP time C ASCII code ce Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time IP address Send frame setting Input format DEC bd Ethernet 2 0 IP address 10 97 85 C IFEESO23 T Enable Write at RUN time TCP Existence confirmation setting Use the KeepAlive C Use the Ping End Cancel Local station IP address 0A 61 55 DFH 10 97 85 223 7 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE PROCEDURE EXIST CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q 6 The Open settings parameters are assumed to have been set with GX Developer as follows ii Network parameter Ethernet open setting Module No 1 ojx Peeni Fixed buffer Local station Destination Dest Port communication open confirmation Port No IP address No TCP wv Unpassive Receive v Procedure exist v Nopairs v Noconfim w TCP Unpassive w Receive v Procedure exist No pairs v No confirm Pall 3000 X v v X v nN X hd X v End Cancel Connection No 1 Local station Port No 2000H for main program Connection No 2 Local station Port No 3000H fo
56. TROUBLESHOOTING 4 l Check the PLC parameters Have the group settings YES been made NO Check the mounted CPU Is the standby system powered ON NO YES Is the RESET L CLR switch of the standby system CPU in the neutral position unreset NO YES Is the tracking cable NO connected normally YES NO Is the standby system CPU normal YES NO Is the mounted CPU a control system YES Has any reason for system switching failure e g stop error of standby system CPU if a system switching request is issued from the Ethernet module occurred NO YES NO Is the CPU in the backup mode YES Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 11 62 MELSEC Q When the other module is normal system switching is not executed Power ON the standby system Set the RESET L CLR switch of the standby system CPU from the RESET position to the neutral position unreset Install the tracking cable normally When the standby system CPU is in the error status system switching is not executed When the mounted CPU is the standby system CPU system switching is not executed Remove the reason for system switching failure not Refer to the QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant Syste
57. The user performs remote password lock processing prior to closing the connection Accessing source external device Ethernet ER N EE E i password check __ Local station Ethernet module Setting from GX Developer Set the applicable connection for the remote password check with the parameters 1 10 1 10 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 9 Redundant system support function Detailed explanation Chapter 5 a Personal computer Ethernet Communication with host Backup of Ethernet modules By mounting the Ethernet modules of function version D or later on the main base units of a redundant system the Ethernet modules can be backed up If a failure or communication error occurs in the Ethernet module the system can be switched between the control system and standby system to continue the communication of the Ethernet module 1 Issue of system switching request to control system CPU When the Ethernet module mounted on the main base unit of the control system CPU in the redundant system detects a communication error or disconnection it can issue a system switching request to the control system CPU Access to redundant system Communication using MC protocol or data link instruction enables data communication such as read write of device data and files from to the control system standby system or system A system B of the redundant system Connecti
58. Wait for key input Error handling function App 28 APPENDIX else nErrorStatus W SAGetLastError switch error_kind case ERROR_SOCKET printf Failed to create socket break case ERROR_BIND printf Failed to bind break case ERROR_CONNECT printf Failed to establish connection break case ERROR_SEND printf Sending failed break case ERROR_RECIEVE printf Receiving failed break case ERROR_SHUTDOWN printf Failed to shutdown break case ERROR_CLOSE printf Failed to close normally break printf Error code is d n nErrorStatus if Closeflag FLAG_ON nErrorStatus shutdown socketno 2 nErrorStatus closesocket socketno Closeflag FLAG_OFF printf Press any key to exit the program n Dmykeyin getchar WSACleanup return App 29 MELSEC Q Shutdown processing Close processing Connection completion flag off Wait for a key input Release Winsock DLL App 29 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 8 2 Program example of communication using the MC Protocol 2 This section provides the program example execution environment and data communication contents 1 Execution environment of program example a PLC CPU side 1 Ethernet module mounted station QCPU model name Q25PRHCPU 2 I O signals of Ethernet module X Y000 to X YO1F 3 Ethernet module IP address System A CO0 00 01 FCH 192 00 01 252 Ethern
59. a b Network No 2 When redundant system is on network When making access via redundant system note that the routing parameter setting must be changed by the RTWRITE instruction at the request source station or relay station at the time of system switching Refer to b below When access is made via redundant system The routing parameter setting must be set to the request source station or relay station to access other station via Ethernet using the MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communication function Refer to Chapter 3 in the User s Manual Application When making access via the redundant system set the station which becomes a control system as a routing station Request source station Ethernet module Station No 3 Network parameter setting Transfer destination Relay destination Relay destination network No network No station No 2 1 Control system Ethernet module Station No 1 Standby system Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet module module module Station Station Station No 1 No 2 No 2 Network No 1 Network No 2 O Request destination station Ethernet module Station No 3 QCPU Change the routing parameter setting with the RTWRITE instruction at the relay source station or relay station so that access is made via the station of the new control system after system switching when system swit
60. aT De i LED on LEDoff LED on COM ERR LED on signal X1C Y Error Y Error Y Error Error occurrence occurrence occurrence occurrence b The off request is processed continuously while the off request signal Y17 is on c The error information in the error log area of the buffer memory is not cleared deleted by turning the off request signal Y17 is on 2 How to turn off COM ERR LED on the Ethernet diagnostics screen of GX Developer See Section 11 2 1 a Clicking on the COM ERR off button turns the COM ERR LED off b The error information in the error log area of the buffer memory is not cleared deleted 3 How to read clear error information using the dedicated instructions Error information can be read cleared at arbitrary timing by using the following dedicated instructions a Dedicated ERRRD instruction Using this instruction initial abnormal code information or open abnormal code information can be read b Dedicated ERRCLR instruction Using this instruction it is possible to turn off COM ERRJLED and clear initial abnormal code open abnormal code or error log For the details of the dedicated instruction see Chapter 10 Dedicated Instructions 11 4 11 4 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 How to Check an Error Through GX Developer The status of the various settings for the Ethernet module can be checked using the GX Developer functions 1 Ethernet
61. bo The following shows the buffer memory addresses GX Developer Initial value setting Hexadecimal applicability Reference section Local station Ethernet module IP address C00001FEx Za Section 4 7 Special function settings e Router relay function b5 b4 Section 5 3 00 Do not use default 01 Use e Conversion system setting for MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 Chapter 3 of relay function b7 b6 Application 00 Automatic response system default 01 IP address computation system 10 Table exchange system 11 Use together system FTP function setting b9 b8 00 Do not use Chapter 5 of 01 Use default Application Decimal Application Hexadecimal Bits other than above are reserved for system use param ter seting Setting time setting value x 500 ms ace TCP zero window timer value Setting time setting value x 500 ms TCP resend timer value Setting time setting value x 500 ms TCP end timer value Setting time setting value x 500 ms IP assembly timer value Setting time setting value x 500 ms Response monitoring timer value 3 Setting time setting value x 500 ms C 60 Destination existence confirmation starting interval srs 9 4B0u 1200 Setting time setting value x 500 ms Destination existence confirmation interval timer 14u 20 Setting time setting value x 500 ms i Destination existence confirmation resend timer 3H 3 Monitoring timer Section 5 2 Conti
62. external device The U0 G20480 and U0 G20482 codes shown in the program designate the following areas in the buffer memory U0 G20480 Open completion signal storage area address 5000H 20480 U0 G20482 Open request signal storage area address 5002H 20482 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE M400 v0 MOV 620480 K4MO UO MOV 20482 K4M20 M5000 PLS M1000 RST M202 RST M203 M1000 x19 Mo M20 HO D100 H8000 D100 H8001 D102 H2000 D103 ZP OPEN U0 D100 M100 M100 M101 SET M150 M101 HKR _ _ ao M151 MO RN gt BE M160 M160 M150 H 1 H S PLS M161 M6000 te EE M2000 M2000 MO ZP CLOSE uo KI D200 M200 M161 M210 SET M210 M200 M201 SET M202 M201 s EY M203 RST M150 RST M151 RST M210 MELSEC Q X19 Initial normal completion signal MO Connection 1 open completion signal M20 Connection 1 open request signal Open processing of connection No 1 TCP IP Unpassive open Read the open completion signal information Read the open request signal information Change the open command to pulse Designate the control data for the OPEN instruction When using the open setting parameters of GX Developer Designate the execution type complete type When not using the open setting parameters of GX Developer Designate the execution type complete type Designate the information of the application Designate the Local station Port No 20001 Execute the open processing to the external device Set
63. for communication Receive data using binary code Number of words length There is a procedure for communication 1 to 508 using ASCII code Number of words Non procedure for communication using 1 to 2046 1 0 binary code Number of bytes D1 0 System ae i Receive data Stores the data read from the fixed buffer data area System D2 n sequentially in ascending order y 1 The Set by column indicates the following User Data set by the user before executing a dedicated instruction e System The PLC CPU stores the execution results of a dedicated instruction 2 For details on the error codes at abnormal completion see Section 11 3 Error Code List 10 2 10 2 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Functions 1 This instruction reads receive data for fixed buffer communication from the connection specified by S1 for the module designated by Un PLC CPU Ethernet module Fixed buffer data area D1 Receive data length Receive data BUFRCV Receive data 2 Whether or not the BUFRCV instruction has been completed can be checked by the complete bit devices D2 0 and D2 1 a Complete bit device D2 0 Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the BUFRCV instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Complete bit device D2 1 Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the BUFRCV instruction e Normal completion S
64. for main program BUFRCVS instruction for interrupt program For details on the dedicated instructions see Chapter 10 Dedicated Instructions The following should be observed when using a connection opened by UDP e External devices can be switched by modifying the setting values in the communication address setting area of the communication parameter setting area before sending receiving data Thus data can be sent to multiple external devices sequentially When performing sending receiving make sure to perform switching between external devices properly so that no communication problems occur The connections for which no procedure is selected are dedicated to the no procedure fixed buffer sending receiving Thus communications using fixed buffers with the procedure exist control method random access buffers and the MC protocol cannot be performed at the same time with a communication using fixed buffers with the no procedure control method Message data length is not used for the no procedure communication The Ethernet module stores the size of the received message packet in the receive data length storage area and turns on the fixed buffer receiving status signal address 5005H corresponding bit It is recommended to employ a check system such as including the data length and data type code in the application data of a message so that the byte count and data type in the application data can be identified by the receivi
65. gt Content of header information Type text plain charset iso 2022 jp Correct the setting if it is charset EUC jp or SHIFT JIS 11 57 11 57 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 4 7 Error in redundant system 1 System switching error The following shows a troubleshooting flowchart for the case where system switching does not occur at communication error or disconnection detection System is not switched Check the starting I O number of the target Ethernet module with the network parameter Check SD1590 of the control system CPU Is the system switching request issued to the CPU NO Check the error log area buffer memory address E3u to 1741 of the Ethernet module mounted on the main base unit of the control system CPU What error code is generated gt 1 C0321 Error other than No error code TCP ULP timeout ma C0321 or C0354 C035x Existence check error Check the Ethernet parameters Is Issue System switching request at communication error checked in the redundant setting s Systemswitching settings when communication error occurs checked in the redundant setting Check the System switching settings when communication error occurs status storage area Buffer memory address 52104 52111 Are the settings of GX Developer consistent the contents of the buffer memory 11 58 Repair the error area according to the e
66. number is incorrect The port number set is used in a f Review and correct the port numbers of connection already opened by p TCP IP the Ethernet module and external device The port number used in a connection already opened is set in UDP IP open processing Initial processing and open processing of the Ethernet module is not completed Dedicated instruction amp 3 E mail log Correct the sub net address and execute the initial processing again Review and correct the port number of the Ethernet module Execute the initial processing and open processing 11 26 11 26 11 Error code abnormal code C0304 11 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Description of error At open processing the setting value of an external device s IP address is incorrect The pairing open processing of the connection or the next connection designated for pairing open has already been completed A connection could not be established during the open processing of a TCP connection The setting value of an external device s IP address is incorrect x When TCP is used FFFFFFFFu cannot be set as an IP address Data length exceeds the allowable range An abnormal end response was received after a transmission using fixed buffers A response could not be received within the response monitoring timer value The applicable connection was closed during waiting for a response The open processin
67. of the Initial Processing Perform loopback test ee See Section 5 4 3 Loopback Test Create a program foreach communication sf ees See applicable communication function Operation POINT To operate the Ethernet module after the parameter settings are added or modified with GX Developer the PLC CPU must be reset after saving the parameter values in the PLC CPU 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q Important 1 Do not write any data in the System area of the buffer memory of the intelligent function module 2 Do not output turn on the Use prohibited signal which is one of the output signals When status control such as remote RUN STOP from a external device is used for the PLC CPU the user should make the selection beforehand using the selecting parameters Always wait for OPEN Select using initial timing in the operation settings If Do not wait for OPEN is selected the communication line will be closed during remote STOP After that it cannot be reopened from the PLC CPU side and remote run from the external device also cannot be started When using sequence programs created for Ethernet modules of conventional models do not use the open request signals Y8 to YF fixed buffer communication signals YO to Y7 and the dedicated OPEN CLOSE and BUFSND BUFRCY instructions for the same connection simultaneously in the program It may result in malfun
68. path 2 system switching is performed between the control system and standby system and communication can be continued to the new control system x3 LAN card 2 Network No 2 Station No 3 IP address 10 97 24 3 Sub net mask 255 255 255 0 External device Ethernet seals espe Ethernet network No 1 network No 2 O O QO O Control system f zoron rono Communication path 1 Standby system i ee Communication path 2 D romana nono eos ieosm J lesol esl fats v T i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i L QJ71E71 100 1 Network No 1 Station No 1 IP address 10 97 14 1 Sub net mask 255 255 255 0 QJ71E71 100 2 Network No 2 Station No 1 IP address 10 97 24 1 Sub net mask 255 255 255 0 1 Tracking cable Si QJ71E71 100 4 vu x2 Mao Network No 2 Station No 2 IP address 10 97 24 2 Sub net mask 255 255 255 0 QJ71E71 100 3 Network No 1 Station No 2 IP address 10 97 14 2 Sub net mask 255 255 255 0 When using two LAN cards in the external device use them at different sub net addresses to the set IP address using the sub net mask Perform Network module redundant group settings on GX Developer
69. protocol TCP UDP of the external device For details see Section 5 5 NO Correct the interrupt setting from GX Developer See Section 7 3 2 Make sure that the send receive processing using input output signals and the dedicated BUFSND or BUFRCV instruction are not executed in the same connection If so modify the program Correct the control data For details see Chapter 10 Data may not have been set from the external device Check the sending side If the sending side is also an Ethernet module see Section 11 3 Did the error occur in the device on the sending side Fix the faulty part of the device on sending YES side The Ethernet module on receiving side NO may be faulty Consult your nearest dealer with the details of errors Was the dedicated BUFRCV instruction executed Correct the execution condition of the BUFRCV instruction Make sure that the send receive processing using input output signals and the dedicated BUFSND or BUFRCV instruction are not executed simultaneously executed in the same connection If so modify the program Did the BUFSND instruction complete normally Fix the error according to the abnormal code see Section 11 3 in the BUFSND instruction complete status area 11 48 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 49 Check the communication status of the device on the sending side Does the de
70. restart the PLC CPU and confirm the completion of the initial processing b The Ethernet module performs the open processing for connection No 1 to the external device set in the Open settings or control data c The close processing for connection No 1 is performed according to the close instruction to the Ethernet module or the close request from the external device The U0 G20480 and U0 G20482 codes shown in the program designate the following areas in the buffer memory U0 G20480 Open completion signal storage area address 5000H 20480 U0 G20482 Open request signal storage area address 5002H 20482 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE SM400 UO MOV 620480 UO MOV 620482 M5000 PLS RST RST M1000 x19 MO M20 MOVP HO MOVP H8000 MOVP HO MOVP H1000 DMOVP H0A6155DF i i MOVP H2000 K1 D100 M100 M101 SET M101 AA fiir M150 oeo M161 M210 SET M200 M201 SET M201 RR EA RST RST RST K4M0 K4M20 M1000 M202 M203 D100 D100 D102 D103 D104 D106 M100 M150 M151 M160 M161 M2000 M200 M210 M202 M203 M150 M151 M210 a MELSEC Q X19 Initial normal completion signal Mo Connection 1 open completion signal M20 Connection 1 open request signal Open processing of connection No 1 TCP IP Active open Read the open completion signal information Read the open request signal information Change the open comman
71. start up according to the parameters TCP Existence confirmation setting b4 0 Use the Ping Module status 1 Use the KeepAlive Section 4 7 CBu area Send frame setting b5 0 Ethernet frame 1 IEEE802 3 frame Setting of write enable disable at RUN time b6 0 Disable 1 Enable Communication Initial timing setting b8 status storage 0 Do not wait for OPEN area Communications impossible at STOP time 1 Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time Bits other than above are reserved for system use System area g a Chapter 4 of A N Meee eet Ooo o o Application i Chapter 4 of Execution result of ZNRD instruction x p CFu Application instructions Data link System area DOH instruction execution Chapter 4 of Execution result of ZNWR instruction X n Din per channel Application A100229 System area D2 to DF 2 Continues on the next page 203 CB 204 CCx 205 CDx e EN Ra aC CEx 207 CFn 208 DOn 209 D1 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Decimal Hexadecimal 224 to 226 E0 to E24 E3H E44 E54 N as E6 E8x 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 236 237 E9u 234 to 235 ECu ECu ED EDH 238 to 246 EE to F64 247 to 255 F7 to FFn 256 to 264 100 to 1081 265 to 273 109 to 1114 274 to 282 112 to 11An 283 to 291 11B to 123n 292 to 300 124 to 12Cx 301 to 309 12D to 1351 310 to 318 13
72. 0 Special module register Constant Others register Direct JO O UD GO Zn Bt woa Bt woa KH Se a a Se Pe ee orik eo l o aa as ea ee Instruction code Executing condition Command ERRRD ET H o ZP ERRRD Setting data Description Set by 9 Un Start input output signal of the Ethernet module liser Binary 16 bits 00 to FE The two most significant digits of the 3 digit input output signal y Head number of the local station bit device that turns on for one scan D1 upon completion of instruction System D1 1 also turns on if the instruction execution ends abnormally The file registers for each of the local device and the program cannot be used as devices to be used in the setting data Control data Device Item Setting data Setting range Set by Si 0 Systemarea i i ooo S o oS i Stores the status at completion 00001 Normal completion Complete status Other than 0000 System Abnormal completion error code 2 Designates the error information to read Read information O Initial abnormal code 0 User designation 1 to 16 Open abnormal code for the applicable 1to 16 connection Read target e Designates a target of the error information to read information 0000 Information of the last error that has 0000 User designation occurred Stores the error information that has been read Error information 000 No error 0000 System Other than 0000
73. 1 Usage of fixed buffer b0 0 For sending or fixed buffer communication is not executed 1 For receiving Destination existence confirmation b1 0 No confirm 1 Confirm Pairing open b7 0 No pairs 1 Pairs Communication method protocol b8 0 TCP IP 1 UDP IP Fixed buffer communication b9 0 Procedure exist 1 No procedure Open system b15 b14 00 Active open or UDP IP 10 Unpassive open 11 Fullpassive open Bits other than above are reserved for system use Connection No 2 bit configuration is the same as connection No 1 Connection No 3 bit configuration is the same as connection No 1 Connection No 4 bit configuration is the same as connection No 1 Reference section Section 5 5 Communication Connection parameter setting usage setting area area Same as connection No 1 Same as connection No 1 Same as connection No 1 Continues on the next page PECIFICATION aaa MELSEC Q Continued from the previous page Address Initial value Gx Developer Reference Decimal Application Name setting Hexadecimal era ate section Hexadecimal applicability 36 Connection No 5 bit configuration is the same as connection No 1 25H bit configuration is the same as connection No 1 38 Connection No 7 27H bit configuration is the same as connection No 1 i 40 i 29 to 2An j 43 a 44 to 46 Communication 2C to 2Ex Communication address setting FFFFFFFFFFFFa 47 to 53
74. 11 1 How to Check Errors Using LED Displays This section describes the errors that can be checked with the LED displays on the front of the Ethernet module 11 1 1 Checking error display The following can be checked with the LED displays on the front of the Ethernet module lt Ethernet module LED gt QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 B2 RUN C_ C ERR RUN C_ C ERR RUNC_ C ERR INIT C0 C COM ERR INIT CJ C COM ERR INIT C C COM ERR OPEN _ C 100M OPEN LJ OPEN SDCI RD SDCI CARD SDC CORD N LEDname Status to check Cause corrective action 1 Watchdog timer error When a watchdog timer approximately 600 ms error occurs the watchdog timer error detection 1 IRUN Turns off after powering on signal X1F is turned on by the self diagnosis function of the Ethernet module the Ethernet module 2 Ethernet module installation fault e Check if the power supply capacity 5 V DC of the power supply module is insufficient e Turn off the power supply and reinstall the module 1 Module parameter setting error e Check correct the parameter setting values for the Ethernet module using GX Developer Turns on after powering on PREC CPU NOT 2 ERR the Ethernet module 1 When the PLC CPU s RUN LED is off flashing or the ERR LED is on check the content of the error occurring in the PLC CPU and correct the problem e Check that the Ethernet module is installed on the
75. 3 Routing to a MELSECNET H or of parameters MELSECNET 10 network system in A F A A Applicati order to communicate with PLCs of on other stations Remote password Set the target connection of the remote Section settings password check a A 5 9 5 O Must be set when the applicable function is used A Set as needed X Setting is not required x1 The meanings of the abbreviations used in the table above are as follows MC Communication using the MC protocol Random Communication using the random access buffer FTP File transfer protocol Mail E mail Fixed Communication using the fixed buffer Data link Communication using data link instructions Automatic notification Data transmission via automatic notification Web Communication using the Web function N Application in the Reference Section column refers to the User s Manual Application 3 9 3 9 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 7 List of Input Output Signals to from the PLC CPU This section explains the input output signals of the Ethernet module For assignments of the input output signals shown in the table below it is assumed that the Ethernet module is mounted in slot 0 of the basic base unit Device numbers starting with X indicate input signals from the Ethernet module to the PLC CPU and device numbers starting with Y indicate output signals from the PLC CPU to the Ethernet module The following shows the input output signals to from the PLC CP
76. 4 3 2 o 1 0 Communication data code setting 0 Communication in binary code 1 Communication in ASCII code TCP Existence confirmation setting 0 Use the Ping 1 Use the KeepAlive See the Operation settings Send frame setting See Section 4 7 0 Ethernet frame 1 IEEE802 3 frame Setting of write enable disable at RUN time 0 Disable 1 Enable Initial timing setting 0 Do not wait for OPEN communication impossible at STOP time 1 Always wait for OPEN communication possible at STOP time description to the left 1 The Set by column indicates the following User Data set by the user before executing a dedicated instruction System The PLC CPU stores the execution results of a dedicated instruction 2 For details on the error codes at abnormal completion see Section 11 3 Error Code List When performing re initial processing of the Ethernet module only i e without changing the local station IP address and operation settings the control data should be specified so that the value 0x is stored in S1 2 the specification of target of change before executing the UINI instruction The Ethernet module clears external device address information that it has been maintaining and performs re initial processing in order to allow data communication to restart The initial normal completion signal X19 is on 10 24 10 24 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q F
77. 4 characters Numbers AZ a z ri l I Connection 2 I Connection 3 I Connection 4 SERENE I Connection 5 I Connection 6 I Connection 7 I Connection 8 Password active module settings I Connection 9 I Connection 10 I Connection 11 I Connection 12 RORE I Connection 13 I Connection 14 I Connection 15 I Connection 16 0J71E71 eta Note Please enable the existence confirmation function in case of using the UDP IP protocol r System connection I Auto open UDP port J FTP transmission port TCP IP I GX Developer transmission port TCP IP r GX Developer transmission port UDP IP Dedicated instruction MELSECNET 10 H relay transmission port 2 I HTTP pot Give validity to HTTP protocol password Necessary setting No setting Alreadyset If you enable the remote password the dedicated instructions and the MELSECNET 10 H Selling completion Cael relay transmission function can not be used If the remote password of the port is enabled the existence confirmation function will be enabled automatically When making a remote password enabled write parameters to the PLC and reset the PLC or turn off the power and turn on the power again Setting completion Cancel Setting items Description of item setting Setting range options Password settings Enter the password to be set in the QCPU oe ee Select the model name for the module performing the chec
78. 5 2 Other SOttinOSetecit eich pha ee eE eee ag nk eee en eben wh ewe tetas 4 13 4 6 Network Parameters Setting the Number of MNET 10H Ethernet Cards 0 c cesseceeeeseeteeeeeeeeees 4 16 4 7 Operational Settings nesenai aise ai Se ee des eee el 4 19 4 8 Self DiagnOstic Tests cccsceecececesseeeceeceeeeseeaeceeeaeeaecaeceeesaesaecaesaeseaeeaecaeeaseaecaesaeseaeeeseeseaseaeeaesaeeeateats 4 22 ASA Seltiretrain test ies oot t cae Ais edie As el yl eee ie nA ati ee tlie ea A tlle fads 4 22 4 82 Hardware test HAN TOST eranen neanke a ENEAN AREN ENANTA TAN AAT eSEE ARANETA ATENA aA AREENA 4 23 4 9 Maintenance and nspas sisese a a 4 24 4 9 1 Maintenance and inspection eceeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeaeseaeecaeeeaeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeenaeeaeeeaeeeatenas 4 24 4 9 2 Mounting and dismounting the module ee eeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeesaeeeaeesaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeatenas 4 25 5 1 Overview of the Communication Procedure ccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeceeseaeeaesaeseeseaeeaesaeseeeeaesaesaeeaeeaees 5 1 5 2 Initial PrOCESSING gic ions Fit eed ea en evi Pe eva ean evi Se vie ean eve et 5 3 D 251 Initial processi ws sie oh oh ha eee heh aia eh ee oie e aie hee 5 3 52 2 Initial setings kt aa eh ooh cel Actes tl An bea aul Aetent oh an Aah aul Aube atl Ata auladiants 5 4 5 2 3 Re initial PrOCOSSIMG uic ci eutcuSs tanvwsed E teevetel aes E eee tweet nee ivi een eet 5 10 5 3 Router Rel
79. 5 3 Router Relay Parameter This section explains the router relay parameter using GX Developer Select Setting the number of MNET 10H Ethernet cards Router relay parameter to start the Setting the Ethernet router relay parameter screen Router relay function Not used Sub net mask pattern ee ee Default router IP address fF ft e Router information Input format DEC No Sub net address Router IP address Clear Check End Cancel Description of setting Setting range options ma e Use Router relay function Select whether the router relay function is not used or is used Sub net mask pattern Set the sub net mask C0000000 to FFFFFFFCu Default router IP address Set the IP address of the default router to be routed through Other than 00000000 and FFFFFFFFu A DE a Decimal Input format Select the input format of setting items Hexadecimal Set the sub net address or network address of the external device when Sub net address communicating with an external device on another Ethernet via a router other Other than 000000001 and FFFFFFFFu than the default router Set the IP address of a router used when communicating with an external device Router IP address on another Ethernet via a router other than the default router 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE Example Class B IP address MELSEC Q 1 Router relay function Address 4H b5 b4 a c Set whether the router relay functio
80. Accessing the QCPU via the Ethernet module TCP IP or UDP IP Monitoring various Ethernet module statuses PING test Self loop back test Via the CPU PING test Ethernet diagnostic function Via the Ethernet board Support for the IEEE802 3 frame Connection of MELSOFT products such as GX Developer Simultaneous connection with multiple units via TCP IP communication Simplifying access to other stations Access with the same station number Hub connection status monitor function XfOJO O JOJOJOJOJO OJOJOC O L O JOI O XID IP JOP IPIEJO JOJOJOIP e gt IP D gt eiil O JOJOJOSOJOJO JOJOCJOIL O JO Can be used A Can be used However there are restrictions on the product serial No manufactured date 1 x Cannot be used x1 There is a time limit on the manufacturing date of Ethernet modules that can support this function For how to check the function version see Section 2 7 For the description of the following items see Section 2 7 e How to check the function version of the Ethernet module e Correspondence with related products CPU modules GX Developer that can use added functions App 2 App 2 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 1 2 Precautions when updating the module from function version A to function version B or later This section explains the utilization of programs created for the Ethernet module of function version A and
81. CONFIGURATIONS MELSEC Q 4 Applicable software packages a Software for PLC 71 The following table shows the systems and software packages applicable to the Ethernet module When using the Ethernet module GX Developer is required ee a 2 nan Q02 G02HG06H Q12HIQ25HCPU e a CPU system i Q12PH Q25PHCPU Version 7 10L or later Multiple CPU system CPU system Q12PRH Q25PRHCPU Redundant system Version 8 18U or later When installing to MELSECNET H remote I O station Version 6 or later x1 Refer to Section 2 7 for the GX Developer versions that support the additional functions of the improved Ethernet module b Communication support tool for external devices Active X control library MX Component SWnDSC ACT E The n in the model name is 0 or greater 1 x1 Depending on the version of MX Component used different versions of Ethernet modules are supported Refer to the manual of MX Component for the details 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS MELSEC Q 2 2 Devices Required for Network Configuration This section explains the devices that are required to configure a network Network installation work requires sufficient safeguard ask a network specialist for installation 1 When configuring an Ethernet system with a QJ71E71 100 When connecting a QU71E71 100 to a network either a 10OBASE T or 100BASE TX can be used The Ethernet module detects whether it is 1OBASE T or 100BASE TX and the full dupl
82. Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet module module module module module i Network No 1 y y A Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Loop back test is performed module module module module for network No 1 from 5 i A e Station No 2 Station No 4 Station No 6 Station No 8 station 1 to station 5 b The following can be checked by performing the loop back test Whether a line has been properly connected to the test target Ethernet module e Whether the parameters for the Ethernet module have been correctly set e Whether the initial processing for the Ethernet module has been completed normally c The loop back test can be performed for an Ethernet module in the same Ethernet as the local station Same sub net address d Inthe station on which the Ethernet module subject to the loop back test is mounted do not designate the UDP port for GX Developer of the Ethernet module as a valid port for the remote password check If it is designated as a valid port for the remote password check the loop back test cannot be performed e When performing a loop back test using GX Developer set the router relay function in the router relay parameter of GX Developer to Not used 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 2 Executing the loop back test The example explains the loop back test methodology and GX Developer settings
83. Ethernet module side connector b System switching request operation at disconnection detection The Ethernet module always checks the connected cable for disconnection The system switching request operation performed at disconnection detection is described below External device Disconnection occurrence system System A Control TeSTsSH aH im E Tracking cable J External device O To Sea Control system System A Standby system System B WE a ERRE H HE A a i H HE a B gE a 3 i a System switching Tracking cable request l To next page 1 Disconnection monitoring The Ethernet module always checks the connected cable for disconnection 1 The monitoring result is stored into the hub connection status area address 201 C9H of the buffer memory Refer to Section 5 10 At disconnection detection 2 When the Ethernet module mounted on the main base unit of the control system CPU detects disconnection it executes a disconnecti
84. Explanation a lErrersoccaiind ia initial processi Setting value error 691 Initial error code 9 p 9 Initial processing error Communication status storage area 7Du 5825n Fixed buffer sending error code 7En 58261 Connection end code ath P Setting value error 7Cu 5824u Open error code 2 Errors occurring in open processing f DO Open processing error Communication status storage area Errors occurring in fixed buffer Designated data error Section 11 3 3 sending to an external device Sending error A Communication status storage area Errors occurring in fixed buffer Designated data error st 5 F g Nah 7Ex 5826 Connection end code 4 communication with an external e Communication error Paar Communication status storage area device exclude 3 above e Errors returned in fixed buffer communication end code Section 11 3 1 e Errors returned in random access buffer communication end code ed End codes when QnA compatible 3E frame Errors returned to an external device P Section 11 3 3 TAN commands are used when communicating with the AN Errors returned in communication using End codes when A compatible 1E frame commands 3 external device Section 11 3 1 the MC protocol are used Error hen A compatible 1E frame commands or odes Whe pas Section 11 3 2 are used Designated data errors ee Errors whose source cannot be Errors occurring while communicating i Cet n confirmed with an external devic
85. Figure 5 4 5 5 5 6 POINT 5 6 1 5 6 2 5 8 2 3 5 9 1 1 2 5 9 3 Figure 5 9 5 5 9 6 3 5 9 7 Section 6 2 Section 7 1 7 2 Figure 7 3 1 Figure 7 3 2 2 Figure 7 5 2 Section 8 2 Figure 8 3 1 Figure 8 3 2 2 Figure 8 5 1 8 6 2 Section 9 2 3 2 Figure Section 10 1 POINT 10 6 10 8 Section 11 1 1 11 1 2 11 2 3 11 3 7 Figure 11 3 3 error codes C113H C114H and C14Eu 11 4 POINT 11 4 6 Figure Appendix 1 1 Appendix 2 1 2 2 2 Appendix 8 3 Appendix 11 x The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date_ Manual Number Jun 2001 SH NA 080009 C Addition Section 1 2 5 6 Section 2 2 1 2 6 Section 5 4 2 Section 11 3 6 11 3 2 error code 1Fx 11 3 3 error codes COF7H and C300h Appendix 4 Appendix 7 Appendix 9 Appendix 11 Oct 2001 SH NA 080009 D Correction Section 1 2 4 7 1 3 1 4 1 Section 2 2 POINT 2 5 1 2 7 1 Section 3 1 3 5 3 8 Section 4 1 1 2 4 3 4 4 1 POINT 4 7 5 Section 5 2 2 REMARK 5 2 3 5 4 2 5 5 Table 5 6 1 5 6 2 5 6 3 Section 10 1 Section 11 2 2 2 11 2 4 11 3 3 Appendix 1 1 Appendix 8 2 Appendix 9 Addition Section 10 9 M A ar 2002 SH NA 080009 E Correction About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 1 2 7 Section 2 1 1 2 7 1 Section 3 7 Table Section 5 1 Figure 5 2 2
86. Fixed buffer Setting Protocol Open system Fixed buffer Communication _ r Station number and mode setting System B gt Station number B Mode Online tai r IP address settings procedure Input format DEC we IT Enable auto open UDP port System A I Enable GX D per UDP communication port isa 1 252 I Enable GX Developer TCP communication port I Enable FTP communication port System B 2 I Enable HTTP communication port 192 L 4 1 253 It is necessary to set the remote password if the system switch setting during communication error is enabled in Check Cancel Ethernet module IP address System B C0 00 01 FDH 192 00 01 253 App 31 App 31 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 4 External device side program The following shows a program example of the external device that accesses the Ethernet module mounted station Q25PRHCPU When this program is executed the following contents are displayed in due order 1 Version of used Winsock Test starting message Write of batch command messages in word unit Write of batch response messages in word unit Test end message The following describes the general compile procedure for the program created using Microsoft Visual C Ver 6 0 1 Create a QUSAMP C file using a text editor Refer to the next page for the program example 2 Start Visual C 3 Open the QUSAMP C file Choose File Open
87. H remote I O station a Perform communication using a QnA compatible 3E frame Communication cannot be done with the A compatible 1E frame 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS MELSEC Q b The following functions are available for the MELSECNET H remote I O station For the QnA A series compatible MELSECNET 10 remote I O station only read write of the intelligent function module buffer memory can be performed Available function Function Read write of device memory Batch read batch write Random read test random write Monitor data registration monitor Multiple block batch read multiple block batch write Read write of buffer memory Read write of Ethernet module buffer memory Read write of intelligent Read write of specified intelligent function module buffer memory function module buffer memory c The following devices of the MELSECNET H remote I O station are accessible by read write of the device memory See the Reference Manual for a detailed explanation Device name Device symbol Device name Device symbol Special relay PSM Link relay Special register ____s0_ Data register ___ gt _ Input relay Link register Output relay Link special relay Internal relay mMm Link special register d Other station access via the MELSECNET H remote I O station enables access to the MELSECNET H remote master station and access to the MELSECNET H remote I O station 1 Inthe following figure access can be
88. MELSEC Q 2 Data can be communicated with the following external devices e Device on the Ethernet to which the Ethernet module is connected e Devices connected with the router relay function see Section 5 3 As shown in the diagram below when using each fixed buffer No 1 to 16 the destination devices and usage conditions for sending receiving procedure exist no procedure etc should be set when the connection via the Ethernet module is opened to fix the external device for each buffer a At TCP IP communication It is allowed to change external devices only when the open completion signal of the applicable connection is off b At UDP IP communication External devices can be changed regardless of the status of the applicable connection Destination IP address and Destination Port No in the communication address setting area can be changed However Local station Port No cannot be changed When changing external devices do not use the Pairing open and Existence confirmation functions For sending to external device 1 For receiving from external device 1 For receiving from external device 8 Fixed buffer No 1 External device 1 Fixed buffer No 2 Fixed buffer No 3 External device 8 to to to For sending to external Fixed buffer No 16 device 28 External device 28 POINT The connections for which no procedure is selected are dedicated to the fixed
89. MELSECNET H or MELSECNET 10 coexist or in a network system that relays multiple Ethernets data communication is performed via multiple number of such networks User s Manual Web Function Reference section Chapter 3 of User s Manual Application Router relay communication router relay function Performs data communication via a router or gateway The router relay function is not a function by which the Ethernet module works as a router Section 5 3 Existence check of external device Existence check function Checks whether or not the external device is working normally after a connection is established open processing Sections 5 2 2 and 5 5 Communication via pairing open Pairs and then opens a reception connection and a transmission connection for fixed buffer Section 5 7 Communication via automatic open UDP port Enables communication after the station in which an Ethernet module is mounted has been started Open close processing by sequence programs is not required Section 5 8 Remote password check Prevents unauthorized access by a remote user to a QCPU Section 5 9 Simultaneous broadcast Sends receives data for all external devices on the same Ethernet as for the Ethernet module in data communication via UDP IP Section 8 5 Connecting MELSOFT products GX Developer MX Component etc and GOTs MELSOFT products GX Developer MX Component etc
90. No pairs Existence confirmation If existence confirmation is going to be executed set the receiving connection to Confirm and the sending connection to No confirm If existence confirmation is not going to be executed select No confirm for both 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE 7 MELSEC Q Local station Port No Set this for the receiving connection for receiving only Setting is not required for the sending connection Set the port number upon consulting a network administrator Destination IP address a If the Unpassive system is chosen Setting is not required b If either Active or Fullpassive system is chosen Setting is required Set for the receiving connection only upon consulting a network administrator Destination Port No a If the Unpassive system is chosen Setting is not required b If either Active or Fullpassive system is chosen Setting is required Set for the receiving connection only upon consulting a network administrator 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 5 8 Automatic Open UDP Port Normally when communicating with an external device it is necessary to establish a communication line with the external device when starting the data communication and to disconnect the communication line with the external device again when terminating the data communication following the arrangement with the external device The automatic open UDP port automatically opens closes u
91. Non control PLC MELSEC Q 3 Itis possible to access the control PLC and non control PLCs using the MC protocol and through GX Developer and file transfer FTP server from the external device Also communication using the fixed buffer and sending receiving of e mail are possible with respect to the Ethernet module control PLC Example When communicating by MC protocol Control PLC Ethernet module External device O3E0x to 03E3H Device memory etc O3FFH TUE eee ener al Response message Data erostbosteo ses site rion ssn gt Device memory etc Command message transmitted using iit Se ee eee eaves ee a QnA compatible Specify the QCPU tobe 3E frame accessed by the I O number i1 of the requested module Communication using the MC protocol read write gt If the MC protocol or GX Developer is used to access other stations it is possible to access the control PLC and non control PLCs of the station to be accessed even if the relay station and the accessed station are multiple CPU systems Example It is possible to access other stations regardless of whether the control PLC of the module to be routed through is of the same kind or different Setting from GX Developer Relay station Local station External device 2 3 1 2c Communication through GX Developer ZEN Communication using the MC protocol
92. PLC CPU To start up an interrupt program create an interrupt enable disable program in the main program The instructions to be used for this are El and DI 7 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE PROCEDURE EXIST CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q 7 4 Data Format When communicating data between the Ethernet module and an external device the data format explained below is used The communication data consists of a header and application data as follows Application data k at azi Maximum of 2040 bytes 7 4 1 Header The header for TCP IP or UDP IP is used In case of the Ethernet module the Ethernet module adds and deletes the header Thus the user does not need to set it Details of the size of the header section 1 In case of TCP IP Ethernet IP TCP 14 bytes 20 bytes 20 bytes 2 In case of UDP IP Ethernet IP 14 bytes 20 bytes 7 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE PROCEDURE EXIST CONTROL METHOD 7 4 2 Application data MELSEC Q As shown below the data code in the application data can be expressed in either binary or ASCII code Switching between binary code and ASCII code is performed with GX Developer as follows GX Developer Network parameters Operational settings Communication data code For more details see Section 4 7 Operational Settings 1 Format a Communication request source side Communication using binary code Application data section
93. QCPU by users at a remote location The Ethernet module performs a remote password check with respect to data communication from the external device that uses the connection set as a parameter in the QCPU x The remote password function is one of the QCPU functions for preventing improper access to the QCPU by other users When setting a remote password for the QCPU using GX Developer the remote password function of the QCPU can be used All the remote password checks during data communication from the external device to the local station or other stations are performed for the remote passwords set in the local station QCPU When communicating data using the applicable connection for the remote password check data communication from external device can be performed by the remote password unlocked canceled processing after completing open processing 1 When communicating using the MC protocol fixed buffer or random access buffer Use the dedicated instruction for communication using the MC protocol to unlock the remote password from the external device 2 When accessing the PLC through GX Developer Unlock the remote password through GX Developer at the start of online operation 3 When using the file transfer FTP server function Use a dedicated FTP command to unlock the remote password from the external device 4 When using the Web function Unlock the remote password in the dialog box displayed by a Web browser while accessing the QCPU
94. QuJ_test Start n App 34 App 34 APPENDIX MELSEC O System A connect processing socketnoA socket AF_INET SOCK_STREAM 0 TCP IP socket for System A connection creation if socketnoA INVALID_ SOCKET hostdataA sin_family AF_INET hostdataA sin_port scA my_port hostdataA sin_addr s_addr scA my_addr s_addr if bind socketnoA LPSOCKADDR amp hostdataA sizeof hostdataA SOCK_Ok Bind System A qj71e71A sin_family AF_INET qj71e71A sin_port SCA qj_port qj71e71A sin_addr s_addr scA qj_addr s_addr if connect socketnoA LPSOCKADDR amp qj71e71A sizeof qj71e71A SOCK_Ok Connect Active open System A ShutdownflagA FLAG_ON Shutdown flag ON CloseflagA FLAG_ON Connection end flag ON Set to non blocking mode ulCmdArgA 1 ioctlsocket socketnoA FIONBIO amp ulCmdArgA Set to non blocking mode for System A connection else ConnectLastErrorA ERROR_CONNECT Connection establishment failure else ConnectLastErrorA ERROR_BIND Bind failure else ConnectLastErrorA ERROR_SOCKET Socket creation failure System B connect processing socketnoB socket AF_INET SOCK_STREAM 0 TCP IP socket for System B connection creation if socketnoB INVALID_ SOCKET hostdataB sin_family AF_INET hostdataB sin_port scB my_port hostdataB sin_addr s_addr scB my_addr s_adadr if bind socketnoB LPSOCKADDR amp hostd
95. Relationship between the External Devices and Additional Functions for Each Communication Function This section explains with which external devices data communication can be performed and which additional functions can be used for each function 1 Communicability with external devices using various functions The following table lists the communicability with external devices using various functions External device Personal computer Personal computer QJ71E71 QJ71E71 Conventional model Function L T L T L L QJ71E71 QJ71E71 QJ71E71 Conventional model QJ71E71 Communication using the MC protocol O x Communication using the fixed buffer O Communication using the random access o x buffer Sending receiving e mail O x Communication using data link Z o A 1 F instructions File transfer FTP server function g x Communication using the Web function O x O Can communicate A Can communicate with restrictions X Cannot communicate QJ71E71 Q Series Ethernet interface module Conventional model QnA or A Series Ethernet interface module 1 Communication can be performed with the QnA Series Ethernet interface module 2 Relationship with additional functions The following table lists the correspondence between functions and their additional functions that can be used Additional function Communication method A ___ MELSECNETH Router relay Evictence ns o
96. Sequence program processing processing processing Instruction execution CLOSE instruction Complete device Peewee eae Hoj 1 A Complete device 1 7 44 r 4 Abnormal completion u 1 3 The ZP CLOSE is executed when the close instruction switches from off to on Important Never execute the open close processing using input output signals and the open close processing using the OPEN or CLOSE dedicated instructions simultaneously for the same connection It will result in malfunctions Errors 1 When a dedicated instruction ends with an error the abnormal completion signal D1 1 turns on and the error code is stored in the complete status area S2 1 Refer to the following manuals regarding the error codes check the errors and take corrective actions lt Error codes gt 4FFFH or less QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection COO0H or higher Section 11 3 3 of this manual 10 12 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Program example MELSEC Q A program that closes the connection number 1 When the input output signals of the Ethernet module are X Y00 to X Y1F m_m T M160 M150 M2000 MO ZP CLOSE uo K1 D200 M161 M210 SET M200 M201 10 13 M160 M161 M2000 M200 M210 M202 M203 M210 MO Connection 1 open completion signal M150 OPEN instruction execution normal completion flag Set the flag by the close
97. Set parameters using GX Developer and Developer have not been loaded load them to the CPU module The number of blocks exceeded the Correct the designation value for the COD8x range number of blocks Incorrect subcommand value was designated CoD2u COD9x Ethernet module for the PING test e Change the status of the Ethernet module for the PING to allow communication to the status after the initial processing is completed A response to the PING test could not be received within the time of the communication time check There is an error in the IP CODBu address host name of the Ethernet module for the PING test COoDCu System error CODDu e The OS detected any error watchdog timer Data could not be received within e Review the designated value of the the designated watchdog time channel number Check the status of the sending source station and relay station System error DF 1 ODF The OS detected any error ooo L L Check if the PLC CPU and intelligent function modules are correctly mounted to the base or not Check that the PLC CPU does not remain in the reset status Check that no error has occurred in the PLC CPU If an error is found take corrective actions according to error description of the PLC CPU Replace the power supply module PLC CPU and or intelligent function module Conduct a hardware test again If an An Ethernet module RAM abnormality is detected again the abnormality was det
98. Straight cables can be used Correct operation is not guaranteed if a crossed cable is used to connect to an external device via the 1OBASE T of the Ethernet module However it is possible to use crossed cables to connect two Ethernet modules i e two QJ71E71 100 modules for data communication or to connect an Ethernet module to a GOT e RJ45 jacks e 10Mbps hub During the high speed communication 100 M bps via 100BASE TX connection a communication error may occur due to the effect of high frequency noise from devices other than PLC in a given installation environment The following describes countermeasures on the QU71E71 100 side to prevent the effect of high frequency noise for construction of a network system Wiring connection Do not bundle the twisted pair cables with the main circuit and power wires and do not install them close to each other Make sure to place the twisted pair cables in a duct Communication method e Data communication with an external device is performed using TCP IP communication e Increase the number of communication retries as necessary 10 M bps communication e Communication is performed at a data transmission rate of 10 M bps by changing the connection hub for the QU71E71 100 to a hub capable of handling 10 M bps 2 SY SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS MELSEC Q 2 When configuring the Ethernet system with a QJ71E71 B5 a Connecting using the 1OBASE5 N type terminator Coaxial cable
99. TCP IP UDP IP and the open method Active Passive including programming procedures 4 To find out about the details of the data communication functions a To find out about the communication functions e Section 1 2 describes an overview of the Ethernet module communication functions and related section numbers and manual names that can be referenced for more detailed explanations e Special functions of the Ethernet module are described in the User s Manual Application e Web functions of the Ethernet module are described in the User s Manual Web function 5 To find out about the data communication functions and programming a To find out how data is read from and written to the PLC CPU e Data is read from and written to the PLC CPU with communication functions using the MC protocol e Chapter 6 describes an overview of the communication functions using the MC protocol For details refer to the Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual b To find out how to send and receive data between the PLC CPU and the external devices e Data communication between the PLC CPU and the external devices is performed with the communication functions using either the fixed buffers or the random access buffers e Chapters 7 and 8 explains details of the communication functions and programming using the fixed buffers e Chapter 9 explains details of the communication functions and programming using the random ac
100. The OS detected any error E he initial i in An Ethernet module system error seg eat ve hiram San COC7H e Execute the ane by referring occurred Section 11 4 POINT 3 COC8x i System error e The OS detected any error COCA d Another sending request was made 9 q Make the next sending request after the COCBu when the sending processing has A nud previous sending is completed not been completed COCCu System error 1 COCFu The OS detected any error i E ES eee ee designated length CO a eee ea ee designated count 11 32 11 32 Connection E mail log Dedicated instruction 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Storage destination Error code abnormal Description of error Error handling code D O 2 8 oO 2 EJ W Q Connection instruction Incorrect watchdog time was e Review the designated value of the designated watchdog timer Check the designated value of the COD3x The number of relay stations in destination MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10__ Review the Station No lt gt IP information C0D4u exceeded the allowable count between the local station and destination Review the system specifications Incorrect retry count was COD5x y e Review the retry count designated e Review the content of the destination The designations of network number designation or station number were incorrect e Review the designated values of the destination C0D7 Parameter values set by GX
101. a re initial processing via UINI instruction Also do not request another re initial processing while a re initial processing is already being performed Be sure to reset external devices if the IP address of the Ethernet module has been changed If an external device maintains the Ethernet address of a device with which it communicates the communication may not be continued after the IP address of the Ethernet module has been changed In a redundant system do not change the IP address and operation setting with the UINI instruction If they are changed normal communication cannot be made Use GX Developer to change the IP address and operation setting Errors 1 When a dedicated instruction ends with an error the abnormal completion signal D1 1 turns on and the error code is stored in the complete status area S1 1 Refer to the following manuals regarding the error code check the errors and take corrective actions lt Error codes gt 4FFFH or less QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Co000H or higher Section 11 3 3 of this manual 10 25 10 25 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Program example The following figure shows a sample program that performs a re initial processing When I O signals of the Ethernet module are X Y00 to X Y1F SM400 U0 H mov G20480 K4NO Always ON Connection 1 open completion signal M6500 s E M2500 Re initial Re init
102. a sending window confirmation packet to the receiving side after the TCP zero window timer value has been reached and confirms the reception enabled status c Designate the setting value in a range from 2 to 32767 When the default value is used setting is not required d Timer setting setting value x 500 ms Timer setting TCP resend timer address DH a Set the resend time if ACK is not returned at TCP opening or data transmission This timer is also used for the existence time of the ARP function ARP is resent in TCP resend timer value 2 if a response is not returned in reply to the sent ARP request It also serves as the minimum setting time for the data link instruction arrival monitoring time b Designate the setting value in a range from 2 to 32767 When the default value is used setting is not required c Timer setting setting value x 500 ms Timer setting TCP end timer address EH a When the TCP connection is closed from the local station this timer sets the monitoring time for how long the local station waits for a FIN request from an external device after it sends an FIN request and the external device returns an ACK b Ifthe FIN request cannot be received from the external device before the time designated by the TCP end timer setting a RST should be sent to the external device to forcefully close the connection c Designate the setting value in a range from 2 to 32767 When
103. address Send frame setting Input format DEC ha Ethemet 2 0 IP address 10 97 85 C IEEES023 J I Enable Write at RUN time TCP Existence confirmation setting Use the KeepAlive C Use the Ping Cancel Local station IP address 0A 61 55 DEH 10 97 85 222 d The Open settings parameters are assumed to have been performed using GX Developer as follows E Network parameter Ethernet open setting Module No 1 oO x Seon open qoini Port No IP address 200 10 97 85 223 a Local station Port No 1000H Destination IP address 0A 61 55 DFH 10 97 85 223 Destination Port No 2000H 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q e The following contact signals are used in the program Connection No 1 open completion signal MO Connection No 1 open request signal M20 Connection No 1 OPEN instruction control data Stored in D100 to D109 Connection No 1 CLOSE instruction control data Stored in D200 and D201 f The area enclosed with i in the program example should be used when the Open settings Ethernet module parameters are not set for GX Developer This part of the program is not required when the Open settings parameters are used for GX Developer g For details on the dedicated OPEN instruction see Chapter 10 Dedicated Instructions 2 Outline of the program example a After each parameter is set from GX Developer and write to PLC CPU
104. address for the PING test destination device in the result display field 2 Specify the data size Specify the size of the system data to be transmitted for the test during the PING test Input range 1 to 8192 bytes default 32 bytes x The Ethernet module will return a response of 1460 bytes if the PING test is performed when a data size of 1460 bytes or greater for transmitting to the Ethernet module is specified 3 Specify the time of the communication time check Specify the response wait time for the PING test Input range 1 to 30 s default 1 s 4 Specify the number of transmissions Specify the number of times the PING test is to be performed Selection item Description of item Transmission count 1 to 50 times default 4 times Specify the number of times The PING test is performed for the number of specified times Execute till interrupting The PING test is performed until the interrupt button is pressed Result Results of the PING test are displayed lt When the test is completed abnormally gt Check the following then perform the PING test again How the Ethernet module is mounted on the base unit e Status of the connection to the Ethernet e Contents of the parameters written to the PLC CPU e Operating status of the PLC CPU whether any errors have occurred IP addresses set in GX Developer and the PING test target station Whether the external device has reset when the Ethernet module was ch
105. and GOTs are connected via TCP IP communication or UDP IP communication It is also possible to connect multiple MELSOFT products and GOTs simultaneously Section 1 2 6 Manual of each MELSOFT product 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 Status check of the Ethernet module Whether the Ethernet module is working normally and whether it can communicate normally are checked Function Description Reference section Checks the Ethernet module s sending receiving function and line Self refrain test Section 4 8 1 connection status Hardware test Tests the RAM and ROM of the Ethernet module Section 4 8 2 When a data communication error occurs this function stores the error information error log including the message subheader and IP address of the external device for a maximum of 16 pairs in the buffer memory Communication error storage Chapter 11 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 5 Dedicated Instruction List MELSEC Q The following table lists the dedicated instructions that can be used by the Ethernet module Application For opening and closing a connections For reinitialization Instruction name OPEN Description Opens a connection Reference section Section 10 8 CLOSE UINI Closes a connection Reinitializes the Ethernet module Section 10 5 Section 10 9 For fixed buffer communication BUFRCV Reads data received in the fixed buffer Section 10 2 BUFRCVS
106. applicable connection for receiving only for which the pairing open method has been set the open close processing of the next connection for sending only will automatically be performed 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 5 7 2 Example of pairing open settings from GX Developer This section explains the settings using GX Developer in order to communicate in the pairing open method by giving an example The screen below shows an example of the settings under the following conditions Connection No 1 and 2 are used The Ethernet module port number is 0500n e The Unpassive open system is used m Network parameter Ethernet open setting Module No 1 Of communication open confirmation Port No IP address No ae TCP v Unpassive v Receive v Procedure exist v Pairs v No confiim 0500 EED v Unpassive v Send v Procedure exist v No pairs _v No confim v 0500 1 Protocol Both TCP IP and UDP IP are allowed Open system All the open systems Active Unpassive and Fullpassive can be set Fixed buffer In the open pairing the applicable connection No and the subsequent connection No are paired Set the applicable connection No to Receive and the next connection number to Send Fixed buffer communication Both Procedure exist and No procedure can be selected Pairing open Set the receiving connection to Pairs and the sending connection to
107. automatic open UDP port Correct the automatic open UDP port C0031 j k number is outside the allowable number range C004 The setting value of the sub net Correct the sub net mask and execute the i mask field is incorrect initial processing again e The setting value of the default router IP address for the router relay function is incorrect e Correct the default router IP address and Network address network execute the initial processing again C005x address after sub net mask of Set the network address to the same the default router IP address is network address as the local station s different from the network Ethernet module IP address address of the local station s Ethernet module IP address The setting value of the sub net address for the router relay function is incorrect e The setting value of the router IP address for the router relay function is incorrect e Correct the router IP address and execute Network address network the initial processing again address after sub net mask of Set the network address to the same router IP address is different network ID as the local station s Ethernet from the network address of the module IP address local station s Ethernet module IP address At open processing the setting value of the Ethernet module port e Correct the port number number is incorrect At open processing the setting value of an external device s port e Correct the port number
108. b0 turns on and data communication is enabled The Ethernet module starts the close processing upon receiving the close request FIN from the external device When the close processing is completed the open completion signal turns off and data communication is disabled After the Ethernet module s internal processing is completed the connection returns to the open acknowledge enabled status An open request SYN received after the normal completion of an initial processing and before the Ethernet module is placed in the open acknowledge enabled status generates an error and the Ethernet module sends a connection forced close RST For Passive open connections for which Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time is selected in Operational settings the connection open close processing of Ethernet module side is performed according to the open close request from the external device When the close processing is performed from the Ethernet module side using the dedicated CLOSE instruction the applicable connection will not return to the open acknowledge enabled status after the close processing It requires the same open processing as for Passive open connection for which Do not wait for OPEN Communications impossible at STOP time is selected 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 2 When Do not wait for OPEN is selected in the operational setting When Operational setting Initial timing setting
109. branch office or dealer with details of the errors 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 9 Maintenance and Inspection This section explains the maintenance and inspection as well as the mounting and dismounting of the Ethernet module 4 9 1 Maintenance and inspection The Ethernet module does not need to be inspected for anything particular other than checking whether or not the connections of terminators and cables are loose Maintain and inspect the system according to the same inspection items as described in the user s manual for the PLC CPU in order to use it in optimal operating conditions lt DANGER e Do not touch the terminals and connectors while the power is on Doing so may cause in electric shocks and malfunctions e Do not touch the connector inside the cover at the upper section of the module Doing so may cause damages and malfunctions of the module e Make sure to turn off all phases of the external power supply before cleaning or re tightening the screws Failure to do so may cause damages or malfunctions of the module If the screws are loose it may cause the module to short circuit malfunction or fall off Tightening the screws excessively may damage the screws and or the module and cause the module to short circuit malfunction or fall off CAUTION e Be careful not to let any foreign matter such as wire chips get inside the module They may cause fire as well as breakdowns and malf
110. buffer Refer to program example indicated in Section 7 5 2 when programming 8 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE NO PROCEDURE CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q 8 4 Data Format When communicating data between the Ethernet module and an external device the data format explained below is used The communication data consists of a header and application data as shown below 1 Header The header for TCP IP or UDP IP is used In case of the Ethernet module the Ethernet module adds and deletes the header Thus the user does not need to set it Details of the size of the header section 1 Incase of TCP IP Ethernet IP TCP 14 bytes 20 bytes 20 bytes 2 Incase of UDP IP Ethernet IP 14 bytes 20 bytes 2 Application Data The data code in the application data is expressed in binary code Communication is performed using binary code regardless of the set communication data see Section 4 7 Text command c Maximum of 2064 bytes The subheader and data length that are added for communications using the fixed buffers in the procedure exist control method are not present for communications in the no procedure control method All data is treated as valid text 8 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE NO PROCEDURE CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q 8 5 Simultaneous Broadcast Using UDP IP When UDP IP is used for no procedure fixed buffer communication data can be broadcast simultaneously to all Ethernet modu
111. buffer sending or receiving after the completion of open processing 8 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE NO PROCEDURE CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q 3 At data sending receiving the Ethernet module performs the following processing 1 Atdata sending When the PLC CPU executes the dedicated BUFSND instruction 1 in a sequence program the Ethernet module sends data in the applicable fixed buffer No n to the external device that is specified in the communication address setting area addresses 28H to 5FH and 5038H to 507FH corresponding to fixed buffer No n 2 2 Atdata receiving The Ethernet module processes the receive data if the data is received from an external device set in the communication setting area that corresponds to fixed buffer No n 2 Also when the Ethernet module stores the receive data in the corresponding fixed buffer in the receive processing it updates the destination IP address and destination port No in the connection information area addresses 78H to C7H and 5820H to 586F that corresponds to fixed buffer No n If data is received from an external device not set in the connection information area of the buffer memory the Ethernet module ignores the receive data to 1 For details on the dedicated instructions see Chapter 10 Dedicated Instructions 2 In case of TCP IP Unpassive open data is communicated with an external device stored in the connection information area of the buffer
112. bytes Specify 1460 bytes or Specify the data size Specify the size of the system data transmitted during the PING test ytes Specify yt Option less for the Ethernet module l specification Specify the time of the communication Specify the completion wait time for the PING test time check Specify the number Specify the number of times ise Specify the transmission count H of transmission e Execute till interrupting Result Display results of the PING test ror Display the total packet transmission count and the number of successes Success transmissions during the PING test 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q Address specification The PING test target station external device subject to the PING test is specified by the IP address or the host name 1 Specification using the IP address e Select the input format for the IP address select Decimal or hexadecimal e Specify the IP address of the external device according to the input format decimal or hexadecimal 2 Specification using the host name Specify the host name of the external device set in the DNS server or the HOSTS file for the personal computer on which GX Developer is mounted x The IP address can also be entered in the host name specification field Option specification Set the details for the PING test No setting required if the default is used 1 Display the host name Select this to display the host name instead of the IP
113. communication 7 Local station Port No connection numbers 1 to 8 addresses 28H to 5FH connection numbers 9 to 16 addresses System area is used a In this item the port number of each connection for the Ethernet module is set in hexadecimal b The setting values are designated in a range from 401H to 1387H and from 138BH to FFFEH Set port numbers that are not already used by other port Port numbers 1388H to 138AH cannot be designated because they are used by the operating system of the Ethernet module c Set the port numbers for the Ethernet module upon consulting a network administrator 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 8 Destination IP address connection numbers 1 to 8 addresses 28H to 5FH connection numbers 9 to 16 addresses System area is used a Select the input format of the IP address options decimal nexadecimal b Set the IP addresses two words for external devices in the chosen input format decimal hexadecimal c The IP addresses of external devices must be given values other than On Furthermore FFFFFFFF is the setting value for simultaneous broadcast communication d Setthe IP addresses of external devices upon consulting a network administrator IP Address Input format DEC IP address 10 97 a5 223 ome 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 9 Destination Port No connection numbers 1 to 8 addresses 28H to 5FH connection numbers 9 to 16 a
114. confirming existence of an external device 1 to 32767 interval after communication with it has terminated Destination existence confirmation interval timer Set the time interval between reconfirming existence 1 to 32767 Set the number of times to reconfirm existence when a response 1 to 32767 to the existence confirmation is not received Decimal hexadecimal IP address of DNS server 1 Set IP address of DNS server 1 Wa sh IP address of DNS sever2 Set Paddressof DNS server2 o oi i y IP address of DNSsever3 Set Paddressof DNS server3 oo y IP address of DNS server4 Set IPaddressof DNS server ooo doo o 1 For details see Chapter 2 of the User s Manual Application Destination existence confirmation resend timer 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 1 Timer setting TCP ULP timer address Bu a This item sets the time of packet existence during TCP data sending This timer is passed through the parameter when TCP opens or data is sent b Designate the setting value in a range from 2 to 32767 When the default value is used setting is not required c Timer setting setting value x 500 ms Timer setting TCP zero window timer address CH a The window indicates the reception buffer on the receiving side b When there is no more space in the receiving buffer window size 0 on the receiving side data communication has to wait until enough space is made When this occurs the sending side sends
115. data Set by Un Start input output signal of the Ethernet module Binary 16 bits 00 to FE The two most significant digits of the 3 digit input output signal y S1 Connection number 1 to 16 Binary 16 bits D1 Head number of the device that stores receive data Binary 16 bits The file registers of each of the local device and the program cannot be used as device to be used in the setting data Receive data Device Item Setting data Setting range Set by Stores the data length of the data read from the fixed buffer data area in word units There is a procedure for communication 1 to 1017 Receive data using binary code Number of words length There is a procedure for communication 1 to 508 using ASCII code Number of words Non procedure for communication using binary code Number of bytes 1 to 2046 Stores the data read from the fixed buffer data area Receive data ice sequentially in ascending order 1 The Set by column indicates the following User Data set by the user before executing a dedicated instruction System The PLC CPU stores the execution results of a dedicated instruction 10 5 10 5 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 10 6 MELSEC Q Functions 1 This instruction reads receive data for fixed buffer communication from the connection specified by S1 for the module designated by Un PLC CPU Ethernet module Fixed buffer data area D1 Receive dat
116. data can be communicated with an external device for which the procedure exist control method is selected in the fixed buffer communication procedure setting see Section 5 5 using a connection where the Ethernet open completion signal address 5000h corresponding bit is on 2 Communication using the random access buffer is performed asynchronously with the sequence program When it is necessary to synchronize use the fixed buffer communication function 9 COMMUNICATION USING THE RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER 9 2 Data Format 9 2 1 Header MELSEC Q When communicating data between the Ethernet module and an external device the data format explained below is used The communication data consists of a header and application data as shown below Application data XR MN ba ri Y Maximum of 2044 bytes The header for TCP IP or UDP IP is used In case of the Ethernet module the Ethernet module adds the header Details of the size of the header section 1 In case of TCP IP Ethernet IP 14 bytes 20 bytes TCP 20 bytes 2 In case of UDP IP Ethernet IP 14 bytes 20 bytes 9 COMMUNICATION USING THE RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER MELSEC Q 9 2 2 Application data As shown below the data code in the application data can be expressed in either binary or ASCII code Switching between the binary code and the ASCII code is performed with GX Developer as follows GX Developer Network parameters
117. device The Ethernet module automatically adds command response type the user does not need to set these See REMARK in Section 11 3 3 Check and correct the data length Check and correct the designated head address Check and correct the head address and data word count Correct the number of points read written Check and correct the send data of the external device Write data by setting Enable Write at RUN time to enable with check mark However writing a parameter sequence program or microcomputer program is not allowed while the CPU is in the RUN status Write such data by placing the PLC CPU in the STOP status MC Communication using the MC protocol 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q nd code ipti Eo Device designation from an external side is incorrect e Correct the device designated o f o The number of points for a command designated by an external device exceeds the maximum number of processing points number of processing that can be executed per communication Correct the designated points or the for each processing head address device number and Addresses from the head address head device number and head step number step number to the designated points exceed the maximum addresses device number and step number Byte length of a command does not conform to the specifications When writing data the set number of data points written is different from the value of the desi
118. eae Systemi switching settings when mn OS Select the object connection communication error occurs S O p eee S S S O eee MEC MEL O erram O eem App 65 App 65 INDEX Ind 1 to 10 TOBASE2 inanan ani 2 7 4 10 TOBASES 2s AitiienesAdieenedateeat 2 5 4 9 TOBAS EM irinna aaien 2 4 4 8 1O00BASE TX vets atti yeni 2 3 4 8 A A compatible 1E frame eects 6 2 end codes assssssesrssresreiererrerneenernes 11 24 abnormal CodeS serrie 11 24 Abnormal Code 2 cccccceseeeeteeeeteeeeeeeees 11 24 Accessible range Fixed buffer communication procedure exist 7 1 Fixed buffer communication no procedure assssessessesiesresrsrresrsrrensenernns 8 1 Communication using the random ACCESS Duler snan 9 1 Active Open sses 5 37 5 42 5 45 AJ TIET Tea oA ite hee sees Appendix 4 AJ7A E71 SJ aiia Appendix 4 Applicable systems 2 1 Application data Fixed buffer communication procedure EXIST eee eee eeteereeeteeeeeees 7 13 Fixed buffer communication MO PFOCECUIE sarni 8 10 Communication using the random access DUOT ieran i a 9 6 PR Pets a a ak yds 1 15 5 42 AUI cable transceiver cable eee 2 5 Automatic open UDP port eerie 5 66 B Buffer memory list aesseseeresrsrrereresenns 3 13 Buffer Memo see raae 3 12 BUFRCYV instruction 4 7 5 8 6 10 2 BUFRCVS instruction 7 7 8 8 10 5 BUFSND instruction 4 7 3 8 4 10 8 C
119. error Sent TCP packet total count Received UDP packet total count Total number of Sum check error TCP annulments TCP packet Status of each number of sends protocol Total Total number of receives Total number of Sum check error annulments Received UDP packet count UDP discarded due to sum check error UDP packet Sent UDP packet total count Total number of sends Open completed signal for connections No 1 to No 16 Check on the System monitor screen status of each connection Connection No 9 to 16 same as connection No 1 address 120 to 126 781 to 7Ex Number of mail remaining on the server Receive Connection No 9 to 16 Number of mail remained on the server Dedicated instruction normal completion count Dedicated instruction abnormal completion count Normal receiving count Attached file receiving count Server inquiry count Server communication error count Error log write count Error code Command code Number of normal end of dedicated instructions Number of error end of dedicated instructions Number of normal receives Number of attached file receives Number of sever inquires Number of server transfer errors Number of Error log writes Error code Command code Received e mail information Error log block 1 From From Latest error log Receive date Subject Subject Error log block 2 to 16 same as error log block 1 Dedicated instruction normal comple
120. for 1OBASE5 Transceiver AUI cable External device DC Power supply 1 Use a10BASE5 coaxial cable an N type terminator a transceiver and an AUI cable transceiver cable that meet the Ethernet standards 2 Use a transceiver with SQETEST Signal Quality Error TEST ora heart beat function 3 Use a DC power supply power supply for transceiver that meets the specifications of the transceiver and the AUI cable Refer to REMARK The transceiver power characteristics are as follows e Input terminal voltage 12 v8 to 15 vie e AUI cable direct resistance 40 Q km or less maximum length 50 m 164 ft e Maximum current consumption 500 mA or less Thus the applicable transceiver supply power will be from 13 28 V to 15 75 V Calculation of the transceiver supply power s voltage drop V Voltage drop V AUI cable direct current resistance Q m X AUI cable length m X 2 both directions X transceiver consumption current A Example 2 0 V 0 04 Q m X 50 m x 2 x 0 5 A In this case the recommended transceiver supply power is more than 13 28 V 13 28 V 12 V 11 28 V 2 0 V 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS MELSEC Q 1 Consult a network specialist for required devices 2 The following can be used as a countermeasure for errors due to high frequency noise according to the installation environment e Mount a ferrite cor
121. in BCD code The order of date and time to be stored is the same as for the date and time of e mail reception shown in a 13 13 Error log block Subject address starting from 5B4Fr e This block stores 15 words from the beginning of the Subject of the e mail 11 21 11 21 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 1 End codes Complete codes returned to an external device during data communication This section explains the end codes complete codes that are added to responses when communicating using the fixed buffer the random access buffer or the MC protocol For more details on the error codes that are added to responses during communication using A compatible 1E frames through the MC protocol see Section 11 3 2 For more details on the end codes error codes that are stored in the buffer memory of the Ethernet module see Section 11 3 3 End code Description Processin Communication turiction Iptl i Designation of device range of devices to be read written from to is Check and correct the designated E E incorrect device and number of points Codes for command response type of subheader are not within the Fixed 11 22 Fixed buffer communication specifications la Command Communication processing response type Communication using fixed buffer 1 eo OE Communication using random access buffer 614 624 Communication using the MC protocol 00n to 3CH In communication using the fixed
122. is used for a connection opened via the TCP IP or UDP IP protocol The Ethernet module performs an existence check by sending a PING command using the ICMP echo request response function to a remote device with which communication has not been performed for a certain period of time and waiting to see whether or not a response is received gt x2 Note that the Ethernet module automatically returns an echo response packet when it receives a PING echo request command It sends a response to the received PING command even if the connection used in the data communication with the remote device is closed The following actions are taken if a response message cannot be received an error is detected from the remote device The conesponding connection will be forcibly closed the line is disconnected x3 Itis possible to reopen it with a user program The Ethernet module turns off the open completion signal the corresponding bit in address 5000n and stores the error code C0351 in places such as the open error code storage area Example Assuming the values are set under the condition that the number of retries is three the Ethernet module performs target existence check at the timing shown in the figure below An example of existence check by PING Open completion signal address 5000H Last communication 4 PING PING command command Ethernet module Target Y existence Target Ta
123. made from the external device to the remote master station and to the MELSECNET H remote I O station lt Access allowed Ae Access prohibited Remote master station QCPU ea 1 External device MELSECNET H Remote 1 O net QJ72 station eh a 2 Other station access via the following MELSECNET H remote I O stations cannot be made e Other station access from the MELSECNET H remote master station via the Ethernet module mounted on the MELSECNET H remote I O station Station 1 in the above figure e Other station access via between the Ethernet modules Station 2 in the above figure Remote I O station x2 This function is available for the MELSECNET H remote I O station of function version D and later GX Developer Version 8 18U or later is required to use the function 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS MELSEC Q 3 Setting parameters for the Ethernet module through GX Developer The following parameters should be set through GX Developer in order to use the Ethernet module mounted on MELSECNET H remote I O station The setting can be made in the same way as when setting the parameters for the Ethernet module mounted on a QCPU station See Section 4 5 and later See the operating manual for GX Developer for how to display each setting screen Parameter setting items for the Ethernet module mounted on MELSECNET H remote I O station Parameter setting item Setting S
124. module s mail address C1511 e mail address setting parameter is C1521 different from the account name in the mailbox on the server side C1531 C1541 C160 Received a response from the DNS server after timeout Id not receive a response from C1641 Could not receiv p The Ethernet module s password e mail setting parameter is different from the password on the server side An error occurred when getting the received mail list Failed to obtain the list of mail arrived at the POP3 server An error occurred when receiving a mail Cannot read e mail from the POP3 server the DNS server 11 37 Check whether or not the POP3 server is faulty Check whether or not there is too much load on the network e Check the account name in the mailbox on the server side and correct the mailbox account set for the Ethernet module Check the password on the server side and correct the password set for the Ethernet module Reset the server inquiry time to the default value and reset the local station s PLC CPU Check whether or not the mail is compressed or encrypted Check that the sending side has the same e mail specifications as the Ethernet module encode decode file format etc e Check whether or not there is too much load on the network e Check the status of the DNS server 11 37 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Storage destination s glz Error code abnormal Description of e
125. module starts the close processing upon receiving the close request FIN from the external device When the close processing is completed the open completion signal turns off and data communication is disabled Start the close processing using the dedicated CLOSE instruction Open request signal OFF At normal completion of internal processing Open completion signal OFF e CLOSE instruction complete device ON e CLOSE instruction complete device 1 OFF e CLOSE instruction complete status area 2 0000H At abnormal completion of internal processing Open completion signal OFF e CLOSE instruction complete device ON e CLOSE instruction complete device 1 ON e CLOSE instruction complete status area 2 Value other than 00001 This example uses connection number 1 for explanation Use the corresponding signals and bits for other connection numbers 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 1 An open request SYN received after the normal completion of an initial processing and before the Ethernet module is placed in the open acknowledge enabled status generates an error and the Ethernet module sends a connection forced close RST x2 The end code at completion is stored in the dedicated instruction complete status area For details on the dedicated instructions see Chapter 10 Dedicated Instructions 1 If the settings of the connection need modifying the modifications should be done before exe
126. module to breakdown or malfunction e Tighten the terminal screws using the specified torque 4 If the terminal screws are loose it may cause the module to short circuit malfunction or fall off Tightening the terminal screws excessively may damage the screws and or the module and cause the module to short circuit malfunction or fall off e Do not directly touch the conducting parts and electronic parts of the module This may cause the module to malfunction or fail e When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste e A protective sheet is pasted on the upper part of the module in order to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips to get inside the module while wiring Do not remove this protective sheet during wiring work However be sure to remove the protective sheet before operating the module to allow heat radiation during operation 4 1 2 Installation environment This section explains the installation environment for the PLC When installing the PLC the following environments must be avoided e Locations where the ambient temperature exceeds the range of 0 to 55 C e Locations where the ambient humidity exceeds the range of 5 to 95 RH e Locations where condensation occurs due to a sudden temperature change e Locations where there are corrosive or inflammable gases e Locations exposed to considerable amounts of conductive powdery substances such as dust and iron filing oil mist salt or organic solven
127. not the connection destination Example of connection to control system and access to standby system CPU QnA compatible 3E frame 1 The external device connects to the Request destination module I O No 03D1H Ethernet module mounted on the main Network No 00H 7 PLC No FFH base unit of the control system CPU and makes access to the standby system CPU O Accessible if communication via the tracking cable line is faulty This enables access if the communication line between the external device and standby system is faulty 5 102 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q b Communication procedure example for access to control system CPU in redundant system The following shows a communication procedure example for access to the control system CPU in the redundant system Place the Ethernet module in an open waiting status and perform open close processing from the external device Communication procedure example Perform open processing with System A Perform open processing with System B ON System A is control system Is SM1515 ON Operation system type OFF System A is standby system TRK CABLE ERR occurred Refer to QNPRHCPU User s Manual Re
128. number 64 Same as conversion information No 1 Chapter 3 of Application Net mask pattern for MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 routing System area QJ71E71 QJ71E71 FTP login name Password Chapter 3 of Command input monitoring timer PLC CPU monitoring timer System area 3 20 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Continued from the previous page Address ai GX Developer Ao Initial value i Reference Decimal Application Name 7 setting r Hexadecimal eT okt section Hexadecimal applicability 1664 Data length 6801 Fixed buffer 9 1665 to 2687 No 1 Fi 681 to A7Fu ixed buffer data 2688 to 3711 Fixed buffer A80 to E7Fx Same as fixed buffer No 1 3712 to 4735 Fixed buffer E80 to 127F l Same as fixed buffer No 1 4736 to 5759 Fixed buffer data Fixed buffer 1280 to 167F area Same as fixed buffer No 1 5760 to 6783 Fixed buffer 1680 to 1A7Fu Same as fixed buffer No 1 6784 to 7807 Fixed buffer 1A80 to 1E7Fs Same as fixed buffer No 1 7808 to 8831 Fixed buffer 1E80 to 227Fx l Same as fixed buffer No 1 8832 to 9855 Fi ff 2280 gt 267Fu ea Same as fixed buffer No 1 H Shared area for random access buffers and e mail buffers 1 When communicating with the random access buffer refer to 9856 to 16383 Shared area for z Chapter 9 x See the left 2680 to 3FFF random access 2 p j 2 When using the E mail function refer to Chapter 2 in the User s buffers and e mail cis M
129. of mails normally completed address 5B3Bx e This address stores a cumulative count of how many times the Ethernet module transferred send mails to the Send mail server 0 No mail is sent 1 or more The number of normal completions of mail sending 4 Attached file sending count address 5B3Cu e This address stores a cumulative count of how many times the Ethernet module sent mails with files attached 0 No sending of mail with files attached 1 or more The number of normal completions of mail sending with files attached 5 Sending to the server count address 5B3Dux e This address stores a cumulative count of sending to the send mail server 0 No mail is sent to the server 1 or more Cumulative count of sending to the server 6 Number of mails abnormally completed address 5B3Ex e This address stores a cumulative count of communication error occurrences that are returned when requesting sending to the transmitting mail server 0 No communication error between servers or no transmission has been made 1 or more Cumulative count of communication error occurrences 7 Error log write count address 5B3Fx e This address stores a cumulative count of registrations made to the sending error log block area 0 No error or no inquiry has been made to the server 1 or more Cumulative count of registrations made to the error log block area 11 20 11 20 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 8 Sending error log wri
130. open processing on the TCP connection only addressing specific devices The local station is placed in the wait status to wait for an Active open request to be sent Fullpassive A naa The local station waits for an Active open request from the opposite station set in 8 Destination IP address Used to connect MELSOFT products via TCP IP communication MELSOFT connection Perform passive open processing on the TCP connection addressing all the MELSOFT 1 2 3 products connected to a network The local station is placed in the wait status for an Active open request to be sent Used to connect the OPS via TCP IP communication OPS connection 1 gt 4 Perform passive open processing on the TCP connection addressing only specific OPSs The local station waits for an Active open request from the OPS set in 8 Destination IP address x1 Regardless of the initial timing setting in the operation setting refer to Section 4 7 this connection will always wait for the open status x2 The set connection is dedicated to data communication with the MELSOFT products x3 When simultaneously connecting to multiple MELSOFT products set the connections as many as the number of MELSOFT products Setting is unnecessary when only one product is connected The connection dedicated to the system is used x4 When using the MELSOFT product such as GX Developer on the OPS to make TCP IP communication with the Ethernet module use the dedicat
131. or CLOSE dedicated instruction simultaneously for the same connection It will result in malfunctions 10 21 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Errors 1 When a dedicated instruction ends with an error the abnormal completion signal D1 1 turns on and the error code is stored in the complete status area S2 1 Refer to the following manuals regarding the error code check the errors and take corrective actions lt Error codes gt 4FFFu or less QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection COO0H or higher Section 11 3 3 of this manual Program example A program that Active open the connection 1 for TCP IP communication When the input output signals of the Ethernet module are X Y00 to X Y1F X19 Initial normal completion signal MO Connection 1 open completion signal M20 Connection 1 open request signal Open processing of connection No 1 TCP IP Active open SM400 O y MOV G20480 K4MO Read the open completion signal information u0 i A f MOV 620482 K4M20 Read the open request signal information M5000 Change the open command to pulse Designate the control data for the OPEN instruction It is necessary to designate either one of the processing enclosed by a broken line J_ rs m1000 M1000 x19 MO m20 When using the open setting parameters of GX Developer Designate the execution type complete type MOVP HO D100 PE EEE SOG e a When not using the open s
132. or may damage or degrade the module e While pressing the installation lever located at the bottom of module insert the module fixing tab into the fixing hole in the base unit until it stops Then securely mount the module with the fixing hole as a supporting point If the module is not installed properly it may cause the module to malfunction fail or fall off Secure the module with screws especially when it is used in an environment where constant vibrations may occur e Be sure to tighten the screws using the specified torque If the screws are loose it may cause the module to short circuit malfunction or fall off If the screws are tightened excessively it may damage the screws and cause the module to short circuit malfunction or fall off e Before mounting or dismounting the module make sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply Failure to do so may damage the module e Do not directly touch the conducting parts and electronic parts of the module This may cause the module to malfunction or fail Wiring Instructions A CAUTION e Use crimp contact pressure displacement or soldering to wire the connectors for external connections properly using the manufacturer specified tools If the connection is incomplete it may cause the module to short circuit catch fire or malfunction e Do no connect the AUI cable when the power to the station in which the module is loaded is on e Make sure to place the commu
133. port FTP port b3 Section 5 9 information area a System port use prohibited designation 0 Use allowed 20488 a 1 Use prohibited 500814 Automatic open UDP port b0 designation area GX Developer UDP port b1 GX Developer TCP port b2 20489 to 20591 eee 5009 to 506Fx y Remote password mismatch notification 20592 accumulated count designation 5070s For user open port 0 No designation 1 or higher Notification accumulated count Remote password mismatch notification accumulated count designation For automatic open UDP port GX Developer aon communication port TCP UDP and FTP 2H communication port 0 No designation Section 1 or higher Notification accumulated count x 5 9 6 Accumulated count of unlock process 5072 normal completion Accumulated count of unlock process 5073H abnormal completion Accumulated count of lock process 5074H normal completion Accumulated count of lock process 50751 Ba Remote abnormal completion Monitoring area password Accumulated count of lock process 50761 function based on close 20599 to 20603 monitoring area ence 50771 to 507B x No 2 20604 to 20608 Connection 507Cu to 5080 No 3 Same as connection No 1 20609 to 20613 Connection 50814 to 50854 No 4 Same as connection No 1 20614 to 20618 Connection 5086x to 508A x No 5 Same as connection No 1 20619 to 20623 Connection F 508Bu to 508F H No 6 Same as connection No 1 20624
134. precautions for using the functions on the Q12PRH Q25PRHCPU 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS MELSEC Q 2 6 For Use at MELSECNET H Remote I O Station This section describes the use of the Ethernet module at a MELSECNET H remote I O station When using the Ethernet module with the QCPU it is not necessary to read this section 1 System configuration Example 0 Remote master station Remote I O station MELSECNET H Remote I O network External device Remote I O station 2 Available functions The following functions are available when the Ethernet module is mounted on the MELSECNET H remote I O station x Initial processing Sequence program is SS eS O GX Developer parameter setting See 3 4 Open close Sequence program processing GX Developer parameter setting O Communication using the random access buffer Pairing open communication Communication while the automatic open UDP port Simultaneous broadcast Router relay communication Router relay function ee OSO O External device existence confirmation OoOo OoOo O i Support for the QCPU remote password function Setting the Ethernet parameters through GX Developer Access to QCPU with GX Developer TCP IP or UDP IP O Available X Unarailable x1 The following explains access made to the MELSECNET H remote I O station using the MC protocol and other station access via the MELSECNET
135. processing close processing for the sequence program that executes the open processing close processing Make sure to change the Fixed buffer communication setting from Procedure exist to No procedure 8 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE NO PROCEDURE CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q b Receive program QCPU 2nd station side 1 After setting each parameter with GX Developer and write to PLC CPU reset the PLC CPU and confirm that the initial processing is completed When the initial processing is normally completed connection No 1 waits for an Active open request from the external device 2 Communicate data from the external device using fixed buffer communication no procedure sending 3 Data received in the corresponding fixed buffer data area in the Ethernet module is read to the PLC CPU Send program Open processing program See Section 5 6 1 X19 Initial normal completion signal Mo Connection 1 open completion signal Fixed buffer No 1 sending program M6000 X19 MO KJ KS L M3000 Change the sending command to pulse K6 D300 Designate the BUFSND instruction data Designate the send data length K1234 D301 Designate the send data K5678 D302 K8901 D303 D300 M300 Execute the data sending to the external device M300 M301 p s Perform the sending normal completion processing Perform the sending abnormal completion processing See Section 5 6 1 8 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE NO PROCEDU
136. processing from the external device Change the close processing from the external device to pulse Change the close request from the Local station side to pulse Perform close processing Set the close processing executing flag Set the normal completion flag Set the abnormal completion flag Reset the close processing execution flag 10 13 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 10 6 ERRCLR Instruction 10 14 This instruction turns off the LEDs of the Ethernet module and clears data information stored in the buffer memory Applicable device Setting Internal device MEESEONET E Index data System user File MELSECNET 10 Special module register Constant ihe register Direct JOO uoco Bit woa Bit woa AE ae ae a ey Fs Ee Oe Se i ee es ee Instruction code Executing condition Command eon Setting data Set by Un Start input output signal of the Ethernet module 00 to FE The two most significant digits of the 3 digit input output signal Head number of the local station bit device that turns on for one scan upon completion of instruction System D1 1 also turns on if the instruction execution ends abnormally The file registers for each of the local device and the program cannot be used as devices to be used in the setting data User Binary 16 bits Control data Set by S1 0_ Systemarea ooo d o oS i Stores the status at completion Complete status 00001
137. program that reads receive data from the fixed buffer for connection number 1 When the input output signals of the Ethernet module are X Y00 to X Y1F sM400 U0 MOV 620480 UO MOV G20482 vo MOV 620485 M8000 X19 MO M40 M5000 BR rr 2 rrev uo K1 D5000 D500 M500 M501 Ue Pe eet Pee eg A S E a et tl 10 4 K4M0 K4M20 K4M40 M5000 M500 X19 Initial normal completion signal MO Connection 1 open completion signal M40 Connection 1 data receiving signal Read the open completion signal information Read the open request signal information Read the fixed buffer receiving status signal information Fixed buffer No 1 receiving program Main program Change the receive data read command to pulse Execute receive data reading Perform the receiving normal completion processing Perform the receiving abnormal completion processing 10 4 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 10 3 BUFRCVS Instruction This instruction reads data received from an external device through fixed buffer communication This instruction is used in the interrupt program Applicable device Setting Internal device apa aud Index data System user File MELSECNET 10 Special module register Constant Oiber register Direct JO O upeo Bit Wor _ Bit Word TE AS ol l o J ol L o1 Q s ia Instruction code Executing condition Command BUFRCVS ee m Z BUFRCVS Un S1 D1 H Setting
138. programs for initial processing and end processing 3 The sequence programs designed for the local station s QE71 can be utilized for communication with the Ethernet module except for the programs listed below e Sequence programs for accessing data link system Refer to the QCPU User s Manual Sequence programs relating to EEPROM e Paring open settings for connection No 8 See Section 5 7 1 Paring Open e Parameter setting program using the EPRSET instruction However since the Ethernet module and the QE71 have different response speeds the programs may not be used as is Make sure to test the operation first Keep the following points in mind when utilizing the programs Do not use the sequence program for initial processing together with initial processing by parameter setting from GX Developer Do not execute the following operations to the same connection simultaneously open close processing using input output signals and open close processing using the OPEN CLOSE dedicated instructions as well as the fixed buffer sending receiving and sending receiving processing using the BUFSND BUFRCV BUFRCVS instruction Furthermore when setting parameters for the Ethernet module and communicating with the QCPU make sure to use GX Developer SW4D5C GPPW E or later App 7 App 7 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 1 The operating mode and communication conditions can be set via the following parameter setting screen of GX Devel
139. r Mode Online p System s ation error occurs Station number and made setting System B Setting Protocol Open system Fixed butter anmunication Station number Mode Online z IP address settings Input format DEC bad System A Ie 192 a 1 254 maddy daman LIL 5 ilelelelela cfelalelele cfalelafele wlelatelelele System B 132 0 1 253 jord if the system switch nabled in Check End Cancel Setting items Item name Description System B settings Set the station number and IP address of the Ethernet module mounted on the system B Issue system switch in Cable Set whether a system switching request will be issued or not to the control system CPU at disconnection timeout disconnection detection Issue system switch in Set whether a system switching request will be issued or not to the control system CPU at communication error a communication error 1 System B settings Set the station number mode and IP address of the Ethernet module mounted on the system B The setting method is the same as that of the Ethernet module mounted on system A Refer to Section 4 6 and Section 4 7 POINT 1 2 Set different station numbers and IP addresses to system A and system B When using the redundant system in the backup mode set the operation mode of system A as that of
140. re initialization For re initialization refer to Section 5 2 3 13 TCP Maximum Segment Size Option transmission is applicable when the software version of the QE71N or AJ71E71N is E or later Note that the default is set to disable TCP Maximum Segment Size Option transmission Enabled when retransmitting TCP data The Ethernet module s response speed to an external device is faster than that of the Ethernet modules for the A QnA series Keeping compatibility with the Ethernet modules for the A QnA series strictly is not possible when using this Ethernet module If this becomes a problem when considering the performance of an external device try to make the timing similar to that of the conventional system using the QCPU constant scan setting or other applicable settings App 5 App 5 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 2 2 Using the programs designed for QnA A series modules The data communication that was previously performed between the PLC CPU and an external device on the Ethernet using a QnA A series Ethernet interface module such as the AJ71E71 can also be performed using an Ethernet module The following explains how to use the programs designed for conventional modules to perform data communication using the Ethernet module 1 Using the programs designed for the AJ71E71 S3 and AJ71E71N a Using the programs designed of the external device side The following parts of the communication function programs of
141. registration of error log 1 or more Error log block number where the latest error logging is registered x If the pointer value is 16 it means that the latest error logging is registered in the error log block 16 area e When 17 or more receiving errors occur the registration of error logging starts from error log block 1 area again POINT The error log block area consists of 16 error log blocks that have the same data order b Log counter HTTP response codes 100 to 199 address 5102h Log counter HTTP response codes 200 to 299 address 5103H Log counter HTTP response codes 300 to 399 address 5104H Log counter HTTP response codes 400 to 499 address 5105H Log counter HTTP response codes 500 to 599 address 5106H The log counters store how many times the Ethernet module has sent the HTTP response codes to the Web browser c Error log block HTTP response code address starting from 5108n This error log block stores the HTTP response code when an error occurs See Section 11 3 d Error log block Communication counterpart IP address address 5109H 510AH and up This error log block stores the IP address of the server when an error occurs e Error log block Error occurrence time address starting from 510Bn This block stores the time when the error occurs in BCD code 11 17 b15 to b8 b7 to bO Month 01 H tO 12h Lower 2 digitals of year 00H to 99H b15 to b8 b7
142. replaced due to an error reboot the following external devices and restart data communication All external devices that communicated with the station whose Ethernet module was replaced All external devices that communicated with other station s PLC CPU via a station whose Ethernet module was replaced When connecting a device to the Ethernet module see the following sections for the required devices and connection method Section 2 2 Devices Required for Network Configuration Section 4 4 Connection Method Check If the Ethernet module could not receive messages sent from external devices frequently check the values stored in the following buffer memory a Simultaneous transmission error detection count storage area address 18EH to 18FH and Error End code storage area for each error log block address E5t When the error detection count number is high or when the error code COC7H has been stored high load may be applied to the Ethernet connection line to transfer data among connected devices To reduce the load to the Ethernet line it is necessary to take corrective measures such as dividing the network or reducing the data transmission frequency Consult your network administrator and take appropriate measures b TCP packet reception count storage area address 1B8H 1B9x When data cannot be received even though TCP packet reception count has been renewed set 8000H Disable TCP Maximum Segment Size Option
143. s port No when an error occurred 2 0 is stored for errors below the TCP and UDP levels h Error log block Destination IP address address EAH and starting from EBn 1 This block stores the IP address of an external device when an error occurred 2 0 is stored in the following cases e For errors below the IP level e When an error response was performed by relaying through the PLC CPU i Error log block Destination Port No address starting from ECH 1 This block stores the external device s port No when an error occurred 2 O is stored for errors below the TCP and UDP levels j Status for each protocol addresses 178H to 1FFH 1 This address stores the count of the occurrence for the applicable contents of each protocol s condition The value counted by the Ethernet module 2 When the count value exceeds two words the count stops at FFFFFFFFH 4294967295 Values stored in the buffer memory are cleared when the station in which the Ethernet module is installed is powered on or reset They are not cleared during the initial processing Normally it is not necessary to read this area so read it as needed during maintenance 11 16 11 16 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 6 HTTP status storage area address 5101H to 5177h a Error log pointer address 5101 e This address stores the error log block number where the latest error logging is registered No error No
144. see the Section 4 7 Operational Settings on R Communication data code Data communication function Reference chapter Binary code ASCII code Automatic open UDP port SS o H Communication using MC protocol Chapter 6 Useropenpon d o d o O Procedure exist ae o O Chapter 7 Communication using fixed buffer Communicaron usg meatuter fesse pme J J Chapter 8 Communication using random access buffer oOo o O e oe Chapter 9 O Selectable x Cannot be communicated 1 Communication is performed in binary code regardless of the setting in Operational Settings Communication data code see Section 4 7 When the following data communication functions are used communication is performed using the data code handled by each function regardless of the setting of the communication data code e Sending receiving e mail e MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communication e Communication using data link instructions e File transfer FTP server function e Communication using the Web function 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Ethernet module gt PLC CPU Data is sent and received in binary code Ethernet module Binary code Communi Binary code cation External data device storage area ASCII BIN ASCII conversion pele PLC CPU 2 When communicating using ASCII code 1 byte binary code data is automatically converted into 2 byte ASCII code data and then transmitted Example Binary code data ASCII code data
145. selected the data can be communicated by the following methods after the open processing is completed e Fixed buffer communication with the procedure exist control method sending or receiving e Communication using the random access buffers e Communication using the MC protocol 3 At data sending receiving the Ethernet module performs the following processing a At data sending When the PLC CPU executes the dedicated BUFSND instruction 1 in a sequence program the Ethernet module sends data of the applicable fixed buffer No n to the external device that is specified in the communication address setting area addresses 28H to 5FH and 5038H to 507Fx corresponding to fixed buffer No n 72 b At data receiving The Ethernet module processes the received data if the data is received from an external device set in the communication setting area that corresponds to fixed buffer No n 2 If data is received from an external device not set in the connection information area of the buffer memory the Ethernet module does not request to read the receive data to the PLC CPU side 1 For details on the dedicated instructions see Chapter 10 Dedicated Instructions 2 In case of TCP IP Unpassive open data is communicated with an external device stored in the connection information area corresponding to fixed buffer No n When the Ethernet module stores the receive data in the corresponding fixed buffer in the receiv
146. set in the buffer memory the Ethernet module sends this message when attempting to confirm the existence of the target 1 Others JO ignored by the Ethernet module Not supported x 1 The Ethernet module can simultaneously receive two ICMP ECHO requests type 8 Ping message which are used for existence confirmation etc and handles them accordingly When three or more ICMP ECHO requests are received at the same time the third and succeeding requests will be ignored If a response is not returned to the external device when an ICMP ECHO request is sent to the Ethernet module send an ICMP ECHO request to the Ethernet module again The Ethernet module is able to receive a maximum of 1460 byte ICMP message at one time Do not send an ICMP message request exceeding 1460 bytes to the Ethernet module Destination Unreachable Failed to deliver IP packet to the destination Echo Request Requests loopback of IP packet App 51 App 51 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 12 Setting Value Recording Sheets App 52 This section provides setting value recording sheets for parameters set with GX Developer Make copies as needed Setting value recording sheet No GX Developer setting screen Network parameters Setting the number of MNET 10H Ethernet cards Recording sheet 1 9 Ethernet operations Recording shee Network parameters Ethernet initial settings Recording shee 2 3 Network parameters Ethernet open sett
147. signal storage area address 50051 of the buffer memory switches from off to on At abnormal data receiving the fixed buffer receive completion signal address 5005H b0 does not turn on In addition data is not stored in the fixed buffer No 1 area 7 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE PROCEDURE EXIST CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q 7 3 2 Receive processing with an interrupt program dedicated instruction BUFRCVS This section explains about the receive processing when an interrupt program is used When an interrupt program is set to handle the receive processing the interrupt program starts up when data is received from an external device and reading the receive data destined for the PLC CPU is enabled In order to start up the interrupt program set the parameters using GX Developer 1 Setting screen Set the following parameters using GX Developer to start the interrupt program e Network parameters Interrupt settings Set the control number SI on the Ethernet module side when an interrupt request is issued from the Ethernet module to the PLC CPU e PLC parameters Interrupt pointer settings Associate the control number SI set in Network parameters Interrupt settings with the interrupt pointer Ixx used in the interrupt program Ethernet module PLC CPU Connection No 1 lt Program gt Connection No 2 Control Ixx BUFROVS Setting number Setting Interrupt BUFRCVS poi
148. specify QUSAMP C created in Step 1 and open it 4 Execute the compile of the created program on the Compile sceen of the Build menu Choose Build Compile Following the displayed messages create a default project workspace 5 Link WSOCK32 LIB from the Project setting screen Choose Project Setting to display the Project setting dialog box Select the Link tab and add WSOCK322 LIB to the Object library module 6 Create an execution file QJSAMP EXE on the Build screen of the Build menu Choose Build Build 7 Exit from Visual C 8 Execute QUSAMP EXE ee App 32 App 32 APPENDIX MELSEC Q X KK KKK K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K ok K ok ok ok ok ok XX xX gt Sample program ak XX xX Xxx This program is a sample program for testing the Xxx connection of the Ethernet module and external xX device xX This program accesses the data registers D of KX 2k the redundant CPU control system mounted xX Xxx with the Ethernet module KK XX xX 2 Copyright C 2004 Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Xxx All Rights Reserved x xx KK L X KK KKK KK K OK K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K ok K ok ok ok ok K include lt stdio h gt include lt winsock h gt define FLAG_OFF 0 End flag OFF define FLAG_ON 1 End flag ON define SOCK_OK 0 Normal termination define SOCK_NG 1 Unsuccessful termination define BUF_SIZE 4096 Receive buffer size
149. station the External device subject to the PING test e Select the input format of the IP address select decimal or hexadecimal e Specify the IP address of the PING test target station according to the input format decimal or hexadecimal The information displayed is the same as that displayed when performing a PING test via the Ethernet board See Section 5 4 1 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 5 4 3 Loop back test using GX Developer This section explains how to check the completion status of the initial processing for the Ethernet module using the loop back test function of GX Developer Ethernet diagnostics 1 Loop back test a The loop back test is performed in the network for GX Developer connection destination The test involves transmission of loop back test messages in order with respect to the network specified by the loop back test request destination and all Ethernet modules within the station number range function version B and later to check whether the initial processing for each module has been completed x A loop back test can be performed on a network connected via the Ethernet board x Since the Ethernet module of function version A and QnA A series Ethernet module do not have a function to respond to this request the test results cannot be checked GX Developer Station to which GX Developer is connected L Station No 1 Station No 3 Station No 5 Station No 7 Station No 9 Ethernet
150. station and access station where Ethernet modules are installed when accessing other station s PLC it may not be possible to access other stations See items 1 and 3 in Section 5 9 1 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 5 10 Hub Connection Status Monitor Function The current connection status of the Ethernet module and hub the transmission speed and the number of times the Ethernet module detected disconnection can be checked at the following buffer memory addresses QU71E71 100 only 10BASE T 100BASE TX Full duplex half duplex Ethernet module Fub External device 1 Hub connection status area Address 201 C9H Stores the current connection status of the QJ71E71 100 and hub and the transmission speed b15 b14 b13 to b11 b10 b9 b8 to bO Address 201 C91 1 Communication mode 0 Half duplex 1 Full duplex 2 Hub connection status 0 Hub not connected disconnected 1 Hub connected 3 Data transmission speed 0 Operating at 10BASE T 1 Operating at 100BASE TX Bits other than above are reserved for system use 2 Disconnection detection count storage area Address 20995 5203h a Stores the number of disconnection detection times after initial processing is completed X19 turns ON Disconnection is detected in any of the following cases e Disconnection between Ethernet module and hub e Cable removal from hub side connector e Hub power off e Cable removal from Ethern
151. switching the RECV instruction or interrupt program is executed using the held RECV instruction execution request area of the buffer memory and the interrupt factor of the interrupt program 5 110 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 9 When using file transfer FTP server function a When writing parameter file or program file 1 Be sure to write the same file to system A and system B An error will occur if different files are written or a file is written to only one system 2 Write a parameter file or program file when the operating status of the CPU is STOP 3 Perform file write in the following procedure Log in to the Ethernet module mounted on the main base unit of the system A CPU Log in to the Ethernet module mounted on the main base unit of the system B CPU Set the system A CPU to STOP by remote operation A continue error occurs in the Set the system B CPU to STOP by remote operation standby system CPU Execute file write to the system A CPU Execute file write to the system B CPU x1 Set the system A CPU to RUN by remote operation Set the system B CPU to RUN by remote operation Log out from the Ethernet module mounted on the main base unit of the system A CPU Log out from the Ethernet module mounted on the main base unit of the system B CPU Clear the error of the standby system CPU 2 x1 After writing a parameter file simultaneously reset the both redundant CPUs x2 When the operati
152. system B If the mode of the Ethernet module differs between system A and system B an error will occur in the redundant CPU For the Ethernet module settings other than the station number mode and IP address use the same data for system A and system B Set the station number mode and IP address of the Ethernet module mounted on System A in Setting the number of MNET 10H Ethernet cards and Operational settings 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 2 Issue system switch in Cable disconnection timeout When this setting is made valid the Ethernet module issues a system switching request to the control system CPU when a disconnection status continues for a period of disconnection monitoring time after detection of the disconnection Refer to Section 5 11 1 for system switching at disconnection detection Setting range choices Issue system switch in Set whether a system switching request will e Checked System switching request is issued Cable disconnection be issued or not at disconnection detection e Not checked System switching request is not timeout issued Default Checked Cable disconnection Set the time from when disconnection is 0 0s to 30 0s timeout setting detected until the system switching request is Default 2 0s issued to the control system CPU POINT Set the cable disconnection timeout setting to several seconds to several ten seconds If it is shorter than the above a system switching r
153. the compiling procedure for a program created using Microsoft Corporation Visual C Ver 4 0 1 Start Visual C 2 Prepare for program creation Select File gt New and start the console application from the project workspace screen 3 Open the file named AUSAMP C and create a program See the program example on the next page 4 Compile the created file from the compile screen of the build menu 5 Link WSOCK32 LIB from the setting screen of the build menu 6 Create an executable file AJSAMP EXE on the build screen of the build menu 7 End Visual C 8 Execute AJSAMP EXE 2 Outline of the procedure for calling the socket routine Start Create socket socket bind Bind Passive open Active open UDP Open listen connect accept Communicate sendto recvfrom send recv Disable sending receiving shutdown Close closesocket Complete App 23 APPENDIX MELSEC Q L 2K 2K 2 KK KKK K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K kK K K KKK KKK XX xX Xxx Sample program xK KK xx k This program is a sample program to conduct a xK gt connection test between the Ethernet module xK k and target device xK gt This program accesses the data register D of x gt gt the PLC CPU installed together with the Ethernet gt k module xk Xx xk gt Copyright C 1996 Mitsubishi Electric xk gt Corporation xK
154. the existence check Refer to Section 2 7 for applicable versions of the Ethernet module and GX Developer POINT 1 The Setting the number of MNET 10H Ethernet cards and Operational settings parameters must always be set If the settings are changed the PLC CPU must be reset 2 If the re initial processing of the Ethernet module is required due to the occurrence of an error perform re initial processing using sequence programs see Section 5 2 3 3 When using the programs for conventional models be sure to delete or disable the program for initial processing that uses I O signals 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 8 Self Diagnostic Tests This section explains the self diagnostic tests for checking the hardware and transmission and reception function of the Ethernet module The self diagnostic test is performed on the Network parameters setting the number of MNET 10H Ethernet cards screen of GX Developer 4 8 1 Self refrain test The following explains the self refrain test that is used to check the hardware including the Ethernet module s transmission and reception circuit The self refrain test transmits a test message addressed to the Ethernet module s local station to a line and checks whether or not the same message can be received via the network The following explains the procedure for performing the self refrain test The test takes approximately five seconds to complete
155. the main base unit of the ee eer O Communication error occurrence Soo jerm e JAIK l Eman ig EDE cols DICANTA DIG control system CPU the redundant tH ele system support application changes the communication path automatically and communicates with the control system 1 Path is bypassed to make access to control system CPU PU via th n m CP 2 Communication with control system CPU is continued using CPU via the standby system CPU tracking cable I Ge 91 Operation of standby system CPU Since the received data is addressed to the control system CPU data is relayed to the control system CPU via the tracking cable Set whether the system switching request will be issued or not to the control system CPU in the redundant settings of GX Developer Refer to Section 5 11 3 5 96 5 96 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 5 11 3 Redundant settings This section explains the redundant settings of GX Developer Starting procedure Setting the number of MNET 10H Ethernet cards Redundant settings gt Redundant settings screen Setting screen Redundant settings x System B settings Station number and mode setting System A Station number T
156. the normal completion flag of the open processing Set the abnormal completion flag of the open processing Set the flag when the close processing is performed from the external device Change the close processing from the external device to pulse Change the close request from the Local station side to pulse Perform close processing Set the close processing executing flag Set the normal completion flag Set the abnormal completion flag Reset the open processing flag Reset the close processing execution flag 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 5 6 3 UDP IP open processing close processing The following explains the UDP IP open processing The operations of the open processing close processing in UDP IP differ depending on whether Always wait for OPEN or Do not wait for OPEN is selected in the settings using GX Developer Operational settings Initial settings as shown below 1 When Always wait for OPEN is selected in the operational settings Communications possible at STOP time According to the Open settings with GX Developer a connection for which the UDP IP communication is selected is established automatically after the Ethernet module installed station has been restarted and the data transmission reception is enabled Sequence programs for open processing and close processing are not required For details on the Open settings parameter see Section 5 5 Open Settings Even when Always wait for
157. the setting value of each timer on the external device side in such a way that the following relations are met Communication errors such as transmission timeouts may occur more frequently if the timer values are not set so that they satisfy the following relationships TCP resend timer TCP resend timer bs value on the external device side value on the Ethernet module side Monitoring timer value for the s TCP ULP timer value n i external device application software on the Ethernet module side x 1 nis the number of TCP segment transmissions and can be obtained via the following calculation ce Size of the message transmitted by the Ethernet module fractions below decimal point are rounded up Maximum segment size Example1 Number of TCP segment transmissions when communicating via the same line The maximum segment size is 1460 bytes via the same line without going through a router and the number of TCP segment transmissions is as follows n 1 if the size of the message transmitted by the Ethernet module is 1460 bytes or less n 2 if the size of the message transmitted by the Ethernet module is greater than 1460 bytes Example2 Number of TCP segment transmissions when communicating via separate lines The maximum segment size is at least 536 bytes on a separate line via dialup router etc and the number of TCP segment transmissions is as follows n 1 if the size of the message transmitted by the Ethernet module is 536 b
158. to 16 user connections e If only one MELSOFT product is to be connected the following settings using GX Developer are not required If two or more MELSOFT product are to be connected the following settings using GX Developer are required since user connections will be used On the Ethernet open settings screen for network parameters set TCP in the protocol field of the connection number to be used and MELSOFT connection in the open method field See Section 5 5 2 Connection via UDP IP communication By using one dedicated system connection the Ethernet module side can connect MELSOFT product or GOT via UDP IP communication Connections used by the Ethernet module side when connecting a MELSOFT product or GOT External device Protocol used Connection used on the Ethernet module side One unit Connection via TCP IP Uses a dedicated system connection The Ethernet open settings parameter is not required gt a 2 5 N D 5 a CPU Ethernet module Connection via TCP IP Uses a dedicated system connection and user connections set up by the user for MELSOFT connection The Ethernet open settings parameter is required One unit Multiple units E Connection via UDP IP ee Uses a dedicated system connection The Ethernet open settings parameter is not required x1 It is possible to use the same station number if two or mo
159. to bO Hour 00 to 23x Date 01H to 311 b15 to b8 b7 to bO Second 004 to 59x Minutes 004 to 59x b15 to b8 b7 to bO Higher 2 digitals of year 00 to 99 Day of the week 0 to 6 11 17 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 7 E mail status storage area addresses 5870H to 5FFFH x When the storage count exceeds FFFFu times the count starts from OH again a E mail status storage area for reception addresses 5870H to 5B38n 1 Number of mails remaining on the server address 5870n e This area stores the number of mails remaining when the Ethernet module inquires to the receiving mail server 0 No received mail in the server 110 15 The number of mails remaining in the server 16 The number of mails in the server is 16 or more 2 Dedicated instruction normal completion count address 587 1H e This area stores a cumulative count of how many times the dedicated instruction MRECV completed normally 0 The MRECV instruction is not executed or no executions have resulted in normal completion 1 or more Cumulative count of normal completions of the MRECV instruction 3 Dedicated instruction abnormal completion count address 5872h This area stores a cumulative count of how may times the dedicated instruction MRECV completed abnormally 0 The MRECV instruction is not executed or no executions have resulted in abnormal completion 1 or more Cumulative count of abnormal completions of the M
160. to check the serial No and function version of the target module through GX Developer The serial No and function version are displayed on the Product Information List or the Module s Detailed Information screen of GX Developer The following diagram shows how to check the serial No and function version on the Product Information List screen See Section 11 2 for the Module s Detailed Information screen Startup procedure 1 H H i Ww Diagnostics gt System monitor Product Inf List Product Information List x Slot e Series Model name Points I 0 No Master PLC Serial No Ver 2 QOZHCPU A 0 0 Intelli Q QI71E71 32pt 0000 020930000000000 B o 1 Intelli Q QU71024 R2 32pt 0020 7 020510000000000 B 0 2 7 None y 0 3 None 0 4 7 None f a 0 5 7 None ed y a 0 6 None 0 7 gt None CSY file creating Close Serial No Ver The serial No of the target module is displayed in the serial No area The function version of the target module is displayed in the Ver area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 SPECIFICATIONS This section explains the Ethernet module performance specifications and transmission specifications For more details on the general specifications refer to the User s Manual for the QCPU Q mode 3 1 Performance Specifications The following explains the performance specifications of the Ethernet module
161. transmission to the TCP Maximum Segment Transmission setting area address 1EH and execute re initialization For re initialization refer to Section 5 2 3 All dedicated instructions must be executed online If any of the dedicated instructions is executed offline no error will occur but the execution of the dedicated instruction will not be completed 11 44 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 4 1 Sending errors during fixed buffer communication common to procedure exist and no procedure 11 45 Check the abnormal code marked with by referring to the complete status stored as the control data of the dedicated instruction Check the open status of the connection with an external device Execute the open processing of the applicable connection For details see Section 5 6 NO Make sure that the open close gt processing using input output signals and the OPEN or CLOSE dedicated instruction are not executed simultaneously in the same connection If so modify the program Is the applicable connection open Buffer memory address applicable bit of 5000 Read the open abnormal code buffer memory address 124 134 of the communication status storage area and check that no errors have occurred NO Fix the error according to the error code see Section 11 3 Have parameter errors occurred Read the content of the communication abnorm
162. transmitting function of the Ethernet module s PLC CPU monitoring function and the random access buffer communication function can be used together 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Item Specification Transmission specifications Transmission and reception data Connecting using the 10BASE2 10BASE5 Terminator Segment length There is no transceiver when connecting using the 10BASE2 Attached file Data size 6 k words x 1 Main text 960 words x 1 Data transfer method When sending Sends either a file as attachment or main text select one When receiving Received a file as attachment Subject Us ASCIl format or ISO 2022 JP Base64 Attached file format MIME format MIME Version 1 0 Data of attached file format Binary ASCII CSV can be selected File name XXXX bin binary XXXX asc ASCII XXXX csv CSV CSV Comma Separated Value Division of attached file Cannot be divided only one file can be sent received If any divided files are received only the first file will be received and the remaining files will be discarded When sending encode Subject Base64 7 bits Main text 7 bits Attached file Base64 When receiving decode Subject Does not decode Main text Cannot be received Attached file Base64 7 bits 8 bits Quoted Printable If e mail is sent from the external device to the PLC side specify the encoding method Bas
163. using ASCII code 36H 304 30 304 45H 30H SS Subheader Subheader 7 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE PROCEDURE EXIST CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q 3 Data length setting This value indicates the data size of the text command section The data length can be designated in the following range e Communication using binary code Maximum of 1017 words e Communication using ASCII code Maximum of 508 words 1 1 Since data is sent received as ASCII data the communication data size is approximately half of the data size when using binary code 4 Text command The format of the command response when communicating using fixed buffers is configured as follows a Communication using binary code Command format Maximum of 1017 words 60H OOH L H L H L H L H L H Subheader Data designation storage device for sending receiving instructions ee Data length n setting Aase e aea wes Pastas n 1 H L eet at n 2 H L Send receive data n 3 H D 1 word 2 bytes 7 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE PROCEDURE EXIST CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q b Communication using ASCII code Command format Maximum of 1016 words lt H to L H to L H to L H to L Subheader 4 ai 4 tree nE OSAN I T tOn for sending receiving instructions ASCII BIN conversion an Data length Le
164. when performing a loop back test for the Ethernet module in the same Ethernet from the GX Developer GX Developer Station No 3 10 97 85 223 Network No 1 Ethernet Station No 1 Station No 2 10 97 85 221 10 97 85 222 a QCPU station side settings 1 Set the following Ethernet module parameters for each PLC CPU through GX Developer Use default values for setting items other than those listed below Setti n Setting item __ Setting description _ description Remarks etting scree 2 QCPU 1 QCPU 2 Network type Ethernet Ethernet Starting I O No See Section 4 6 setting the number of a Network No e7 Set the local station MNET 10H Ethernet aeoo No network No etc cards StationNo No Network parameters 2 Section 4 7 Operational setting IP address 10 97 85 221 10 97 85 222 Enter the local station IP address MNET 10 routing Table exchange system Table exchange system system See Section 3 3 1 of MNET 1 i information Station No 3 Application IP address 97 85 223 10 97 85 223 x Itis not necessary to set the network No station No and IP address for GX Developer station performing the loop back test when Automatic response system is specified as the MNET 10 routing system under the MNET 10 routing information 2 Write the parameters to the applicable station 3 The initial processing is completed when the PLC CP
165. when the close processing is abnormally completed TCP When closing normally from the Ethernet module the Ethernet module sends a FIN request and the external device returns an ACK and a FIN However if an ACK and a FIN are not returned because the external device is faulty the Ethernet module forcefully disconnects the connection send a RST message PLC CPU Open request signal 1 CLOSE instruction execution r Open completion signal X 2 Ethernet Close abnormal processing module 5 FIN is not sent after waiting for the time of TCP end timer value Ethernet 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q The open request signal is turned off by the dedicated CLOSE instruction The Ethernet module executes the close processing The Ethernet module sends a FIN request to the external device The external device sends back FIN and ACK messages in reply to the FIN request sent by the Ethernet module When the reply is not returned the Ethernet module sends the FIN request again The Ethernet module waits for the external device to send an ACK and a FIN The module waits for the amount of time set in the TCP end timer value For details on how to set it see Section 5 2 Initial Settings If the ACK and FIN messages are received at this point it returns an ACK as in the normal processing If an ACK and a FIN are not received within the time designated in the TCP end timer value an RST mes
166. without designating extension Device memory extension can be designated only for stations with Ethernet modules installed and Q QnACPUs that connect via the MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 Correct the number of device points to read write and send it to the Ethernet module again Check whether the content can be requested to the target PLC CPU Correct the content of the request and send it to the Ethernet module again Correction of subcommand etc Review the content of the request MELSEC Q E mail log Dedicated instruction 11 30 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code abnormal code C0744 C0801 C0814 C0824 C083x C0841 C0854 C0871 COB2h COB3x COB5x Description of error Request could not be executed on the target PLC The IP address of an external device could not be obtained during MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communication or data link instruction communication The end processing for the Ethernet module has been completed and data link instruction communication cannot be checked Communication processing was abnormally completed in following communication Communication with GX Developer UDP IP e MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay Communication processing was abnormally completed in data link instruction communication Communication processing was abnormally completed in data link instruction communication The local station s channel designated by another sta
167. writes 0 Clear history 9 Command code Error Receive date command 4 gt FING test Loop test COM ERR off Close 5 8 Explanation of items Description Setting range Specifies the target Ethernet module for monitoring 1 T 1 4 ee arget module setting Number of cards for MELSECNET H module is not included aera Change IP address display Switches the IP address display between decimal and hexadecimal Decimal hexadecimal 3 Selection from the various Various types of information for the Ethernet module can be monitored information monitors See Section 11 2 3 for the buffer memory corresponding to the display contents PING test Performs the PING test on the external device See Section 5 4 1 Section 5 4 2 Loop test Performs the loop back test for the network See Section 5 4 3 COM ERR off Clicking this button turns the COM ERR LED off See Section 11 1 2 Cc icking this button executes the Ethernet diagnostics he display is updated during monitoring Clicking this button stops the Ethernet diagnostics The display is retained while monitoring is stopped Lo Clear history ears the log Clear information ears various values 7 Start monitor Stop monitor 11 6 11 6 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q When accessing a PLC on other station with a data link instruction during Ethernet diagnostics it may take some time to execute the da
168. 0 Special module Constant System user f giste Direct JO O register Others Setting Internal device Instruction code Executing condition Command ZP OPEN so l ZP OPEN Un S1 S2 Setting data Setting data Set by Data type Start input output signal of the Ethernet module Binary 16 bits 00 to FE The two most significant digits of the 3 digit input output signal A S1 Connection number 1 to 16 Binary 16 bits Un Head number of the device that stores control data Binary 16 bits D1 Head number of the local station bit device that turns on for one scan D1 upon completion of instruction System D1 1 also turns on if the instruction execution ends abnormally The file registers for each of the local device and the program cannot be used as devices to be used in the setting data 10 19 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCT 0 C STRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Control data Set by C Designate which settings to use at open processing of a connection either the parameter setting values from GX Developer or the setting f th l ing f Execution values of the contro data starting rom S2 Ha 0000 00001 Open processing with parameters set in User type complete type 8000 Open settings of GX Developer 8000 Open processing with parameters designated with control data from S2 2 to S2 9 Stores the status at completion Complete status 0000 Normal completion Syst
169. 03102 are 03102 i ificati Function version D or Function version D 7 Target Station CPU type specification for unction versi unction versi Function version D or later O O data link instructions later or later Multiple CP 7 Function version B or Function version u T e ER system E of file O O later whose first 5 digits of eN O ransfer server function the serial No are 03102 Function version B or Communication using the Web function O O later whose first 5 digits of O O the serial No are 05051 Function version A or later whose Remote password check O O Function version B or later first 5 digits of the Version 6 or later serial No are 02092 Available no restrictions on version X Unavailable 1 Change was made to the operation of the Ethernet module to be performed when the Active open request is received again from the external device in the open completion status of TCP Refer to POINT in Section 5 6 2 2 18 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Checking the function version and serial No of the Q series PLC a Checking using the Rating plate on the side of the module The serial No and function version of the subject module are displayed in the SERIAL line of the rating plate MODEL MAC ADD Serial No first 5 digits Function version Conformed standard ga MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN b Checking through GX Developer The following explains how
170. 051 No Function version B or ater whose first 5 digits of he serial No are 05051 Version 8 05F or later Connection of up to 17 MELSOFT products via TCP IP communication O unction version B or er whose first 5 digits of e serial No are 02122 Version 6 05F or later Simplifying Simpliying accessio Function version B or F connection other stations s Function version B or i later whose first 5 ae with a O later whose first 5 digits of O O Access with the same digits of the serial No MELSOFT the serial No are 05051 station number are 05051 products Monitoring of various Function version Ethernet daanosti Ethernet module statuses A or later whose Version 6 or later gn PING test loopback test O O Function version B or later first 5 digits of the function of GX Developer via Ethernet board serial No are PING test via CPU 02092 Version 7 or later Hub connection status monitor function Pog VeRO gk x x O O Pending MeS I GoY Function version B or later Version 6 or later format as attachment O Function version B or When using Sending main text later whose first 5 digits of Version 7 or later the e mail O the serial No are 03102 O function Function version B or i Function version B or Support for later whose first 5 fi on A f ed 5 later whose first 5 digits of O encoding decoding digits of the serial No the serial No are
171. 071H The remote password unlock release processing is performed after the open processing for the connection is completed All data received before the unlock processing will be processed as an error See the troubleshooting section for error codes When the unlock processing for the remote password is performed from the external device the specified station can be accessed from the external device if the remote password specified by the user matches the remote password set in the local station QCPU After data communication is completed close the applicable connection after performing the remote password lock processing from the external device The remote password unlock processing and lock processing are performed from the external device connected to the Ethernet module using the dedicated instructions for MC protocol communication They are performed with dedicated FTP commands when using the file transfer FTP server function The remote password is input with the dialog box when using the Web function or GX Developer When the GX Developer communication port is set as the remote password check connection access the PLC after performing the unlock processing on the GX Developer screen shown when access begins 7 The remote password unlock and lock processing can only be performed for the local station QCPU on which the Ethernet module is mounted The remote password unlock and lock processing cannot be performed for o
172. 1 Relayed module controlled by QCPU No 1 Ethernet module controlled by QCPU No 1 2 Relayed module controlled by QCPU No 2 2 3 4 4 2 1 MELSECNET H 1 2 3 4 2 Accessed station Relayed module MELSECNET H network module x1 The targets of the relayed modules for other station access are as follows e MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 network modules e Q series C24 e Ethernet module 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS 2 4 For Use with Q00J Q00 Q01CPU MELSEC Q This section describes the use of the Ethernet module with the Q00J Q00 Q01CPU 1 Available functions The following functions are available when the Ethernet module is mounted on the main base unit of the Q00J Q00 Q01 CPU Function Availability Reception processing by an interrupt program Communication using the MC protocol O Communication using the fixed buffer D Reception processing by an interrupt program O k3 Communication using the random access buffer O Sending receiving of e mail X Communication using the data link instruction File transfer FTP server function Communication using the Web function MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communication Router relay communication Router relay function External device existence confirmation Pairin
173. 1 Menlo Park California 94025 RFC Number TCP RFC793 UDP RFC768 IP RFC791 ICMP RFC792 ARP RFC826 App 17 App 17 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 7 External Dimensions 1 QJ71E71 100 n i AR TERAPAN k QJ71E71 100 RUN ERR INIT COM ERR OPEN 100M 98 3 86 10BASE T 100BASE TX E 0 QJ71E71 100 90 3 54 27 4 1 08 D gt Unit mm in 1 When connecting a twisted pair cable set the bending radius near the connector reference value R1 as four times the cable s outside diameter or larger 2 QU71E71 B5 nn pi acfeneenee 5 QU71E71 B5 RUN EPR INIT COM ERR OPEN SD RD 8 5 0 33 98 3 86 J 10BASE5 Nod R2 O 1 L 12V 2O 12610 E D wer C powe supp y Qu7ie71 5 EXT POWER U for transceiver 90 3 54 27 4 1 08 Unit mm in x1 When connecting an AUI cable set the bending radius near the connector reference value R2 as four times the cable s outside diameter or larger App 18 App 18 APPEN App 19 DIX 3 QU71E71 B2 98 3 86 TI 29 2 1 15 eA 23 65 0 93 hee in
174. 1 254 Execute the ping command Pinging 192 0 1 254 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 192 0 1 254 bytes 32 time 1ms TTL 128 Reply from 192 0 1 254 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 128 Reply from 192 0 1 254 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 128 Reply from 192 0 1 254 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 128 Ping statistics for 192 0 1 254 Packets Sent 4 Received 4 Lost 0 0 loss Approximate round trip times in milli seconds Minimum Oms Maximum 1ms Average Oms CA gt _ Example of screen at abnormal completion C gt ping 192 0 1 254 Execute the ping command Pinging 192 0 1 254 with 32 bytes of data Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out Ping statistics for 192 0 1 254 Packets Sent 4 Received 0 Lost 4 100 loss Approximate round trip times in milli seconds Minimum Oms Maximum Oms Average Oms C gt _ lt When the PING command does not respond successfully gt Check the following items and send the PING command again e Check the Ethernet module s attachment to the base unit e Check the connection to the Ethernet network e Check the contents of each parameter written to the PLC CPU e Check the operation condition of the PLC CPU are there any irregularities e Check the IP address of the Ethernet module dictated by the PING command 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 5 4 5 Loop back test Communication using the MC protocol Oo The
175. 1 3 Is the end code of the response 0 11 50 MELSEC Q Correct the IP address and send the command again Match the communication protocol TCP UDP with the external device For details see Section 5 5 11 50 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Is the IP address of the command correct NO Correct the IP address and send the command again Is the buffer memory address designation of the Ethernet module set for the command correct NO Correct the buffer memory address of the Ethernet module and send the command again Is the command a data write from the external device NO Data read Is the data to be written set on the external side Set the data Is the data set in the designated address of the Ethernet module s random access buffer Are there any open errors or initial errors in the error log area Check and fix the faulty part The Ethernet module hardware may be faulty Consult your nearest dealer with the details of the errors 11 51 MELSEC Q Write data 11 51 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC O 11 4 4 Errors in communication using the MC protocol Communication error Check the open status of the connection with the external device Execute the open processing of the applicable connection For details see Section 5 6 NO Make sur
176. 31H 35H 15H q 5 One byte Two bytes 1 2 4 12344 31H 32H 33H 34H gt q an g g Two bytes Four bytes 3 The size of data that can be communicated between the Ethernet module and an external device at a time is determined by the function used and the data code binary ASCII that is set by selecting GX Developer Communication data code The following shows the maximum sizes of communication data that can be sent and received at a time with each data communication function Data communication function Exchangeable data size Communisation using MG brotocol The maximum number of point that can be designated with g p each command instruction Maximum of 1920 bytes Sete 1017 words Binary code 508 words ASCII code Communication using fixed buffer 2046 words Communication using random access buffer 1017 words Binary code 508 words ASCII code Sending receiving by e mail Attached file Maximum of 6 k words 9 g 9y Main text Maximum of 960 bytes MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay SoN 480 words communication Cornmuniestion using datailinkinstrictioh The maximum number of point that can be designated with 9 each command instruction Maximum of 960 bytes File transfer FTP server function Maximum of one file Communication usin b function The maximum number of point that can be designated with I R R NOS AA each command instruction Maximum 1920 bytes 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 3
177. 5 APPENDIX b When disconnection is detected Tnc Td St Tcc Tne System switching time Td Cable disconnection timeout St 1 scan time MELSEC Q Tsw System switching time Refer to the QNPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System The following shows the system switching operation timing when disconnection is detected External device QJ71E71 100 Station No 1 o0 ers D Lic eones Tracking cable Disconnection occurrence QJ71E71 100 Control system Standby system Station No 1 operation operation Ta System switching request is issued 1 System A CPU scan time System A Control system Standby system Tsw i System B Standby system Control system System B CPU scan time QJ71E71 100 Standby system operation Control system operation Station No 2 i Tne App 16 QJ71E71 100 Station No 2 App 16 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 5 ASCII Code List N EL BS HT LF VT FF CR E Si Appendix 6 References For details on TCP IP refer to the DDN Protocol Handbook 3 volumes Publisher DDN Network Information Center SRI International 333 Ravenswood Avenue EJ29
178. 5 34 Text command Fixed buffer communication procedure exist eee settee eeeeeeeteeeeeeeeees 7 15 Communication using the random ACCESS DUMP EN ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 9 Timer S UING ss aeeecsi eee serstateeiei da ceetadverchineeess 5 4 U UDP ss teiciadciinversiaia Sisrdines 1 15 5 36 UINI instruction ceseeeeeeeees 5 13 10 23 UNPASSIVE eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeteeeeteeees 5 37 5 52 Usage Setting eeeeeeseeeeeeeteeee 3 14 5 36 V Valid module during other station access 4 17 Index 3 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribut
179. 5 Open Settings This section explains the open setting using GX Developer Select Setting the number of MNET 10H Ethernet cards Open settings to start the Ethernet open settings screen E Network parameter Ethernet open setting Module No 1 ioj x ized buffi Fixed buffer Local station Dest Port open confirmation Port No IP address No End Cancel A sequence program can perform open processing establishing connection with external devices up to a maximum of 16 stations Once a connection is established with an external device it is possible to communicate using the MC protocol fixed buffer communication and random access buffer communication Thus the open processing is required even when communication using the MC protocol and random access buffer communication Description of setting Setting range options Sores TCP IP Set the communication method protocol lt UDP IP Active open Unpassive open Open system Select the connection open system Fullpassive open MELSOFT connection e OPS connection Send Fixed buffer Select the usage of the fixed buffer e Receive ook e Procedure exist Fixed buffer communication Select which protocol is used for fixed buffer communication e No procedure Pairing open Select whether paring open is used or not bak irl WI S i gop paringo e No pairs 5 A Select whether the continued existence of a destination sta
180. 5821 to 58224 status sibtaga i Connection 58231 f 22564 Continues on the next page 3 24 3 24 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Continued from the previous page Address ai GX Developer a TER Initial value Decimal Application setting Hexadecimal a kts Hexadecimal applicability 22 ee Fixed buffer sending error code fx Section 11 3 H 22 x Reference section 22567 58271 22568 5828n 22569 5829n edn anal Communication Conn g Same as connection No 9 582A to 5833 Connection No 10 Maximum value rx Fixed buffer communication Minimum value time Current value x ion i 5834 to 583D No 11 583E to 58471 No 12 5848 to 58514 No 13 5852 to 585Bu No 14 585C to 5865x No 15 5866 to 586F1 No 16 eeu Number of mails remaining on the server 58704 g 22641 A Dedicated instruction normal completion count 58714 22642 S Dedicated instruction abnormal completion count 58724 22049 Normal receiving count 58731 9 22644 58744 Attached file receiving count x Section 11 3 22645 5875 Server inquiry count H PROA Error log write count 28771 9 22648 E mail status Receiving error log write pointer 58781 storage area E 9 P 22649 22650 587An 22651 to 22658 From 587B to 588214 22659 to 22662 Date 5883 to 58861 22663 to 22692 5887 to 58A4 22693 to 22736 Error log 58A5 to 58D0x block 2 Same as error log block 1 22737 to 22780 Error l
181. 6 to 13Ex 319 to 327 13F to 1471 328 to 336 148 to 150x 337 to 345 151 to 159 346 to 354 15A to 1621 355 to 363 163 to 16Bn 364 to 372 16C to 174 373 to 375 175 to 1771 EA to EB Error log area ka ici System area Number of error occurrence Error log write pointer Error log block area System area m 3 fe Q Destination IP address Destination Port No Same as error Same as error Same as error Same as error Same as error Same as error Same as error Same as error Same as error Same as error Same as error Same as error Same as error Same as error Same as error Initial value Hexadecimal E DEEI a og bl og bl og bl og bl og bl og bl og bl og bl og bl og bl og bl og bl og bl og bl og bl MELSEC Q Continued from the previous page GX Developer setting applicability Reference section Section 11 3 lock 1 lock 1 lock 1 ock 1 ock 1 lock 1 lock 1 lock 1 lock 1 lock 1 ock 1 lock 1 Continues on the next page 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Decimal Application Hexadecimal 376 to 377 178 to 179 378 to 379 17A to 17B 380 to 381 17C to 17D 382 to 397 17E to 18D 398 to 399 18E to 18F 400 to 407 190 to 1971 408 to 409 198 to 1991 410 to 411 19A to 19B 412 to 413 19C to 19D 414 to 415 19E to 19F1 416 to 417
182. 8 10 5 CLOSE INsStryCtON ass iiiaae ar eanan aA AEA Narea TAa ENEA AAA AA deste sees 10 11 10 6 ERRGCLER Instr ctioi an ai avs io ed A ia a ie a 10 14 10 7 ERRRD MSUN eei aane TA E A AN EE E AEEA EATE A A AAN EEA 10 17 AOE d INA OEO Eaa PAEA TAE ei Alas ah ho E etree tated 10 19 1029 UNNS TUCHO e E E ETTE E E 10 23 11 1 How to Check Errors Using LED Displays seseeseseeseeneseeneiesnsnernsrsrnsnstntnsrnrnsnnnnnsnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 11 2 11 1 1 Checking error display ccccecceceeeeeeeceeeeeeeseceeceeeeeeeaecaeceeeeaesaecaeseeseaesaesaeseseaesaesaeseeseatieseeseaeeate 11 2 11 1 2 How to turn off COM ERR LED and to read clear error information ccceeeeeeeeereeteeeees 11 4 11 2 How to Check an Error Through GX Developer cccccecceceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeaecaeeeeeeaeeaesaeseeeeaesaeseseeeeaeeaes 11 5 11 2 1 Ethernet diagnostics 0 n0 ces di a i a ey 11 6 12 2 SYSteMiMOnmtOl v 22 feces eet ey ate ee et ele eee eh ea a ee eee rede 11 8 11 2 3 Buffer memory that can be monitored with the GX Developer diagnostic function 4 11 10 11 2 4 Checking the error information by the buffer memory batch monitoring function 006 11 12 WAS Error COE Listir t a ducting sbecibla dughics a events a a a aa a a a a a e 11 13 11 3 1 End codes Complete codes returned to an external device during data communication 11 22 11 3 2 Abnormal codes returned during communication using A compatible 1E frames
183. 9 Communication using Communication using TCP IP UDP IP Kat Kaf 0 0057 ooo Kaf 0 0014 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 2 Minimum processing time of communication using the random access buffer Trs Kr Kdr x Df ACK processing time of an external device Added only for TCP IP communication Trs The time the Ethernet module takes to complete the processing of a data request from a PC after receiving it unit ms Kr Kdr Constants see the table below Df Word count of requested data ACK processing time of the external device Time required until the external device returns an ACK after reading or writing of the random access buffer is completed QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 QU71E71 B2 Communication using Communication using Communication using Communication using TCP IP UDP IP TCP IP UDP IP Kr Kar Kr Kar Kar Kar Dat ata communication using 0 004 0 005 0 008 6 6 0 008 binary code Rean Data communication using ASCII code ia 9216 iss ss S D ata communication using 0 006 0 005 0 014 0 012 binary code Write Data communication using 0 017 ASCII code Calculation example 1 Calculate the time the QJ71E71 B5 takes to complete the processing of a data request from a PC after receiving it when the QJ71E71 B5 and the PC communicate using TCP IP and read 508 words of binary code data from the random access buffer unit ms 13 46 ACK processing time of the external dev
184. A sample program its execution environment and contents of data communication are shown below 1 Execution environment of the program example 1 The settings of the PLC CPU side are the same as those of the execution environment described in Section 8 1 1 a and 3 of Appendix 2 The settings of the external device side are the same as those of the execution environment described in Section 8 1 1 b of Appendix except for the following including the software development Software development environment Microsoft Corporation Visual Basic Ver 6 0 e Arbitrary numbers are assigned for the IP address and port number 3 The communication protocol is TCP IP 2 Outline of the program example With the A compatible 1E frame command 01 batch read in word units this program reads data from DO to D4 five points of the QCPU of the station on which the Ethernet module is mounted 3 Outline of the sample program a Create a new project and form b Create the example window shown in 4 below using Command Button in the toolbox c Add Microsoft Winsock Control 6 0 using the component s control Add a Winsock object from the toolbox to the form and set the Property Pages screen as follows Property Pages General Protocol D sckTCPProtocol RemoteHost 92 0 1 253 RemotePort i2 LocalPort Doo d Create the program shown in 5 App 41 App 41 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 4 Window example
185. APPENDIX MELSEC Q 3 GX Developer settings Set the parameters of the PLC CPU as described below a Operation setting Ethernet operations x r Communication data code Initial timing C Binary code c Do not wait for OPEN Communications impossible at STOP time ASCII code Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time r IP address Send frame setting Input format DEC ad Ethemet 2 0 IP address 192 0 1 252 C IEEE802 3 IT Enable write at RUN time TCP Existence confirmation setting Use the KeepAlive Use the Ping Ethernet module IP address System A C0 00 01 FCH 192 00 01 252 b Open setting E Network parameter Ethernet open setting Module No 1 oy x Fixed buffer Pai Exist Host stad Transmission Transmission Protocol Open system Fixed buffer communication airing hee Pe iN Jen Target device IP target device procedure Bai Sect GUAGE address Port No Se Hnnassive v Send v Procedure exist _ Disable v No confim 2000 Local port number 2000H c Redundant setting Redundant settings xi r System B settings a IV Issue system switch in Cable disconnection timeout Sistine Ewah Cable disconnection timeout setting 2 0 sec 0 0sec 30 0sec Station number fi T Issue system switch in communication error Mode E nline v r System switching settings when communication error occurs
186. All Rights Reserved ak oe KK xk 2K AK K K K k k k k k k kK K KK K K K K K K K K K K K kK kK kK ok kK kk include lt stdio h gt include lt winsock h gt define FLAG_OFF 0 Completion flag OFF define FLAG_ON 1 Completion flag ON define SOCK_OK 0 Normal completion define SOCK_NG 1 Abnormal completion define BUF_SIZE 4096 Receive buffer size define ERROR_INITIAL define ERROR_SOCKET define ERROR_BIND define ERROR_CONNECT define ERROR_SEND define ERROR_RECEIVE define ERROR_SHUTDOWN define ERROR_CLOSE Initial error Socket creation error Bind error Connection error Send error Receive error Shutdown error Line close error NO of WDM O Definitions for checking the receiving sizes define RECV_ANS_1 4 Receiving size of response message in reply to device write 1E frame define RECV_ANS_1 22 Receiving size of response message in reply to device write 3E frame define RECV_ANS 2 24 Receiving size of response message in reply to device read 1E frame define RECV_ANS_2 42 Receiving size of response message in reply to device read 3E frame typedef struct sck_inf struct in_addr my_adadr unsigned short my_port struct in_addr aj_adadr unsigned short aj_port App 24 App 24 APPENDIX int nErrorStatus int Dmykeyin int Closeflag int socketno int main WORD wVersionRequested MAKEW ORD 1 1 WSADATA wsaData int l
187. C1 20D to 2101 Router relay parameter setting area 529 to 532 215 to 218 537 to 540 21D to 220 221 to 2241 2251 226 to 227 228 229 to 22An 22B to 22Cx 22D to 22En 559 to 564 22F to 2341 Station No lt gt IP information setting area 931 to 936 3A3 to 3A8H 3A9 to 3AA 3AB to 3AFn 3B0 to 3B5x 3B6 to 3B9x 954 3BBx 3BC to 67Fr FTP setting area MELSEC Q Continued from the previous page GX Developer setting applicability Reference section Initial value Hexadecimal Sub net mask Default router IP address Section 5 3 Number of registered routers Sub net address Section 5 3 Router IP address Same as router 1 Same as router 1 Same as router 1 Same as router 1 Same as router 1 Same as router 1 D D D D D D D D o o e o o o o G c G Z D D D D D D D D ai N fo a A oo N er 1 22 lt pe 3 w 5 fo D Application Continues on the next page no lt pea 0 3 w 5 fo D Number of conversion table data Communication request destination source stations network number and station number Same as rou External station Ethernet module IP address E stems O oo Same as conversion information No 1 Chapter 3 of Application Conversion information number 1 Conversion information number 2 Conversion information
188. Cancel Local station IP address 0A 61 55 DFH 10 97 85 223 d The Open settings are assumed to have been set using GX Developer as follows End Cancel Local station Port No 2000H 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q e The following contact signals are used in the program Connection No 1 open completion signal MO Connection No 1 open request signal M20 Connection No 1 OPEN instruction control data Stored in D100 to D109 Connection No 1 CLOSE instruction control data Stored in D200 and D201 f The area enclosed with i in the program example should be used when the Open settings Ethernet module parameter are not set for GX Developer This part of the program is not required when the Open settings parameters are used for GX Developer g For details on the dedicated OPEN instruction see Chapter 10 Dedicated Instructions 2 Outline of the program example a After each parameter is set from GX Developer and write to PLC CPU restart the PLC CPU and confirm the completion of the initial processing b The open processing for connection No 1 of the Ethernet module is performed After the completion of the open processing connection No 1 waits for the open request from the external device c The close processing for connection No 1 is performed according to the close instruction to the Ethernet module or the close request from the
189. Confirm Se eo ee aa cc po fecal Destination IP address input Destination Hexadecimal O format IP address Adjust to input format A a dis Ore ee App 55 App 55 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Recording sheet 4 Module number GX Developer setting Setting data Data item screen Setting value Remark R f __ Do not use Pope O Sub net mask pattern Adjust to input format OUREA ERS e a ess ae e i ona ener a Router information Input u i OO o oma ee oE format eere es S fo S Setting the Ethernet Ses ooo Adjust to input format e a Cewe OOOO e fo Cewe OOOO Cees o e e App 56 App 56 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Recording sheet 5 Module number GX Developer setting R Setting data Data item screen Setting value Remark Automatic response system r i _ IP address computation system Station No lt gt IP information Table exchange system ld Use together system etmas Panan Le Agust a opat format ae Pf cima S Conversion setting PRAN P Hexadecimal O input format Network No Input format Decimal okay E a a l AS oe mha Network parameters AREN rl f Setting the Ethernet RVOR YR input format Decim l Station No lt gt IP information Station No eee Doo e a one e put Ona Input format Decimal aSa Leal ns 5 a oma Input format Decimal ome ea Agust a nee pate App 57 App 57 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Recording sheet 6 Module number
190. D off 0100 FFFFu Error log address E3u to 1741 Status by each e Clears communication status 0101 FFFF address 1781 to 1FF E mail Communication E mall regewe 01024 FFFFa E mail receiving address 58711 to 5B38 status E mail send status 0103 FFFFi peak Seung j address 5B39 to 5CA0 FFFFu FFFFi Clears all of the above 2 Whether or not the ERRCLR instruction has been completed can be checked by the complete bit devices D1 0 and D1 1 a Complete bit device D1 0 Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the ERRCLR instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Complete bit device D1 1 Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the ERRCLR instruction e Normal completion Stays off and does not change Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the ERRCLR instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing Operation when the ERRCLR instruction is being executed END END END Instruction execution ERRCLR instruction IN Complete device 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 EAE al completion eee NENIET i Abnor a Dateless ens te Ae Complete device 1 2 2 47 akiai baa 3 The ZP ERRCLR function is executed when the clear instruction switches from off to on 10 15 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Errors 1 When a dedicated instruction ends wi
191. D9 according to the application l l Processing for normal completion H M Processing for abnormal completion H lt lt Close processing for connection No 1 using the dedicated CLOSE instruction gt gt direction ZP CLOSE U0 K1 D100 M100 M100 M101 LF Processing for normal completion H M101 Processing for abnormal completion H Parameter communication Power on completed l 1 1 1 1 1 Open status Open allowed status closed Closed status Initial normal completion X19 OPEN instruction One scan OPEN instruction complete device OPEN instruction complete device 1 CLOSE instruction lt One scan CLOSE instruction complete device CLOSE instruction complete device 1 Open completion signal Address 5000n 3 4 6 7 Internal Internal processing processing 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q After communicating the parameter settings confirm the normal completion of the Ethernet module initial processing Initial normal completion signal X19 ON Start the open processing using the dedicated OPEN instruction Open request signal address 5002 b0 ON The Ethernet module executes the open processing Internal processing only When the open processing completes normally e Open completion signal address 5000H b0 ON e OPEN instruction complete device ON e OPEN instruction complete device 1 OFF e OPEN instructio
192. DP IP open processing close processing Never execute the open close processing to the same connection using the input input signals and use together with dedicated OPEN CLOSE instructions for OPEN CLOSE processing It may result in malfunctions Except when the close processing is requested the open completion signal address applicable bit of 5000 automatically turns off and the communication line is closed in the following cases 1 When the existence confirmation function times out occur see Section 5 5 1 When a close or the ABORT RST instruction is received from an external device When the Active open request is received again from the external device in the open completion status of TCP Depending on its version the Ethernet module operates as described below a Ethernet module whose first 5 digits of the serial No are 05051 or later After returning ACK to the external device the Ethernet module closes the connection when the RST command is received from the external device b Ethernet module whose first 5 digits of the serial No are 05049 or earlier After sending the RST command the Ethernet module closes the connection However when receiving the Active open request again from the external device with a different IP address or port No the Ethernet module only sends the RST command It does not close the connection 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE 5 6 1 Active open processing close processing
193. Developer Le Ethernet module x1 In the above diagram a communication request from the external device cannot be received since a remote password check has been set If the remote password check has not been set a communication request can be received and data communication from the external device is possible b Selecting a connection for which the remote password check is performed The user can select any connection for which the Ethernet module performs a remote password check and set this using QCPU parameters This is set on the Setting the remote password screen of GX Developer 1 User connections connections 1 to 16 2 System connections such as GX Developer communication port c Stations that can be accessed when the remote password check is performed The stations that can be accessed from the external device when a remote password is set in the QCPU and the QCPU stations for which the remote password unlock processing and lock processing can be performed are indicated 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q Example 1 When a remote password is set in the QCPU station of the PLC system station 1 1 and the remote password check is set in 1 of station 1 1 Station 1 2 1 x External device that can perform the unlock A station processing and lock processing 1 of station 1 1 By A station only acpu Ethernet module BO g Network No 1 Ethernet Oo O Station 3 2 1
194. E oO Ka ped W External device The communication functions using the MC protocol correspond to the communication functions for reading writing data from to the PLC CPU that are supported by the A QnA series Ethernet modules A1SJ71E71 A1SJ71QE71 etc 1 2 1 2 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 2 Communication using fixed buffers Details are explained in Chapters 7 and 8 In the communication using fixed buffers a maximum of 1 k words of arbitrary data can be sent or received among PLCs or between the PLC and the host system An Ethernet module is provided with 16 fixed buffer data areas of 1 k word storage space and each is assigned as either a sending or receiving buffer for an arbitrary device While the communication using the MC protocol is passive the communication using fixed buffers is an active protocol Data can be sent from the PLC side to the host system when errors occur in machine equipment or when some conditions are satisfied Furthermore by using the data receiving function in an interrupt program retrieval of receive data to the PLC CPU may be expedited Receive Receive send send CPU Ethernet module Ethernet module gt gt a pet 2 a f on N ra ra fo fo s z 6 6 a a External device Local station External device 3 Communication using random access bu
195. Ethernet module etc that are connected by the Ethernet for data communication GX Developer Abbreviation for GX Developer SWnD5C GPPW E n in the model name is 4 or greater MELSECNET 10 Abbreviation for MELSECNET 10 Network system MELSECNET H Abbreviation for MELSECNET H Network system MX Component Abbreviation for MX Component SWOD5C ACT E or later Network module N W module OPS Abbreviation for interface modules compatible with the MELSECNET 10 H network system Generic term for the partner product installed with redundant system compatible EZSocket operator station The OPS can make communication using the Ethernet module s user connection for OPS connection Refer to Section 5 5 Personal computer Generic term for IBM PC AT or 100 compatible personal computer QCPU Generic term for QO0JCPU QO0CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU QO02HCPU Q mode QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU QCPU A A mode Generic term for for Q02CPU A QOD2HCPU A and QO6HCPU A QCPU station Abbreviation for the PLC with QCPU installed QnACPU Generic term for Q2ACPU Q2ACPU S1 Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU and Q4ARCPU Q QnA Generic term for QCPU and QnACPU Reference Manual Abbreviation for the Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual User s Manual Application User s Manual Ba
196. Ethernet module mounted on the main base unit of the standby system CPU via TCP a standby system CPU side error can be detected 2 System switching timing at communication error The timing of issuing the system switching request to the control system CPU ata communication error is shown below a System switching timing by existence check Open completion signal Address 50001 Response message cannot be received from external device Ethernet module i Existence Existence Existence each check check check message message message Target Target Target existence existence existence check starting check interval check interval interval timer timer value timer value value 1 1 Issue of system switching gt lt gt lt request to control system CPU 1 The Ethernet module makes an existence check on the external device whose connection is open if communication is not made for a predetermined period of time Refer to Section 5 2 2 for the existence check function 2 Ifthe Ethernet module cannot receive a response message from the external device it closes the corresponding connection and issues a system switching request to the control system CPU The above chart shows an existence check example of two resend times b System switching timing by ULP timeout BUFSND instruction BUFSND instruction completion device 1 1 Ethernet mod
197. F For fixed buffer communication of connection No 6 ON Detection of sending error or reception error OFF x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 X7 x8 x9 XB For fixed buffer communication of connection No 7 ON Detection of sending error or reception error For fixed buffer communication of connection No 8 ON Sending normal completion or reception completion OFF For fixed buffer communication of connection No 8 ON Detection of sending error or reception error YB ON Open reques YE ON Open reques YF JON Open reques Connection No 1 ON At sending request or reception complete onfirmation signal ion No 2 sending request or reception compl ion No 4 sending request or reception compl ion No 5 sending request or reception compl ion No 6 sending request or reception compl onfirmation signal ion No 7 sending request or reception compl ion No 8 sending request or reception compl confirmation signal OFF Connection No 1 ON Open reques OFF Connection No 2 ON Open reques OFF Connection No 3 YA ON Open reques OFF Connection No 4 OFF Connection No 7 OFF Connection No 8 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Signal direction Ethernet module PLC CPU Signal direction PLC CPU Ethernet module Signal name 3 Signal name number section number section Open completed for connection No 1 X10 JON Open complete signal Y10
198. Form 1 ws Form SR Object name Winsock E Connect a Set the properties sie E71 command send n Command 1 Connect to the Ethernet interface module Send the A compatible 1E frame Command 2 batch read in word units Disconnect Command 3 Disconnect the line Command 4 End the program Check the connection state Command s c Pen aE emia 5 Sample program Form 1 Option Explicit Private Sub Command1_Click Connect to the Ethernet interface module Me Winsock1 Connect End Sub Private Sub Form_Load When calling an Active open method from a PC to the Ethernet interface module The property screen should be used or the settings performed as follows Specify the protocol to be used Winsock1 Protocol sckTCPProtocol sckUDPProtocol Specify the IP address of the Ethernet interface module Winsock1 RemoteHost 192 0 1 253 Specify the port No used by the Ethernet interface module Winsock1 RemotePort 8192 H2000 If the open method of the Ethernet interface module is Fullpassive open specify the set port No If the open method of the Ethernet interface module is Unpassive open 0 use any port No Winsock1 LocalPort 0 Unpassive open End Sub Private Sub winsock1_connect Use the Connect event to perform confirmation processing at the time when the connection processing is normally completed The Connect event occurs w
199. L H L 4H Oo 00H FFH OAH 00H 64 00400400420440H OCH 00H 80H OOH 104104 10410H10H 104 10 Command message for the A compatible 1E frame Response message for the A compatible 1E frame The following manual is available for performing data communication using the MC protocol Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual sold separatel 6 COMMUNICATION USING THE MC PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 6 1 3 PLC CPU setting for performing data communication Data communication via MC protocol is enabled by making the following settings using GX Developer and writing the parameters to the PLC CPU 1 Setting the number of Ethernet cards see Section 4 6 2 Initial settings see Section 5 2 3 Open settings see Section 5 5 PONT _ 1 By using the automatic open UDP ports of the Ethernet module communication using the MC protocol can be performed regardless of the RUN STOP status of the PLC CPU When the automatic open UDP ports are not used connect the user open port first and perform data communication referring to Chapter 4 Settings and Procedures Prior to Starting the Operation and Chapter 5 Communication Procedure of this manual 2 When writing from an external device to the PLC CPU the enable disable write at CPU RUN time setting can be set using the GX Developer Ethernet operational settings parameters x When writing data to the re
200. MELSEC Q Attaching the connector for the coaxial cable The following section explains how to attach the BNC connector connector plug for the coaxial cable to the cable 1 Structure of the BNC connector and coaxial cable The following shows the composition of the BNC connector and coaxial cable Parts comprising the BNC connector Structure of the coaxial cable External conductor amp Outer sheath Insulation Nut Washer Gasket u i ea material Plug shell Internal conductor Clamp Contact 2 How to attach the BNC connector and the coaxial cable The following shows how to attach the BNC connector and the coaxial cable PISI R222222 a Cut the length shown in the diagram to the right off the outer sheath of the coaxial cable 8mm osin Be careful not to damage the external Cut this portion of the conductor outer sheath b Fix the nut washer gasket and clamp unto the coaxial cable as shown in the diagram to the right and unfasten the external f conductor Gasket Clamp c Cut the external conductor insulation Insulation material material and internal conductor to the Internal conductor dimensions shown in the diagram to the right HE ja However cut the external conductor to the nae mm pat NG same dimensions as those of the tapered iain npani Section of the clamp and smooth it down to external conductor the clamp d Solder the contact to th
201. Method m ns itansan taaa ana tara eaaa eed Pans sededi Aaa Saar aasan a iea Sait dna 8 4 8 3 Receiving Control Method cecceecceceeeeeeceeeeeeaecaeceeeeaeeaecaeceeeeaesaecaessaeeaesaesaeseaesaesaesaesaaesaesaeeeeeeaeeats 8 6 8 3 1 Receive processing with the main program dedicated instruction BUFRCV eeeeee 8 6 8 3 2 Receive processing with an interrupt program dedicated instruction BUFRCVS 0 8 8 8 4 Data Format ivcetey et eit ied ei yada ete de eed eid eel ee ine ee eed nies 8 10 8 5 Simultaneous Broadcast Using UDP IP ccccecceseeseceececeeseeeeceeeeeeeaecaeceeseeeeaesaesaeseaeeaesaeseeeeaesaeeeseaeeaees 8 11 8 5 1 Sending by simultaneous broadCasting ccccceccececeeseeeeceeceeeeaeseeceeseeeeaesaeseeseeesaeeeseeeeaesaeeeeseeeaees 8 11 8 5 2 Receiving by simultaneous broadcasting eeceeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeseeeseeeseeeseaeeeeeeeeteneaaes 8 13 8 5 3 Precautions when using the simultaneous broadcast fUNCTION ce eeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeeteeeeeeteeeteeeteees 8 16 8 6 Program Mini isis fateectia tected hewitt Nite ani tetas mates annie semis 8 17 8 6 1 Precautions when Creating PrOQrams cceceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeseeseeseeseeeseeseaeseeeseeseeteeaes 8 17 8 6 2 Fixed buffer communication program example with the no procedure control method 8 18 9 COMMUNICATION USING THE RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER 9 1 to 9 16 9 1 Control Method
202. N is selected in the operational setting When Operational setting Initial timing setting Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time is selected from GX Developer the open processing close processing is performed as explained below In this case sequence programs for open processing and close processing are not required because the Ethernet module keeps the connection in the always wait for the OPEN status according to the Open settings parameter setting For detail on the Open settings parameter see Section 5 5 Open Settings Parameter communication Open status Power on completed Open allowed status closed Active open acknowledge enabled Close status Initial normal completion x19 Open completion signal Address 5000 Open request signal Address 5002 SYN ACK FIN ACK ta t 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE 1 MELSEC Q After the parameters are sent the normal completion of the Ethernet module initial processing is confirmed Initial normal completion signal X19 ON After the initial processing is normally completed the connection is placed in the open allowed status and Ethernet module waits for an open request from the external device The Ethernet module starts the open processing upon receiving the open request SYN from the external device When the open processing is normally completed the open completion signal address 5000H
203. Normal completion System Other than 00001 Abnormal completion error code 2 Designate the error information to be cleared 0000 Initial abnormal code 00014 to 00164 Open abnormal code for the applicable connection Clearing target 0100 Error log block area as described designation 01014 Communication status status by each in the left protocol 0102 Communication status E mail receive status 0103 Communication status E mail send status FFFFu Clears all of the above e Designate the function to be cleared 0000s 0000x COM ERR LED off error code clear FFFFu User FFFFu Error log clear Clearing function designation 1 The Set by column indicates the following User Data set by the user before executing a dedicated instruction e System The PLC CPU stores the execution results of a dedicated instruction 2 For details on the error codes at abnormal completion see Section 11 3 Error Code List 10 14 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 10 15 MELSEC Q Functions 1 This instruction turns COM ERR LEDs off and clears error information listed below for the module designated by Un Target Function Error information to be cleared Target item re aes buffer memory e Initial abnormal code address 69 Interer o nitial error 0000x 00001 COM ERR LED off Open abnormal code for applicable Open error 00014 to 00161 0000x connection address 7Cu 86n COM ERR LE
204. OCEDURE EXIST CONTROL METHOD M400 M8000 M5000 M500 I50 sm400 19 MO M40 RSJ RS KF BPs M5000 HR 2 Breve uo K1 D5000 D500 M500 s O yo K2 D700 Receive program vo MOV G20480 K4MO v0 MOV 620482 KAM20 UO G20485 K4M40 Normal completion processing Abnormal completion processing FEND IRET MELSEC Q X19 Initial normal completion signal MO Connection 1 open completion signal M40 Connection 1 data receiving signal Read the open completion signal information Read the open request signal information Read the fixed buffer receiving status signal information Enable permit the execution of the interrupt program Fixed buffer No 1 receiving program Main program Change the receive data read command to pulse Execute receive data reading Perform the receiving normal completion processing Perform the receiving abnormal completion processing Fixed buffer No 2 receiving program Interrupt program Execute receive data reading 8 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE NO PROCEDURE CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q 8 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE NO PROCEDURE CONTROL METHOD This chapter explains how the PLC CPU and external device communicate using the fixed buffers with the no procedure control method of the Ethernet module The following points are difference overview from the Procedure exist when communicating using the fixed buffers 1 Iti
205. OFF Open completed for connection No 2 X11 JON Open complete signal Y11 OFF Open completed for connection No 3 X12 JON Open complete signal OFF Open completed for connection No 4 X13 JON Open complete signal Use prohibited eted for connection No 5 complete signal eted for connection No 6 X15 JON Open complete signal OFF Open completed for connection No 7 X16 ON Open complete signal Y16 OFF COM ERR LED Off request Y17 JON At off request rit p OFF Open completed for connection No 8 X17 JON Open complete signal OFF Open abnormal detection signal Section 18 JON Abnormal detection 56 Y18 Use prohibited Initial normal completion signal Section Initial request signal 19 ON Normal completion 51 Y19 JON At request OFF k OFF Initial abnormal completion signal A JON Abnormal completion BE Y1A OFF 3 B_ Use prohibited YiB C 1F O 9 7 ie X X E x lt ay is E nan 3 fe J D a 1 7 lt COM ERR LED lit confirmation 1 ON Lit See Section 11 1 eg OFF Off Use prohibited Watchdog timer error detection ON OFF x m X Watchdog timer error Important Among the input output signals for the PLC CPU do not output ON the signals marked with Use prohibited If any of the Use prohibited signals is output the PLC system may malfunction 1 The input output signals shown
206. OPEN Communication possible at STOP time is selected at Operational settings if there is a dedicated OPEN instruction from the Ethernet mudule open processing using the CLOSE instruction and close processing there is a need to perform all open processing and close processing after the relevant connection using the sequence program If Do not wait for OPEN Communication impossible at STOP time is selected there is a need to perform open processing and close processing in the same manner as a connection 2 When Do not wait for OPEN is selected in the operational settings Communications impossible at STOP time In this case the open processing and close processing in the sequence program shown in the next page are required Data transmission and reception are enabled after the open processing is normally completed Perform the open processing and close processing using the applicable dedicated instructions For more details see Chapter 10 Dedicated Instructions 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q lt lt Open processing for connection No 1 using the dedicated OPEN instruction gt gt direction m Set the control data to DO to D9 When setting the application of GX Developer in the Open settings Control data DO HO ZP OPEN UO Ki DO MO When setting the application of OPEN instruction in the Control data D0 H8000 Mo M Set D1 to
207. Passive open processing 5 52 Pairing open processing s es 5 63 l Open Settings si ccrihicinadivaduiaecdetcnieesileaseanlads 5 36 IGMP ie auinen aetas 1 15 Appendix 51 Pairing open settings eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 64 Improper aCCeSS rcn 5 68 Sending by simultaneous Initial processing 5 3 DrOAACASTING eee eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeteeeeeeaeeeaeeees 8 11 Initial setings oniar a 5 4 Index 2 Index 2 Receiving by simultaneous proadcastimii saaara 8 13 Open Syste ass apuesia iinitan 5 37 Operational settings ccceeeseeeeeeeee 4 19 P Pairing Open cc cceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeneeeeees 5 63 Parameter setting Setting item list eeeeeesteeeseeeeeeeeeees 3 9 Setting screen list cceeeseeeeeeeeees 4 13 Setting value recording sheets Appendix 52 Passive OPeN cceceeeeee 5 37 5 42 5 52 Physical address eeceeseeseeseeeeeeneeeeeees 9 15 POPS ut hi sbace cheval titans td 1 15 PONO m etic 5 40 5 41 Program example Open close processing Active 5 49 Open close processing Passive 5 57 Fixed buffer communication procedure exiSt a essessesresresrennrerneenns 7 18 Fixed buffer communication MO PrOCECUIe ogean in 8 18 Protool ie enoa ae ea N Aaaa 5 37 Q QEZ T eian a a a a a Appendix 4 QnA compatible 3E frames ceeee 6 2 R Re initial processing 5 9 Redundant System ccceeeeee 1 11 5 89 Related manuals
208. Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module MITSUBISHI Basic Mitsubishi Programmable Logic Controller QJ71E71 100 MELSEC Q QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 B2 e SAFETY PRECAUTIONS e Always read these instructions before using this equipment Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The instructions given in this manual are concerned with this product For the safety instructions of the programmable controller system please read the user s manual of the CPU module to use In this manual the safety instructions are ranked as DANGER and CAUTION N Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions O DANGER resulting in death or severe injury l CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions y resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage Note that the CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to the circumstances Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user Design Precautions lt DANGER e For details on the operating status of each station when a communication abnormality occurs in the data link see the manual for each data l
209. Q mode PLC CPU 3 Ethernet module error H W error 1 Check the contents of the error using the error codes stored by the error detection of the following processing and remove the causes Initial processing Turns on afiar pewerna n Fixed buffer send processing 3 COM ERR E mail send receive processing the Ethernet module 4 Open processing Data communication processing Other processing processing for which error codes are stored in the error log area 2 For a list of error codes see Section 11 3 Continues on the following page 11 2 11 2 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Continued from the previous page N LED name Status to check Cause corrective action 1 ERR or COM ERR LED turns on e Remove the factors that turn on the ERR or COM ERR LED 4 liso The SD LED does not flash 2 Poor cable connection 2 at data sending e Check the connection of the cable gt 3 Program reviewing is required Review the sequence program for sending 1 ERR or COM ERR LED turns on e Remove the factors that turn on the ERR or COM ERR LED 2 Poor cable connection e Check the connection of the cable 2 5 RD eee stays on and cata 3 Local station IP address setting error cannot be received S A A A s If the cable connection is all right review each setting value of the local station IP address router setting and sub net mask settings using GX Developer 4 Program reviewin
210. RE CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q Receive program X19 Initial normal completion signal MO Connection 1 open completion signal M40 Connection 1 data receiving signal SM400 vo MOV 620480 Kamo Read the open completion signal information vO Mov 620482 K4M20 Read the open request signal information u0 Mov 620485 K4M40 Read the fixed buffer receiving status signal information Fixed buffer No 1 receiving program m8000 x19 MO M40 Main program r F FS BO tris M5000 Change the receive data read command to pulse M5000 BR Ea uo K1 D5000 D500 M500 Execute receive data reading M500 M501 PEET REEE AEE STEE RE SINEP FEE uri ine ens etaar iik ae ene ense Normal completion processing Perform the receiving normal completion processing Perform the receiving abnormal completion processing 9 COMMUNICATION USING THE RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER MELSEC Q 9 COMMUNICATION USING THE RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER 9 1 Control Method This chapter explains how to communicate data between the Ethernet module and external devices using the random access buffer of the Ethernet module The communication function using the random access buffer and the e mail sending receiving function of the PLC CPU cannot be used together The communication function using the random access buffer and the e mail sending function of the PLC CPU monitoring function can however be used together This section explains the control method of random access buffer co
211. RECV instruction 4 Normal receiving count address 5873 e This address stores a cumulative count when the Ethernet module transferred received mails to the mail buffer data area 0 No mail is transferred 1 or more The number of normal mail transfer completions 5 Attached file receiving count address 5874 e This address stores a cumulative count of how many times the Ethernet module received mails with files attached 0 No receiving of mail with files attached 1 or more The number of normal completions of mail receiving with files attached Server inquiry count address 5875H e This address stores a cumulative count of inquiries made to the receiving mail server according to the parameter settings See Chapter 2 of the User s Manual Application 0 No inquiry is made to the server 1 or more Cumulative count of inquiries to the server 6 7 Server communication error count address 5876 This address stores a cumulative count of communication error occurrences that are returned when making inquiries to the receiving mail server 0 No communication error between servers or no inquiry has been made 1 or more Cumulative count of communication error occurrences 11 18 11 18 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 8 Error log write count address 58774 e This address stores a cumulative count of registrations made to the receiving error log block area 0 No error or no inquiry has b
212. RST M60 MO m f H 70 Normal receive of e mail M 2 Ha__Y _ _WYTYN YNNM HA Unsuccessful receive of e mail Af stove MAIL RECV OK D207 Text data normal A_ OOOO MAIL RECV NG D207 Text data abnormal MOVP H1000 D20 Specifies text WOP KI D22 Specifies transmission destination No MOVP K14 D29 Specifies transmission data length MOVP K7 D30 Specifies subject length MOVP E71 recv mail D200 Specifies subject M10 M11 M11 5 107 c ZP MSEND uo D20 D200 M0 Sends e mail 20 Normal completion a Unsuccessful completion When using reporting function Since a reporting mail may be sent from both the control system and standby system in either of the following conditions perform the processing that will discard the overlapping mail on the receive side personal computer 1 e When the CPU operation status is set to the reporting condition e When the device data set to the reporting condition is tracked x1 By setting the following SM devices as reporting conditions the system of the redundant system can be identified by a reporting mail and the devices can be used as conditions for identifying which system sent the overlapping mail e SM1511 System A identification flag e SM1512 System B identification flag e SM1515 SM1516 Operation system type 5 107 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE 7 Wh MELSEC Q en communication is made via MELSECNET H or MELSECNET 10
213. Reads data received in the fixed buffer using an interrupt program Section 10 3 BUFSND Sends data to the external device using the fixed buffer Section 10 4 For reading and clearing error information ERRCLR Clears the error turns off the COM ERR LED clears the error log Section 10 6 ERRRD Reads error information Section 10 7 For sending and receiving e mail MRECV Receives e mail Section 6 2 of User s Manual Application MSEND Sends e mail Section 6 3 of User s Manual Application For other station PLC communication instructions for data link For reading writing device data READ Reads word devices of other stations Section 6 4 of User s Manual Application SREAD Reads word devices of other stations with complete device Section 6 10 of User s Manual Application WRITE Writes to word devices of other stations Section 6 12 of User s Manual Application SWRITE Writes to word devices of other stations with complete device Section 6 11 of User s Manual Application ZNRD Reads word devices of other stations Section 6 13 of User s Manual Application ZNWR Writes word devices of other stations Section 6 14 of User s Manual Application For sending receiving messages arbitrary data SEND Sends data to other stations Section 6 9 of User s Man
214. SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION 4 1to 4 25 4 1 Loading and Installation ee eecceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeeeaeesaeesaeesaeesaeeaeesaeesaeesaeesaeeeseeseesieetieeseess 4 1 4 4 1 Handling precautions s siiic aia ee it ea ee ade ei et ele 4 1 41 2 Installation OnvirOnment s saenu era n EEE avec at di weet etna iv wed NETEN KAEN RETETE 4 2 4 2 Settings and Procedures Prior to Starting the Operation cccecceceececeeeeeeeeeceeeeesaeeeeeeaeeaeseeeeeeateaes 4 3 4 3 Components of the Ethernet MOCUIe c ccecceceeseeeeceeceeeeseeeeceeeeeesecaeseeeaesaesaeeeeeeaesaeseseaesaeeeeseeesateats 4 5 4 4 Connecting to the Network cceccescesececceceeeceeeeeeeaecaeceeeaseaeeaecaeeeaeeaesaeeeaseaeeaeseeeaseaesaeseeeaesaesaeseeeeaeeats 4 7 4 4 1 Connecting to the 10BASE T 100BASE TX network ccceceeeeeceeeceeeeeeseeceeseeeseeeeaeeaesaeseeeseeeeateas 4 8 4 4 2 Connecting to the 1OBASES network sssessssesssssssesrsssnsisrnsrsrnstsrusnstntustntnssnstununnnnnnnnnnannnnsnnnnnnnn 4 9 4 4 3 Connecting to the 10BASE2 network cccccecceceeeeeeeeeeceeceeeeaesaecaeeeeeaeeaesaeeseeseaesaeeaeseeeaeeaesaneateats 4 10 4 5 Settings from GX Developer ceccesceeccecceseeeeeeeceeeeeeeaecaeceeeeaesaecaeseaeeaeeaecaeeaaseaesaeseeseaesaecaesesaeeaeseneeaeeaes 4 12 4 5 1 I O assignment setting 2 ee cecceeeeteeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaecaecaeesaeeaecaecaeesaeeaecaessaseaecaesaeeeaeeaesaeeetaeeaeeeeseateaes 4 12 4
215. Select Unpassive or Full passive for the Open system setting under Open settings Communicating with UDP IP when using the user port Select Always wait for OPEN for the Initial Timing under the Operational Settings Data communication can also be done using the automatic open UDP port for the Ethernet module Start up MELSECNET H remote I O station Perform the open processing 1 When communicating using TCP IP always perform Active open from the external device The status of the Ethernet module side is Wait for open because of Passive open When communicating using UDP IP perform the open processing on the external device side The status of the Ethernet module side is Data communication enabled through internal processing Perform data communication After completing data communication perform the close processing 1 When communicating using TCP IP always perform the close processing from the external device The Ethernet module side performs the close processing at a request from the external device and its status becomes able to receive another open request When communicating using UDP IP perform the close processing for the external device The close processing on the Ethernet module side is not required 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS 2 7 Checking the Function Version and Serial No MELSEC Q This section explains the function version serial No and how to check them for re
216. Structure Structure of this manual 2 About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 1 1 1 2 1 3 Section 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 5 2 6 Section 3 1 3 2 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 2 Section 4 1 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 1 4 5 entire 4 5 1 Table 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 entire Section 5 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 5 5 5 6 entire 5 7 2 5 8 Chapter 6 entire Section 7 1 7 2 7 3 1 7 3 2 7 4 2 7 5 2 Chapter 8 Section 8 1 8 2 8 3 1 8 3 2 8 5 1 8 6 2 Section 9 2 3 Section 10 2 to 10 8 Chapter 11 Section 11 1 1 11 1 2 2 11 2 11 2 2 11 2 4 11 3 5 6 11 3 1 to 11 3 3 11 4 11 4 4 Appendix 1 entire Appendix 2 entire Appendix 3 Appendix 8 entire Appendix 11 Addition Entire manual add the explanation on MELSECNET H remote I O station The Manual s Usage and Structure 2 e Section 5 4 Section 11 2 11 2 1 11 2 3 11 3 1 error code 63H 11 3 3 error code 00631 C086H C087H CODAH CODBH C119H C200H to C2051 Jun 2001 SH NA 080009 C Added the description of the model QU71E71 100 Ethernet interface module Additional model QJ71E71 100 Correction Conformation to the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Instruction The Manual s Usage and Structure About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Product Configuration Section 1 2 1 3 1 4 Figure Section 2 1 2 2 2 3 POINT 2 4 2 5 2 7 Chapter 3 entire Section 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 7 4 8 1 Section 5 1 Figure 5 3 1
217. TION WITH THE PROCEDURE EXIST CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q 1 Confirm the normal completion of the initial processing 2 Confirm the normal completion of the open processing of connection No 1 3 Execute the dedicated BUFSND instruction The Ethernet module processes the following and sends the data e Writes the send data length and send data to the fixed buffer No 1 area Send data length The head address area of the target fixed address 1 Send data Area beginning from the head address of the target fixed buffer 1 1 The send data length denotes a word count 4 The size of send data in the fixed buffer No 1 area designated by the send data length is sent to the designated external device set in the open processing 5 Upon receiving the data from the Ethernet module the external device returns a Response to the Ethernet module 6 Upon receiving the Response from the external device the Ethernet module ends the data transmission If the Response is not returned within the response monitoring timer values see Section 5 2 a data send error occurs At normal completion e BUFSND instruction complete device ON e BUFSND instruction complete device 1 OFF e BUFSND instruction complete status area 2 OOOOH Response end code 3 OOH At abnormal completion e BUFSND instruction complete device ON e BUFSND instruction complete device 1 ON e BUFSND instruction complete stat
218. There is no received mail Failed to convert an e mail to be received An e mail was sent and an error mail was received from the mail server of the destination C11Cu Mail address not found The size of the attached file exceeded the allowable size 11 35 Error handling Designate an attached file on the sending side Check the program on the sending side When the sending source is the mail server sending with the previous MSEND instruction failed Check the destination of the MSEND instruction etc Check that the sending side has the same e mail specifications as the Ethernet module encode decode file format etc A server with unknown destination was received from the SMTP server Check on the sending side whether the extension of the attached file is bin or asc Check whether or not the mail is compressed or encrypted Check the destination of the MSEND instruction etc A server with unknown destination was received from the SMTP server Check that the sending side has the same e mail specifications as the Ethernet module encode decode file format etc Check the mail information storage area of the buffer memory address 2682 then read any received mail that is in the server Check whether or not the mail is compressed or encrypted Check that the sending side has the same e mail specifications as the Ethernet module encode decode file format etc Check whether or not the
219. U Signal direction Ethernet module PLC CPU Signal direction PLC CPU Ethernet module Device R Reference Device i Reference Signal name Signal name number section number section For fixed buffer communication of connection No 1 ON Sending normal completion or reception completion OFF For fixed buffer communication of connection No 1 ON Detection of sending error or reception error OFF For fixed buffer communication of connection No 2 ON Sending normal completion or reception completion OFF For fixed buffer communication of connection No 2 ON Detection of sending error or reception error OFF For fixed buffer communication of connection No 3 ON Sending normal completion or reception completion OFF For fixed buffer communication of connection No 3 ON Detection of sending error or reception error OFF For fixed buffer communication of connection No 4 ON Sending normal completion or reception completion OFF For fixed buffer communication of connection No 4 ON Detection of sending error or reception error OFF For fixed buffer communication of connection No 5 ON Sending normal completion or reception completion OFF For fixed buffer communication of connection No 5 ON Detection of sending error or reception error OFF For fixed buffer communication of connection No 6 XA ON Sending normal completion or reception completion OF
220. U reboot the QCPU PLC No 1 for a multiple CPU system reset using the RESET L CLR switch or power reset By rebooting the QCPU the remote password becomes valid Set the remote password check to only the connection to be used in data communication with the external device that can perform the unlock processing and lock processing Example The remote password check should not be set in the reception connection for receiving data transmitted from the MELSEC PLC CPU when communicating by fixed buffer A check mark should not be placed at the applicable connection on the Remote password detail settings screen shown in Section 5 9 5 The remote password check should not be set since the remote password check is not performed for the connection performing communication using a non procedure fixed buffer When the external device accesses the PLC other station via the Ethernet module it may not be able to access the PLC if a remote password has been set in the QCPU of the relay station or station to be accessed See Section 5 9 1 1 and 3 Precautions when performing UDP IP communication 1 Decide the external device that will be communicating Never perform data communication with a non specified external device 2 Use the Ethernet module existence confirmation function Also always perform the remote password lock processing when completing data communication x If the lock processing is not performed data communicati
221. U reboots When the initial processing is completed normally the INIT LED of the Ethernet module lights up 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q b Designating GX Developer connection destination connecting to QCPU 1 Serial NET IOH NETM CCLink Ethemet PLC AF SSC board board board board board board net abl Network No 1 Station No 3 Protocol TCP IE PLC MNET 10 H MNET II CC Link Ethernet C24 G4 Bus module module module module module module abl Network No T _ Station No fi Computer type QJ71E71 IP address Host 10 97 85 221 Routing parameter transfer method Others E Connection channel list No specification Other station Sinale network Other station Co existence network PLC direct coupled setting Time out Sec 30 Retry times fo Connection test E Z Pic ype Detail C24 NETO NETO _CC Lik__Ethemet 4 ate CPU setting Network No T Station No fI System image J J J J Line Connected Q ABTEL C24 1234 C24 NET 10 H NETI CCLink Ethernet Ok Accessing other station Target PLC os No Choice made Close c Executing the loop back test through GX Developer 1 Select the loop back test on the Ethernet diagnostics screen GX Developer gt Diagnostics Ethernet diagnostics Loop back test 2 Perform the settings indicated below then click the Execute button The execution results of the loop back
222. UNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q S400 U0 _R S nov G20480 K4MO Always ON Connection 1 open completion signal M6500 YJ A _Raa _ _ J J_ ser M2500 Re initial Re initial instruction instruction lt Set to Disable TCP segment trans gt M2500 X19 MO M1 U0 1 H move H8000 630 Re initial Connection 1 instruction open completion signal Initial Connection 2 lt Set to ASCII code communication gt normal open U0 completion completion SET G31 1 signal signal o KeepAlive gt U0 SET G31 4 o the Ethernet frame gt N U0 LRST G31 5 lt Set to Enable write at RUN time gt U0 SET G31 6 lt Set to Do not wait for OPEN gt R U0 LRST G31 8 lt Re initial instruction request gt SET G31 F RST M260 Initial completion status UO G31 F UO lt Processing upon normal completion gt W G105 HO e INCP D260 Initial error code storage area UO lt Processing upon abnormal completion gt KOJ G105 HO s AL D261 Initial error code storage area RST M2500 Re initial instruction X19 i a ApA a p p a pa p p_pap p Jpp pa p___ er M260 Initial normal Initial f completion signal completion status This is an example program that can be used to perform re initial processing when communicating with connections 1 and 2 The corresponding numbers and bits for each connection should be specified if other connections are used 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q
223. a connection in which the local station and the external device use a single port for each by pairing the receiving and sending connections through fixed buffer communication both the procedure exists and no procedure are allowed of the Ethernet module By designating the paring open method data communication can be performed with two connections by performing open processing for only one port Communications using the MC protocol and the random access buffers can also be performed using these paring opened connections The procedure for performing the open close processing for pairing open is explained below Example Ethernet module TCP IP or UDP IP communication Send data ion No 1 fi Connection o 1 fixed buffer Port Eweraal devies for receiving i Receive data Connection No 2 fixed buffer for sending 1 When setting the pairing open method the fixed buffer of the applicable connection number for receiving only and the fixed buffer of the immediately succeeding connection number for sending only are paired For the applicable connection for receiving only designate in ranges of connection No 1 to 7 and 9 to 15 The range of external devices that can be communicated by the pairing open method are limited to devices in the Ethernet to which the Ethernet module is connected and devices connected with the router relay function see Section 5 3 Router Relay Parameter By the open close processing of the
224. a length Receive data BUFRCVS Receive data Operation when the BUFRCVS instruction is being executed le Scan gt ENRE TEN END Interrupt program Instruction execution Sequence program BUFRCVS instruction Data receiving Receive data storage 2 The Z BUFRCVS instruction is used by the interrupt programs and its processing completes within one scan 3 In order to read receive data with an interrupt program it is necessary to perform both the interrupt settings and interrupt pointer settings with parameter settings of GX Developer 4 When reading receive data from the same connection this cannot be used together with BUFRCV instructions for main programs Errors 1 When the dedicated instruction is completed abnormally the error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO Refer to the following manuals regarding the error code check the errors and take corrective actions lt Error codes gt 4FFFH or less QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection COO0H or higher Section 11 3 3 of this manual 10 6 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Program example A program that reads receive data from the fixed buffer for connection number 2 When the input output signals of the Ethernet module are X Y00 to X Y1F zr J Enable permit the execution of the interrupt program lt lt Fixed buffer N
225. a multiple CPU system set the QCPU controlling the Ethernet module hereinafter referred to as the control CPU through GX Developer e It is possible to mount an Ethernet module of function version A on a multiple CPU system in which case the access is limited to the control PLC PLC No 1 6 1 5 Support for the QCPU remote password function When the following parameters have been set for the Ethernet module mounted on the QCPU the Ethernet module performs the remote password check when the external device accesses the PLC QCPU parameter settings e When a remote password is set in the QOPU When the connection that is communicating data with the external device is set as a target for the remote password check Section 5 9 of this manual explains the remote password subject to the password check data communication procedure and the unlock lock processing for the remote password Refer to Section 5 9 first if the connection that is communicating data with the external device is set as a target for the remote password check 6 COMMUNICATION USING THE MC PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 6 2 Utilizing the MX Component If the external device is a PC running one of the basic operation systems below it is possible to create a communication program for the external device without considering the detailed MC protocol transmission reception procedures using one of the following separately sold communication support tools Refer to Appendi
226. a stank eee a a Ce ra A Soe Ta ete oe ha a Ras 9 1 9 1 1 Control method by read requests from an external CEVICE ceccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeteteeeeeeenteaees 9 3 9 1 2 Control method by write requests from an external device ccccecceceeeeceeceeeeteeeeteeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeaees 9 4 Pa Data Foma sic uccaien duces iesaltenien siccaetsficcncen daceatecaucepiatonsenteedicsbish tases ee duidaus E eeeayts 9 5 9 2 1 T Le es winter lure ete at eae et ee te ate eae 9 5 Q 2 2 Applicaton dala hari na an anA c asda gay nace Tava deck vat ea cea ENA nah cada datceadiaaieesnaduicediastjcasnaduieedfietitenaduicests 9 6 9 2 3 Examples of the command response formats cccceeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeenaeeeaeeeaeeeaeenas 9 11 9 3 Physical and Logical Addresses of the Random Access Buffer cece eee teeter seen te eeeeeeeeae 9 15 9 4 Precautions when Creating Programs cccceccecceseseeceeceeeeeeeaeeaeeeeeeaecaeceeseeeeaesaeseeseaesaeeaeseeseaesaneateaeeaees 9 16 i0 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 10 1 to 10 26 10 1 Dedicated Instruction List 00 cece eeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseaeseaeseeeseaeeeaesaeseaeseaeseaeeeaeesaeeaeeeaeeeaeeeateeas 10 1 102 BUFRO V HSU O a area ara e aa araa iat a A a Te Aaaa aa Aaa aecaiwiveth adeeiee ss eeth eater ind 10 2 10 3 BUFRCVS Instr UGtiON i scianie aiei ae aaa aaa aaa aaa aaae aa a aa 10 5 10 4 BUF SND SEO aae a r a aaa e r a a a a aa a a aa ae a naa aE a a 10
227. al code storage area buffer memory address 125 135 corresponding to the fixed buffer of the buffer memory and check whether or not a communication error has occurred Has a communication error occurred NO Fix the error according to the error code see Section 11 3 NO Correct the IP address of the external device Match the protocol with the communication protocol TCP UDP of the external device For details see Section 5 5 Is the parameter IP address of the external device correct communication protocol TCP UDP match that of the external device 11 45 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Correct the execution condition of the BUFSND instruction Check that the send receive NO processing using input output signals and the dedicated BUFSND or BUFRCYV instruction are not executed simultaneously in the same connection If so modify the program Was the dedicated BUFSND instruction executed YES Fix the error according to the NO abnormal code see Section 11 3 in the BUFSND instruction complete status area Did the BUFSND instruction complete normally Is the send data length set in the control data Write the data length Check the communication status of the external device Does the external Fix the faulty part of the external device operate device If the receiving side is also an nor
228. al no procedure communication using the fixed buffers For more details see Section 8 3 8 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE NO PROCEDURE CONTROL METHOD The following flowchart illustrates an outline of the Ethernet module s internal MELSEC Q processing when data is received by simultaneous broadcasting in the no procedure control method Data receiving The values designated in the buffer memory addresses On to 1H and 28h to 5Fx are used for the IP addresses and port numbers of the local station s Ethernet module as well as those of external devices IP address of the local station s Ethernet module IP address of receive data request source NO YES Is the network address sub net address in the IP address of the local station s Ethernet module the same as the network address sub net address of the receive data and are all bits of the host address in the receive data 1 NO YES NO 1 Destination IP address FFFFFFFFu Destination IP address NO request source IP address of the receive data YES Simultaneous Broadcasting YES NO Destination Port No FFFFu NO Destination Port No request source port number of the receive data YES Simultaneous Broadcasting Store the application data of the receive data in the fixed buffer Turn on the fixed buffer receive completion signal addres
229. am its execution environment and the contents of data communication 1 Execution environment of the program example a PLC CPU side 1 QCPU model name of the Ethernet installed station Q25HCPU 2 Ethernet module I O signal X Y000 to X YO1F 3 Ethernet module IP address C0 00 01 FDH 192 00 01 253 4 Ethernet module port number 2000H 5 GX Developer setting e Operational settings See 3 GX Developer setting a on the next page e Open settings See 3 GX Developer setting b on the next page b External device side 1 Operation environment Microsoft Windows 95 operating system 2 Ethernet interface board model name WINSOCK compatible board 3 Library WSOCK32 LIB 4 Software development environment Microsoft Corporation Visual Ct Version 4 0 5 Ethernet address Setting not required because the ARP function is available 6 IP address Receive at Active open 7 Port number Receive at Active open c Communication protocol TCP IP 2 Outline of the program example a Sequence program on the PLC CPU side Parameters are set from GX Developer Sequence program is not required b Program on the external device side Executes the following read write data communication with the PLC CPU using the library mentioned above e Write in word units for 5 points from DO to D4 e Read in word units for 5 points from DO to D4 App 21 App 21 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 3 GX Develo
230. ame In this case perform the test again after terminating the data communication between other devices 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 8 2 Hardware test H W Test This section explains the RAM and ROM tests for the Ethernet module The procedure for the hardware test is as shown in the table below The test results are judged from the LED displays on the front of the Ethernet module Status of LED Step Description of operation re RUN EFE EE 1 StopacPu 2 Select Setting the Number of MNET 10H Ethernet Cards Mode to choose a ae eae ce EE test and save the parameter values in the PLC CPU See Section 4 6 Reset QCPU Reset QCPU Teststats SY starts Check status of each LED after 5 seconds Error Select Setting the Number of MNET 10H Ethernet Cards Mode change 5 the mode to Online or another test mode and save the parameter values in the PLC CPU See Section 4 6 6 amp 6 Reset QCPU The following are probable causes of errors e Ethernet module RAM ROM error An error code is stored in the error log area address E5x in the buffer memory of the Ethernet module the error content can then be checked from GX Developer See Sections 11 2 and 11 3 If the result of the hardware test shows an error conduct the test again If this test result also shows an error the hardware of the Ethernet module may be faulty Please consult the nearest
231. anged Success transmissions The number of successes and the total packet transmission count when the PING test is performed are displayed 5 25 5 25 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 5 4 2 PING test using GX Developer Via CPU This section explains how to check the completion status of the initial processing for the Ethernet module using the PING test function of GX Developer s Ethernet diagnostics 1 PING test a The PING test is used to check the existence of an Ethernet module on the same Ethernet line as the connection station of GX Developer that has completed the initial processing 1 or an external device Such as a personal computer with the designated IP address 1 The PING test can also be performed for the QnA A Series Ethernet modules However the PING test can be performed for the following A Series Ethernet modules starting with software version S AJ71E71 AJ71E71 B2 AJ71E71 B5 The following items can be checked by performing the PING test for the Ethernet module e Whether a line has been properly connected to the test target Ethernet module Whether the parameters for the Ethernet module have been correctly set e Whether the initial processing for the Ethernet module has been completed normally The PING test can be performed for an Ethernet module on the same Ethernet as that of the local station same sub net address Note that the PING test is not available for the Ethern
232. anual Application 4000 to 4FFF Open complete signal 0 Open incomplete 1 Open completed Connection No 1 b0 Section 5 6 e Connection No 2 b1 to e Connection No 16 b15 20481 50011 System area information area Open request signal 0 No open request 20482 1 Open being requested 5002 Connection No 1 b0 Section 5 6 H Connection No 2 b1 to Connection status Connection No 16 b15 20483 to 20484 storage area Pierre 5003 to 50041 y area En Fixed buffer reception status signal 0 Data not received 1 D i i 20485 Fixed buffer ata being receveg 50051 information area Connection Ne 1 10 x Chapter 7 H e Connection No 2 b1 to e Connection No 16 b15 En Remote 1 Lock status password status Connection No 1 b0 storage area Connection No 2 b1 to e Connection No 16 b15 20486 50061 Remote password status Section 5 9 0 Unlock status no remote password setting Continues on the next page PECIFICAT 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Continued from the previous page GX Developer Initial value f Reference Decimal Application setting Hexadecimal Riera section Hexadecimal applicability Remote password status 0 Unlock status no remote password setting 20487 Remote 1 Lock status 50071 password status Automatic open UDP port b0 x storage area GX Developer UDP port b1 GX Developer TCP port b2 System
233. anual In this manual explanations are given for each application of the Ethernet modules QJ71E71 100 QU71E71 B5 and QU71E71 B2 Please use this manual using the following key items below as a reference 1 To find out about the features and utility lists a To find out about the features and functions e Chapter 1 describes the features of the Ethernet modules e Chapter 3 describes the common functions and specifications of the Ethernet modules b To find out about the packaged items and network configured items e The section prior to Chapter 1 Product Configuration describes the items that are supplied together with the Ethernet module e Section 2 2 describes the system configuration of the Ethernet module Parts and components other than those packaged with the module must be purchased separately by the user 2 To find out about the processing required prior to starting the operation of the Ethernet module a To find out about the startup procedure e Section 4 2 describes an outline of the procedures prior to starting the operation of the Ethernet module b To find out about the connection to the Ethernet network system e Section 2 2 describes the devices required to connect to the Ethernet network system e Section 4 4 describes the connection methods for each type of interface c To find out about the parameter settings required prior to starting the operation of the Ethernet module e Section 4 5 describes the
234. area x2 Value other than 0000H x2 The status at completion is stored in the complete status area of the dedicated instructions For details on the dedicated instructions see Chapter 10 Dedicated Instructions 1 The destination setting see Section 5 5 for a connection whose parameters 2 are set with GX Developer becomes valid when the open completion signal address 5000 corresponding bit of the Ethernet module switches from off to on Execute the BUFRCV instruction when the corresponding connection s bit in the fixed buffer receive status signal storage area address 5005H of the buffer memory switches from off to on 3 At abnormal data receiving the fixed buffer receive completion signal address 5005H b0 does not turn on In addition data is not stored in the fixed buffer No 1 area 8 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE NO PROCEDURE CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q 8 3 2 Receive processing with an interrupt program dedicated instruction BUFRCVS This section explains about the receive processing when an interrupt program is used When an interrupt program is set up to handle the receive processing the interrupt program starts up when data is received from an external device and reading the receive data destined for the PLC CPU is enabled In order to start up the interrupt program set the parameters using GX Developer 1 Setting screen Set the following parameters using GX Develope
235. as the transmission count Time of the communication time check 1 s Normal Normal Abnormal Normal GX Developer response response response response Ethernet line Ethernet module Normal response occurs when the PING test response is received within the time of the communication time check Number of transmissions 4 times x Success transmissions 3 4 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE PING test screen via CPU MELSEC Q PING test PING test Input item Input item Connection Setup Connection Setup Execute station of PING Execute station of PING Network No 1 Station No 2 Network No 1 Station No 2 Target of PING Padd i Target of PING Pad F address input form address input form IPaddress f0 9 85 221 DEC C HEX IPaddress 10 97 85 221 DEC HEX Option specification Option specification Default Default Specify the time of the communication time 1 seconds Specify the time of the communication time 1 seconds Specify the number of transmissions Specify the number of transmissions Specify the number of times si 4 times Specify the number of times hal 4 times Result Result Pinging 10 97 85 221 Pinging 10 97 85 221 Success Timeout Success Tea Timeout ae Success Timeout Success Timeout Packets transmitted 4 Received 4 Lost 0 Packets transmitted 4 Received 0 Lost 4 success transmissions 4 4 Close success transmissions of 4 Close Example of normal completio
236. ata 3 amp amp idata 4 Else MsgBox Read Error amp Hex rtn End If End Sub App 48 App 48 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Private Sub Commands3_Click t KKK K K K K K K K K ok K K K Ok K K K K Disconnection t KKK K K K K K K K K K K ok K K K K K K Dim rtn As Long Disconnection rtn ActEasylF1 Close If rtn 0 Then MsgBox The disconnection was successful Else MsgBox Disconnection Error amp Hex rtn End If End Sub b When Visual C is used IL X K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K Connection IL X K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K void CVCDIg OnOpen long IRet CString szMessage UpdateData Get LogicalStationNumber m_actEasylF SetActLogicalStationNumber m_lILogicalStationNumber Connection IRet m_actEasylF Open if IRet 0 MessageBox The connection was successful else szMessage Format Connection Error x IRet MessageBox szMessage App 49 App 49 APPENDIX MELSEC Q IL X K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K Read LL X K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K void CVCDlg OnRead long IRet short sData 5 CString szMessage DO D4 are read IRet m_actEasylf ReadDeviceBlock2 DO 5 sData if IRet 0 szMessage Format D0 D5 d d d d d sData 0 sData 1 sData 2 sData 3 sData 4 MessageBox szMessage else szMessage Format Read Error x IRet
237. ataB sizeof hostdataB SOCK_OK Bind System A qj71e71B sin_family AF_INET qj71e71B sin_port scB qj_port qj71e71B sin_addr s_addr scB qj_addr s_ addr App 35 App 35 APPENDIX MELSEC Q if connect socketnoB LPSOCKADDR amp qj71e71B sizeof qj71e71B SOCK_OK Connect Active open System B ShutdownflagB FLAG_ON Shutdown flag ON CloseflagB FLAG_ON Connection end flag ON Set to non blocking mode ulCmdArgB 1 ioctlsocket socketnoB FIONBIO amp ulCmdArgB Set to non blocking mode for System B connection else ConnectLastErrorB ERROR_CONNECT Connection establishment failure else ConnectLastErrorB ERROR_BIND Bind failure else ConnectLastErrorB ERROR_SOCKET Socket creation failure Connect completion processing if CloseflagA FLAG_OFF amp amp CloseflagB FLAG_OFF When both systems are abnormal Sockerror ConnectLastErrorA ConnectLastErrorB Error handling return SOCK_NG strcpy s_buf SO0000FFO3D000002C000A1 4010000D 00000000051 12233445566778899AA DO D4 batch write request 3E frame addressed to control system length strlen s_buf printf Send starts Press any key n Dmykeyin getchar Waiting for key input SendFlag FLAG_OFF Send completion flag OFF System A send processing if CloseflagA FLAG_ON amp amp SendFlag FLAG_OFF if send socketnoA s_buf lengt
238. ation IP address Destination Port No No 2 to No 16 Total number of receives Total number of Sum check error IP packet annulments Total number of sends Total number of receives Total number of Sum check error annulments Total number of sends Total number of echo request receives ICMP packet Total number of echo reply sends Total number of echo request sends 11 10 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 1A44 to 1A5x ICMP packets 1B81 to 1B9H 442 to 443 1BAu to 1BB 444 to 445 1BC1 to 1BD 472 to 473 1D8n to 1D9n 474 to 475 1DAn to 1DBy 476 to 477 1DC to 1DD x 20480 5000x x1 22560 to 22639 58204 to 586F H 22640 5870 22641 58714 22642 58724 22643 5873n 22644 5874n 22645 5875n 22646 5876n 22647 5877 n 22649 5879n 22650 587A n 22651 to 22658 587Bu to 5882n 22659 to 22662 5883 n to 58861 22663 to 22692 5887 n to 58A4n 22693 to 23352 58A5 x to 5B38x 23353 5B39 23354 23355 23356 23357 23358 23359 5B3F n 23361 5B41 n 23362 5B42 n 23363 to 23370 5B3A H 5B3B H 5B3C H 5B3D H 5B3E H 23371 to 23374 23375 to 23404 23405 to 23712 11 11 5B43 4 to 5B4A x 5B4B x to 5B4E x 5B4F n to 5B6C 1 5B6D n to SCAOn Total number of echo reply ICMP packet A receives Received TCP packet count Total number of receives Received TCP packet count discarded due to sum check
239. ation data However when greater reliability must be maintained a user application or the TCP should be utilized IP Internet Protocol Communication data is sent and received in datagram format Communication data can be divided and reassembled e Routing option is not supported ARP Address Resolution Protocol e This protocol is used to get the Ethernet physical addresses from the IP addresses ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol e This protocol is used to exchange errors occurred on an IP network and various information related to the network e Provides a function to transmit IP error messages e See Appendix for information regarding the option support type ICMP protocol FTP File Transfer Protocol e This protocol is used to transfer files e Can upload and download PLC CPU files DNS Domain Name System e This system translates IP addresses to names that are easy to remember by the user SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol e This protocol transfers mails POPS Post Office Protocol Ver 3 e This protocol transfers mails received by a mail server to a local computer 10 HTTP Hyper Text Transfer Protcol 1 15 e This protocol is used to perform data communication for world wide web of the internet 1 15 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS MELSEC Q 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS This section explains the system configurations that may be combined with the Ethernet modules 2 1 Applicable Sys
240. ay Parameter sisne teh cies ong hues ded cadet occ cae oudenecs dua cgiesdudsduss ous aates RRR S 5 16 5 4 Confirming the Completion of the Initial Processing cecceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeceeeeaeeaesaeeeeeeaeeeseeseeeeates 5 21 5 4 1 PING test using GX Developer Via Ethernet bDoard cccecceseeeeeeeeeceeseeeseeeeseeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaees 5 21 5 4 2 PING test using GX Developer Via CPU ccccecceceeeeeeeceeceeeeseceeceeseeeeaesaeseeseeeeaeeaeseeseaeseeaeseeeeees 5 26 5 4 3 Loop back test using GX Developer eccecceseeeeeeeeeeeeseeseceeeeeeeaesaecaeseeeeaesaeseeseeeeaesaeseeseaeeaeeneaeeaees 5 29 5 4 4 PING command Personal computer gt Ethernet module ccccccccceseseesecseeseeeseeseseeseseseeaes 5 34 5 4 5 Loop back test Communication using the MC protocol csccecceceeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeneeaees 5 35 5 5 Open Settings a mesa renan ae n are tae Redeye neh dane Naaa ie aan la tae vay tena gtr fend atin dee eet tee 5 36 5 6 Open Processing Close Processing of the CONNECTION ecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaesaeseeeeaetaeeaeeeeeeaes 5 43 5 6 1 Active open processing close processing cseceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeteeeeateaees 5 45 5 6 2 Passive open processing close processing eeceeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeseeeseeeseeeteeeeeeeeeeteats 5 52 5 6 3 UDP IP open processing cloSe processing ccsecceeceeecee
241. b function MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communication Communication using data link instructions File transfer FTP server function GX Developer TCP communication gt GX Developer UDP communication 1 2 3 Data communication NOIreimote FaN check Remote password check setting gt 1 setting Communication is possible after the open processing is completed Communication is possible after the initial processing is completed Communication is possible after the open processing is completed Remarks After the open processing is completed communication is allowed from the time the unlock command is received until the lock command is received After the initial processing is completed communication is allowed from the time the unlock command is received until the lock command is received After the open processing is completed communication is allowed from the time the unlock command is received until the lock command is received Communication is allowed after the open processing is completed gt 2 Since the remote password check is not performed in non procedure communication the remote password check is not set for the connection used After the open processing is completed communication is allowed from the time the unlock command is received until the lock command is received See Section 3 18 of the Reference Manual for the unlock and lock commands After t
242. buffer if the data length setting is less than the actual data count the remaining data is determined as the second data and processed In this case a subheader undefined command type error may occur In communication using the random access buffer the head address designated by an external device is set outside the range from 0 to 6143 In communication using the random access buffer head address data word count depending on the setting when reading designated by an external device exceeds the range from 0 to 6143 Data for the designated word count text cannot be sent in one frame The value of the data length and amount of text communicated are not in the allowable range When ASCII code communication is selected in Operational settings Communication data code with GX Developer ASCII code data that cannot be converted to binary code was received from an external device When Operational setting Enable Write at RUN time is set to disable no check mark with GX Developer an external device requests to write data while the PLC CPU is in the RUN status An external device requests writing a parameter sequence program or microcomputer program while the PLC CPU is in the RUN status Not related to the settings in Operational settings at RUN time with GX Developer Enable Write Random Random access buffer communication Check and correct command response type set by an external
243. buffer struct sck_inf scA scB struct sockaddr_in hostdataA hostdataB External device side data struct sockaddr_in qj71e71A qj71e71B Ethernet module side data BOOL DataRecv int unsigned char int Receive processing function void Sockerror int int Error handling function unsigned long ulCmdArgA ulCmdArgB Non blocking mode setting flag scA my_addr s_addr scB my_addr s_addr htonl INADDR_ANY External device side IP address scA my_port scB my_port htons 0 External device side port number scA qj_addr s_addr inet_addr 192 0 1 252 Ethernet module side IP address System A C00001FCh scB qj_addr s_addr inet_addr 192 0 1 253 Ethernet module side IP address System B C00001FDh scA qj_port scB qj_port htons 0x2000 Ethernet module side port number ShutdownflagA ShutdownflagB FLAG_OFF Shutdown flag OFF CloseflagA CloseflagB FLAG_OFF Connection end flag OFF nErrorStatus WSAStartup wVersionRequested amp wsaData Winsock initial processing ConnectLastErrorA ERROR_NO_ ERROR Connect processing error information initialization for System A ConnectLastErrorB ERROR_NO_ERROR Connect processing error information initialization for System B if nErrorStatus SOCK_OK Sockerror ERROR_INITIAL ERROR_INITIAL Error handling return SGOCK_NG printf Winsock Version is 1d 1d n HIBYTE wsaData wVersion LOBYTE wsaData wVersion printf
244. ceiving if length 0 Is connection cut off Sockerror ERROR_RECIEVE Error handling return SOCK_NG App 27 App 27 APPENDIX if length SOCKET_ERROR nErrorStatus WSAGetLastError if nErrorStatus WSAEWOULDBLOCK Sockerror ERROR_RECIEVE return SOCK_NG else continue else rouf_idx length recv_size length if recv_size gt RECV_ANS_2 break r_buf rbuf_idx 0 printf receive data n s n r_buf if shutdown socketno 2 SOCK_Ok Sockerror ERROR_SHUTDOWN return SOCK_NG if closesocket socketno SOCK_Ok Sockerror ERROR_CLOSE return SOCK_NG Closeflag FLAG_OFF WSACleanup printf nAJ_test End n n Normally completed n printf Press any key to exit the program n Dmykeyin getchar return SOCK_OkK void Sockerror int error_kind if error_kind ERROR_INITIAL printf Initial processing is abnormal App 28 MELSEC Q Error handling Repeat until messages are received Update the receive data storage position Update the number of receive data Have all response messages been received Stop repeating as messages have been received Set NULL at the end of receive data Processing to disable sending receiving Error handling Close processing Error handling Connection completion flag off Release Winsock DLL
245. cess buffers 6 To find out how to check for error occurrences and take corrective actions a To find out about the contents of the error codes e Chapter 11 describes troubleshooting how to check for errors and contents and reference manual of error codes b To find out about the storage area of the error codes in the buffer memory of the Ethernet module e Section 11 3 describes the error code storage areas in the buffer memory 7 To learn about functions that have been added to function version B and later e Section 1 3 provides the added function list and detailed explanation manual e Appendix 1 1 provides the comparison of the Ethernet module functions Structure of this manual 1 Setting parameters with GX Developer a Using GX Developer to set parameters the sequence programs for communicating with external devices can be simplified in the Ethernet module b In this manual parameter settings using GX Developer are explained as follows 1 Section 4 5 describes the types of setting screens objectives of settings items and an outline of settings 2 Details are explained in the detailed explanatory sections on the screens or in the text in Section 4 5 c Confirm the required parameters and set them according to the relevant explanatory section or manual and save the values in the PLC CPU to which the Ethernet module is installed 2 Setting screen of GX Developer This manual explains the parameter sett
246. ching occurs For the RTWRITE instruction refer to the QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions Request source station Ethernet Network parameter setting Transfer destination Relay destination Relay destination network No network No station No Change using module Station No 3 Standby system Ethernet QnPRH module CPU Station No 1 RTWRITE instruction Control system Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet module QnPRH module module Station CPU Station Station No 1 No 2 No 2 Network No 1 5 108 Request destination station Ethernet module Station No 3 QCPU 5 108 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 8 When QCPU accesses other station PLC using data link instruction Redundant system compatible data link instructions a 1 2 By specifying the target station CPU type of the control data in any of the following data link instructions access can be made to the control system standby system or system A system B Refer to Chapter 4 or Chapter 6 of the User s Manual Application for the data link instructions e READ SREAD instruction e WRITE SWRITE instruction e REQ instruction Operation performed for access to control system standby system or system A system B Example of executing the READ instruction Since the received command is addressed to the control system CPU target
247. ck that the Ethernet module s mail was received address is set correctly Illegal mail box name Could not close the SMTP server System error e The OS detected any error C13Bx 11 36 11 36 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code abnormal code Description of error Could not open the POPS server Cannot communicate with the POP3 server Error response Cannot communicate with the POP3 server Abort Cannot communicate with the POP3 server Reset response C1411 C1424 C143 C1444 Could not receive a response from the POPS server Error handling Check that the port number of the POP3 server 110 For the Ethernet module this is fixed to 110 Check whether or not it is possible to communicate with the POPS server using the Ping command Check if the POP3 server is busy Check if the POP3 server is busy Check if the POP3 server is busy Check whether or not the POPS server is faulty Check whether or not there is too much load on the network MELSEC Q Storage destination Connection E mail log Dedicated instruction C145 Forcefully disconnected from the Check whether or not the POP3 server is of POP3 server faulty Could not close the POPS server C146 C147 Closing the POP3 server gave an Check whether or not the POP3 server is error response faulty e Check the status of the POP3 server C150x POPS server verification error The Ethernet
248. connecting to the same ports of an Ethernet module External device external device set multiple port number for the i Ethernet module However it is necessary to QO open a connection for each Ethernet module port Ethernet module External device Setting multiple ports numbers for the same port F T of an external device and the Ethernet module is possible only when paring open is set Important Parameters for connections that communicate by Passive open and UDP open must always be set from this screen when Always wait for OPEN communication possible at STOP time is selected in the Operational settings see Section 4 7 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q Set parameters according to the open method to be used for open connection Communication system TCP open system ARP function of ARP function of external device Un passive Full passive external device Parameter Communication address Ethernet address 3 1 Use the default value FFFFFFFFFFFF or 0 x 2 When using the Open settings of GX Developer the default value is used When communicating with an external device without the ARP function use the dedicated OPEN instruction and set the external device s Ethernet address in the control data 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 5 6 Open Processing Close Processing of the Connection This section explains the open processing close processing using sequence programs 1 Open proc
249. constant intervals and up to 960 words of data can be sent by either of the following methods when the notification conditions are satisfied 1 Sending data as an attached file 2 Sending data as main text Internet Public dial up line gt a 2 m N t z 6 a Local station Ethernet module E mail sending receiving STMT Internet service provider _ TTT External device 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 5 Communication by the Web function Details are explained in the User s Manual Web function With communication using the Web function the system administrator can monitor a Q Series CPU at a remote location via the Internet using a commercially available Web browser a By setting up a communication library in the Web server data communication with the PLC can be performed A sample screen to be displayed by a Web browser is also available for your use Contact your local agency or marketing company A Web server and a Web browser are required to use the Web function Basic operating systems e Microsoft Windows 2000 Server Operating System Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows NT Server Network Operating System Version 4 0 Microsoft Windows NT Worksta
250. correct resent count was e Correct the designated value of the C1ACu f designated resent count Correct the designated value of the data length Correct the designated values of Incorrect mail sending receiving data sending receiving data length and length and header length were header length designated Sending receiving data length should be equal or longer than the header length C1ADu Incorrect data length was designated C1AFu The open processing of the C1B0u designated connection is already completed The open processing of the designated connection has not been Execute the open processing completed The OPEN CLOSE instruction is being executed in the designated connection Another sending receiving instruction e Change the channel number C1B3x is being executed on the designated Execute after the sending receiving channel instruction is completed C1B4n Incorrect arrival time was designated i ee Watchdog mer within the proper EH Data could not be received within the e Review the designated value of the C1B5n designated watchdog time watchdog timer Review the designated value of the mail Incorrect mail destination number designation number was designated Review the sending mail address setting parameter Execute the open processing after executing the close processing Execute after the OPEN CLOSE instruction is completed 11 38 11 38 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q
251. cretion Microsoft Windows Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Netscape is a registered trademark of Netscape Communication Corporation in the United States and other countries Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporation Pentium and Celeron are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Co Ltd in the United States Other company names and product names used in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of respective owners Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Basic MODEL QJ71E71 U KI E MODEL 13JL88 SH NA 080009 1 0406 MEE a MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE 1 8 12 OFFICE TOWER Z 14F HARUMI CHUO KU 104 6212 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
252. ction 6 14 ZNWR Instruction Related Manual 2 Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Web function 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 Overview 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS 2 1 System Configurations 2 2 Precautions for Using the Web Function 3 OPERATING PROCEDURE 3 1 General Procedure up to Communication Using the Web Function 3 2 How to Obtain and Set Up the Communication Library and the Sample Screen 4 VERIFYING THE OPERATION OF THE WEB FUNCTION USING A SAMPLE SCREEN 4 1 Web Function Items Available on the Sample Screen 4 2 Operating Procedure 4 3 Explanation of the Sample Screen 4 4 Example of Data Communication on the Sample Screen 4 5 Configurations of Files on the Sample Screen 5 EXAMPLE OF CREATING A FILE FOR ACCESSING THE PLC 6 COMMUNICATION LIBRARY FUNCTIONS SH 080180 B Related Manual 3 Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 Overview of the MELSEC Communication Protocol 1 2 Features of the MELSEC Communication Protocol 2 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MELSEC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL 2 1 Types and Applications of Data Communication Frames 2 2 Accessible Range of Each Data Communication Frames 2 3 How to Read the Control Procedures of the MC Protocol 2 4 Access Timing of the PLC CPU Side 2 5 Setting Method for Writing to the PLC CPU during RUN 2 6 Accessing Other Stations 2 7 Precautions on Data Communication 2 8 Time Chart and Communication Time of th
253. ction SS execution Execution result of ZNWR instruction per channel Chapter 4 of Application 210 to 223 D2 to DF System area Continues on the next page About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations This manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations to describe the Model QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 and QJ71E71 B2 Ethernet interface modules unless otherwise specified Generic Term Abbreviation Description Generic term for ANNCPU AnACPU and AnUCPU Generic term A2ACPU A2ACPU S1 A2ZACPUP21 R21 A2AACPUP21 R21 S1 A3ACPU ASACPUP21 R21 Generic term A1NCPU A1NCPUP21 R21 A2NCPU A2NCPU S1 A2NCPUP21 R21 AANCPUP21 R21 S1 ASNCPU ASNCPUP21 R21 Generic term for A2UCPU AZUCPU S1 AZASCPU A2ASCPU S1 ASUCPU and A4UCPU Ethernet Address A machine specific address that is also referred to as the MAC Media Access Control address This is used to identify the addresses of external devices over a network The Ethernet address of the Ethernet module can be verified on the MAC ADD column of the rating plate Ethernet module Abbreviation for Model QJ71E71 100 QU71E71 B5 and QU71E71 B2 Ethernet Interface Modules Described as the Ethernet module or E71 in the figures Ethernet network system Abbreviation for 1OBASE2 10BASE5 10BASE T and 100BASE TX network systems External device Generic term for personal computers computers workstations WS and
254. ctioning When the Ethernet module is replaced reset the external device as well If the external device retains the Ethernet address it may be impossible to continue the communication because a module is replaced and the Ethernet address changes In the same may when the external device personal computer etc is replaced restart the Ethernet module 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 3 Components of the Ethernet Module This section shows the components of the Ethernet module QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 B2 RUN E RUN E QJ71E71 100 RUN EPR RR RR 1 gt INIT COM ERR 1 gt INIT COM ERR 1 gt INIT COM ERR OPEN 100M OPEN OPEN SD RD SD RD SD RD AL SB CN 10BASE T 100BASE TX 3 gt fopase 5 a 16 O O 12 12V 12G QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 EXT POWER QU71E71 B2 Pf Name U UO Description LED display Refer to the contents of the LED displays 1 0BASE T 1 00BASE TX Connector for connecting the Ethernet module to the 10BASE T 1 CORRE connector RJ45 1 Ethernet module discriminate between 10BASE T and 100BASE TX according to the hub Connector for connecting the Ethernet module to the 10BASE5 3 for connecting AUI cable transceiver cable of 10BASE5 Connector for connecting the Ethernet module to the 10BASE2 for conn
255. cuting the dedicated OPEN instruction 2 Once open processing is executed an open request cannot be canceled before the open processing completes Perform close processing CLOSE instruction after the open processing has completed 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q Program example 1 E Network parameter Ethernet open setting Module No 1 iof x communication open confirmation Port No IP address No This example explains a program for open processing close processing when Unpassive open is selected in the open system setting Execution environment for the program example a The Ethernet module is installed in the 0 slot of the basic base unit b The Network Parameters Setting the number of MNET 10H Ethernet cards settings are assumed to have been set using GX Developer as follows e Network type Ethernet e Starting I O No 0000 e Network No zal Group No 1 e Station No 2 c The Operational settings parameters are assumed to have been set using GX Developer as follows Ethernet operations x Communication data code Initial timing Binary code Do not wait for OPEN Communications impossible at STOP time ASCII code Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time IP address Send frame setting Input format DEC Ethemet 2 0 IP address 10 97 85 C IEEE8023 I Enable write at RUN time TCP Existence confirmation setting Use the Keep live C Use the Ping End
256. d by parameter setting from GX Developer By performing parameter setting from GX Developer the initial processing is executed when the Ethernet module starts up A conventional sequence program is not required The number of connections which can be opened from the PLC CPU has been increased to 16 for the Ethernet module Also when executing the Passive open processing for TCP IP communication and the open processing for UDP IP the open processing is executed when the Ethernet module starts up by setting the Always wait for OPEN parameter from GX Developer A conventional sequence program is not required 10 When the Ethernet module is used a maximum of 960 words can read written a maximum of 480 words for the QE71 QE71N 11 This cannot be used together with the communication function using the random access buffer 12 TCP Maximum Segment Size Option transmission is available for the product with the serial number which first 5 digits are 05051 or later e In the QU71E71 100 QU71E71 B5 QU71E71 B2 with the first 5 digits of serial No 05051 to 05081 the default value is preset to Enable TCP Maximum Segment Size Option transmission If normal communication cannot occur due to incorrect combination with the other node change the setting to Disable TCP Maximum Segment Size Option transmission e To change the TCP Maximum Segment Size Option transmission setting change the TCP Maximum Segment Transmission setting area and execute
257. d to pulse Designate the control data for the OPEN instruction When using the open setting parameters of GX Developer Designate the execution type complete type When not using the open setting parameters of GX Developer Designate the execution type complete type Designate the application information Designate the Local station Port No 10001 Designate the external device IP address 10 97 85 223 Designate the external device Port No 2000n Execute the open processing to the external device Set the normal completion flag of the open processing Set the abnormal completion flag of the open processing Set the flag by the close processing from the external device Change the close processing from the external device to pulse Change the close request from the Local station side to pulse Perform close processing Set the close processing executing flag Set the normal completion flag Set the abnormal completion flag Reset the open processing flag Reset the close processing execution flag 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 5 6 2 Passive open processing close processing This section explains the procedure for opening and closing a connection with the Ethernet module from an external device The operations of Passive open processing close processing differ depending on whether Always wait for OPEN or Do not wait for OPEN is selected as shown in this section 1 When Always wait for OPE
258. d write points and send to the Ethernet module again The maximum address must not be exceeded m E mail log Dedicated instruction 11 29 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code abnormal code Request data length does not C0574 match with data count in character area part of text Request data length after ASCII binary conversion does not match C058 with data count in character area part of text Description of error i i f comman A C0594 Incorrect dosigratioi of command e Review the content of the request and subcommand CO5Ax The Ethernet module cannot read COSB from write to the designated i device The content of a request is incorrect GOSC Requesting read write in bit units to word devices COsD Monitor registration is not e Monitor after performing monitor Rea i performed registration Communication time between the Ethernet module and PLC CPU CO5En Fx exceeded the CPU monitoring timer Th l d CO5Fu e request could not be execute on the target PLC The content of a request is incorrect C060 Incorrect data was designated for bit devices etc Request data length does not C0614 match with the number of data in character area part of text When online correction was inhibited write operation via MC C0624 protocol QnA compatible 3E frame was performed for the remote I O station Extension of device memory C0704 cannot be designated for the target
259. data Setting range Set by Designate the send data length in word units There is a procedure for communication using binary code Number of words Send data length There is a procedure for communication 1 to 508 using ASCII code Number of words 1 to 1017 Non procedure for communication using binary code Number of bytes 1 to 2046 Send data Designate the send data 1 The Set by column indicates the following User Data set by the user before executing a dedicated instruction e System The PLC CPU stores the execution results of a dedicated instruction 2 For details on the error codes at abnormal completion see Section 11 3 Error Code List 10 8 10 8 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Functions 1 This instruction sends the data designated by S3 to the external device of the connection specified by S1 for the module designated by Un PLC CPU Ethernet module Fixed buffer data area S3 Send data length No 1 Send data BUFSND a No n t External device Send data No 16 2 Whether or not the BUFSND instruction has been completed can be checked by the complete bit devices D1 0 and D1 1 a Complete bit device D1 0 Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the BUFSND instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Complete bit device D1 1 Turns on and off d
260. ddress of the corresponding class 05H ST a eee ee See ce ee ee ee tJofojofojojojifojojofojol fof jofojsfolsfifts 1fojofojofofojo 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 3 Default router IP address Address 202H 203 Set the IP address of the router default router to be used when the QU71MT91 communicates with the target device on another Ethernet via other than the router specified in the router information refer to 4 below Set the value that satisfies the following conditions e Condition 1 The IP address class is any of A B and C e Condition 2 The sub net address of the default router is the same as that of the local station Ethernet module e Condition 3 The host address bits are not all 0 or all 1 If the corresponding sub net address does not exist in the router information refer to 4 in this section when the connection is opened or data communication is made communication is made via the default router 4 Router information Subnet address Address 205H 206H and later a Set the network address 1 or subnet address 2 of the target device when the QJ71MT91 communicates with the target device on another Ethernet via other than the default router Set the value that satisfies the following conditions e Condition 1 The IP address class is any of A B and C e Condition 2 The host address bits are all 0 x1 If the class network address of the local station differs from that o
261. ddresses System area is used a Set the port numbers of the external devices for each connection in hexadecimal b The port numbers of the external devices are set in a range from 4014 to FFFFu Furthermore FFFFH is the setting value for simultaneous broadcast communication c Set the port numbers for the external device upon consulting a network administrator d The following table provides some precautions that should be observed when setting port numbers O in the diagram indicates a device and indicates a port number A Communication Status of connection establishment ei F O Port indicates port number Description of connection protocol i k External device When connecting to multiple external devices set multiple port numbers for the local station When connecting to multiple external devices set single port number for the local station However it is necessary to open a connection for each external device This cannot be chosen when the local station is Unpassive Ethernet module External device When connecting to multiple ports of an external device set multiple port numbers for the Ethernet module When connecting to multiple ports of an external Ethernet module External device device set single port number for the Ethernet o O module However it is necessary to open a eo connection for each external device port This cannot be chosen when the local station is Unpassive When
262. define ERROR_NO_ ERROR 0 No error define ERROR_INITIAL 1 Initial error define ERROR_SOCKET 2 Socket creation error define ERROR_BIND 3 Bind error define ERROR_CONNECT 4 Connect error define ERROR_SEND 5 Send error define ERROR_SHUTDOWN 6 Shutdown error define ERROR_CLOSE 7 Line close error Definition for checking receive size define RECV_ANS_1 22 Response message receive size in reply to device write 3E frame typedef struct sck_inf struct in_addr my_addr unsigned short my_port struct in_addr qj_addr unsigned short qj_port k int nErrorStatus Error information storage variable int Dmykeyin Dummy key input int ShutdownflagA Shutdown flag for System A connection int ShutdownflagB Shutdown flag for System B connection App 33 App 33 APPENDIX MELSEC Q int CloseflagA Connection end flag for System A connection int CloseflagB Connection end flag for System B connection int socketnoA int socketnoB int ConnectLastErrorA Connect processing error information for System A connection int ConnectLastErrorB Connect processing error information for System B connection int SendFlag Send completion flag int main WORD wVersionRequested MAKEWORD 1 1 Winsock Ver 1 1 request WSADATA wsaData int length Communication data length unsigned char s_buf BUF_SIZE Send buffer unsigned char r_bufA BUF_SIZE r_bufB BUF_SIZE Receive
263. device that stores control data Binary 16 bits Head number of the local station bit device that turns on for one scan upon completion of instruction System D1 1 also turns on if the instruction execution ends abnormally The file registers for each of the local device and the program cannot be used as devices to be used in the setting data 10 23 10 23 0 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Control data Set by S1 0 Systemarea S o o o Stores the status at completion Completion status 0000 Normal completion System Other than 00001 Abnormal completion error code 2 Specifies the parameters to be changed b15 to b2 bi b0 0 2 1 1 Specification of whether or not to change the IP address of the local station Specifies whether or not to change the IP address of the local station Specifies the address using S1 3 and S1 4 Specification of if it is to be changed target of change 0 Do not change Plo tee 1 Change 2 Specification of whether or not to change the operation settings Specifies whether or not to change the operation settings Specifies the settings using S1 5 if it is to be changed 0 Do not change 1 Change S1 3 Local station oe 3 00000001 to ifies the IP f the local St 4 IP address Specifies the IP address of the local station EFFFFFFE User Specifies the operation settings b15 to b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi b0 0 5 0
264. device through fixed buffer communication This instruction is used in the main program Applicable device Setting Internal device apa aud Index data System user File MELSECNET 10 Special module register Constant Oiber register Direct JO O Bit Word _ kuj s O o S ol f Instruction code Executing condition Command BUFRCV i m ZP BUFRCV Un S1 S2 D1 D2 Setting data Setting data Description Set by Data type Start input output signal of the Ethernet module Binary 16 bits 00 to FE The two most significant digits of the 3 digit input output signal User y Connection number 1 to 16 Binary 16 bits S2 Head number of the devices that designate control data Binary 16 bits D1 Head number of the device that stores receive data Binary 16 bits Head number of the local station bit device that turns on for one scan System D2 upon completion of instruction D2 1 also turns on if the instruction execution ends abnormally The file registers for each of the local device and the program cannot be used as devices to be used in the setting data Control data Set by 2 0 Systemarea S oo o S o i Stores the status at completion 00001 Normal completion Complete status Other than 0000 System Abnormal completion error code 2 Receive data Set by Stores the data length of the data read from the fixed buffer data area in word units There is a procedure
265. diagnostics See Section 11 2 1 The module status of an Ethernet module parameter settings communication status error log and others can be checked using the Ethernet diagnostic function The following are the functions of the Ethernet diagnostics Parameter status Ethernet diagnostics Checks the stored parameters after the initial processing for the Ethernet module See Section 5 2 Error log Received e mail information Checks the information for received e mail See Section 11 3 Send e mail information e Checks the information for sent e mail See Section 11 3 Checks the error stored in the error log area See Section 11 3 Status of each connection e Checks the status of each connection after the connection to the external device is established with the open processing See Section 5 6 PING test See Section 5 4 e Checks the completion of the initial processing with the issuance of the PING command Status of each protocol Checks the communication status of each protocol supported by the Ethernet module LED status Checks the on off status of the LED on the front of the Ethernet module See Section 11 1 Loop back test See Section 5 4 Checks the completion of the initial processing for the Ethernet module in a network to which the loop back command is issued COM ERR off See Section 11 1 2
266. dundant System for details Is SM1516 ON Operation system type OFF ON System A is standby system ON System B is control system Is SM1515 ON Operation system type OFF System B is standby system Is SM1516 ON Operation system type ON System B is standby system Send command message Request destination module I O number 03D0x Send command message Request destination module I O number 03D0x Is response message normally terminated Is response message normally terminated YES YES NO NO Close system A Close system B Close system B Close system A 5 103 5 103 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q c Precautions for writing parameter file or program file 1 Be sure to write the same file to system A and system B An error will occur if different files are written or a file is written to only one system 2 Write a parameter file or program file when the operating status of the CPU is STOP 3 Perform file write in the following procedure Set the control system CPU to STOP by remote operation A continue error occurs in the standby system CPU Set the standby system CPU to STOP by remote operation Execute file write to the control system CPU Execute file write to the standby system CPU Set the standby system CPU to RUN by remote operatio
267. e Transmission Sequence of the Serial Communication Module 2 9 Transmission Time When Accessing Other Stations Via MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 2 10 Compatibility with Multiple CPU Systems 2 11 Compatibility with the QOOCPU Q01CPU Serial Communication Function 3 WHEN COMMUNICATING USING THE QnA COMPATIBLE 3E 3C 4C FRAMES 3 1 Message Formats 3 2 List of Commands and Functions for the QnA Compatible 3E 3C 4C Frames 3 3 Device Memory Read Write 3 4 Buffer Memory Read Write 3 5 Reading from and Writing to the Buffer Memory of an Intelligent Function Module 3 6 PLC CPU Status Control 3 7 Drive Memory Defragmentation for Other Station QnACPU 3 8 File Control 3 9 Registering Deleting and Reading User Frames for Serial Communication Modules 3 10 Global Function for Serial Communication Modules 3 11 Data Transmission to an External device On Demand Function for Serial Communication Modules 3 12 Initializing the Transmission Sequence for Serial Communication Modules 3 13 Mode Switching for Serial Communication Module SH 080008 F 3 14 Turning Off Displayed LEDs and Initializing Communication Error Information and Error Code for Serial Communication Module 3 15 Turning Off the COM ERR LED for Ethernet Modules 3 16 Loopback Test 3 17 Registering or Canceling PLC CPU Monitoring for Serial Communication Modules 3 18 Remote Password Unlock Lock 4 WHEN COMMUNICATING USING THE QnA COMPATIBLE 2C FRAMES 4 1 Control Procedur
268. e including the s Mis Errors that occurred while causes shown in the description ea s communicating using the random i column and whose error codes are Section 11 3 3 F access buffer E5u stored in the error log area Errors that occurred while Error log area communicating using the MC protocol Errors response commands 7 BAR Cee Designated data error occurring in communication with an Communication error external device using file transfer CPU module FTP function manual etc with the Web function HTTP status stroage area mail e Receiving error E mail status storage area f 3 e Setting data error 5B39u Send e Sending error E mail status storage area Section 11 3 3 Errors occurring in communication F 9 Designated data error Not stored using data link instructions from the hee 9 Communication error Stored in the complete status area of the instruction local station s QCPU Designated data error Not stored e Communication data error Stored in the complete status area of the instruction using dedicated instructions from the local station s QCPU fe Errors occurring in communication 12 For details on the error codes returned by MX Component when communicating data using MX Component refer to the MX Component Programming Manual 11 13 11 13 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 14 1 MELSEC Q Initial error code address 69H a This address stores the error codes ge
269. e and the program cannot be used as devices to be used in the setting data Control data Set by 1 S2 0 Systemarea o ooo o o i Stores the status at completion Complete status 0000 Normal completion System Other than 00001 Abnormal completion error code 2 1 The Set by column indicates the following User Data set by the user before executing a dedicated instruction e System The PLC CPU stores the execution results of a dedicated instruction 2 For details on the error codes at abnormal completion see Section 11 3 Error Code List 10 11 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 10 12 MELSEC Q Functions 1 This instruction closes the connection specified by S1 for the module designated by Un disconnecting connections 2 Whether or not the CLOSE instruction has been completed can be checked by the complete bit devices D1 0 and D1 1 a Complete bit device D1 0 Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the CLOSE instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Complete bit device D1 1 Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the CLOSE instruction e Normal completion Stays off and does not change e Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the CLOSE instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing Operation when the CLOSE instruction is being executed END END END
270. e applicable connection open Buffer memory address applicable bit of 5000x Read the open abnormal code buffer memory address 124 134 of the communication status storage area and check that no errors have occurred Fix the error according to the parameter error code see Section 11 3 Have parameter errors occurred YES y Read the content of the communication abnormal code storage area buffer memory address 126 136 corresponding to the fixed buffer of the buffer memory and check whether or not a communication error has occurred Fix the error according to the communication error code in the error log area see Section 11 3 communication error occurred in the 11 47 11 47 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Is the parameter IP address of the external device correct NO YES Does the communication NO MELSEC Q Correct the IP address of the external device Match the protocol with the communication protocol TCP UDP match that of the external device YES Is the receive completion signal buffer memory address corresponding bit of 5005 of the applicable fixed buffer on NO YES Perform receive processing using the interrupt program Was the dedicated BUFRCVS instruction executed Is the control data of the BUFRCVS instruction correct 11 48
271. e host system such as a personal computer and a work station and between PLCs using the TCP IP or UDP IP communication protocol via Ethernet 100BASE TX 10BASE T 10BASE5 10BASE2 Internet Public dial up line Internet service Internet service Provider Provider Router External device External device Web server GX Developer 1 Collection and modification of PLC CPU data Communication using the MELSEC communication protocol 2 Transmission and reception of arbitrary data to from external devices Communication using fixed buffers or random access buffers 3 Data transmission reception by e mails When using the e mail function 4 Data transmission reception by Web function User s Manual Web function x By using the GX Developer SW4D5C GPPW E or later version hereinafter called GX Developer the sequence programs for communication can significantly be simplified 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 1 2 Features of the Ethernet Module 1 Data communication using the MELSEC communication protocol Details are explained in Chapter 6 of the MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual In the data communication using the MELSEC communication protoco
272. e internal conductor E e Insert the connector assembly d into the plug shell and screw the nut into the plug shell Pay attention to the following when soldering the internal conductors and contacts 1 Make sure that the solder does not bead up on the soldered section Make sure that there are no gaps between the connector and the cable insulator and that they do not cut into each other Solder as quickly as possible to prevent the insulation material from deforming 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 5 Settings from GX Developer This section explains the names of the setting screens for GX Developer that are available for the Ethernet module Perform the settings according to the function used by referring to Section 3 6 Ethernet Module GX Developer Setting Item List For details on how to display each screen refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual 4 5 1 I O assignment setting Setting purpose The I O assignment settings perform the settings for the types of modules to be mounted on a base unit and the range of input output signals Startup procedure GX Developer gt PLC Parameter gt I O assignment For screen display see the operating manual for GX Developer Setting screen PLC name PLC system PLC file PLC RAS Device Program Boot file SFC 140 Assignment po a ep Pe a foro intel fQu7IE I 100_ 32points_ v Se o Detailed se
273. e processing for the simultaneous broadcasting it updates the destination IP address and destination port No in the connection information area addresses 78H to C7H and 5820H to 586Fx that corresponds to fixed buffer No n 7 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE PROCEDURE EXIST CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q 7 2 Sending Control Method This section explains the control method when data is sent from the Ethernet module to an external device using the fixed buffer No 1 and the area corresponding to connection No 1 as an example lt lt Data sending using the dedicated BUFSND instruction gt gt Send data direction D100 Word count for send data Set the send data in D100 and D101 H lt From D101 Send data ZP BUFSND U0 K1 DO D100 MO MO M1 aa Processing for normal completion M1 __ Processing for abnormal completion Address 5000 b0 Initial processing Open processing Data sending Response receiving I j I I 1 l Initial normal completion signal X19 I l I I I l I I I i I 2 I l Open completion signal E BUFSND instruction l l 6 BUFSND instruction complete device e One scan acter 1 1 BUFSND instruction complete 1 1 T o device 1 l D xe co om no Oo Cc n fo s ACK 3 ACK a only TCP only TCP 4 5 7 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICA
274. e that the open close processing Is the applicable connection open buffer memory address corresponding bit of 5000 1 using input output signals and the dedicated OPEN or CLOSE instruction are not executed simultaneously in the same connection If so modify the program YES Was a command sent form the external device NO Send the command to the Ethernet module YES Was a response returned to the device that sent the command NO Is the IP address designation of the command correct YES NO Correct the IP address and send the command again YES Does the communication protocol TCP UDP match with that of the external device NO Match the communication protocol TCP UDP with the external device For details see Section 5 5 YES The command may not be sent to the Ethernet module from the external device on the command sending side Check the sending side NO Fix the faulty part according to the description of the end and abnormal codes see Section 11 3 Is the end code of the response 0 11 52 11 52 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Correct the IP address and send the command again Is the IP address of the command correct command formats such as command type device Correct the command format by referring designation and address to the MELSEC Communication Protocol designation des
275. e using the method shown in 3 below e Increase the retry number when communicating by TCP IP Use the following method to mount a ferrite core when connected to the network by 10BASE5 Mounting the ferrite core Mount the ferrite core 1 to the Ethernet module side and the external device side the transceiver side for AUI cable 1 gt ZCAT 2032 0930 manufactured by TDK Corporation is usable QJ71E71 B5 _ AUI cable Coaxial cable for 1OBASE5 Ferrite core gt q 7 Transceiver 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS MELSEC Q 3 When configuring the Ethernet system with a QU71E71 B2 a Connecting using the 1OBASE2 7 RG58A U coaxial cable Terminator 1 or RG58C U coaxial cable T Type connector External device TCT Use devices that meet the standards of IEEE802 3 and 10BASE2 e RG58A U or RG58C U coaxial cable 50 Q e BNC type Terminator product equivalent to 221629 4 manufactured by Tyco Electronics AMP K K e T shaped adapter product equivalent to UG 274 U 1S manufactured by Hirose Electric Co Ltd POINT Consult a network specialist for required devices 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS MELSEC Q 2 3 For Use in Multiple CPU System This section describes the use of the Ethernet module in a multiple CPU system 1 When making access from the external device to the non control CPU of the Ethernet module us
276. e64 7 bits 8 bits Quoted Printable of the attached file Encryption No Compression No Communication with mail server SMTP sending server Port number 25 POPS receiving server Port number 110 Operation check mailer Microsoft Corporation Internet Explorer 5 0 Outlook Express 5 5 Outlook Express 5 Netscape Communications Corporation Netscape 4 05 The following explains each of the transmission specification items Segment length Connecting using the 10BASE T 100BASE TX O O Maxmum Maxmum 100m 5m 100m Maxumum node to node distance Up to 4 2 levels are allowed for cascade connection Segment length o The item in parentheses indicates when a connection is established using a 100BASE TX 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 2 Data Codes for Communication This section explains the data codes used in the communication between the Ethernet module and the external device or the PLC CPU 1 The data codes used while communicating are listed below 1 Ethernet module External device Data can be communicated by selecting either binary code or ASCII code in the data code setting of GX Developer as shown below The switching between binary code and ASCII code is set using GX Developer GX Developer Network parameter Operational settings Communication data code For more details
277. ead write Multiple block batch read write mmunication using the M Communicaian using the MC Read write by extension designation protocol 7 Other station access via a network system Read write of the Ethernet module buffer memory Read write of the intelligent function module buffer memory Read write of the sequence program files Status control of the PLC CPU remote RUN STOP etc 6 1 2 Message format and control procedure for data communication The data communication functions using the MC protocol correspond to the functions for reading writing data in the PLC CPU supported by the A QnA series Ethernet interface modules Therefore the message format and control procedure are the same as when accessing the PLC using A QnA series Ethernet interface modules e Communication using QnA compatible 3E frames This message format is used for the QnA series Ethernet interface modules e Communication using A compatible 1E frame This message format is used for the A series Ethernet interface modules The external device side can access the Q series PLC with a program used for accessing the PLC via A QnA series Ethernet interface module Example Header 5 Text Command Header 5 Text response a E T LS TAa a B ae a VE 2 IP TCP PC ACPU 5g 2 IP Toe 3 Read data 3 ji S aas os 2 B No monitoring Head device 2 2 QD o my UDP timer 58 7 UDP D 14 bytes 20 bytes Zz 3 14 bytes 20 bytes e koj jo
278. eadDeviceBlock Batch reads data from devices LONG type WriteDeviceBlock Batch writes data to devices LONG type Batch reads data from devices SHORT type INT type Batch writes data to devices SHORT type INT type Randomly reads data from devices LONG type WriteDeviceBlock2 WriteDeviceRandom Randomly writes data to devices LONG type ReadDeviceRandom2 Randomly reads data from devices SHORT type INT type WriteDeviceRandom2 Randomly writes data to devices SHORT type INT type SetDevice Sets one device LONG type GetDevice Acquires the data of one device LONG type Sets one device SHORT type INT type Acquires data of one device SHORT type INT type etDevice2 GetDevice2 Connect ReadDeviceBlock2 Batch reads data from devices SHORT type INT type ReadDeviceRandom Randomly reads data from devices LONG type App 45 App 45 APPENDIX MELSEC Q WriteBuffer Writes to buffer memory GetCpuType Reads a PLC CPU type Remote RUN STOP PAUSE of PLC CPU EntryDeviceStatus Registers device status monitor FreeDeviceStatus Deregisters device status monitor OnDeviceStatus Announces event 6 Collecting data on Excel without programming Using MX component and MX Sheet SWnD5C SHEET E allows users to collect PLC device data on Excel with only simple setting and without any programming App 46 App 46 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 9 2 Usage Procedure of MX Component This section expla
279. eats 2 8 2 4 For Use with QO0J QO0 QO1 CPU 0 0 cceccccssscssessccseesssecssecseesseesseesseesseecseesenesseessuesseessuesseesenessessnessnesaes 2 10 2 5 For Use with Q12PRH Q25PRHCPU cccecceceeceeseeeecseeeeeaecaeceeeaeeaecaeseeeeaesaeseeseaesaesaesaeseaesaesaeeeeenateaes 2 11 2 6 For Use at MELSECNET H Remote I O Station cccccccccscecsecseeeneceseeceeecseeceescaescaescaescaeseaeseaeesaeeeaeeas 2 14 2 7 Checking the Function Version and Serial No c ccecceceeseeseeeeceeeeeeeaeceeeeeeeaesaeseseaesaesaeseeeeaesaeenneaneaes 2 18 3 1 Performance Specifications saana rea etaar dee Sci adea aaea Se a didisia ea aeea rantatie Naa 3 1 3 2 Data Codes for COMMUNICATION araire iiini iieii i iiia 3 3 3 3 Relationship between the External Devices and Additional Functions for Each Communication FUN CUO Maer aedarcsadigecie stock ees le Ree veers a dente det cid eeetag detest T 3 5 3 4 Ethernet Module Function EST aa r a a A a a aa a a a aa aaa A Aaaa Aa aeaa aiaa iia 3 6 3 5 Dedicated Instruction LiStaz inan npn i aa a aaa a a aaa a aaa RI 3 8 3 6 List of GX Developer Setting Items for Ethernet MOGUIES cc ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaesaecaeeeeeeaeeaesaeeeaeaes 3 9 3 7 List of Input Output Signals to from the PLC CPU cccecceseeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaesaeseeeeaesaeeeseaesaesaeseeeeaneaes 3 10 3 8 List of Applications and Assignments of the Buffer Memory eeceeeeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeteetieeeaeee 3 12 4
280. ected in the Ethernet module hardware may be faulty hardware test Consult your nearest branch office or dealer with the details of the errors Conduct a hardware test again If an An Ethernet module ROM abnormality is detected again the abnormality was detected in the Ethernet module hardware may be faulty hardware test Consult your nearest branch office or dealer with the details of the errors Review the IP address host name of the Ethernet module for the PING test e Review the designated value of the An error was detected in the PLC 11 33 11 33 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Storage destination Error code abnormal Description of error code A module system error Serious COF3s cme coe abnormality was detected in the CPU System error e The OS detected any error An error occurs in the self refrain test A response could not be received from the DNS client A response from the SMTP layer could not be received C1044 to System error C1064 e The OS detected any error C1101 C111 A response could not be received s from the DNS client A response from the POP3 layer C1124 could not be received 11 34 Error handling Correct the causes of error in the local station CPU Send after an arbitrarily selected time has elapsed because packets may be congested on the line e Check that the connection cable is not dislocated e Check that connections to the transceiver and te
281. ecting 10BASE2 coaxial cable 4 10BASE2 connector Power supply terminal for supplying power to the transceiver when connecting by E 5 xternal power supply termina 10BASE5 13 28 V to 15 75 V x1 The LED on the connector does not light up For connectors with first 5 digits of serial No 05059 or earlier the orientation of the connectors has been rotated by 180 degrees 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q x1 1 LED display contents 1 LED display QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 B2 RUN C ERR RUN C ERR RUNCO Co ERR INIT CO CoO COM ERR INIT CO Co COM ERR NIT CO Co COM ERR OPEN L_ _ 100M OPENL_ C OPENI C SDC CORD SDCI CORD SDD CORD QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 Display description When the LED is on When the LED is off QJ71E71 B2 Normal operation display INIT INIT Initial processing status display Normal completion Not processed Normally opened connection Normally opened connection not OPEN OPEN Open processing status display y Op yop available available Data sending display Data being sent Data is not sent Setting abnormal display Normal setting Communication abnormal occurrence 100 M Not used Transmission speed display 100Mbps 10Mbps When not connected RD Rm Data receiving status display Data being received Data not received COM ERR COM ERR Communication abnormal display Normal communica
282. ed to control system CPU 1 The Ethernet module starts disconnection detection after initial processing completion 2 Ondetection of disconnection the Ethernet module performs a disconnection status time check and when a disconnection status continues for the period of cable disconnection timeout setting the Ethernet module issues a system switching request to the control system CPU 3 When the disconnection status returns to normal within the cable disconnection timeout setting the Ethernet module does not issue a system switching request 3 Set whether the system switching request will be issued or not to the control system CPU in the redundant setting of GX Developer Refer to Section 5 11 3 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 5 11 2 Communication path bypass function 1 Communication path bypass function When any of the following redundant system support applications is used the path where a communication error occurred can be automatically bypassed to continue communication if an error occurs in communication with the Ethernet module The user need not change from one communication path to the other e Application that operates on the OPS except the MELSOFT products such as GX Developer 1 GX Developer e PX Developer monitor tool For the compatible versions and available functions refer to the manual of the corresponding application 1 The Ethernet module can communicate with the OPS using the u
283. ed connection for system GX Developer communication TCP port or set MELSOFT connection in this setting PLC CPU Ethernet module Ethernet module PLC CPU Initial processing Initial request Initial request Initial processing Initial Initial processing completion completion Initial completion Initial completion Fullpassive Open Unpassive open Wait for open Open request request Open completion z Open completion Open completion Open completion Active open 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 3 Fixed buffer connection numbers 1 to 8 addresses 20H to 27H bO connection numbers 9 to 16 addresses System area is used a Here it is selected whether the fixed buffer corresponding to each applicable connection number will be used for sending or receiving when communicating using the fixed buffers Name of setting Description of setting For sending or fixed buffer communication is not executed b When both sending and receiving are performed with an external device using fixed buffer communication one buffer for sending and one for receiving are required Thus two connections should be set c Whether the fixed buffers are set for sending or receiving external devices can communicate using the MC protocol or the random access buffers 4 Fixed buffer communication connection numbers 1 to 8 addresses 20H to 27H b9 connection numbers 9 t
284. ed to send receive data using a communication procedure defined by the user 8 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE NO PROCEDURE CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q 8 3 Receiving Control Method This section explains the control method when the Ethernet module receives data from an external device Fixed buffer communication employs the following receive processing methods e Receive processing with the main program dedicated instruction BUFRCV See Section 8 3 1 e Receive processing with an interrupt program dedicated instruction BUFRCVS See Section 8 3 2 8 3 1 Receive processing with the main program dedicated instruction BUFRCV This section explains about the receive processing to be performed with the main program using an example in which the fixed buffer No 1 and the area corresponding to connection No 1 lt lt Data receiving using the dedicated BUFRCV instruction main program gt gt direction ZP BUFRCV U0 K1 DO D100 M100 Receive data e D100 Byte count of receive data stored e From D101 Receive data M100 M101 1 f Processing for normal completion H M101 Processing for abnormal completion HH Initial processing Open processing Data sending 1 Initial normal completion signal X19 Open completion signal Address 5000 b0 BUFRCYV instruction BUFRCYV instruction complete device BUFRCYV instruction complete device 1 Fixed buffer receiving sta
285. eeeeaesaeseeseeeeaeeaeeneeeattaees 6 4 6 2 Utilizing the MX COMPONEN iaeiei ieaie aenea araea aa eea aaah a aana ae anha etant ea ahea aaa 6 5 7 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE PROCEDURE EXIST CONTROL METHOD 7 1 to 7 22 Al GOMTOMMOTIOG fs ct fos besa tone or hak barat eat ate ate tse eet et ot hit ee re ee te 7 1 722 Sending Control Method mesias anren iar anne aa ae araea aa aana Ee aaa E AAE AEAEE Kaane 7 3 7 3 Receiving Control Method ccccceceecceeeeeeeceeceeeeaecaeceeeeaeeaecaeceeeeaecaesaessaeeaesaeseeseaesaesaeeesaaesaesaeseeeeaeeats 7 5 7 3 1 Receive processing with the main program dedicated instruction BUFRCV s es 7 5 7 3 2 Receive processing with an interrupt program dedicated instruction BUFRCVS 7 7 TA Data Format icv Ane io Mk ave Sion Se eA A ev ne o i iii 7 12 PAM CAG ETE O E serene enone yee ae ier eee ee el 7 12 7 4 2 Applicatlon data vss shag sed nai ek ee NG NG Na en ee Ne Na Nei nN a A ge Nein 7 13 To Prog amiming eo e E EA EA EAEE AEAN EAEE TETE SAA EERTE EN EARE 7 17 7 5 1 Precautions when Creating Programs ccecceeceeeceseeeeeeeeeeteeeseeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeseeseeeseeeseaeseeeteneeeneaaes 7 17 7 5 2 Fixed buffer communication program example with the procedure exist control method 7 18 8 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE NO PROCEDURE CONTROL METHOD 8 1 to 8 21 8 1 Control Methodiriiisii ana a Ae aarti eed peel eed ede 8 1 8 2 Sending Control
286. eeeeeeaesaesaeseeesaesaeseeseaeeaeeaeeaeeaees 5 88 5 11 Configuring a Network in Redundant System Redundant System Support Function 00 5 89 5 11 1 Issue of System Switching Request to Control System CPU ecceecceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeneeaees 5 89 5 11 2 Communication path bypass function cceececeeceeeeeeececeeeeaeeaeceeeeeeeaesaeseeeeeesaeeaeseeseaesaeeeeentaees 5 95 5 11 3 Redundant Settings rnr oeroceaan a a n ia e airi 5 97 5 11 4 Buffer memory for redundant system support fUNnCtION ssssssseessssnserssrsensinsinsinsenstnsrnnrnnrnnnnnnnnn 5 99 5 11 5 Data communication for using Ethernet module in redundant system sssseneeseessen 5 100 6 COMMUNICATION USING THE MC PROTOCOL 6 1to6 5 6 1 Data Communication Function ccceccecceeeeeeeeeeseeeeceeceeeeaeeaecaeceeeeaecaecaesaeeaesaesaeseaesaesaeeeseaesaesaeseeeeaeeaes 6 1 6 1 1 Accessing the PLC CPUs using the MC protocol ccccecceseeeeeeeceeceseeeeeeeceeeeeesaesaeseeeeaesaeeaeeeeeens 6 1 6 1 2 Message format and control procedure for data COMMUNICATION 1 cceeeeeeteeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeenees 6 2 6 1 3 PLC CPU setting for performing data COMMUNICATION ceseeeee cette eeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeetetaeseeeenetaees 6 3 6 1 4 Compatibility with multiple CPU system or redundant system c cecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeaees 6 4 6 1 5 Support for the QCPU remote password FUNCTION ccececeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceee
287. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeteeseeeseeeteeeeeeeeeees 5 60 bef Pairing ODS ties Fe atte celta hie eet aks Mah ori cat She tS as hale ae E het aS eave ts 5 63 SAT Pairing OPEM reire aerie ee arene Lec erent een eee eee E nee eee eden ee eee res 5 63 5 7 2 Example of pairing open settings from GX Developel e ceccceceeceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeeeees 5 64 5 8 Automatic Open UDP Poft sissies nance davies sient aiaa daaa iaia aaa apaiia aaas 5 66 5 9 Corresponding with the QOPU Remote Password FUNnction ceceseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeteeeteesneeeeaseees 5 68 5 9 1 Data communication when a remote password IS Set oo eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeas 5 69 5 9 2 Precautions when using the remote password Check fUNCtION ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeeteeeeeeeeeees 5 76 5 9 3 Data COMMUNICATION proceduto ieoa nn a A ATE E AA O ASEE TERS TAE 5 77 5 9 4 When the remote password unlock processing or lock processing is completed abnormally 5 79 5 9 5 How to set the target connection for the remote password CHECK eeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeas 5 81 5 9 6 Buffer memory for the remote password check FUNCTION 00 eee eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeas 5 83 5 9 7 Data communication when the remote password check iS Set ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeas 5 87 5 10 Hub Connection Status Monitor Function 0 cccceeccecceseeseeeeceeeeeeeeecaece
288. een made to the server 1 or more Cumulative count of registrations made to the error log block area 9 Receiving error log write pointer address 5878H e This address stores the error log block number where the latest error logging is registered 0 No error No registration of error log 1 or more Error log block number where the latest error logging is registered If the pointer value is 16 it means that the latest error logging is registered in the error log block 16 area e When 17 or more receiving errors occur the registration of error logging starts from error log block 1 area again The error log block area consists of 16 error log blocks that have the same data order 10 Error log block Error code address starting from 5879n e This block stores the error codes that indicate the contents of errors See Section 11 3 11 Error log block Command code address starting from 587An e This block stores the system command codes for the error causing messages 12 Error log block From address starting from 587B e This block stores eight words from the beginning of the sending source mail address of an error causing e mail during communication with the mail server in ASCII code characters Example If the sending source mail address was use from add sample co jp use from add sam is stored as ASCII code characters 13 Error log block Date address starting from 5883h This b
289. eiving if length 0 ls connection cut off Sockerror ERROR_RECIEVE Error handling return SOCK_NG App 26 App 26 APPENDIX MELSEC Q if length SOCKET_ERROR nErrorStatus WSAGetLastError if nErrorStatus WSAEWOULDBLOCK Sockerror ERROR_RECIEVE Error handling return SOCK_NG else continue Repeat until messages are received else rbuf_idx length Update the receive data storage position recv_size length Update the number of receive data if recv_size gt RECV_ANS_ 1 Have all response messages been received break Stop repeating as messages have been received r_buf rouf_idx 0 Set NULL at the end of receive data printf n receive data n s n r_buf strcpy s_buf 01 FFOO0A4420000000000500 DO to D4 batch read request 1E frame strcpy s_buf S500O000FFO3FF000018000A04010000D 0000000005 DO to D4 batch read request SE frame length strlen s_buf if send socketno s_buf length 0 SOCKET_ERROR Data sending Sockerror ERROR_SEND Error handling return SOCK_NG printf n send data n s n s_buf Perform receiving size check and receiving processing simultaneously rbuf_idx 0 Receive data storage head index initialization recv_size 0 Initialize the number of receive data while 1 length recv socketno amp r_buf rbuf_idx BUF_SIZE rbuf_idx 0 Response data re
290. em Other than 0000 Abnormal completion error code 2 e Designate how to use a connection b15 b14 b13 to b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 to b2 bi b0 6 0 5 4 13 0 2 1 1 Usage of fixed buffer 0 Sending or fixed buffer communication is not executed 1 For receiving Destination existence confirmation 0 No confirm S2 2 Appicaton seng 3 E AOR setting as desorbed in User area the left 0 No pairs 1 Pairs 4 Communication method protocol 0 TCP IP 1 UDP IP Fixed buffer communication 0 Procedure exist 1 No procedure Open system 00 Active open or UDP IP 10 Unpassive open 11 Fullpassive open local station 407n to 13874 S2 3 Desi h No of the local stati ee ee ae 138Bx to FFFEn du to FFFFFFFFu S2 4 Destination IP FFFFFFFFr Se ae Designate the IP address of the external device F 3 User S2 5 address simultaneous broadcast 4014 to FFFFu Destination FFFFu S2 6 Designate the port No of the external device User Port No simultaneous broadcast S2 7 ole n Destination Designate the Ethernet address of the external K Ethernet address a See Section 5 5 POINT 000000000000 ser S2 9 i FFFFFFFFFFFFu 1 The Set by column indicates the following User Data set by the user before executing a dedicated instruction System The PLC CPU stores the execution results of a dedicated instruction 2 For details on the error codes at abnormal completion see Section 11 3
291. en data in the random access buffer range a Communication using binary code XN a 2 bytes b Communication using ASCII code r S Designate the number of words by its binary value Designate an ASCII code value that expresses the number of words in hexadecimal The data length can be designated in the following range e Communication using binary code Maximum of 1017 words e Communication using ASCII code Maximum of 508 words 1 x1 Since data is sent received as ASCII data the communication data size is approximately a half of the data size when using binary code 9 COMMUNICATION USING THE RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER MELSEC Q 5 Text Indicate the data written to and read from the random access buffer a Communication using binary code Data length maximum of 1017 words Random access buffer Designated address gt n H L n 1 H i Ll e n 2 H L k Setting value of H L k word count read j y gt 1 word 2 bytes b Communication using ASCII code Data length x 2 maximum of 1016 words ASCII BIN conversion Random access buffer Designated address gt n n Setting value of Maximum of 508 words word count read Example 9 COMMUNICATION USING THE RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER MELSEC Q 6 End codes The following end codes are added to a
292. ence program Sean END eer l Gen processing i processing Interrupt program Data receive processing 7 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE PROCEDURE EXIST CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q Confirm the normal completion of the initial processing Confirm the normal completion of the open processing of connection No 2 Upon receiving data from the designated external device set in the open processing the Ethernet module processes the following Stores the receive data to the fixed buffer No 2 area Receive data length The head address area of the target fixed address Receive data Area beginning from the head address of the target fixed buffer 1 e Fixed buffer receive status signal address 5005H b1 ON e Request the PLC CPU to start up the interrupt program The interrupt program starts up Execute the dedicated BUFRCVS instruction to read the receive data length and receive data from the fixed buffer No 2 When the receive data length and reception data are read the following processing is performed At normal completion e Return a Response to the destination e PLC CPU error flag SMO 1 OFF At abnormal completion e PLC CPU error flag SMO 1 ON e PLC CPU error code SDO 1 error code The execution of the interrupt program is finished and the execution of the main program starts again x1 For information of the PLC CPU error flag SMO and error code SD0 see the manual for the
293. ength unsigned char s_buf BUF_SIZE unsigned char r_buf BUF_SIZE int rouf_idx int recv_size struct sck_inf sc struct sockaddr_in hostdata struct sockaddr_in aj71e71 void Sockerror int unsigned long ulCmdArg sc my_addr s_addr htonl INADDR_ANY sc my_port htons 0 sc aj_addr s_addr inet_addr 192 0 1 253 sc aj_port htons 0x2000 Closeflag FLAG_OFF MELSEC Q Error information storage variable Dummy key input Connection completion flag Winsock Ver 1 1 request Communication data length Send buffer Receive buffer Receive data storage head index Number of receive data External device side data Ethernet module side data Error handling function Non blocking mode setting flag External device side IP address External device side port number Ethernet module side IP address C00001FDH Ethernet module side port number Connection completion flag off nErrorStatus W SAStartup wVersionRequested amp wsaData Winsock Initial processing if nErrorStatus SOCK_OK Sockerror ERROR_INITIAL return SOCK_NG Error handling printf Winsock Version is ld ld n HIBYTE wsaData wVersion _LOBYTE wsaData wVersion printf AJ_test Start n socketno socket AF_INET SOCK_STREAM 0 if socketno INVALID_ SOCKET Sockerror ERROR_SOCKET return SOCK_NG hostdata sin_family AF_INET hostdata sin_port sc my_port hos
294. epending on the completion status of the BUFSND instruction e Normal completion Stays off and does not change e Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the BUFSND instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing Operation when the BUFSND instruction is being executed END END END Sequence program Scan processing Scan processing Scan processing Instruction execution BUFSND instruction Complete device ie a ya ee i aa Complete device 1 ma 7 3 The ZP BUFSND instruction is executed when the send instruction switches from off to on 10 9 10 9 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Errors MELSEC Q 1 When a dedicated instruction ends with an error the abnormal completion signal D1 1 turns on and the error code is stored in the complete status area S2 1 Refer to the following manuals regarding the error code check the errors and take corrective actions lt Error codes gt 4FFFu or less QCPU Q mode User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection COO0H or higher Section 11 3 3 of this manual Program example A program that sends data from the fixed buffer of connection number 1 When the input output signals of the Ethernet module are X Y00 to X Y1F K1234 K5678 K8901 ZP BUFSND yo D300 M300 M301 10 10 M3000 D300 D301 D302 D303 M300 X19 Initial nor
295. equest may be generated due to noise etc 3 Issue system switch in communication error When this setting is made valid the Ethernet module issues a system switching request to the control system CPU when a communication error is detected on the connection set in the system switching settings when communication error occurs Refer to Section 5 11 1 for system switching at communication error Setting range choices Issue system switch in Set whether a system switching request will e Checked System switching request is issued communication error be issued or not at communication error e Not checked System switching request is not issued Default Not checked System switching Set the target connection whose Check the target connection settings when communication error will cause a system Default Not checked communication error switching request to be issued occurs k 1k23 x1 The settings of the automatic open UDP port and GX Developer communication UDP port are made valid when the following conditions are satisfied 1 The remote password setting is valid 2 The remote password is canceled When the above conditions are not satisfied a system switching request is not issued if a communication error occurs on the target connection x2 Do not set the following connection as the target connection Do not check its check box Initial timing setting of operation setting Always waiting for OPEN communicat
296. ernal device 1 When communication procedure is with procedure If a response timeout to the Ethernet module occurs change the connection destination to the other system and send data 2 When communication procedure is without procedure Send the same data to both the control system and standby system The following shows a transmission procedure example when data is transmitted to the redundant system via the fixed buffer with procedure Receive a response from system A 5 105 Send data to system B Has timeout occurred YES Receive a response from system B Error occurrence 5 105 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q Note the following when executing re transmission processing at system switching 1 When making communication while synchronizing transmission and reception During communication system switching may occur with transmission and reception not synchronized When system switching has occurred resume communication after initializing synchronization to ensure safety 2 When using the dedicated instruction Since whether the execution of the write instruction is completed or not is difficult to judge the same instruction must be executed again In this case note that the same instruction may be executed twice 5 Communication via random access buffer The buffer memory of the Ethernet module is not tracked Therefore when writing data to the random access buffe
297. ernet Station No 1 10 97 85 222 2 module 1 module 10 97 85 221 PING test target station a Setting the PING test target station 1 Set the following Ethernet module parameters for the PING test target station through GX Developer Use default values for setting items other than those listed below Setting description QCPU 1 QCPU 2 Network type Ethernet Ethernet Network parameters setting Starting I O No 0000 0000 the number of MNET 10H Network No Setting screen Setting item Ethernet cards Group No aen C Co Operational setting IP address 10 97 85 221 10 97 85 222 2 Write the parameters to the applicable station 3 The initial processing is completed when the PLC CPU restarts When the initial processing is completed normally the INIT LED of the Ethernet module lights up 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q b Designating GX Developer connection destination connecting to QCPU 2 Connection Setup a a Serial NET 10H NETIN CCLink Ethemet PLC AF SSC board board board board board board net gt l Network No 1 Station No 3 Protocol TCP at amp Ss PLC MNET 10 H MNET II CC Link Ethemet C24 G4 Bus module module module module module module KD Network No 1 Station No 2 Computer type QJ71E71 IP address Host 10 97 85 222 Routing parameter transfer method Automatic transfer method gal Connection channel list No speci
298. erring to Section 11 3 2 Error codes not found in the error code list may be returned to the external device side if the communication data settings on the Ethernet module side see Section 4 7 and the data code settings on the external device side are different The Ethernet module cannot decode commands correctly if data with different data codes is received The Ethernet module returns error responses according to the communication data code settings Example When communication is performed using a fixed buffer Subheader Subheader The external device side receives this portion as an end code External device side Data length Text y Set to binary code T T T T T 60HOOH Ethernet module side 45H30H 35H34 H Set to ASCII code aay Subheader End code 11 43 11 43 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 3 If the LG and FG terminals of the power supply module of the station in which the Ethernet module is installed are not grounded the communication line is closed disconnected due to the effects of noise and as a result communication with an external device may not be performed Turn off the power to the station in which the Ethernet module is installed and ground the LG and FG terminals of the power supply module after referring to the section in the PLC CPU User s Manual that explains the wiring procedure POINT 1 2 3 4 11 44 When the Ethernet module is
299. es and Message Formats 4 2 Contents of the Data Designation Items 4 3 List of Commands and Functions for QnA Compatible 2C Frames 4 4 Precautions on the Data Communication 4 5 Example of Data Communication Using QnA Compatible 2C Frames 5 WHEN COMMUNICATING USING THE A COMPATIBLE 1C FRAMES 5 1 Control Procedures and Message Formats 5 2 Device Memory Read Write 5 3 Extension File Register Read and Write 5 4 Reading and Writing in the Buffer Memory of an Intelligent Function Module 5 5 Loopback Test 6 WHEN COMMUNICATING USING THE A COMPATIBLE 1E FRAMES 6 1 Message Formats and Control Procedures 6 2 List of Commands and Functions for A Compatible 1E Frames 6 3 Device Memory Read Write 6 4 Extension File Register Read and Write 6 5 Reading and Writing in the Buffer Memory of an Intelligent Function Module APPENDIX Appendix 1 Reading and Writing by Designation of the Device Memory Extension Appendix 2 Reading from and Writing to the Buffer Memory Appendix 3 Processing Time of the PLC CPU Side While Communicating Using the MC Protocol About Manuals Related Manuals The following manuals are also related to this product In necessary order them by quoting the details in the tables below Manual number Manual name Model code Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Application This manual explains the e mail function of the Ethernet module the PLC CPU status monitoring function SH 080010
300. essing a The purpose of the open processing is to establish a connection with an external device in order to perform the following forms of data communication They can all be performed with an external device opened by the user e Communication using the MC protocol e Sending receiving using the fixed buffers Procedure exists e Communication using the random access buffers b When the following is set by the parameter settings of GX Developer the open processing should be performed in a sequence program 1 Inthe Operational settings Section 4 7 When Do not wait for OPEN is set in the Initial timing setting 2 Inthe open settings Section 5 5 When Active is set in the OPEN system setting c In order to perform the open processing the initial processing must have been completed d Aconnection with an external device must be established open processing when communicating using either the MC protocol fixed buffers or random access buffers 1 All the three types of data communication mentioned above can also by performed with an external device opened by the user 1 Since the Ethernet module recognizes the external device to communicate with by the IP address the open processing is required for UDP communication e Upto a maximum of 16 connections can be opened to external devices However two buffers are required when communicating with the same external device using fixed buffer communication so
301. et module Setting item Description of setting Ethernet V2 0 Transmits using an Ethernet frame IEEE802 3 Transmits using an IEEE802 3 frame b When receiving data from the external device reception should occur regardless of whether the Ethernet frame or IEEE802 3 frame is used 1 Transmission using Ethernet frames is generally recommended 2 When communication with the external device fails check whether or not communication is possible using a PING command 6 Enable Write at RUN time address CBH b6 a Select enable disable external devices to write data while communicating through the MC protocol while the PLC CPU is running Name of setting Description of setting Check mark Allows an external device to write while the PLC CPU is running Enable write at RUN time No check mark Prohibits an external device to write while the PLC CPU is running Disable write at RUN time 7 TCP Existence confirmation setting Select the existence check method for TCP communication 1 For the existence check function refer to Section 5 2 2 Use the KeepAlive Checks connection status with KeepAlive Use the Ping Checks connection status with Ping 1 Do not use GX Developer incompatible with this setting together with compatible GX Developer Doing so may change the setting to Use the Ping This setting is ignored when the Ethernet module does not support the KeepAlive check function Ping is used for
302. et module IP address System B C0 00 01 FDH 192 00 01 253 4 Ethernet module port number 2000H 5 GX Developer settings e Operation setting Refer to 3 GX Developer settings a on the next page e Open setting Refer to 3 GX Developer settings b on the next page e Redundant settings Refer to 3 GX Developer settings c on the next page b External device side 1 Operating environment Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System 2 Ethernet interface board model name WINSOCK compatible board 3 Library WSOCK32 LIB 4 Software development environment Microsoft Corporation make Visual C Ver 6 0 is used 5 Ethernet address Need not be set as the ARP function is available 6 IP address Received at Active open 7 Port number Received at Active open c Communication system TCP IP 2 Overview of program example a PLC CPU side sequence program Parameter settings must be made using GX Developer No sequence program required b External device side program Writes data to the data registers DO to D4 5 points of the redundant CPU control system in word unit using the above library If write of data from the system A side is unsuccessful due to a communication error or similar reason at this time data are written from the system B side to the data registers of the redundant CPU control system App 30 App 30
303. et module mounted on the station to which GX Developer is directly connected local station The PING test addressed to the local station is not available If the external device subject to the PING test is an Ethernet module do not designate the UDP port for GX Developer of the Ethernet module as a valid port for the remote password check If the port is designated as such the PING test cannot be performed 2 Executing the PING test The example below explains the PING test methodology and GX Developer settings when a PING test is performed for an Ethernet module of other station from GX Developer connected to the QCPU GX Developer Network No 1 i GX Developer connecting station Ethernet module Station number 2 10 97 85 222 Ethernet Station number 1 CPU Ethernet 1 module 10 97 85 221 PING test target station Bi 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q a Settings on the QCPU station side 1 Set the following Ethernet module parameters for each QCPU using GX Developer Use default values for setting items other than those listed below Setting description QCPU 1 QCPU 2 Network type Ethernet Ethernet Network parameters setting Starting I O No 0000 0000 Setting screen Setting item the number of MNET 10H Network No Ethernet cards Group No Station No Operational setting IP address 10 97 85 221 10 97 85 222 2 Wri
304. et module side connector b If an error has occurred 65536 times or more a count stops at FFFFH 65535 Write 0 to this area using a sequence program to clear the stored value 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 5 11 Configuring a Network in Redundant System Redundant System Support Function This section explains the functions and settings for use of the Ethernet module in the redundant system Refer to Section 2 5 for the system configuration 5 11 1 Issue of System Switching Request to Control System CPU 1 Issue of System Switching Request to Control System CPU This function issues a system switching request to the control system CPU when the Ethernet module mounted on the main base unit of the control system CPU in the redundant system detects a communication error or disconnection External device om Communication error occurrence System switching request 2 System switching request issuing condition When any of the following conditions set in the redundant setting of GX Developer is satisfied the Ethernet module issues a system switching request to the control system CPU Refer to Section 5 11 3 for the redundant setting System switching request issuing condition After the connection is opened after open processing the existence of the external device cann
305. eters required for initial processing set using GX Developer e Network parameter Setting the number of See Section 4 6 Ethernet cards e Operational settings See Section 4 7 e Initial settings See Section 5 2 2 2 Confirmation of initial processing result Ethernet module Initial processing INIT LED V O signal Initial normal a ee signal X19 j Initial abnormal completion signal X1A At normal completion OFF At abnormal completion Off ou ____ ON If the initial processing does not complete normally correct the above parameter setting value and write to the PLC CPU Then reset the PLC CPU 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 5 2 2 Initial settings This section explains the initial settings using GX Developer Select Setting the number of MNET 10H Ethernet cards Initial settings to start the Ethernet initial settings screen E Network parameter Ethernet initial setting Module No 1 Timer setting Module will operate on default values if setting left blank Setting value Default value TCP ULP timer 60 X500ms TCP zero window timer 20 X500ms 500ms 500ms 500ms 60 X500ms 500ms 500ms TCP resend timer TCP end timer Oo IP assembly timer Ys DNS setting Input format DEC Ae Timer setting 2 to 32767 Destination existence confirmation starting Set the time to start
306. etion signal on Store data lt received z Procedure exists Execute dedicated instruction i communication BUFRO Set at A tet o OR ESSE eee x For receiving when the Dedicated instruction BUFRCV communication Is open execution completion E0u an nr rr ee en en ee ee Ye eee ee nee eee P Request from an external device receive Random access buffers Ley a e i Confirm th X Header x i g Data Random access buffer 1 61W 62H 1 t ie ict ro S 1 communication read write rogues SEO si e t gi S T A AN withthe ete rE a k v subheader SiS g 2 i 2 1 b ti 1 1 En Sa Pas H lt i Rae ENEA 00x to 3Cx 50x Response to the request send Communication using the MC protocol read write E o poi i Device memory etc Application data Sub header i 80 to BCu DOs 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 5 2 Initial Processing This section explains the initial processing of the Ethernet module 5 2 1 Initial processing The initial processing is for enabling data communication with an external device by setting the minimum parameters required for data communication by the Ethernet module Set the following parameters using GX Developer save them in the PLC CPU and reset the PLC CPU the initial processing of the Ethernet module is then performed Sequence programs for initial processing are not required 1 Param
307. etting cecceceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 5 7 DIN R EEE tate tie 1 15 Enable write at RUN time eee 4 21 End code Fixed buffer communication procedure exist assessresrersrsrrsrsrsrnss 7 16 Index 1 Communication using the random Initial timing settings 4 20 ACCESS buffer oo ee eecceecceecteeeeeeeteeeteeetes 9 10 Interrupt function End Codes list ccecccseeceeeeseeeeeeteeeees 11 22 Fixed buffer communication ERRCLR instruction c ce 10 14 11 4 procedure exist 0 eeeeeeeeeeeteeteeeeeeeeees 7 7 Error COUG ccccesceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeses 11 25 Fixed buffer communication 0 016 U0 21 gt nan kiei AR LRAT 11 15 NO PLOCECUIE eeeeceeseeteeeteeeeeeeteteeaeeees 8 8 ERRRD instruction eeeeeeeee 10 17 11 4 Interrupt settings 7 7 Ethernet Module A 21 1 1 Interrupt pointer settings cere 7 9 Etherneti 1 1 IP address setting Ethernet Address eccceccceceeceseeeteeeseeetes A 21 Destination IP AddreSS eeeeeeeeeees 5 40 Existence confirmation ccceseeeeeeee 5 36 Local station IP address cece 4 20 Pn aara aa Naa ENN 1 15 F Fixed buffer setting eseceeeseeeeee 5 38 L Fixed buffer communication LED display oraa 4 6 11 9 MO procedure 00 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeeeeees Chapter 8 List of input output Signals 20 0 0 eee 3 10 Fixed buffer communication Local station Port No Settin
308. etting not I O assignment Set the module mounting information required Network Parameters Setting the Perform settings to allow the Ethernet module to be used as a network Number of MNET 10H Ethernet Cards module Initial settings Selita vas for d oomen aon mm timer values for data communication Perform settings Perform settings relating to open close processing for connections to open ciose processing for connections Perform a eee eee when communicating via the MELSECNET H a oe Remote password settings Perform settings for the remote password Station No lt gt IP information Connect GX Developer to MELSECNET H remote I O station and use it to set the parameters Always set the Network parameters setting the number of MNET 10H Ethernet cards and Operational settings Reset MELSECNET H remote I O station after changing the setting It is not necessary to set the Intelligent function module switch settings with GX Developer s I O assignment Each type of setting corresponding to the switch settings is performed in the above mentioned Operational settings Initial settings and Open settings 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS MELSEC Q 4 Data communication procedure a Connect GX Developer to MELSECNET H remote I O station and perform the following settings 1 Communicating with TCP IP e Select Always wait for OPEN for the Initial Timing under the Operational Settings e
309. etting parameters of MOVP H8000 D100 i GX Developer Designate the execution type complete type MOVP H0 D102 Designate the information of the application Move H1000 D103 Designate the local station Port No 10001 H0A6155DF D104 Designate the external device IP address 10 97 85 223 Move H2000 D106 Designate the external device Port No 2000n yo K1 D100 M100 Execute the open processing to the external device ve apa SET M150 Set the normal completion flag of the open processing _ _ _ i M151 Set the abnormal completion flag of the open processing Regarding sections 1 and 2 in the program 1 is necessary when using the GX Developer Open Setting parameter 2 is necessary when not using the GX Developer Open Setting parameter 10 22 10 22 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 10 9 UINI Instruction This instruction is used to perform the re initial processing of the Ethernet module Applicable device Settin Internal device MELSECNET H Ind 9 File MELSECNET 10 Special module ex Constant Unco F Others data System user register Direct JOO Instruction code Executing condition Command UINI f ZP UINI Un S1 D1 Setting data Set by he Start input output signal of the Ethernet module Un pate Be ee User Binary 16 bits 00 to FE The two most significant digits of the 3 digit input output signal S1 Head number of the
310. ex or half duplex transmission mode according to the hub For connection to the hub without the auto detection function set the half duplex mode on the hub side a Connection using the 100BASE TX Twisted pair cable Up to 2 levels are allowed for cascade connection External device TMNT ATT Use devices that satisfy the standards of IEEE802 3 and 100BASE TX About the devices under the hub in the illustration above e Shielded twisted pair cable STP cable category 5 Straight cables can be used Correct operation is not guaranteed if a crossed cable is used to connect to an external device via the 100BASE TX of the Ethernet module However it is possible to use crossed cables to connect two Ethernet modules i e two QJ71E71 100 modules for data communication or to connect an Ethernet module to a GOT e RJ45 jacks e 100Mbps hub 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS MELSEC Q b Connection using the 10BASE T Twisted pair cable Up to 4 levels are allowed for cascade connection External device Use devices that satisfy the standards of IEEE802 3 and 10BASE T About the devices under the hub in the illustration above e Unshielded twisted pair cable UTP cable category 3 4 5
311. f the external device set the network address of the external device x2 Ifthe class network address of the local station is the same as that of the external device set the sub net address of the external device b Subnet address setting examples Local station Ethernet module Class B IP address 81052F01n 129 5 47 1 Subnet mask FFFFFC00 255 255 252 0 Ethernet4 O F Ea Setting example 1 Setting example 2 Setting example 3 Target device 1 Target device 2 Target device 3 Class B Class A Class B IP address 810440011 IP address 710440014 IP address 81052902n 129 4 64 1 113 4 64 1 129 5 41 2 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q Setting example 1 When the network addresses of the local station Ethernet module and target device differ Network address Local station Ethernet module IP address Class B Target device 1 81H 04H 40H 01H IP address Class B 1 o o o o lo o li lololo o o lololol o o o l olo o olo o o o o oli VW Set the network address of the target device 1 Network address Subnet address set value Local station Ethernet module IP address Class B Target device 2 71H 044 404 IP address Class A 0 1 1 1 0 0 O 1 0 0JOJOJOJ1 0JOJOJ1 0JOJOJOJOJOJ0OJOJOJOJOJOJOJ1 Sa Set the network address of the target device 2 Network address Subnet address set value
312. f the SMTP server is busy Reset response Check whether or not the SMTP server is A response from the SMTP server faulty timed out Check whether or not there is too much load on the network E mail log Dedicated instruction C124 Check whether or not the SMTP server is faulty e Check whether or not there is too much load on the network C127 Closing the SMTP server gave an _ Check whether or not the SMTP server is Fa error response faulty Communication channel is closed C1301 Th E e Check the status of the SMTP server because the service is not available Check if r name not registered in The SMTP server was performing con Mauser ne Be ot rogistoreui the server was designated C1314 processing and an error response z Send again after arbitrary set time has was received passed The SMTP server was performing 6132s processing and an error response was received Local error The SMTP server was performing rocessing and an error ri n C133 p ing and a error response was received Insufficient memory area C1344 to C1374 The SMTP server was performing C138 processing and an error response Check that the Ethernet module s mail was received address is set correctly Mailbox not found pom The SMTP server was performing processing and an error response C13Au was received Exceeded the allocation of memory area The SMTP server was performing processing and an error response Che
313. ffers Details are explained in Chapter 9 In the communication using random access buffers data of larger size up to 6 k words of data can be communicated This protocol can be used when the data size is too large for communication using fixed buffers up to 1 k words of data Read write Read write CPU Ethernet module Power supply Es Local station E External device External device 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 4 Communication by e mails Details are explained in the User s Manual Application With sending receiving e mail data can be sent to and received from an external device at a remote location using e mail via an Internet line Internet service provider a Sending receiving e mail by the PLC CPU The following data can be sent received by using dedicated instructions MSEND MRECV Sending receiving data as attached files Up to 6K words of data can be sent to or received from a personal computer or other Ethernet module as a file attached to e mail Sending data as main text Up to 960 words of data can be sent to a personal computer or portable terminal as main text of e mail 1 2 b Sending e mail by the PLC CPU Monitoring function By setting up the Ethernet parameters the notification conditions PLC CPU status or device value set by the user can be monitored at
314. fication Other station Single network Other station Co existence network PLC direct coupled setting Time out Sec 30 Retytimes o Rea i Z PLC ype Detail Ee en BU e B ep ets Network No I Station No 2 _ System image J J J J Line Connected Q A6TEL C24 IA C24 NET IOH NETI CCLink__Ethemet oK Accessing other station Target PLC No Choice made Close T2 c Executing the PING test through GX Developer 1 Select the PING test on the Ethernet diagnostics screen GX Developer Diagnostics Ethernet diagnostics PING test 2 Perform the settings indicated below then click the Execute button The execution results of the PING test are displayed Example The following shows the flow of the PING test when 4 is designated as the transmission count Time of the communication time check 1 s Normal Normal Abnormal Normal GX Developer response response response response Ethernet line Ethernet module Normal response occurs when the PING test response is received within the time of the communication time check Number of transmissions 4 times x Success transmissions 3 4 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q PING test screen PING test PING test Input item Input item Address specification z Address specification E IP address input form IP address input form IP address fio far fs fa pec e Hex IP address fio far fas fpa
315. file was divided on the sending side A server with unknown destination was received from the SMTP server Received mail is stored in the mail buffer Check that the part before is correct in the mail address setting of the parameter settings Check that the part before is registered to the destination mail server Check whether the mail setting of the parameter setting is correct or not When the mail server and Ethernet module are connected via the router check whether the router setting is correct or not Test send a mail to the address where it will be received without fail When the test is normally completed recheck whether the domain name after is correct or not Check that the attached file is less than 6 k word Check that the sending side did not divide the file E o me Connectio MELSEC Q xs E mail log Dedicated instruction Storage destination 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Storage destination Error code abnormal Description of error Error handling code Check that the port number of the SMTP server 25 Could not open the SMTP server Check whether or not it is possible to communicate with the SMTP server using the Ping command Cannot communicate with the SMTP server Check if the SMTP server is busy Error response Cannot communicate with the SMTP server Check if the SMTP server is busy Abort Cannot communicate with the SMTP C1231 server Check i
316. g 0 5 39 procedure exist s Chapter 7 Local station Ethernet module Fixed buffer communication setting 5 38 IP adess rennende 4 20 FTP parameter ccecccecceecceecceeeeeeereeetes 4 14 Logical addres S aimn a 9 15 EPa e a R renee 1 15 Full passive OPEN s 5 37 5 52 M Functional comparisons between the MAC address cccccccsceseeseeeteeeteeeseeseees A 21 QnA A series modules 0 Appendix 4 MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communication 3 6 G NOS aint ss chs E ahi a ies 4 18 Generic terms and abbreviations A 21 Monitoring fUNCHION s es 1 6 GX Developer ccccecceseeseeeteeteeeeeeeeeeaes A 21 Multiple CPU system 0 5 1 8 2 8 6 4 Setting item list eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 9 MX Component 6 5 Appendix 44 Setting value recording sheets Appendix 52 Group Notesin ea iaa 4 17 N Network NOrecaccniina a es 4 17 H Network parameter Head address eeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 8 9 15 Number of MNET 10H Ethernet cards 4 16 Header Network type cceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeas 4 17 Fixed buffer communication procedure XiSt ccececeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 12 O Fixed buffer communication OPEN instruction cceeeeeeees 5 43 10 19 MO procedur airesm 8 10 Open processing Communication using the random Active Open processing 5 45 access buffer sssssesiesrerrsererrsrernrnernens 9 5
317. g for the applicable connection is not completed The applicable connection is closed A sending error occurred A sending error occurred MELSEC Q Storage destination Error handling E mail log Dedicated instruction Correct the IP address Set the class to A B C Check that the open processing of both of the target connections for pairing open is not executed Review the combination for pairing open Check the operation of the external device Check the open processing of the external device Correct the open settings of the communication parameters Review the Ethernet module s port number and the IP address port number and open system of the external device Check that the connection cable is not dislocated Check that connections to the transceiver and terminator are not faulty Correct the IP address Correct the data length If the data transmitted is larger than the allowable size divide and then send it Read the end code of the response from the connection end code error log area and handle as needed Check the operation of the external device Review and correct the response monitoring timer value Check the open status of the applicable connection Execute the open processing of the applicable connection Check the operation of the transceiver and external device Use a transceiver that allows the SQE test Send after an arbitrarily selected time has elapsed because
318. g is required e Review the sequence program for sending x 1 Conduct a hardware test H W test and check whether or not the Ethernet module operates normally For details on the hardware test see Section 4 8 2 Hardware test 2 Conduct a confirmation of the completion for the initial processing and check whether or not there is any problem in the cable connection and the Ethernet lines See Section 5 4 Confirming the completion of the Initial Processing for details on confirming the completion for the initial processing Perform either one of the Confirming the completion of the initial processing completion actions described in Section 5 4 POINT The on off status of the INIT OPEN ERR and COM ERR LEDs is stored in the module status area address C8h of the buffer memory For more details see Section 3 8 List of Applications and Assignments of the 11 3 11 3 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 1 2 How to turn off COM ERR LED and to read clear error information This section explains how to turn off COM ERR LED and to read clear error information using the sequence program 1 How to turn off COM ERR LED using input output signals The COM ERR LED on the front of the Ethernet module is turned on when a communication error occurs in an external device Input output signal X1C ON a The COM ERR LED is turned off by turning on the off request signal Y17 COM ERR LED off request signal Y17
319. g open communication Communication via automatic open UDP port Simultaneous broadcast Support for the QCPU remote password function O 3 Setting the Ethernet parameters through GX Developer Access to QCPU with GX Developer TCP IP or UDP IP O Q Available A Available with restriction X Unavailable x1 For the number of its processing time refer to the Reference Manual The devices that can be accessed and its range are different according to the frame used for data communication x2 When the target station of the SREAD SWRITE instruction is the Q00J Q00 Q01CPU the read reporting device to the target station set to the argument D3 is ignored The operation of the SREAD SWRITE instruction is the same as that of the READ WRITE instruction For the SREAD SWRITE instruction refer to Chapter 4 or Chapter 6 of the User s Manual Application 3 Available for the Q00J Q00 Q01CPU function version B or later To use the function GX Developer Version 8 or later is required 2 SYSTE SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS MELSEC Q 2 5 For Use with Q12PRH Q25PRHCPU This section describes the use of the Ethernet module with the Q12PRH Q25PRHCPU 1 System configuration The configuration of a redundant system is shown below a Basic configuration of redundant system The basic system configuration of the redundant system is shown below Access can be made from the external device t
320. gainst improper access from an external device The company cannot assume any responsibility for any problems that may arise from system troubles caused by improper access x Examples of measures to prevent improper access e Establish a firewall e Set up a personal computer as a relay station and control the relay of sending receiving data using an application program e Set up an access controllable external device as a relay station Please consult with a network connection vendor or equipment sales vendor regarding access controllable external devices 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 5 9 1 Data communication when a remote password is set This section explains the use and setting of the QCPU remote password function and data communication between the external device and the QCPU when a remote password has been set 1 Overview of the remote password function a Remote password function 1 The remote password function enables disables access from the external device to the QCPU via the following modules e Ethernet module e Q series C24 2 When the remote password function is enabled for the Ethernet module the remote password check is performed for access from the external device to the following connections Users can select desired connections to which the remote password check is to be applied e User connection No 1 to 16 e Auto open UDP port e FTP transmission port TCP IP e GX Developer transmission port TCP IP
321. ger aiet naaa ara anit unaa A aa a Aaa ere nos TAa eases A 8 A o t Manuals naa i ir iin a a aiiai aiid aes A 16 Conformation to the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction c ccecceceeseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaetaeeeeeeaeeaees A 16 The Manual s Usage and Structure cccceccecceseeeeceeceeceeeesecaeceeeeaecaecaeseeecaecaecaesaeeaesaeseeseaesaesaeseeseesaeseeeeaeeats A 17 About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations c cccceceseceececeeseeeeceeeeeeeaeeaeceeeeeeeaesaeeeeseaesaesaeeaesansaeeseeeateaes A 21 PFOGUCE Configuratio siz seseaiectegsecescagedhe ana aaa aa ME a a a o i genous a a ines A 22 1 1 Overview of the Ethernet Module c cccceccssseessesseeeseesseeseeeseeseesseeseesseeseeeseeseeeseeseeeseeeseeeseeeseneeaees 1 1 1 2 Features of the Ethernet Module cccccceceecceeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeceaeeeeaeeseaeeseaaeeseaeeseaeeseaeeeeaeeeneaeeseaeeseaeeees 1 2 1 3 Additional Functions in Function Version B or Later cccccccscceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeaeeeseeeeeaeeseaeeees 1 12 1 4 Software Configuratio Nsan aiiai ied a aide Ahad dave i a in i 1 14 2 1 Applicable Systems 4 a 8eA8 nies Seiad iinn A ato a i A ed ini ei 2 1 2 2 Devices Required for Network Configuration ccccccceceeceeseeeeceeceeeeeesaeceeeeeeeaesaeseseaesaesaeseeesaesaeeeeeateaes 2 3 2 3 For Use in Multiple CPU System cccecceceeseeeeceeeeeeeseceececeeaesaecaeeeeeeaeeaecaeeseseaesaeseeseaeeaecaeseseecaeseeneae
322. gnated number Check the data length of the command and redo the data setting Te Addresses after the last address When reading writing in a microcomputer program an address after 3 cannot be read written from to he end of parameter setting range is designated nee P marae 9 Correct the address designated In the block number designation of the extension file register a block number exceeding the range of corresponding memory Correct the block number cassette size is designated Ahead address head device number and head step number of a command designated by an external device is set outside the range that can be designated When reading from writing to a microcomputer program or file register R values exceeding the PLC CPU s parameter setting range was designated A block number nated for an extension file register does not exist Cannot designate a file register R Check the device A word device is designated for a command for bit devices i Correct the command or the The head number of bit devices is designated by a value other than y h designated device a multiple of 16 in a command for word devices 59x Cannot designate an extension file register e Check the device mrs e Fix the faul referrin h The PLC CPU and the Ethernet module cannot communicate ix the faulty parts by teleming tothe abnormal codes appended to the end The PLC CPU cannot process reque
323. h 0 SOCKET_ERROR Data send System A printf n Send data System A n s n s_buf Send data display System A SendFlag FLAG_ON Send completion flag ON Receive processing if DataRecv socketnoA r_bufA RECV_ANS_1 TRUE Data receive printf n Receive data System A n s n r_bufA Receive data display else printf Receive failure System A n else printf Send failure System A n App 36 App 36 APPENDIX MELSEC Q System B send processing if CloseflagB FLAG_ON amp amp SendFlag FLAG_OFF if send socketnoB s_buf length 0 SOCKET_ERROR Data send System B printf n Send data System B n s n s_buf Send data display System B SendFlag FLAG_ON Send completion flag ON Receive processing if DataRecv socketnoB r_bufB RECV_ANS_1 TRUE Data receive printf n Receive data System B n s n r_bufB Receive data display else printf Receive failure System B n else printf Send failure System B n Send completion processing if SendFlag FLAG_OFF Sockerror ERROR_SEND ERROR_SEND Error handling return SOCK_NG if CloseflagA FLAG_ON ShutdownflagA FLAG_OFF Shutdown flag OFF if shutdown socketnoA 2 SOCK_OK Send receive inhibit processing System A Sockerror ERROR_SHUTDOWN ERROR_NO_ERROR Error handling return SOCK_NG if CloseflagB
324. h PLC CPUs of other stations via the Ethernet or MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 Multiple CPU settings Details are explained in QCPU User s Manual This screen is for setting the control PLC for the Ethernet module when it is used in a multiple CPU system Remote Password Details are explained in Section 5 9 5 This screen is for setting connections subject to the remote password check performed by the Ethernet module when the QCPU remote password function is used It is not necessary to set the Intelligent function module switch settings with GX Developer s I O assignment Each type of setting corresponding to the switch settings is performed in the above mentioned Operational settings Initial settings and Open settings 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 6 Network Parameters Setting the Number of MNET 10H Ethernet Cards This section explains one of the network parameters setting the number of MNET 10H Ethernet cards Start the Network parameters Setting the number of MNET 10H Ethernet cards screen by selecting GX Developer Network parameter For details on how to display the screen refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual E Network parameters Setting the number of MNET 10H Ethernet cards olki Module 1 Module 2 Module 3 Network type Ethernet None None viN Starting 1 0 No 0020 Network No 1 Total stations Gr
325. hanges Reference section address hexadecimal PLC parameters VO assignment settings Network parameters Setting the number of x ion 4 6 MNET 10H Ethernet cards Buto 134 PAH DNS settings User s Ta Application m 2 Router relay parameter 4n 2001 to 2244 A 1 Station No lt gt IP 4u 229n to 3A9a A 1 User s Manual Application information Chapter 3 FTP parameters 4n 3B0u to 3BBu 1 YserS Manual Application Chapter 5 E mail settings Send mail address User s Manual Application d x setting Chapter 2 News setting Redundant setting Redundant setting Section 5 11 3 Rotting garamsieis User s Manual Application gP Chapter 3 Remote password settings Remote password settings settings Section 5 9 5 O A Valid X Invalid 1 The PLC CPU operates with the settings performed during the re initial processing in the applicable buffer memories Do not change the settings in the applicable buffer memories 5 12 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 4 Sample Program The following figure shows a sample program that performs a re initial processing When I O signals of the Ethernet module are X Y00 to X Y1F SM400 UO H mov G20480 K4N0 Always ON Connection 1 open completion signal M6500 C s E M2500 Re initial Re initial instruction instruction M2500 X19 MO M1 lt Specify the change of operation settings gt i mam _ ov Ke 0252 Re initial Init
326. he completion of data commnication such as after the reception of a response for the transmission of the previous data commnd 7 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE PROCEDURE EXIST CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q 7 5 2 Fixed buffer communication program example with the procedure exist control method This section explains the programming method in order to communicate data procedure exist control method with an external device using the fixed buffers 1 Execution environment for the program example a Send program QCPU 1st station side 1 Connection No 1 is used for fixed buffer sending 2 The communication parameter settings are assumed to have been set as described in Section 5 6 1 Active open processing close processing 3 Fixed buffer No 1 send data Stored in D300 to D303 4 Fixed buffer No 1 send instruction complete device M300 5 Fixed buffer No 1 send instruction abnormal complete device M301 6 Fixed buffer No 1 send instruction complete status D3001 b Receive program QCPU 2nd station side 1 Connection No 1 is used for processing the fixed buffer receiving in the main program 2 Connection No 2 is used for processing the fixed buffer receiving in the interrupt program 3 The Ethernet module is mounted in slot 0 of the basic base unit 4 The Network parameters Setting the number of MNET 10H Ethernet cards parameter is assumed to have been set with GX Developer as follows
327. he User s Manual Application These settings are for using the e mail transmission reception and automatic news notification functions Send mail address setting Details are explained in Chapter 2 of the User s Manual This screen is for setting sending destination mail addresses when using the e mail sending receiving function News settings Details are explained in Chapter 2 of the User s Manual Application On this screen the settings for news notifying the PLC CPU monitoring results using the e mail function are performed 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 11 Interrupt settings and Interrupt pointer setting Details are 12 13 14 15 explained in Section 7 3 On this screen the settings for reading the receive data using the following functions by means of the PLC CPU interrupt program are performed e Reading the reception data in fixed buffer communication using a dedicated instruction BUFRCVS e Reading data transmitted from another station s PLC CPU using a data link instruction RECVS Redundant setting group setting Detailed explanation Section 5 11 QCPU User s Manual Make settings for using the Ethernet module in a redundant system Routing parameters Details are explained in Chapter 3 of the User s Manual Application This screen is for setting which stations are passed through when communicating wit
328. he error information is continued to be stored into the following areas even if the count of the error occurrences is stopped and no longer stored e Error log write pointer storage area Error log block c Error log block Error code end code address Starting from E5x 1 Inthe error code end code area the error codes that indicate error content are stored See Section 11 3 d Error block Subheader address starting from E6x 1 The subheader code of a faulty message is stored in bits 0 to 7 of the corresponding area 0 is stored in bits 8 to 15 2 For errors below the TCP and UDP levels 0 is stored e Error log block Command code address starting from E7H 1 This block stores the command code of a faulty message or each lower byte value of request type and sub request type of a data link instruction b15 to bO b15 to b8 b7 to bO or 2 0 is stored in the following case For messages not containing a command code e For errors below the TCP and UDP levels because their commands are unknown 11 15 11 15 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q f Error log block Connection No address starting from E8n 1 The faulty connection No is stored in bits 0 to 7 of the corresponding area 0 is stored in bits 8 to 15 2 For errors below the TCP and UDP levels 0 is stored g Error log block Local station Port No address starting from E9u 1 This block stores the local station
329. he initial processing is completed transmission and reception are allowed The remote password check is not performed for e mail transmission and reception Communication is possible after the initial processing is completed Communication is possible after the initial processing is completed Within the Ethernet communication is possible with the external device that has completed the open processing After the initial processing is completed communication is allowed by establishing a connection from the GX Developer side See Section 5 9 1 3 for access to the PLC of other stations Communication is allowed after the remote password is entered The remote password lock processing is automatically performed when the web browser closes Communication is possible after the initial processing is completed 3 After the open processing is completed communication is allowed from the time the unlock command is received until the lock command is received Communication is allowed after the remote password is entered The remote password lock processing is automatically performed when the project closes See Chapter 5 of User s Manual Application See the operating manual for GX Developer A dedicated connection is used for the non procedure fixed buffer communication Do not perform the remote password setting for the applicable connection If aremote password has been set in the QCPUs of the relay
330. he length of the text analyzed because the length of area or the request data length of the Qn text area or request data length is header and send to the Ethernet module too short again Requests that cannot be e Correct the content of request and 00A2 processed command e Handle by referring to the troubleshooting nee section of the CPU User s Manual i u to Errors detected by the PLC CPU a Hardware Design Maintenance and 4FFFu Inspection 11 25 11 25 z Connection oO 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Storage destination Error code abnormal Description of error Error handling code 7000 Take corrective action referring to the Errors detected by serial F eco to commiuni atiori module t Serial Communication Module User s 7FFFuH ae Manual etc Booou Take corrective action referring to the Errors detected by CC Link to ae y CC Link System Master Local Module BFFFu User s Manual e At initial processing the IP ri ing value of the a naile CR r Gorreet the IPandress C001 i Set the class to A B C e When using the router relay z e Correct the sub net mask function the setting value of the sub net mask field is incorrect At initial setting some of the Review and correct the necessary timer C0024 various timer setting values are Ae s values at initial processing outside the allowable range At initial setting the setting value of the
331. heck the number of mails remaining in the mail server 11 56 11 56 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Is the receive data value incorrect Characters got garbled Sending side sent in ASCII code Sending side converted the ASCII code to ASCII code once more Test the following items e The sending side sends an attached file in binary code e Whether or not the send data attached file is in ASCII code If the sending side is a PC try sending using another mail program If there is any difference due to the mail program check the mail settings again Check that the mail server s encode and decode are the same as the Ethernet Check the following items Whether or not the e mail parameter settings for the Ethernet module are correct e Whether or not the mail server s system is down Whether or not there is an error in the communication path Did the characters of the subject get garbled Codes other than 0 to 9 and A to F are used Y Correct the codes to 0 to 9 and A to F Is the sending side the Ethernet module NO e Because decode processing is not performed it cannot be received normally EUC or SHIFT JIS is used Check the PC setting Send from the PC to the local station Check the header information of the receive data sent from the Local station In case of Outlook Express check Property gt Details
332. hen the connection processing is completed MsgBox Connection Completed End Sub App 42 App 42 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Private Sub Command2_Click Dim SData As String Read DO to D4 5 points with the A compatible 1E frame command SData 01 ff000a4420000000000500 Send the data Me Winsock1 SendData SData End Sub Private Sub Commands3_Click Close the TCP connection socket disconnect the line Me Winsock1 Close End Sub Private Sub Command4_Click End the program End End Sub Private Sub Command5_Click Check the state of Winsock See the Help of Visual Basic for details MsgBox Winsock1 State End Sub Private Sub Winsock1_DataArrival ByVal bytesTotal As Long The DataArrival event occurs when new data arrives Dim RData As String Obtain the current data block and save it as a variant type variable Read the response from the PLC CPU Me Winsock1 GetData RData MsgBox RData End Sub App 43 App 43 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 9 Communication Support Tool MX Component MX Component is an ActiveX control library that supports any types of communication paths between IBM PC AT compatible personal computers and PLCs It allows the users to establish communication using simple processing only without having to know about the different communication protocols used in the individual communication It also supports various programming languages allowing for a
333. his area Address 20592 area Connection No 1 to No 16 Address 20593 area Connection using the automatic open UDP port Communication from GX Developer using the Ethernet connection Communication from the external device that uses the FTP function When the number of times a remote password mismatch occurred during the unlock lock processing exceeds the notification accumulated count the Ethernet module performs the following a mismatch occurs See Section 5 9 4 for details e The COM ERR LED lights up e The code C200h is stored in the error code and end code storage area of the buffer memory error log area address 227 to 372 E3H to 174n x The Ethernet module system does not close the connection The accumulated number of times a remote password mismatch occurred up to the present accumulated count value according to the Ethernet module can be checked using the storage area for abnormal completion accumulated count indicated in 4 below 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 4 Storage area for accumulated count unlock process normal completion of address 20594 5072H Storage area for accumulated count unlock process abnormal completion of address 20595 5073H Storage area for accumulated count lock process normal completion of address 20596 5074H Storage area for accumulated count lock process abnormal completion of address 20597 5075H a The accumulated number of times the rem
334. i module side Start SI No e Set the smallest number 0 to 15 among the maximum 16 interrupt SI No the control numbers on the Ethernet module side set in a Interrupt settings 7 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE PROCEDURE EXIST CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q In order to start up the interrupt program the Network parameters Ethernet interrupt setting and PLC parameters Intelligent function module interrupt pointer setting are required 2 Control method The control method when the interrupt program starts up is explained using fixed buffer No 2 and the area corresponding to connection No 2 as an example The interrupt settings with GX Developer for reading receive data using the interrupt program example below is illustrated in the screen display shown in 1 lt lt Data receiving using the dedicated BUFRCVS instruction interrupt program gt gt FEND SM400 lso Z BUFRCVS U0 K2 D200 Receive data D200 Word count for receive data stored RT From D201 Receive data Initial processing Open processing Data receiving Response sending I I 7 mae 1 Initial normal completion signal X19 l l 2 Open completion signal l l l l I Address 5000 b1 l BUFRCVS instruction lso interrupt processing D n 8 5 g ACK o ACK amp _ y onytcr only TCP 3 5 Cycle Cycle pee fap EE Sequ
335. ial instruction instruction M2500 X19 MO M1 lt Specify the change of operation settings gt i mam Imamah ov K 0252 Re initial Initial Connection 1 instruction normal open completion completion signal signal Connection 2 o Sn completion signal lt Read the current operation setting status gt UO mov G203 D255 lt Set write enable during RUN gt SET D255 6 ZP UINI U0 D250 M250 UINI instruction completion device RST M260 Initial completion status lt Processing upon normal completion gt W250 M251 INCP D260 lt Processing upon abnormal completion gt f INCP D261 device RST M2500 Re initial instruction X19 C SN __f set M260 Initial normal Initial completion completion signal status This is an example program that can be used to perform re initial processing when communicating with connections 1 and 2 The corresponding numbers and bits for each connection should be specified if other connections are used 10 26 10 26 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 TROUBLESHOOTING This section explains the contents of the errors that may occur during communications between the Ethernet module and an external device as well as the troubleshooting procedures The following are methods for checking whether there is an error on the Ethernet module side and the contents of the error Use one of the following methods to check whether there is an error and its content then take c
336. ial setting correct NO Review the TCP ULP timer Refer to Section 5 2 2 YES Is the existence check of the open setting set to Check NO Select Check Refer to Section 5 5 YES Is the existence check starting interval timer setting value of the initial setting correct NO Review the existence check starting interval timer Refer to Section 5 2 2 YES Is the existence check interval timer setting valu of the initial setting correct NO Review the existence check interval timer Refer to Section 5 2 2 YES Is the communication target IP address of the open setting set to broadcast Set the IP address of the YES communication target station to the communication target IP address Refer to Section 5 5 NO Check the initial processing parameter setting area buffer memory address 0 to 14H and communication parameter setting area buffer memory area 20 to 5Fx Are the settings of GX Developer consistent with the contents of the buffer memory Write the Ethernet parameters again and reset the PLC CPU Check the connection status Is the connection open 11 60 11 60 Open the connection 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 11 61 11 61 11
337. ial Connection 1 instruction normal open completion completion signal signal Connection 2 o Sn completion signal lt Read the current operation setting status gt UO mov G203 D255 lt Set write enable during RUN gt SET D255 6 ZP UINI U0 D250 M250 UINI instruction completion device RST M260 Initial completion status lt Processing upon normal completion gt W250 M251 INCP D260 lt Processing upon abnormal completion gt f INCP D261 device RST M2500 Re initial instruction X19 C SN __f set M260 Initial normal Initial completion completion signal status This is an example program that can be used to perform re initial processing when communicating with connections 1 and 2 The corresponding numbers and bits for each connection should be specified if other connections are used 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q Direct write to the following buffer memory addresses enables the re initial processing of the Ethernet module The procedure for performing the re initial processing by directly writing to the buffer memory is explained below a Change the value stored in the TCP Maximum Segment transmission area address 1En 0000nH Enable TCP Maximum Segment Size Option transmission 8000H Disable TCP Maximum Segment Size Option transmission b Change the values stored in the communication condition setting area address 1FH Bits 0 to 14 Specify the value
338. ication port For TCP IP communication GX Developer communication port For UDP IP communication c Ifthe remote password check is performed and the remote password status of the connection using the applicable port is in the lock status the use of the applicable port can be prohibited 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE d MELSEC Q If improper access from the opposite device has been performed during the above data communication set the applicable port to use prohibited See Section 5 9 4 for details To prohibit data communication from the opposite device using the Ethernet module FTP function set Not used in the FTP function setting item under the Setting the Ethernet FTP parameters through GX Developer See Section 5 3 of User s Manual Application 3 Remote password mismatch notification accumulated count designation area Address 20592 to 20593 5070H to 5071h a Use 0 to FFFFu to designate the count that will be the notification timing to the user when the number of occurrence of remote password mismatches become the permit or more during the unlock lock processing from the user external device after the Ethernet module starts up This designation is common to all connections Ou No designation The process c when a remote password mismatch occurs is not performed 1 to FFFFu Notification accumulated count Designate the notification accumulated count for each of the following connections in t
339. ication using the fixed buffer communication between the Ethernet modules a Communication using the fixed buffer Procedure exist Tfs St Ke Kdf x Df Sr Tfs Time from the start of sending to the completion of sending unit ms St Sending station scan time Ke Kdf Constant see the table below Df Word count of send data Sr Receiving station scan time QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 QU71E71 B2 Communication using Communication using Communication using Communication using TCP IP UDP IP TCP IP UDP IP Ke Kdf Ke ka Data communication using binary code 0 0065 0 020 0 019 Data communication using ASCII code 0 030 0 068 0 068 b Communication using the fixed buffer No procedure Tfs St Ke Kdf x Df Tfs Time from the start of sending to the completion of sending unit ms St Sending station scan time Ke Kdf Constant see the table below Df Byte count of send data Communication using TCP IP Communication using UDP IP Ke Kdf Ke Data communication using binary code 0 0018 Calculation example Calculate the time from the start of sending to the completion of sending unit ms when the QJ71E71 B5 communicate using TCP IP and send 1017 words of binary code data using fixed buffer communication procedure exist e Assume that the scan time on the receiving side is 10 ms and the scan time on the transmission side is 8 ms 63 34 ms 10 25 0 020 x 1017 8 App 9 App
340. ice ms 9 4 0 008 x 508 ACK processing time of the external device Calculation example 2 Calculate the time the QJ71E71 B5 takes to complete the processing of a data request from a PC after receiving it when the QJ71E71 B5 and the PC communicate using TCP IP and write 508 words of binary code data to the random access buffer unit ms 16 61 ACK processing time of the external device ms 9 5 0 014 x 508 ACK processing time of the external device App 10 App 10 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 3 Minimum processing time of communication using the MC protocol batch read and batch write Tfs Ke Kdt x Df Scr x number of scans required for processing ACK processing time of external device Tfs Time from when Ethernet module receives request data from personal computer until it completes processing unit ms 1 Ke Kdt Constant refer to the table below Df Number of request data words number of response data words Application data part Scr PLC CPU processing time a When the target station is the QCPU e Local station access Ethernet module mounted station scan time e Other station access via MELSECNET 10 Transmission delay time Ethernet module mounted station scan time b When the target station is in the redundant system and data is relayed via the tracking cable e Local station access Control system CPU scan time tracking time 2 e Other station access via MELSECNET 10 Transmissi
341. ignated Reference Manual correctly Are there any open errors or initial errors in the error log area Check and fix the faulty part The Ethernet module hardware may be faulty Consult your nearest dealer with the details of the errors 11 53 11 53 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 4 5 Sending errors during e mail communication 11 54 lt Sending with the sequence program gt Sending error NO Correct the execution condition of the MSEND instruction Was the dedicated MSEND instruction executed Was the MSEND instruction normally completed Fix the error according to the abnormal code in the MSEND instruction s complete status area and the e mail sending error log see Section 11 3 For details on the MSEND instruction refer to Section 2 6 of the User s Manual Application Can the error response be received from the mail server using the MRECV instruction YES Confirm with the system administrator that the following settings are made correctly DNS setting E mail setting Check the following items E mail parameter settings for the Ethernet module Whether or not the mail server s system is down Whether or not there is an error in the communication path MELSEC Q 11 54 11 TROUBLESH TIN Siete CANINE MELSEC Q lt Sending with the CPU monitoring function gt Sending error Are the
342. in the network system containing the Ethernet module Application installed station Data link instruction 4 Maximum size of data per communication The maximum size of data per communication differs depending on the data communication function wer coe Reference Data communication function Maximum size of data per communication Section ommunication using the MC g anaes The number of data that can be designated with the commands for the QnA compatible 3E frame protocol QnA comparatible 3E frame The number of data that can be designated with the commands for data Chapter 4 of Data link instruction link Application Chapter 6 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 5 9 Corresponding with the QCPU Remote Password Function The remote password function is one of the QCPU functions for the purpose of preventing improper access to the QCPU from users at the remote location The remote password function can be used by setting a remote password in the QCPU This section explains Ethernet module data communication in relation to the QCPU remote password function The remote password function is a function that has been added to the QCPU as a means of preventing improper access such as destroying a program or data from an external device However this function cannot completely prevent improper access The user should incorporate his her own safeguards when it is need to keep the security of the PLC system a
343. in this case the number of external devices that can be communicated with will be lower During communication using the MC protocol or random access buffers if data communication still continues even after the PLC CPU in a station where an Ethernet module is installed has been placed in the STOP status set Always wait for OPEN communication possible at STOP time under Initial timing setting see 4 7 Operation Settings 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE 2 MELSEC Q Close processing a The purpose of the close processing is to disconnect cancel the connection with the external device that has been established by the open processing mentioned previously b The close processing is used when terminating a connection with an external device changing an external device of a connection changing communication conditions etc Perform the close processing for connections that have been established by the open processing using sequence programs d Determine the timing of close processing with the external device The examples in the following sections describe the procedures for establishing a connection from the Ethernet module to an external device and subsequently closing it again by open and close processing for connection number 1 e TCP IP Active open See 5 6 1 Active open processing close processing e TCP IP Passive open See 5 6 2 Passive open processing close processing e UDP IP Open See 5 6 3 U
344. in this section are used when the QnA series Ethernet interface module programs are also used for the Q series Ethernet module see Section 2 in Appendix In the QCPU the input output signals for intelligent function modules are turned on off with dedicated instructions It is not necessary to turn on off the signals by a sequence program except for those that are shown in the programming examples in each of function explanation sections 2 When the QnA series Ethernet interface module programs are also used for the Q series Ethernet module it is also recommended to replace the instructions with the dedicated instructions shown in the corresponding function explanation section of each manual for the Q series Ethernet module 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 8 List of Applications and Assignments of the Buffer Memory This section explains details of the buffer memory 1 Configuration of the buffer memory Buffer memory consists of a user area and a system area as listed below a User areas 1 The areas where the user writes reads data 2 A user area consists of a parameter area for initial processing and data communication an area for data communication and an area for storing communication status and communication error data 3 Reading writing data to the user area should be performed according to the instructions in the corresponding detailed explanation section Data communication may take long if continually executed
345. incorporation into an existing system 1 Program utilization A program created for use with the Ethernet module of function version A can be used as is with the Ethernet module of function version B or later 2 Incorporation into an existing system Wiring used for function version A can be used as is in the Ethernet module of function version B or later App 3 App 3 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 2 The QnA A Series Module This section gives a comparison of functions of the Ethernet module and QnA A series module and explains program utilization and incorporation into an existing system The QnA A series module refers to the following product AJ71E71 AJ71E71 AISJ71E71 B2 AISJ71E71 B5 AJ71E71 S3 AJ71E71 S3 AISJ71E71 B2 S3 AISJ71E71 B5 S3 pea AISJ71E71N B5 AISJ71E71N B2 A1SJ71E71N B5T QE71N AJ71QE71N T AJ71QE71N B5 AJ71QE71N B2 AJ71QE71N B5T A1SJ71QE71N T A1SJ71QE71N B5 A1SJ71QE71N B2 A1SJ71QE71N B5T AJ71E71N T AJ71E71N B5 AJ71E71N B2 AJ71E71N B5T A1SJ71E71N T Appendix 2 1 Functional comparisons between the Ethernet modules and QnA A series modules The following tables list the functional comparisons of the Ethernet modules and QnA A series modules The symbol in the model name columns indicates that the corresponding functions are compatible between the applicable models See each module s manual for details indicates functions that have been added to or modified from the QnA A series m
346. ine Send the same data from the external device again Review the checksum on the external device side and send the correct value Investigate the conditions of the line noise distance between the line and power line contact of each device etc 11 28 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code abnormal code 11 29 Description of error An error packet of ICMP was received An error packet of ICMP was received An error packet of ICMP was received An IP assembly timeout error occurred in an external device An IP assembly timeout error occurred The remaining part of divided data could not be received and a timeout occurred Cannot send because there is no space in the internal buffer e g the IP header buffer In a message the Ethernet module received through automatic open UDP port communication or non procedure fixed buffer communication the data length designated in the application data field is incorrect Not all the receive data can be stored ASCII code data that cannot be converted to binary code is received when ASCII code communication is set in the operational settings of the Ethernet module The number of read write points is outside the allowable range The number of file data read write points is outside the allowable range e Read write request exceeds the maximum address Address is 0 MELSEC Q Storage destination Open Error handling Connection NI m
347. ing any of the following functions use the Ethernet module of function version B or later When the Ethernet module of function version A is used only the control CPU can be accessed Access to the non control CPU will result in an error e Communication using MC protocol e Communication using GX Developer e File transfer FTP server function External device Communication using MC protocol Communication using GX Developer File transfer FTP server function Ethernet O O Multiple CPU system U Ethernet module of function version B or later 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS MELSEC Q 2 When the other station at the access destination is in a multiple CPU system and access is to be made to the non control CPU of the relayed module of the accessed station use the modules of function version B or later as the relayed modules and QCPUs of the local station and all the relayed and accessed stations 1 Example Other station access is enabled independently of whether the control CPUs of the relayed modules are the same or different Poca station External device Communication using GX Developer Communication using MC protocol Setting from Hy Ethernet GX Developer MELSECNET H Relayed station 1 QCPU No 1 QCPU No 2 3 QCPU No 3 QCPU No 4
348. ing the system port use prohibited designation area of the buffer memory address 20488 5008h After this the unlock processing cannot be performed with respect to applicable connection until the use allowed is set d Inform the system manager that the number of occurrence times for an unlock processing lock processing abnormal completion is greater than the accumulated notification count and take appropriate actions 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 1 The following accumulated counts stored in the buffer memory can be cleared under the user s option Write 0 to the applicable area from the QCPU e Storage area for unlock processing normal completion accumulated count Address 20594 5072 e Storage area for lock processing normal completion accumulated count Address 20596 5074H 2 See Section 11 1 2 of User s Manual Basic for how to turn off the COM ERR LED for the Ethernet module after it has lit up 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 5 9 5 How to set the target connection for the remote password check Set the connection for the remote password check with the parameter settings through GX Developer Startup procedure GX Developer gt Remote password settings screen gt Remote password detail settings screen Setting screen Remote password detail settings Password settings A User connection No Characters that can be used in password Password 1
349. ings 4 Recording shee Ethernet mail address settings 7 Recording sheet 8 Ethernet News settings Recording sheet 9 Network parameters Ethernet Interrupt settings App 52 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Recording sheet 1 Module number GX Developer settin Z n o data screen Settingvaue OOOO O value Remark e i es a O OS Sia Siete Oooow G O O Setting the number of MNET 10H Ethernet Station No cards Off line Mode Self refrain test Hardware H W test Binary code communication Communication data code setting ASCllcode communication Do not wait for OPEN Communications impossible at STOP time Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time Input format 0 Ee cial IP address i Hexadecimal O ae format Initial Timing IP address Ethernet Operations setting IP address Adjust tinputtomat to input format aoe naa ze Ethernet V2 0 end frame setting IEEE802 3 Enable Write at RUN time R Enable Write at RUN time Enable Check mark TCP Existence _ Use the KeepAlive Confirmation setting Use the Ping App 53 App 53 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Recording sheet 2 Module number GX Developer setting Setting data Data item screen Setting value Remark ORERE UNA O AN A OFZO Default 20 500 ms window Timer EE es sans ala t 40 500 ms t 10 500 ms Default 60 500 ms Destination ex
350. ings with GX Developer in the following format 4 7 Operational Settings This section explains how to set the operations parameters Start the Ethernet operations screen by selecting Setting the number of MNET 10H Ethernet cards Operational settings Ethernet o1 Communication data code Initial timing Do not wait for OPEN Communications impossible at STOP time Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time G Binary code C ASCII code Send frame setting Ethemet v2 0 C IEEE8023 gt TCP Existence confirmation setting IP address Input format IP address 1 254 I Enable Write at RUN time Use the Keep live Use the Ping Cancel J 1 Communication data code address CBH b1 a Select the format ofthe communication data when communicating with an external device Description of seting Binary code Communicate using binary data ASCII code Communicate using ASCII data b For more details on the data communication codes see Section 3 2 Data Codes for Communication 1 Shows how to start the setting screen 2 Shows the setting screen of GX Developer lt 4 3 Indicates storage destination of setting items and setting vales 1 4 Shows the value of the settings and relevant section that provides detailed explanation The value in parentheses address OOO b O indicates the buffer mem
351. ink Erroneous outputs and malfunctions may lead to accidents Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction e To prevent malfunctions of the PLC system that may be caused by illegal e mails from the outside take a proper countermeasure such as virus detection so that illegal e mails are not received by the mail server of this module e If it is necessary to ensure the security of the PLC system against unauthorized access from external devices via the Internet appropriate measures must be incorporated by the user e Then controlling a running PLC modifying data by connecting peripheral devices to the CPU module or connecting a personal computer to the intelligent function module configure an interlocking circuit in a Sequence program so that the safety of the overall system is always maintained Also before performing other control operations program modifications and operation status modifications status control on the running PLC be sure to read the manual carefully and thoroughly confirm the safety Especially in the above mentioned control operations that are performed from an external device to a remote PLC any problems on the PLC side may not be dealt with promptly due to abnormal data communication In addition to configuring an interlocking circuit in a sequence program determine how the system handles data communication abnormalities etc between the opposite devices and the PLC CPU Design Preca
352. ins the procedure for creating programs and sample programs using MX Component 1 Procedure for creating programs The procedure for creating programs is outlined below The usage procedure below uses Visual Basic as an example tion Setup Utility 1 Perform the communication settings from a IBM PC AT compatible personal computer to the PLC by following the wizard Some types of controls are set only by programs without using the wizard Target seting is vew Conecton test Logoi sinna oer sero feces te sa The wizard allows the user to perform the settings PC side UF Ethernet board Dd oo ee required for the communication such as logical me _s station number connected module type and PLC to nawon T be connected Cancel lt Back L a Project Microsoft Visual Basic design MIE i rrer EE EEA TETEE 2 Paste the ACT control icon onto the form and assign B o TsO teea Neas aD a the logical station number set in step 1 to the 5 Project Form Form cikg a B5 Projecti Project Am mema oar property of the pasted control E rai a 4 Modules RIA Ters Read Device EE T OB Alphabetic categorized 2 iy ei iber Pi ta C GF Basr ActLogicalStationNumber Property ActLogicalStationNumber Pelle E 3 Use the functions provided by the software to write a Private Sub Commandi_Clic
353. ion for the target Ethernet module is in the lock status the parameter to the PLC CPU Error code module subject module The Ethernet line is in the high load status including i A j Perform another test when the load on the Erres a case in which an error equivalent to the error code Ethernet line is low pie C030H CO31H is occurring Error exists Routing parameter is not set An error equivalent to the error code C0804 is occurring POINT 1 The loop back test can only be performed for the Ethernet module of function version B and later Test results cannot be checked for the following modules No response will be displayed However nothing is shown under the use of GX Developer version 6 03D or former products Also they will not be counted in the total number of stations e Ethernet module of function version A QnA A series Ethernet module This is because there is no function to respond to this request e Ethernet module that has not completed the initial processing This is because the initial processing has not been completed x If the Ethernet module of function version A or QnA A series Ethernet module that does not have a function to respond to the loop back test receives a loop back test request the following error codes will be stored in the error log area of the buffer memory Error code 4080 in the case of an Ethernet module of function version A or QnA series Ethernet module of function ve
354. ion column in the error code list indicates the buffer memory where the applicable error code is stored The names used for the explanation indicated in the Storage destination column correspond to the buffer memory error code storage areas shown in the table below Error codes whose storage destination is not written are returned to the external device Note that the buffer memory may store error codes of the messages returned from the external device For error codes not shown in this manual refer to the manual of the external device and check the returned messages 7D 128 Bu 229 Datalink St A fordatalink instructions J o Dedicated instruction Complete status area for dedicated instructions Storage destination Error code abnormal Description of error Error handling code Open E mail log Dedicated instruction j O 0050 00511 0052H _ The content of these errors and the error handling for each error code is the 00544 same as the end codes 02 to 0063n returned to the external device 00554 Check the explanation of the applicable code shown in Section 11 3 1 and 0056 take actions accordingly 00574 00581 00591 Read and handle the error code 005Bu and end code area 00604 00634 Requests that cannot be e Review the content of request O0A0n designated for applicable e Correct the open settings connection See Section 5 5 Contents of request cannot be e Review and correct t
355. ion enabled during STOP Protocol of open setting UDP Existence check of open setting Check If the above connection is set as the target connection system switching may occur consecutively in the redundant system when a communication error occurs due to cable disconnection or external device power off 3 It is recommended not to set the connection which has been set to MELSOFT connection in the open system of the open setting as the target connection Do not check the check box If the above connection is set as the target connection all the MELSOFT products connected to the network will be targets and therefore the target external device MELSOFT product cannot be identified 5 98 5 98 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 5 11 4 Buffer memory for redundant system support function The redundant setting status of GX Developer can be checked in the following buffer memory areas 1 Issue system switch in Cable disconnection timeout Address 20992 5200H Stores the setting status of Issue system switch in Cable disconnection timeout 0 Not set 1 Set Disconnection timeout setting Address 20993 5201h Stores the setting status of the disconnection timeout setting Set time set value xX 500ms Example When the set time is 2s the storage value is 4H System switching settings when communication error occurs Connection for user Address 21008 5210n Stores the setting status
356. ion lt Use the aa M 1 Communication data code address CBH b1 a Select the format of the communication data when communicating with an external device Name of setting Description of setting Communicate using binary data ASCII code Communicate using ASCII data b For more details on the data communication codes see Section 3 2 Data Codes for Communication 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 2 Initial Timing address CBH b8 a Select the timing to open for connections for which TCP Passive open or UDP open are selected with the Open settings parameter 1 x1 For more details on the open settings see Section 5 5 Open Settings Name of setting Description of setting Do not wait for OPEN 3 Communication impossible at e Execute open close processing using a sequence program STOP time P Communication cannot be performed while the PLC CPU is in the STOP status ij e Passive open and UDP open connections always wait for open according to the Always wait for OPEN j Hare kane parameter settings a sequence program for open close processing is not required Communication possible at 2 STOP time i Communication can be performed while the PLC CPU is in the STOP status 2 If the sequence program of the local station s PLC CPU executes the close processing the station is not placed in the OPEN request wait status after the connection is shut off
357. ion been cut return FALSE Error handling if length SOCKET_ERROR nErrorStatus WSAGetLastError if nErrorStatus WSAEWOULDBLOCK return FALSE Error handling else continue Repeated until data are received else rbuf_idx length Updates receive data storage position recv_size length Updates the number of received data if recv_size gt size_max Have all response messages received break Stops repeating as data are received pR_buf rouf_idx 0 At the end of received data set NULL App 38 App 38 APPENDIX MELSEC Q return TRUE Normal termination void Sockerror int error_kind_A int error_kind_B Error handling function if error_kind_A ERROR_INITIAL printf Initial processing is abnormal n else nErrorStatus WSAGetLastError switch error_kind_A case ERROR_SOCKET printf Socket could not be created System A n break case ERROR_BIND printf Bind could not be executed System A n break case ERROR_CONNECT printf Connection could not be established System A n break case ERROR_SEND printf Send could not be executed n break case ERROR_SHUTDOWN printf Shutdown could not be executed System A n break case ERROR_CLOSE printf Normal close could not be executed System A n break switch error_kind_B case ERROR_SOCKET printf Socket could not be created System B n
358. ion for the communication with the procedure exist control method If the send data length exceeds this range at data sending a communication error occurs and the data is not sent Perform the fixed buffer communication using the following dedicated instructions Data sending BUFSND instruction e Data receiving BUFRCV instruction for main program BUFRCVS instruction for interrupt program For details on the dedicated instructions see Chapter 10 Dedicated Instructions The following should be observed when using a connection opened by UDP e External devices can be switched by modifying the setting values in the communication address setting area of the communication parameter setting area before sending receiving data Thus data can be sent to multiple external devices sequentially When performing sending receiving make sure to perform switching between external devices properly so that no communication problems occur When reading of the data received from the same connection reading of data received by the main program and the reading of data received by the interrupt program cannot be done together Use only one of the above mentioned programs for reading the data received Reading of data received by the main program cannot be performed when setting is being performed by GX Developer for reading of received data using the interrupt program For data commnd transmission the next data commnd should be after t
359. ion period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reason
360. ional settings and Initial settings to use for the Ethernet module The settings found on this screen must always be set in order to use the Ethernet module imi Network parameters Setting the number of MNET 10H Ethernet cards of x Module 1 Module 2 Module 3 Network type Ethernet v None v None viN Starting 120 No Network No Total stations Group No ol Station No Mode On line X v Operational settings Redundant settings Necessary settingi No setting Aleadyset Setifitisneeded No setting Already set Valid module M Start 1 0 No during other station access 1 pal Interlink transmission parameter Please input the starting 1 0 No of the module in HEX 16 bit form Assignment image Check End Cancel ie Acknowledge XY assignment Routing parameters Group Settings 2 Operational settings Details are explained in Section 4 7 This screen is for setting common items for when other modules use the Ethernet module The settings on this screen must always be set since they are required for the Ethernet initial processing 3 Initial settings Details are explained in Section 5 2 and Chapter 2 of the User s Manual Application This screen is for setting common timer values for TCP IP communication to be used in the Ethernet module as well as for setting the DNS server in order to use the e mail function It is not neces
361. is a function whereby the Ethernet module checks whether or not a remote device is functioning normally by sending an existence check message and then waiting to see whether a response message is received It is used if a connection to a remote device is open but communication with the remote device has not been performed for a certain period of time a The existence check function has two methods of checking PING and KeepAlive The Ethernet module performs each of the existence checks based on the setting values explained in 7 to 9 of this section and the existence check setting of the open settings refer to Section 5 5 6 The existence check function Ping or KeepAlive can be selected at the time of operation setting or re initialization For the operation setting refer to Section 4 7 Refer to Section 5 2 3 for the explanation about the re initial processing 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE 1 2 b MELSEC Q Checking by KeepAlive This method is used for a connection opened via the TCP IP protocol The Ethernet module performs an existence check by sending an existence check ACK message to a remote device with which communication has not been performed for a certain period of time and waiting to see whether or not a response is received x1 x1 The connection may be cut off if the remote device does not support the TCP KeepAlive function response to KeepAlive ACK messages Checking by PING This method
362. istence confirmation t 1200 500 ms starting interval Destination existence confirmation t 20 500 ms Interval timer Destination existence confirmation resend t 3 times timer Network parameter Ethernet Initial settings DNS server IP address Input format Decimal Hexadecimal Input format DNS server 1 IP address T a ie IP address Adjust to input format DNS server 3 IP address DNS server 4 IP address DNS setting App 54 App 54 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Recording Sheet 3 Module number GX Developer setting Setting data Data item screen Setting value Remark Opensystem Unpassve O pre Fullpassive Fixed buffer pf Seng Mer Pp Receive O Receive Fixed buffer Procedureexist_ communication Noprocedure i No pairs Connection Paring open p No f O Noconfrm O f confirm Existence confirmation ipa Confirm Local station Port No Input format Hexadecimal po fecal Destination IP address input Destination Hexadecimal O format IP address es O AS s npu sorma Da E Iput Dna Network parameter Ethernet open settings Protech Ooo mwa He a UDP ee a Open system o t _ Fullpassive i e ree oe ee ee tas O Pame 8a Receive Fixed buffer Procedure exist O communication Noprocedue ooo O No pairs Pairs E Connection Paring open No _ No confirm Existence confirmation
363. ived through simultaneous broadcasting by setting FFFFFFFF for the IP address of an external device that is to send data to the Ethernet module and FFFFH for the port No then performing the open processing 1 Setting screen This section explains the Open settings for receiving by simultaneous broadcasting e Connection No 16 is used The Ethernet module Port No is 0801H E Network parameter Ethernet open setting Module No 1 communication open confirmation Port No IP address No mo BE xf A lt r End Cancel Protocol Select UDP IP Open system Setting is not required Fixed buffer Select Receive Fixed buffer communication Select No procedure Pairing open Select No pairs Existence confirmation Select No confirm 8 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE NO PROCEDURE CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q g Local station Port No 1 Set the Ethernet module port No in hexadecimal 2 Designate the setting value in a range from 4014H to 1387H and 138BH to FFFEu 3 Ifthe receive data from specific external device is to be processed designate the user defined port No upon consulting a network administrator h Destination IP address Set FFFFFFFFH IP Address Input format HEX x IP address FF FF FF FF OK Cancel i Destination Port No Set FFFFH 2 Receive control method The receive control method is the same as for the norm
364. ixed buffer of the connection that opened the port set in 3 Board No below 3 Board No e Set the connection No 1 to 16 of the fixed buffer that will initiate the startup of the interrupt program 4 Interrupt SI No e Set the interrupt control No 0 to 15 on the Ethernet module side when the interrupt request is issued from the Ethernet module to the PLC CPU e Set a unique interrupt SI No that does not overlap with the ones for interrupts of other fixed buffer communication and the RECV instruction The interrupt SI No 0 to 15 can be arbitrarily assigned by the user to receive data in communication using up to 16 fixed buffers as well as to receive data using the RECV instruction by the interrupt program The user must manage the interrupt SI No assigned to each data reception method Example For receiving by the fixed buffer communication assign the same interrupt SI No as the target data communication connection For receiving using the RECV instruction assign an interrupt SI No that is not assigned to the fixed buffer communication Items other than the ones mentioned above do not need to be set by the user on the Ethernet interrupt settings screen The setting values shown in the table above are automatically displayed for items related to the detection method and event conditions In order to start up the interrupt program the Network parameter Ethernet interrupt setting and PLC paramete
365. k F program that reads the device data ret ActEasyIF1 GetDevice DO lpData 0 Labeli caption lpData 0 End Sub l Completed App 47 App 47 APPENDIX MELSEC O 2 Sample program The following sample program reads DO to D4 five points of the target PLC using the logical station number a When Visual Basic is used 1 Screen example Form1 Texti Enter the logical station number LogicalStationNumber Connection Command1 Detects eee eee IIIN Connect to the communication line E e a e ei Command2 oe E TET Read the device data sg SE a eee A Command3 Cut the communication line ACT control for utility setting type 2 Program example Private Sub Command_1_Click t KK K K K K KKK K K K K K K K K K K K Connection t KKK K K K K K K K K K ok K K K K K K K Dim rtn As Long Get LogicalstationNumber ActEasylF1 ActLogicalStationNumber Val Text1 Text Connection rtn ActEasylF1 Open If rtn 0 Then MsgBox The connection was successful Else MsgBox Connection Error amp Hex rtn End If End Sub Private Sub Command2_Click T KKK K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K Read t KKK K K K 2K K K 2K K K K K K K K K K K Dim rtn As Long Dim idata 5 As Integer D0 D4 are read rtn ActEasylIF1 ReadDeviceBlock2 D0 5 idata 0 If rtn 0 Then MsgBox D0 D5 amp idata 0 amp amp idata 1 amp amp idata 2 amp amp id
366. k fede paie Aa a EE 4 Complete device 1 2 2 7 7777 information read 3 The ZP ERRRD is executed when the read instruction switches from off to on Errors 1 When a dedicated instruction ends with an error the abnormal completion signal D1 1 turns on and the error code is stored in the complete status area S1 1 Refer to the following manuals regarding the error code check the errors and take corrective actions lt Error codes gt 4FFFu or less QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection COO0H or higher Section 11 3 3 of this manual Program example A program to read the open abnormal code for connection 1 When the input output signals of the Ethernet module are X Y00 to X Y1F 10 18 ttt HF Move HI D2 Designate the open abnormal code of Connection No 1 MOVP HO D3 Designate the latest error information SET MI MI A ZP ERRRD uo 00 MIO J Execute the ERRRD instruction M10 M11 i j ye Fide lt p pio 4 Processing at normal completion A Read the error information M11 1 Mov D D101 J Processing at abnormal completion RST MI 10 18 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 10 8 OPEN Instruction 10 19 This instruction establishes a connection open processing with an external device to perform data communication Applicable device MELSECNET H Index File MELSECNET 1
367. k for the remote Password Model name l MAS PARS Ag QJ71E71 password set in the QCPU ica Display the Remote password detail settings screen FTP transmission port TCP IP GX Developer transmission port Set the connection subject to the remote password check TCP IP GX Developer transmission port UCP IP l HTTP pon x1 Refer to the following when setting a remote password e Avoid using a character string of simple numbers or letters only e Combine numbers letters and special characters amp etc Avoid using a character string that represents the user s name or date of birth Place a check mark at the target connection 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q When using the Ethernet module in a multiple CPU system set the remote password by writing it to the control PLC of the Ethernet module After the remote password is set in the QCPU reboot the QCPU the first QCPU module for a multiple CPU system reset using the RESET L CLR switch or power reset By rebooting the QCPU the remote password becomes valid The password supported by the QCPU of function version A is used to prohibit reading writing of file data in the QCPU through GX Developer Dual access control can be provided by using the remote password described in this section and password for file access 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 5 9 6 Buffer memory for the remote password check function This secti
368. l hereinafter called the MC protocol the device data and program files of the PLC can be read from written to the host system This protocol is a passive protocol that communicates data solely according to the requests from the host system It does not require a sequence program for data communication after a connection is established If the host system is a personal computer running one of the basic operation systems below it is possible to create a communication program for the host system without considering the detailed MC protocol transmission reception procedures using one of the following separately sold communication support tools Supported basic operation systems Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System Microsoft Windows NT Workstation Operating System Version 4 0 Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System Depending on the version of MX Component used different operating systems are supported See the manual of MX Component for the details Separately sold communication support tools e MX Component SWOD5C ACT E or later hereinafter abbreviated as MX Component x See Appendix 9 for the overview of MX Component 2 Q Local station Response Power supply oO
369. l device ms 23 0 020 x 21 211 10 x 1 ACK processing time of the external device Command data length 21 words Response data length 211 words Calculation example 2 Calculate the time the QJ71E71 B5 takes to complete the processing of a data request from a PC after receiving it when the QU71E71 B5 and the PC performs TCP IP communication and write 100 points of ASCII code data to the data register D of the local station unit ms using the MC protocol communication When Enable Write at RUN time is set e Assume that the scan time of the station in which QU71E71 B5 is installed is 10 ms 40 58 ms 22 0 037 x 221 11 10x 1 Command data length 221 words Response data length 21 words App 12 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 4 Processing Time of the Dedicated Instructions The following table shows approximate operation processing time of each dedicated instruction The operation processing time differs slightly depending on the system configuration and communication protocol a QJ71E71 100 Processing time unit ms Q02H Q06H Q12H l Instruction name NO of access points Q02CPU Q25H Q12PH Q25PH Q00J Q00 Q01CPU pape STUN Q12PRH Q25PRHCPU For 1 For 2 For 1 For 2 For 1 For 2 a SS 7 GT TCP IP communication E J waw Beers a S R 1 A N E binary code communication procedure exist Closes the UDP IP E a E rr a a the UDP IP pp E E RECVS a a READ SREAD RECV 480 words Co
370. laced and the Ethernet address changes In the same may when the external device personal computer etc is replaced restart the Ethernet module 2 It is recommended to record and save parameters not only when the CPU is replaced but also when parameters for the Ethernet module are created or modified 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE This chapter explains an overview of the communication procedure using the Ethernet module as well as the required initial processing of the Ethernet prior to starting data communication and the open processing for communication with an external device The sequence program for setting the parameters required to perform communication can be greatly simplified by setting the parameters of the Ethernet module supported by GX Developer The following explains the communication procedure using GX Developer When utilizing a sequence program for a conventional module see Appendix Using Programs Designed for Conventional Modules 5 1 Overview of the Communication Procedure This section explains an overview of the procedure for performing data communication with external devices via the Ethernet module To start data communication establish connections with external devices via the initial 5 or open processing To end the data communication perform close and end processing to shut off the connection and as a result all communication processing is terminated The fo
371. lalalalalalatala alalalalalalalalalalalalalatata 15 JUDP 0800 No pairs __v No confirm v No procedure Simultan End Cancel a Protocol Select UDP IP b Open system Setting is not required c Fixed buffer Select Send 8 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE NO PROCEDURE CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q d Fixed buffer communication Select No procedure e Pairing open Select No pairs f Existence confirmation Select No confirm g Local station Port No 1 Set the Ethernet module port No in hexadecimal 2 Designate the setting value in a range from 401H to 1387H and 138BH to FFFEH upon consulting a network administrator Select a port No not used by other ports h Destination IP address Set FFFFFFFFH IP Address Input format HEX IP address FF FF FF OK Cancel i Destination Port No 1 Set the port number of the external device side in hexadecimal 2 Designate the setting value in a range from 401H to FFFEH upon consulting a network administrator 3 Check the communication range shown in Section 8 1 2 2 Send control method The send control method is the same as for the normal no procedure communication using the fixed buffers For more details see Section 8 2 8 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE NO PROCEDURE CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q 8 5 2 Receiving by simultaneous broadcasting Data is rece
372. lated products that can use functions added through improvements in the Ethernet module 1 Compatibility with related products designed for using functions added to the Ethernet module Version of Ethernet module Added function Support for IEEE802 3 frames Version of related product QJ71E71 100 O QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 B2 Function version B or ater whose first 5 digits of the serial No are 03102 CPU module GX Developer Version 7 or later Re initial processing using sequence programs Function version B or later whose first 5 Re initial processing of the Ethernet Re initial processing via dedicated instruction UINI instruction digits of the serial No are 03102 module TCP Maximum Segment split transmission Function version B or later whose first 5 digits of the serial are 05051 No Function version B or ater whose first 5 digits of the serial No are 03061 Function version B or ater whose first 5 digits of he serial No are 03102 Function version B or ater whose first 5 digits of he serial No are 05051 Re open processing of the Ethernet module 1 Function version B or later whose first 5 digits of the serial are 05051 No Function version B or ater whose first 5 digits of he serial No are 05051 O Existence check function Checking by KeepAlive Function version B or later whose first 5 digits of the serial are 05
373. le installed stations on the same Ethernet where the Ethernet module is located This allows writing the same data to all stations etc POINT 1 In simultaneous broadcasting if the messages received by the simultaneous broadcasting are not needed external devices connected to the same Ethernet should discard them at first given opportunity 2 The user needs to determine the port numbers dedicated to the transmission and reception by simultaneous broadcasting after which simultaneous broadcasting can be performed by designating these port numbers 8 5 1 Sending by simultaneous broadcasting Sending can be performed through simultaneous broadcasting by setting the external device IP address to FFFFFFFFu and performing the open processing For data sending by simultaneous broadcasting the Ethernet sets the request destination IP address to FFFFFFFFu and send data over the Ethernet 1 Setting screen This section explains the Open settings for sending by simultaneous broadcasting e Connection No 15 is used The Ethernet module Port No is 0800H E Network parameter Ethernet open setting Module No 1 BEE Fixed buffer Pairing Existence Local station Destination Dest Port Prot i retocat iLE pen systern Ree bufer communication open confirmation Port No IP address No alalalalalalalalalalatalala wo alalalalalalalalalalalalalatata alalalalalalala
374. llowing diagram illustrates the communication procedure See Section 4 6 Network Parameters Setting the Number of MNET 10H Ethernet Cards See Section 4 7 Operational Settings See Section 5 2 Initial Processing l See Section 5 3 Router Relay Parameter See Section 5 5 Open Settings Set parameters for the Ethernet module using GX Developer Start up the PLC CPU Initial processing 1 Automatically processed J See Section 5 6 Open processing Conection for User No 1 to 16 Connection for system Communi Communi Communi Communi i Communi Gaai MELSECNET H i He cation using cation Sie MELSECNET 10 cation using File transfer cation using cation using the MC fixed usingthe Feed ey communi adataink FTP Web GX protocol buffers NC protocol een cation instructions function Developer See Section 5 6 Close processing 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q Each of the following three types of communication can be performed with an external device opened by the user Communication using the MC protocol e Sending receiving in fixed buffer communication procedure exists e Communication using random access buffers When receiving communication request data from an external device PLC CPU Ethernet module Subheader code Receive compl
375. lock stores the time and date on which the e mail is received in BCD code b15 to b8 b7 to bo Month 011 to 12u Lower 2 digits of year 00s to 99n b15 to b8 b7 to bo Hour 00s to 23x Date 011 to 311 b15 to 8 b7 to bo Second 001 to 59s Minute 00u to 59 b15 to b8 b7 to bo Higher 2 digits of year 00 to 99 Day of the week 0 to 6 14 Error log block Subject address starting from 5887 e This block stores 30 words from the beginning of the Subject of the e mail e A Subject is not stored successfully if it contains characters other than alphanumeric and ASCII code 11 19 11 19 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q b E mail status storage area for sending addresses 5B39H to 5CAOn 1 Dedicated instruction normal completion count address 5B39x e This area stores a cumulative count of how many times the dedicated instruction MSEND completed normally 0 The MSEND instruction is not executed or no executions have resulted in normal completion 1 or more Cumulative count of normal completions of the MSEND instruction 2 Dedicated instruction abnormal completion count address 5B3An e This area stores a cumulative count of how many times the dedicated instruction MSEND completed abnormally 0 The MSEND instruction is not executed or no executions have resulted in abnormal completion 1 or more Cumulative count of abnormal completions of the MSEND instruction 3 Number
376. loop back test can be performed with communication using the MC protocol in order to check the completion status of the initial processing for the target Ethernet module The following is an overview of the loop back test for communication using the MC protocol See the Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual for details 1 Loop back test for communication using the MC protocol The loop back test is a function designed to check the following Whether a line has been properly connected to the test target Ethernet module e Whether the parameters for the Ethernet module have been correctly set e Whether the initial processing for the Ethernet module has been completed normally e Whether the program for the external device is running correctly It is necessary to connect lines when performing communication using the MC protocol with the user port on the Ethernet module side Perform the open processing for the connection to be used on the Ethernet module side This function can only be used for the Ethernet module of the local station The function cannot be used for the Ethernet module of another station via a network system Station sending a loop back test command EP ae Ethernet 4 E Ethernet module Ethernet module Ethernet Loop back test target station module 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 5
377. ls and corrective action for the error code selected in Error Display 2 Checking the LED on off status and operation mode number on the H W information screen of the diagnostic functions Startup procedure GX Developer gt Diagnostics System monitor gt Module s Detailed Information H W Information H W Information Module Display format Module Name 0J71E71 100 Product information 060610000000000 D E 3 DEC HW LED Information gt HAW SW Information INIT 0001 BUF 1 0000 NET NO 0001 OPEN 0000 BUF 2 oooo GRP NO 0000 BUF 3 oooo ST NO 0001 ERR 0000 BUF 4 oooo MODE 0000 COM ERR 0001 BUF 5 oooo CONFIG 0014 BUF 6 oooo BUF 7 oooo BUF 8 oooo BUF 9 oooo BUF10 oooo BUF11 oooo BUF12 ooo0 BUF13 oooo BUF14 ooo BUF15 ooo0 BUF16 0000 Start monitor Stop monitor Close Displays This screen displays the Ethernet module information stored in the following areas of the buffer memory 2 HW LED information rignt side Storage area for connection status 5000 20480 Pa theta Station No x2 b1S5tob9 b8 b7 b6 bd b4 b3 b2 bi 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 10 ij tori to f 6 5 4 3 2 1 OPEN LED l l l l COM EER IED 1 Communication data code 4 Send frame 0 Binar
378. lt i POAN er HTTP response code 300 to 399 51041 k 20741 51051 er HTTP response code 400 to 499 20742 HTTP 5106 er response code 500 to 599 20743 Skaten 51071 ystem area 20744 Status storage HTTP 51081 area response code 20745 to 20746 er 5109 to 510Ax Error log block 1 Destination IP address 20747 to 20750 Eirortime 510B to 510Ex 20751 to 20757 510F me 151 Same as the error log block 1 20758 to 20764 5116 nee 1Cx Same as the error log block 1 20765 to 20771 511D ae Same as the error log block 1 20772 to 20778 5124 to 512A Same as the error log block 1 20779 to 20785 5128 east Same as the error log block 1 20786 to 20792 5132 to 5138H Same as the error log block 1 Continues on the next page 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Continued from the previous page Address a GX Developer 7 Ao Initial value Decimal Application Hexadecimal setting Hexadecimal applicability 20793 to 20799 5139 to 513Fx 20800 to 20806 5140 to 51461 20807 to 20813 5147 to 514D 20814 to 20820 514E to 5154n 20821 to 20827 Status storage og b 5155 to 515Bz 20828 to 20834 515C to 51621 20835 to 20841 5163 to 5169n 20842 to 20848 516A to 5170n 20849 to 20855 og 5171 to 51771 20856 to 20991 ae 5178 to 51FFs Use prohibited System area Ca ea 20992 Te Gus switch in cable disconnection timeout eee 5200 i H ection 5 Issue system 1 Set
379. m for the factor that does not switch the system Change the CPU from the separate mode to the backup mode 11 62 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 63 MELSEC Q 2 OPS connection communication error The following shows a troubleshooting flowchart for the case where a communication error occurred during connection with the OPS Error in communication with OPS Has OPS connection been set in the open system of the open setting NO YES Is the local station port number of the Ethernet module correct NO YES Is the IP address of the NO OPS correct YES YES Is the MC protocol used NO Is the MELSOFT YES product used NO Is EZSocket used on the OPS side NO YES The possible cause is other than above or external device fault Execute the troubleshooting for the case where data communication cannot be made Refer to Section 11 4 Set the open system of the open setting to OPS connection Refer to Section 5 5 Set the local station port number of the Ethernet module correctly Refer to Section 5 5 Set the IP address of the OPS correctly The MC protocol cannot be used for the connection set to OPS connection MELSOFT connection cannot be made for the connection set to OPS connection The port set to OPS connection can be connected to only EZSocket 11 63 APPENDIX MELSEC Q APPENDIX
380. mal completion signal MO Connection 1 open completion signal Fixed buffer No 1 sending program Change the send data read command to pulse Designate the BUFSND instruction data Designate the send data length Designate the send data Execute the data sending to the external device Perform the sending normal completion processing Perform the sending abnormal completion processing 10 10 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 10 5 CLOSE Instruction 10 11 This instruction disconnects closes a connection by which data was communicated with an external device Applicable device Setting Internal device MEESECNED TS Index data System user File MELSECNET 10 Special module register Constant iter register Direct JO O Bit Word ku s eol S o S yy dolf S2 o Instruction code Executing condition Command po ZP CLOSE Setting data Setting data Description Set by Data type Un Start input output signal of the Ethernet module Binary 16 bits 00 to FE The two most significant digits of the 3 digit input output signal User S1 Connection number 1 to 16 Binary 16 bits S2 Head number of the device that stores control data Binary 16 bits D1 Head number of the local station bit device that turns on for one scan upon completion of instruction D1 1 also turns on if the instruction execution ends abnormally The file registers for each of the local devic
381. mally Ethernet module see Section 11 3 Are there any open errors or initial errors in the error log area Check and fix the faulty part The Ethernet module hardware on the sending side may be faulty Consult your nearest dealer with the details of the errors 11 46 11 46 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 4 2 Receiving errors during fixed buffer communication common to procedure exist and no procedure Perform error code reading while the connection is open Receiving error If the amount of actually received data is smaller than the length of data expected to be received the subsequent processing must allow reception of the remaining data If the amount of actually received data is larger than the length of data expected to be received the subsequent data should be treated as the next request message or as unnecessary data See Remark in 11 3 3 section for further details Do the expected length of data to be received and the amount of data actually received match Check the open status of the connection with an external device Execute the open processing of the applicable connection For details see Section 5 6 NO 5 Make sure that the open close processing using input output signals and the dedicated OPEN or CLOSE instruction are not executed simultaneously in the same connection If so modify the program Is th
382. me as fixed buffer No 9 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION This chapter explains the settings and procedures required prior to starting the operation of the Ethernet module in a system 4 1 Loading and Installation This section explains precautions for Ethernet module handling from unpacking to installation as well as the installation environment common to all modules For more details on the module mounting and installation refer to the User s Manual for the PLC CPU module used 4 1 1 Handling precautions The following explains precautions for Ethernet module handling 1 Since it is made of resin the Ethernet module case should not be dropped or subjected to any shock 2 Tighten the module terminal and fixing screws within the following specified clamping torque range Tightening torque range External power supply terminal screw M2 5 screw 40 Necm Module fixing screw usually not required M3 screw 36 to 48 Necm 1 This terminal is used as an external power input terminal for supplying power to the transceiver when being connected to a 10BASES 2 The module can be easily fixed onto the base unit using the hook provided at the top of the module However it is recommended that the module will be secured with the dedicated installation screws if it is subject to significant vibration or shock DANGER e Do not touch the
383. memory 8 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE NO PROCEDURE CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q 8 2 Sending Control Method This section explains the control method when data is sent from the Ethernet module to an external device using fixed buffer No 1 and the area corresponding to connection No 1 as an example lt lt Data sending using the dedicated BUFSND instruction gt gt Send data direction D100 Byte count for send data Set the send data in D100 and D101 From D101 Send data ZP BUFSND U0 K1 DO D100 MO MO M1 Processing for normal completion H M1 Processing for abnormal completion H Initial processing Open processing Data sending i i i 1 1 1 1 i l i 4 Initial normal completion signal X19 1 i i Open completion signal Address 5000 b0 BUFSND instruction Is One scan BUFSND instruction complete device BUFSND instruction complete device 1 am ACK only TCP Data sending 8 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE NO PROCEDURE CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q 1 Confirm normal completion of the initial processing 2 Confirm the normal completion of the open processing for connection No 1 3 Execute the dedicated BUFSND instruction The Ethernet module processes the following and sends the data Writes send data length and send data to the fixed buffer No 1
384. mmunication In random access buffer communication data is written to and read from the random access buffer according to instructions requests from an external device The external device writes and reads data in the random access buffer of the Ethernet module asynchronously with the sequence program of the PLC CPU 1 The random access buffer can be written to and read from freely by any external device excluding the Ethernet module without giving access to a specific external device Thus it can be used as a common buffer area for all of the external devices connected to the Ethernet External External device device External device External device Ethernet module Random access buffer External device 9 COMMUNICATION USING THE RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER MELSEC Q 2 The following shows the data flow in the communication processing using the random access buffer Ethernet module Data written orenen rand PLC CPU ane g Read request External access device FROM instruction befer f Dataread 3 The random access buffer communication can be performed from all external devices except from the Ethernet module itself including conventional modules The random access buffer communication cannot be used for communication between PLC CPUs External devices that can perform communication using the random access buffer e External devices on the Ethernet to which the Ether
385. mmunication between END stations in which Ethernet WRITE SWRITE modules are installed ZNRD Sinodi ZNWR Time from receiving the UINI UINI instruction to the completion of re initial processing X19 is turned on x1 When data is relayed via the tracking cable of the redundant system add the tracking time For the data transfer time in the tracking cable refer to the QnNPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System b QJ71E71 B5 QU71E71 B2 E l Instruction name N91 access points Q02CPU Q25H Q12PH Q25PH Q00J Q00 Q01CPU Cerone eee Tae aa en a eT e raa BUFRCV TCP IP communication BUFRCVS iword 1017 words e pee e poa e binary code communication BUFSND 276 24 5 45 0 fixed buffer communication U procedure exist Closes the UDP IP cose foo mee ee o ERRCLR Clear all the error information ERRRD Read initial abnormal code r a a the UDP IP a e Le l os 08 03 05 301 411 ar7xi 4oxt 277 389 480words 53 66 52 63 53 82 Communication between stations in which Ethernet modules are installed Time from receiving the UINI 212 218 instruction to the completion of re initial processing X19 is turned on x1 When data is relayed via the tracking cable of the redundant system add the tracking time For the data transfer time in the tracking cable refer to the QnNPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System App 13 App 13 APPENDIX App 14 MELSEC Q 5 System switching time of
386. mmunication errors occurs the system switching request is issued Communication error Description After the connection is opened after open processing the existence of the external device cannot be checked Existence check There is no ACK response from the external device within the TCP ULP timer value ULP timeout b Target connection A communication error is detected on the connections set in the system switching settings when communication error occurs in the redundant setting of GX Developer Refer to Section 5 11 3 for the redundant settings The following connections can be the targets of monitoring e Connection No 1 to 16 Automatic open UDP port e FTP communication port GX Developer communication port TCP UDP e HTTP communication port 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q c System switching request operation at communication error The Ethernet module checks communication with the external device for an error using the existence check function or TCP ULP timer The system switching request operation performed at a communication error is described below External device 1 ECS CADCA Col Colas eos a Communication error occurre
387. mmunication using MC protocol or random access buffer 1 Operation setting Refer to Section 4 7 Set the initial timing setting to Always waiting for OPEN communication enabled during STOP 2 Open setting Refer to Section 5 5 When making TCP IP communication set the open system to Unpassive or Fullpassive c Open close processing by I O signal Since the output signal Y turns off in the standby system CPU open close processing by I O signal is unavailable Set the initial timing setting of the operation setting to Always waiting for OPEN communication enabled during STOP or use the dedicated instruction OPEN CLOSE instruction Refer to Section 5 6 When using the user connection for communication it is recommended to prepare the connections for communication with system A and for communication with system B If acommunication error occurs in the host system or the system switching occurs the above enables immediate communication with the other system On the Ethernet module up to 16 user connections can be set 5 101 5 101 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 3 Communication using MC protocol The QnA compatible 3E frame can be used to access the control system standby system or system A system B For the message format and data specification method refer to the Reference Manual a Operation performed for access to control system standby system or system A system B 1 When system switching occu
388. monitoring conditions satisfied Correct the notification setting from GX Developer For more details refer to Section 2 7 of the User s Manual Application Can the first sending with the CPU monitoring function be performed YES Are there devices outside the range of the device setting among the condition devices YES Modify the condition devices Handle errors according to the e mail transmission error log Section 11 3 Can the second sending with the CPU monitoring function be performed 1 Correct the following so that the monitoring condition disable time satisfies Disable time gt CPU inquiry interval CPU inquiry interval Device value of the notification condition Perform the following so that the sending time between the SMTP server and the Ethernet module satisfies sending time lt CPU inquiry interval Decrease the load on the SMTP server If the SMTP server and the Ethernet module are connected via routers etc connect the Ethernet module to the same main line as the SMTP server Y Check the following items E mail parameter setting for the Ethernet module Whether or not the mail server system is down Whether or not there is an error in the communication path Check the following items before using the e mail function System configuration and environment Section 2 2 of the User s Manual Applicati
389. mote I O station of the MELSECNET H set the enable disable write at CPU RUN time parameter to Enable 6 COMMUNICATION USING THE MC PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 6 1 4 Support of multiple CPU system or redundant system When the external device accesses the QPU in a multiple CPU system or redundant system specifying the target QCPU with the request destination module I O number in the QnA compatible 3E frame for MC protocol enables access to the control CPU or non control CPU of the multiple CPU system or to the control system CPU standby system CPU or system A CPU system B CPU of the redundant system Refer to the Reference Manual for details Refer to Chapter 2 of this manual for the system configuration Example When multiple system CPU No 1 is specified La cloak aah oT Request data area Header Subheader PC No Request destination module I O No n Command 4 Subcommand 4 Head device Number of device points Device code Po A E Y 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Gi 1 1 1 1 1 1 i H L H L H LIH L Hos ee LH e a E 5 0 0 ofo ofF Fjo 3E ofo ofo 0 1 a o0o 1 0fo 40 1 0 00 1 M i0 0010 0 1000 8 351 301 30H 3030H 30H 6H 46H 30433445430H 304 30H3030H 3138H 304304314 30430 343031 H304 30H 30H 31 HAD HAH 30430H 30H 311 30H 30430H 30H30H 38H Command message for QnA compatible 3E frame T Request destination rm module station No e When using the Ethernet module in
390. mponent can run on IBM PC AT compatible personal computers running the following basic operating systems Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System Microsoft Windows NT Workstation Operating System Version 4 0 Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System 4 Support for a wide variety of programming languages MX Component supports the following programming languages It allows the user to develop a wide range of customized applications Programming language Development software Visual Basic Microsoft Visual Basic 6 0 Microsoft Visual C 6 0 VBScript Text editors and commercially available HTML tools BA Microsoft Access 2000 or Microsoft Access 2002 5 Support for functions dedicated for data communication with PLCs MX Component provides the functions necessary for data communication with PLCs including functions for opening closing communication lines and reading writing devices Multi function communication programs can thus easily be developed with MX Component Function name Function Connects a telephone line Open Opens a communication line lose Closes a communication line Disconnect Disconnects a telephone line GetErrorMessage Displays error definition and corrective action R
391. municated with the following external devices e Device on the Ethernet to which the Ethernet module is connected e Devices connected with the router relay function see Section 5 3 As shown in the diagram below when using each fixed buffer No 1 to 16 the destination devices and usage conditions for sending receiving procedure exist no procedure etc should be set when the connection via the Ethernet module is opened to fix the external device for each buffer a At TCP IP communication It is allowed to change external devices only when the open completion signal of the applicable connection is off b At UDP IP communication External devices can be changed regardless of the status of the applicable connection Destination IP address and Destination Port No in the communication address setting area can be changed However the Local station Port No cannot be changed When changing external devices do not use the Pairing open and Existence confirmation functions Fixed buffer No 1 For sending to external device 1 For receiving from external External device 1 Fixed buffer No 2 i 9 device 1 Fixed buffer No 3 Or receiving omextermnal External device 8 device 8 to to Fixed buffer No 16 For sending to external External device 28 device 28 7 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE PROCEDURE EXIST CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q In communication where the procedure exist control method is
392. n Set the control system CPU to RUN by remote operation Clear the error of the standby system CPU 2 x1 After writing a parameter file simultaneously reset the both redundant CPUs x2 When the operation status of the control system CPU is switched from STOP to RUN check the error status of the standby system CPU and if an error has occurred set the error code 6010H to SD50 and then turn on SM50 to clear the error 5 104 5 104 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 4 Communication via fixed buffer a b c With procedure Has timeout occurred NO Fixed buffer transmission procedure Send data to system A Receive processing in standby system When data is sent to the Ethernet module mounted on the standby system the data received by the Ethernet module is discarded and data receive processing is not performed The fixed buffer receive completion signal corresponding bit of address 5005x does not turn on Receive processing in interrupt program When the control system is switched to the standby system by of system switching before execution of an interrupt program the interrupt factor is held When the system switching occurs again and the standby system is switched to the control system by the interrupt program is executed by the held interrupt factor The interrupt factor is not transferred to the other system When data is sent from ext
393. n Display contents Item name Description of item setting Example of abnormal completion Setting range option Specify the network number of the Ethernet module in the PING executing Execute Network No i 1 to 239 station of Station PING Station No R the station number of the Ethernet module in the PING executing 1to64 Target of IP address Specify the IP address of the PING test target station 000000014 to FFFFFFFEw PING eke input Select the input format of the IP address Decimal hexadecimal Specify the time of Option the communication Specify the response wait time for the PING test 1to30s time ification specmealio Specify the number ae e Specify the number of times ie Specify the transmission count es of transmissions e Execute till interrupting Result Display the result of the PING test lt success transmissions Display the total packet transmission count and its success count during the PING test execution Connection Setup Execute station of PING station connected to GX Developer Specify the network number and station number of the Ethernet module that will 1 Option specification result success transmissions execute the PING test The network number and the station number will be set on the network parameters setting the number of MNET 10H Ethernet cards screen of GX Developer Target of PING Specify the IP address of the PING test target
394. n No 1 BE to C71 Communication No 8 status storage LED on off status area Stores the on off status of the LEDs on the front of the Ethernet module INIT LED b0 0 off 1 on initial processing completed OPEN LED b1 0 off 200 C8 1 on connection open processing completed X ERR LED b3 0 off 1 on setting error COM ERR LED b4 0 off 1 on communication error Area for module Bits other than above are reserved for system use pe a fae status Hub connection status area Continues on the next page e Communication mode b9 0 Half duplex 1 Full duplex e Hub connection status b10 0 Hub not connected disconnected 1 Hub connected e Data transmission speed b14 0 Operating at 1OBASE T 1 Operating at 1O00BASE TX Bits other than above are reserved for system use Switch status operational mode setting 0 Online 1 Offline 2 Self refrain test 3 Hardware test H W test 3 16 3 16 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Continued from the previous page GX Developer RON Initial value i Reference Decimal Application setting Hexadecimal teas section Hexadecimal applicability Status of settings with GX Developer Communication data code setting b1 0 Communication in binary code 1 Communication in ASCII code Initial open method setting b2 0 No parameter setting start up according to the sequence program 1 Parameter setting
395. n abnormal detection signal X18 CLOSE instruction For Open abnormal processing CLOSE instruction complete device CLOSE instruction complete device 1 1 1 fi 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 L 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Open completion signal Address 5000 Open request signal Address 5002h SYN ACK FIN ACK Aa Aa SYN FIN 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q After communicating the parameter settings confirm the normal completion of the Ethernet module initial processing Initial normal completion signal X19 ON Start the open processing using the dedicated OPEN instruction Open request signal address 5002H b0 ON The Ethernet module starts the open processing upon receiving the open request SYN from the external device At normal completion e Open completion signal address 5000H b0 ON e OPEN instruction complete device ON e OPEN instruction complete device 1 OFF e OPEN instruction complete status area 2 0000H Data communication is enabled At abnormal completion e Open completion signal OFF e OPEN instruction complete device ON e OPEN instruction complete device 1 ON e The open error code is stored in the buffer memory e OPEN instruction complete status area 2 Value other than 0000H e Open abnormal detection signal X18 ON The Ethernet
396. n complete status area 1 OOOOH Data communication is enabled When the open processing completes abnormally e Open completion signal OFF e OPEN instruction complete device ON e OPEN instruction complete device 1 ON e The open error code is stored in the buffer memory e OPEN instruction complete status area 1 Value other than 0000H Open abnormal detection signal X18 ON Start the close processing using the dedicated CLOSE instruction Open request signal OFF The Ethernet module executes the close processing Internal processing only When the close processing completes normally e Open completion signal OFF e CLOSE instruction complete device ON e CLOSE instruction complete device 1 OFF e CLOSE instruction complete status area 1 OOOOH When the close processing completes abnormally e Open completion signal OFF e CLOSE instruction complete device ON e CLOSE instruction complete device 1 ON e CLOSE instruction complete status area 1 Value other than 0000H 1 The end code at completion is stored in the dedicated instruction complete status area For details on the dedicated instructions see Chapter 10 Dedicated Instructions 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE 5 7 Pairing Open 5 7 1 Pairing open MELSEC Q The following explains communication using the paring open method via the Ethernet module Pairing open is an opening method for establishing
397. n the GX Developer function Communication a Maximum Segment Size Option transmission a oes O The function is available X The function is unavailable App 4 App 4 APPENDIX 3 x4 5 MELSEC Q Applicable when the module s software version is earlier than Q version The availability of the function depends on the date of manufacture software version of the PLC CPU and SWnIVD NX GPPQ model GPP function software package A sequence program using input output signals cannot be used together with the parameter settings from GX Developer Compatible with the input output signals and the buffer memory of the QE71 QE71N The function is compatible but cannot be used together with the e mail sending receiving function for sequence program 6 When Always wait for OPEN is set in the network parameters of GX Developer the conventional sequence programs are not required 7 8 9 When using this function in the conventional sequence programs the following conditions are not applicable It will not operate correctly because the same area is used e Always wait for OPEN is set in the operational setting of the network parameters MELSOFT connection is set in the open setting of the network parameters e Re initial processing with UINI instruction buffer memory is used in the sequence programs EEPROM is not installed Items that were previously stored in the EEPROM in the QE71 QE71N are now store
398. n will be used or not The router relay function is not needed when the QJ71MT91 communicates with the target device on the same Ethernet the subnet address of the IP address is the same The router relay function allows communication with devices on other Ethernets via routers and gateways The router relay function does not mean a function with which the QJ71MT91 acts as a router One default router and a maximum of any eight routers can be set for the router relay function 2 Subnet mask pattern Address 200H 201h a b 1 Set the subnet mask 1 Setting range C0000000 to FFFFFFFCn Consult the network administrator for the setting When not using the subnet mask set any of the following table values according to the class FF0000001 FFFFO000H FFEFFFOOH Networks constructed by Ethernet include small scaled network systems where multiple devices are connected to one Ethernet and medium and large scaled network systems where multiple small scaled networks are connected by routers etc The subnet mask logically divides one network where many devices are connected into multiple sub networks to facilitate administration Network address 81H 05x Oth ae ee OT oe tJofojofojojojifojojofojol jof fofojsfol fi 1fojofojojojojo i Subnet mask IP address 81H When not administrated by the sub network the connected devices need not have subnet masks Set the network a
399. nce y system System B Control system System A Standb ol z on 9 nono g i sfe qy ee fue System switching Tracking cable request External device 3 Standby system Cols CONE NCK IE ICID During normal communication System A is operating as a control system and system B as a standby system The external device is communicating with the Ethernet module mounted on the main base unit of the control system CPU 1 At error detection 2 When the Ethernet module mounted on the main base unit of the control system CPU detects the communication error that occurred between the external device and Ethernet module it issues a system switching request to the control system CPU 3 After system switching System A operates as a standby system and the system B as a control system The external device changes the connection destination and communicates with the Ethernet module mounted on the main base unit of the control system CPU System B 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 1 By connecting the external device and the
400. nd deletes it automatically to the text b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi b0 1141110100 Oi 00H When reading 61 4 When writing 62 4 Command response flag At command 0 At response 1 When reading Command External device to Ethernet module o N fe T oO 1 0 oO oO 1 Communication using binary code 61H 00H eee Subheader b7 to bO Oo 1 1 10 Ororo rdq 6 46h y 4 1 H Communication using ASCII code 36H 314 301 30H SF Subheader N Only for command no response Command response type When communicating using the random access buffer use the status shown in the diagram Response Ethernet module to external device Etu lt y Subheader b7 to bO ti 4 4 0 o0 o o 4 E Ey 1 lt 14 45H 31H Subheader oO 1 N 9 COMMUNICATION USING THE RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER 3 Head address MELSEC Q Indicates the head address ranging from 2680H to 3F7Fx of the random access buffer whose data is read written from to using its logical address ranging from OH to 17FFH See Section 9 3 a Communication using binary code L Ws s 2 bytes b Communication using ASCII code r XM G 4 bytes Data length setting Designate the head address by its binary value Designate an ASCII code value that expresses the head address in hexadecimal Indicate the number of words of the read writt
401. nder the following conditions The port is placed in the communication enabled status after the initial processing is completed and communication can be performed without programming and regardless of the open status of connection No 1 to 16 Communication enabled at automatic open UDP port 1 1 1 1 4 gt Initial PLC CPU i Normal completion signal X19 Ethernet module Ethernet Y Y Request Response Request Response I 1 Open and close timing of automatic open UDP port a Open timing The port opens automatically according to the parameters registered by the user after the Ethernet module completes the initial processing and the communication line is connected b Close timing It automatically closes again when the station in which the Ethernet module is installed is reset powered off 2 Functions that accommodate data communication using the automatic open UDP port a Communication from an external device 1 Reading writing data from to the PLC CPU the port number is designated by the user default 1388H 5000 when communicating using the MC protocol QnA compatible 3E frame commana 2 Regardless of the communication data code setting for the GX Developer See Section 4 7 Communicate with the binary code 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q b Communication from the station in which the Ethernet module is installed In this case it is possible to communicate using da
402. necting to the 1OBASE T 100BASE TX network This section explains how to connect the Ethernet module to the 10BASE T 100BASE TX network Object module for the explanation QU71E71 100 The following shows the connection diagram for the twisted paid cable lt Operating procedure gt Step 1 Connect the twisted pair cable to the hub Step 2 Connect the twisted pair cable to the Ethernet module 1 The Ethernet module detects whether it is 1OBASE T or 100BASE TX and the full duplex or half duplex transmission mode according to the hub For connection to the hub without the auto detection function set the half duplex mode on the hub side 2 For devices required for 1OBASE T or 100BASE TX connection and a sample system configuration refer to Section 2 2 1 and 2 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 4 2 Connecting to the 1OBASE5 network This section explains how to connect the Ethernet module to the 10BASE5 network Object module for the explanation QU71E71 B5 The following shows the AUI cable connection diagram Transceiver DC power supply See REMARK in Section 2 2 lt Operating procedure gt Step 1 Slide the retainer toward the direction B as shown above Step 2 Push in the AUI cable connector all the way Step 3 Slide the retainer toward the direction A as shown above Step 4 Confirm that the AUI cable is locked Step 5 Supply power to the transceiver
403. ned excessively it may damage the screws and cause the module to short circuit malfunction or fall off e Always make sure to touch the grounded metal to discharge the electricity charged in the body etc before touching the module Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the module Operating Precautions A CAUTION e Please read the user s manual carefully and confirm the safety thoroughly before proceeding to perform control operations of the PLC especially modifications of data programs and operation status status control that is running by connecting personal computers etc to the intelligent function module Incorrect modifications of data programs and operating status may cause system malfunctions damages to the machines or accidents Precautions When Disposing of This Product A CAUTION e Dispose of this product as an industrial waste REVISIONS x The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Revision Oct 2000 SH NA 080009 B Reflect the contents of the function version B Put Windows base software products together from Mitsubishi Programmable Logic Controller MELSEC series to Mitsubishi integrated FA software MELSOFT series Standardize the name from software package GPP function to product name GX Developer Correction Entire manual change MELSECNET 10H to MELSECNET H SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Contents About Manuals The Manual s Usage and
404. ned for the AJ71QE71 N hereafter abbreviated as QE71 can be utilized for communication with the Ethernet module except for the programs listed below e Programs for commands relating to file manipulation Refer to the MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual e Programs for accessing a data link system QCPU Q mode modules cannot be connected to MELSECNET Il and MELSECNET B However since the Ethernet module and the QE71 have different response speeds the programs may not be used as is Make sure to test the operation first App 6 App 6 APPENDIX MELSEC Q b Using the programs designed for the local station s QOPU 1 Do not write the parameters of the Ethernet module set by GX Developer network parameters to the QCPU if sequence programs are used for initial processing or end processing If the parameter settings for the Ethernet module of GX Developer are not used the following precautions should be observed when performing the communication All the setting values of the communication condition setting switches for the QE71 will operate in OFF status Set the communication conditions by the re initial processing described in Section 5 2 3 MELSOFT products e g GX Developer cannot access the QCPU via the direct connection between MELSOFT products e g GX Developer and the Ethernet module 2 Ifthe parameter setting for the Ethernet module is performed using GX Developer delete the sequence
405. nerated when the initial processing is executed b Error codes are stored as binary values when the initial abnormal completion signal X1A is on c An error code is cleared when the initial normal completion signal X19 is turns on but can also be cleared by the following operations 1 Resetting the PLC CPU or turning off the PLC power 2 Writing 0 to the initial error code storage area with a sequence program Open error code connection numbers 1 to 8 addresses 7CH to C1h connection numbers 9 to 16 addresses 5824H to 5869H a These addresses store the result of the open processing for the applicable connections b The results of the open processing are stored in binary values 0 Normal completion Other than O Abnormal completion Open abnormal detection signal X18 ON c An error code is cleared by the following operations 1 Reopening the connection that caused an open error 2 Resetting the PLC CPU or turning off the PLC power Fixed buffer sending error code connection numbers 1 to 8 addresses 7DH to C2h connection numbers 9 to 16 addresses 5825H to 586An a These addresses store error codes generated when an error in data sending to an external device occurs during fixed buffer communication using the applicable connection b A sending error code is cleared when the next data sending is normally completed Connection end code connection numbers 1 to 8 addresses 7EH to C3
406. net module is connected e External devices on the Ethernet that are connected with the router relay function see Section 5 3 9 COMMUNICATION USING THE RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER MELSEC Q 9 1 1 Control method by read requests from an external device The following diagram illustrates the control method when data is sent from the Ethernet module in response to a read request from the external device External device T P E 5 R 2 ACK g ACK 8 only TCP 2 only TCP g s 3 Oo ac Ethernet module Random access buffer iis ac te af a be aa ae Sc ar Ee a ee TA ee ie or Writes with the TO instruction PLC CPU Saf SSeS SSeS eases bs SSS SoS Seet ees ee Sc oe Soe he bosses SS 1 The PLC CPU writes data to the random access buffer of the Ethernet module according to the TO instruction of the sequence program Or the external device writes data to the random access buffer of the Ethernet module 2 Asynchronously with the processing of 1 above the external device sends a read request to the Ethernet module The Ethernet module side command receiving 3 Upon receiving the read request from the external device the Ethernet module sends the data written in the random access buffer to the external device which sent the read request The Ethernet module side response sending In random access buffer communication data can be communicated with an external device for which the procedure exist cont
407. ng modules If any module is faulty please request your local Mitsubishi service center or representative to repair 5 If the problem cannot be solved through the above steps please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining the operation communication conditions at error occurrence and the information stored in the error log area within the buffer memory of the Ethernet module 11 39 11 39 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 40 MELSEC Q Depending on the restrictions of the buffers of the local station and external device data may be divided for communication Data received separately is restored reassembled by the Ethernet module to be communicated using the fixed buffer random access buffer etc The received data is restored reassembled based on the data length in the communication data The Ethernet module performs the following processing if data among the communication data is incorrect 1 When communication is performed using fixed buffer with procedure and random buffer a If the data length specified immediately after the subheader is smaller than the amount of text data received 1 The data immediately following the part of the text data equivalent to the data length specified immediately after the subheader will be regarded as the next message 2 Since the header of each message will be a subheader the Ethernet module performs processing according to the code in the subheader 3 If the
408. ng side When reading of the data received from the same connection reading of data received by the main program and the reading of data received by the interrupt program cannot be done together Use only one of the above mentioned programs for reading the data received x Reading of data received by the main program cannot be performed when setting is being performed by GX Developer for reading of received data using the interrupt program 8 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE NO PROCEDURE CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q 8 6 2 Fixed buffer communication program example with the no procedure control method This section explains the programming method in order to communication data through the no procedure control method with an external device using the fixed buffers 1 Execution environment for the program example a b Send program QCPU 1st station side 1 Connection No 1 is used for fixed buffer sending 2 The communication parameters settings are assumed to have been set as described in Section 5 6 1 Active open processing close processing except the Fixed buffer communication parameter The Fixed buffer communication setting should be changed from Procedure exist to No procedure 3 Fixed buffer No 1 send data Stored in D300 to D303 4 Fixed buffer No 1 send instruction complete device M300 5 Fixed buffer No 1 send instruction abnormal complete device M301 6 Fixed buffe
409. ng the following parameters in the PLC CPU of the station to which the Ethernet module is installed and by restarting the PLC CPU When the processing is completed normally the INIT LED on the front of the Ethernet module turns on e Network parameters Setting the number of MNET 10H Ethernet cards parameter e Operational settings parameter e Initial settings parameter This section explains how to check the completion of the initial processing The status of the Ethernet module becomes communication enabled when the initial processing is completed normally See reference sections for each communication function to perform communication When the initial processing has not been completed normally do the following to check the contents of the error take corrective actions then execute the initial processing again e Check the error code using the Parameter status of the Ethernet diagnostics See Section 11 2 e Check the contents of the error corresponding to the error code then take corrective actions See Section 11 3 3 5 4 1 PING test using GX Developer Via Ethernet board This section explains how to check the completion status of the initial processing for the Ethernet module using the PING test function of the GX Developer Ethernet diagnostics 1 PING test a The PING test is used to check through GX Developer the existence of an Ethernet module on the same Ethernet line that has completed the ini
410. nication and power cables to be connected to the module in a duct or fasten them using a clamp If the cables are not placed in a duct or fastened with a clamp their positions may be unstable or moved and they may be pulled inadvertently This may damage the module and the cables or cause the module to malfunction because of faulty cable connections e Tighten the terminal screws using the specified torque If the terminal screws are loose it may cause the module to short circuit malfunction or fall off If the terminal screws are tightened excessively it may damage the screws and cause the module to short circuit malfunction or fall off e When disconnecting the communication and power cables from the module do not pull the cables by hand When disconnecting a cable with a connector hold the connector to the module by hand and pull it out to remove the cable When disconnecting a cable connected to a terminal block loosen the screws on the terminal block first before removing the cable If a cable is pulled while being connected to the module it may cause the module to malfunction or damage the module and the cable e Be careful not to let any foreign matter such as wire chips get inside the module They may cause fire as well as breakdowns and malfunctions of the module e A protective sheet is pasted on the upper part of the module in order to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips to get inside the module while wiring Do not remove
411. nnection No 1 1 1 Use the program example described in Section 5 6 1 Active open processing close processing for the sequence program that executes the open processing close processing b Receive program QCPU 2nd station side 1 After setting each parameter with GX Developer and write to PLC CPU reset the PLC CPU and confirm that the initial processing is completed When the initial processing is normally completed connection No 1 and 2 wait for an Active open request from the external device 2 Communicate data from the external device using fixed buffer communication procedure exist sending 3 Data received in the corresponding fixed buffer data area in the Ethernet module is read to the PLC CPU 7 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE PROCEDURE EXIST CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q Send program X19 Initial normal completion signal MO Connection 1 open completion signal Fixed buffer No 1 sending program RJ eS RS E M3000 Change the sending command to pulse K3 D300 Designate the BUFSND instruction data Designate the send data length K1234 D301 Designate the send data K5678 D302 K8901 D303 ZP BUFSND yo D300 M300 Execute the data sending to the external device M300 M301 Normal completion processing Perform the sending normal completion processing Perform the sending abnormal completion processing Abnormal completion processing 7 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE PR
412. not be used since the RECV instruction is not executed for the standby system Channel being used RECV instruction interrupt program RECVS instruction When the SEND instruction is executed for the redundant system the processing of the RECV instruction or interrupt program RECVS instruction changes depending on the following condition 1 2 When system switching occurs between execution of the SEND instruction for the control system and execution of the RECV instruction or interrupt program When the control system is switched to the standby system by system switching before execution of the RECV instruction or interrupt program it holds the RECV instruction execution request area address 205 CDu of the buffer memory or the interrupt factor interrupt pointer of the interrupt program When system switching occurs again and the standby system is switched to the control system the RECV instruction or interrupt program is executed using the held RECV instruction execution request area of the buffer memory or the interrupt factor of the interrupt program When the SEND instruction is executed for the standby system When the standby system receives data from the transmission station it holds the RECV instruction execution request area address 205 CDu of the buffer memory and the interrupt factor interrupt pointer of the interrupt program Therefore when the standby system is switched to the control system by system
413. notice 6 Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable logic controller device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi programmable logic controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the programmable logic controller applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices shall also be excluded from the programmable logic controller range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible providing the user consults their local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances solely at the users dis
414. nt Size Option transmission or use UDP IP type communication Otherwise the sequence program may not function correctly read write is incorrect 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q Please keep the following points in mind when re initializing the Ethernet module Failure to do so may cause errors in the data communication with the external devices Be sure to end all current data communication with external devices and close all connections before performing a re initial processing Do not mix a re initial processing done by writing directly into buffer memory for instance by using a TO instruction with a re initial processing via UINI instruction Also do not request another re initial processing while a re initial processing is already being performed Be sure to reset external devices if the IP address of the Ethernet module has been changed If an external device maintains the Ethernet address of a device with which it communicates the communication may not be continued after the IP address of the Ethernet module has been changed It is possible to change the operational settings when performing re initial processing by a sequence program In the case of Ethernet module parameters other than the operational settings the settings should be changed via GX Developer after which the QCPU PLC No 1 in the case of a multiple CPU system should be reset Applicable buffer memor Parameter setting item PP y Parameter c
415. nt transmission speed can be checked Target station CPU type S1 3 can be specified with the following data link instructions The control system standby system or System A System B of the Target station CPU type specification for redundant system can be specified data link instructions READ SREAD instruction e WRITE SWRITE instruction REQ instruction Chapter 4 Chapter 6 of User s Manual Application 1 13 1 13 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 1 4 Software Configuration The Ethernet modules support the TCP IP and UDP IP protocols OSI reference model corres ponding to the PLC configuration a cine i User program ii Q Series PLC CPU i ayers t Bi cpu Dedicated instruction i Di Buffer memory 7 Application layer f System call 6 Presentation layer Commun Commu Commun Commun Commun FTP Commun Commun 5 Session layer tit ication nication ication ication ication ication ication j i m4 using using using using via by by 1 i rt fixed random the MC data e mails Web i i i buffers access protocol link SMTP HTTP i i i buffers instructi POP3 i Socket it DNS Ethernet 1 vt module i TCP UDP ia i 4 Transport layer l IP IGMP IEn IP stil 3 Network layer Ethernet i Ethernet 2 _ Data link layer 00BASE TX 10BASE T 10BASES 10BASE2 100BASE TX 10BASE T 10BASE5 10BASE2
416. nter of a Interrupt of b Ixx SI No Connection No 16 0 to 15 50 to 255 a Network parameters Interrupt settings The interrupt settings using GX Developer are explained below Start the Ethernet interrupt settings screen by selecting Setting the number of MNET 10H Ethernet cards Interrupt settings E Network parameter Ethernet interrupt setting Module No 1 _ Of x Input format Device Detection Word device Board Interrupt Interrupt condition Setting value 51 No No Device code 7 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE PROCEDURE EXIST CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q Description of setting Setting range option Decimal e Hexadecimal Fixed buffer Device code Select device code PREY instructor o ooo instruction DeviceNno OZO O O O OoOO O O No Detection method e Edge detection Interrupt condition ol Scan complete Word device setting value Board No Set channel number connection number used in the e RECVS instruction 1 to 8 interrupt program o instruction 1 to 16 Input format Select the input format of each data Interrupt SI N Set the interrupt No lotos S OE to 15 1 Input format e Select the input format decimal hexadecimal of each setting item 2 Device code Select Fixed buffer The interrupt program starts up when the receive data is stored in the f
417. ntrance to the PLC system relay station and station to be accessed in the above diagram access to other stations beyond the set station is prohibited See 3 5 69 5 69 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 2 Processing for allowing prohibiting access to the PLC from the external device 1 Access allow processing unlock processing e To access the specified QCPU the external device performs the remote password unlock processing for the Ethernet module of the directly connected station local station e If the unlock processing has not been performed access to the specified station is prohibited by the remote password check performed by the Ethernet module that has received a communication request See 3 All data receiving before the unlock processing will be processed as an error x The Ethernet module of the QCPU station for which the remote password is set 2 Access processing Normal completion of the remote password unlock processing allows to access the specified station e Perform any access 3 Access prohibit processing lock processing The remote password lock processing is performed from the external device to disable any further access when access to the specified station has been completed Wh ing the local station QOPU When accessing the other station QOPU rien accessing iis oe Q A station 9 A station A 0 Ethernet O
418. nues on the next page 1 Setting from GX Developer allowed prohibited Setting allowed Setting prohibited 2 Application in the reference section column refers to the User s Manual Application 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Continued from the previous page GX Developer Initial value Dee Application Hexadecimal setting Hexadecimal applicability TCP Maximum Segment Transmission setting area Enable TCP Maximum Segment Size Option transmission Transmission 8000 Disable TCP Maximum Segment Size Option setting area transmission e Re initialization makes the set value effective Communication condition setting Operational Settings area Communication data code setting b1 0 Communication in binary code 1 Communication in ASCII code TCP Existence confirmation setting b4 0 Use the Ping Initial processing 1 Use the KeepAlive parameter setting Send frame setting b5 area For eee re te 0 Ethernet frame reinitialization condition setting 1 IEEE 802 3 frame roi Setting of write enable disable at RUN time b6 Operational 0 Disable Settings 1 Enable Initial timing setting b8 0 Do not wait for OPEN communication impossible at STOP time 1 Always wait for OPEN communication possible at STOP time Re initial specification 015 0 Re initial processing complete reset by the system 1 Re initial processing request set by the user Bits other than above are reserved for system use Connection No
419. o 16 addresses System area is used a For this item select the communication method when communicating using the fixed buffers Name of setting Description of setting In fixed buffer communication data is communicated in 1 1 by handshaking with the external device Communication using the MC protocol and the random access buffers can be performed as well e The no procedure fixed buffer communication uses dedicated connections The PLC CPU and external devices communicate data in 1 1 or 1 n mode through No procedure simultaneous broadcasting 1 Procedure exist The handshaking with an external device must be performed using a sequence program 1 For details on the simultaneous broadcasting see Section 8 3 Simultaneous Broadcasting When UDP IP is Used 5 Pairing open connection numbers 1 to 8 addresses 20H to 27H b7 connection numbers 9 to 16 addresses System area is used a Select whether or not the Ethernet module s receiving and sending connections should be made into one pair and connected to one port of an external device when using fixed buffer communication both of the procedure exists and no procedure can be designated For more details on this see Section 5 7 Pairing Open Name of setting Description of setting Does not use the pairing open method Uses the pairing open method 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 6 Existence confirmation connection number
420. o 2 receiving program Interrupt program gt gt 150 sm400 s Brrecvs uo K2 D700 Execute receive data reading 10 7 10 7 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 10 4 BUFSND Instruction This instruction send data to an external device through fixed buffer communication Applicable device Internal device MELSECNET H Ind earn File MELSECNET 10 Special module ae Constant iner ee register Direct JO O egisi ets a Instruction code Executing condition Command BUFSND f H ZP BUFSND Un S1 S2 S3 D1 Setting data Set by 9 Start input output signal of the Ethernet module 00 to FE The two most significant digits of the 3 digit input output signal Connection number 1 to 16 Binary 16 bits Head number of the device that stores control data Binary 16 bits Head number of the device that stores send data Binary 16 bits Head number of the local station bit device that turns on for one scan upon completion of instruction System D1 1 also turns on if the instruction execution ends abnormally The file registers for each of the local device and the program cannot be used as devices to be used in the setting data Un Binary 16 bits Control data Set by S2 0 Systemarea CT Stores the status at completion Goniplet status 00001 Normal completion esi j 2 Other than 0000 y Abnormal completion error code 2 Send data Device Item Setting
421. o the control system standby system of the redundant system Refer to Section 5 11 when configuring a network with the redundant system External device LAN card Network No 1 Station No 3 IP address 10 97 14 3 Sub net mask 255 255 255 0 Ethernet Control system a JINE FP Gi Ceai QJ71E71 100 1 QJ71E71 100 2 Network No 1 Station No 1 IP address 10 97 14 1 IP address Sub net mask 255 255 255 0 Network No 1 Station No 2 10 97 14 2 Sub net mask 255 255 255 0 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS LAN card 1 Network No 1 Station No 3 IP address 10 97 14 3 Sub net mask 255 255 255 0 MELSEC Q b System configuration with communication path backed up The following shows a system configuration having a pair of communication paths backed up that connect the external device and Ethernet module Access can be made from the external device to the control system standby system of the redundant system in the communication path 1 or communication path 2 Example If a communication error occurs during access to the control system in the communication path 1 access can be made to the control system in the communication path 2 x2 Further if a communication error occurs in the communication
422. ocal station If the system is changed it is possible to restart communication with external devices by changing the IP address for the Ethernet module of the local station in the operation settings see Section 4 7 set by GX Developer To change the communication condition setting values It is possible to restart communication with external devices by changing the communication conditions in the operation settings see Section 4 7 set by GX Developer 2 Programming and timing for performing a re initial processing The programming and timing for performing a re initial processing is shown below U0 lt lt Re initial processing via the dedicated instruction UINI gt gt Instruction X49 G20480 L X19 Ht M250 M251 M251 Store control data in D250 to D255 Store data in D250 to D255 according to the changes ZP UINI__ Uo D250 M250 Processing upon normal completion __ Processing upon abnormal completion Data communication enabled 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q Close processing Re initial processing l l Initial normal completion signal X19 Open completion signal address 50004 UINI instruction UINI instruction completion device UINI instruction completion device 1 Communication condition setting area address 1FH b15 Module initialization 1 It is confirmed whether the initial processing has been completed no
423. odules AJ71E71 QE71 QE71N QU71E71 100 Function AJ71E71 S3 Products earlier Products QJ71E71 B5 Remark AJ71E71N_ than 9706 after 9706B QU71E71 B2 Sequence program o o o o z Initial processing GX Developer parameter soting x x x o Ol Sequence program O oe GX Developer parameter setting O 3 Communication using Pesarvees 0 0 10 0 ows the fixed buffer ee Communication using the random access buffer O Read write of data in the PLC CPC Communication using the MC protocol 2 For communication link a ieee a a a areas between the PLC CPUs Interrupt processing Fixed buffer communication Laxa x z x LC BUFRCVS instruction at data receiving Data link instruction a a a RECVS instruction Sending receiving with the 11 Sending receiving of sequence program e mail Sending with the automatic notification function File transfer 0 Sending by the Web function EEE broadcast Communication while the PLC CPU is in the STOP status a a I pals Selection of communication data code seein o m Router relay function MN RR N R R S E r Router relay function Ping 16 jExistence check of remote devices KeepAlive a For communication 17 Paring open communication O O using the fixed buffer 4g Unit of each timer setting value for eS eer eae data communication pe ome o a a a e For 1 1 communication 2 Open processing 19 Connection with GX Developer UDP IP Depends o
424. of System switching settings when communication error occurs to the connection for user 0 Not set 1 Set b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO Address 21008 5210n 4 b15 Address 21009 521 1 o ose dd Connection No 1 Connection No 2 Connection No 16 System switching settings when communication error occurs Connection for system Address 21009 5211H Stores the setting status of System switching settings when communication error occurs to the connection for system 0 Not set 1 Set to b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO Automatic open UDP port GX Developer communication UDP port GX Developer communication TCP port x FTP communication port HTTP communication port x MELSOFT connection included 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 5 11 5 Data communication for using Ethernet module in redundant system This section describes data communication made when the Ethernet module is mounted on the main base unit of a redundant system For other than the following data communication can be made in the same manner as when the Ethernet module is mounted on the main base unit of a single CPU system Refer to the explanation item of the corresponding function 1 Initial processing a Execution of initial processing Make settings for data communication using GX Developer write the same parameters to the control system CPU and standby system CPU and then simultaneously reset
425. og 58D1 to 58FCx block 3 Same as error log block 1 22781 to 22824 Error lo 58FD to 59281 block Same as error log block 1 Continues on the next page 22646 5876 Server communication error count H Section 11 3 3 25 3 25 PECIFICATION aaa MELSEC Q Continued from the previous page GX Developer EIS Initial value f Reference Decimal Application Name 7 setting Hexadecimal caer section Hexadecimal applicability 22825 to 22868 Error log 5929 to 5954n block 5 Same as error log block 1 22869 to 22912 Error log 5955 to 5980 block 6 Same as error log block 1 22913 to 22956 Error log 5981 to 59AC block 7 Same as error log block 1 22957 to 23000 Error log 59AD to 59D8x block 8 Same as error log block 1 23001 to 23044 Error log Same as error lo 59D9 to 5A04x block 9 g block 1 23045 to 23088 Error log 5A05 to 5A30 block 10 Samie as error log block 1 23089 to 23132 Error log 5A31 to 5A5C block 11 Same as error log block 23133 to 23176 Error log 5A5D to 5A88x block 12 Same asGrfor log block 1 23177 to 23220 Error log Sari for b 5A89 to 5AB4 block 13 Same as Grror lo9 23221 to 23264 Error log 5AB5 to 5AEOu block 14 Samedis eror 1Og bioek 23265 to 23308 Error log 5AE1 to 5BOCs block 15 Samie as error log block 23309 to 23352 Error log 5B0D to 5B38x block 16 Samoas eir r l0g DIocK 23353 5B39x 23354 j Dedicated instruction abnormal com
426. om to an external device MELSEC Q Reference section Chapter 5 Reference Manual Communication using Procedure exist the fixed buffer No procedure Sends receives arbitrary data between the PLC CPU and the external device using the fixed buffer of the Ethernet module Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Communication using the random access buffer Reads writes data from multiple external devices to the random access buffer of the Ethernet module Chapter 9 Sending receiving e mail Sends receives data via e mail e Sending receiving by the PLC CPU Sending by the PLC CPU monitoring function automatic notification function Chapter 2 of User s Manual Application Communication using data link instructions Reads writes the PLC CPU data of other station via Ethernet using data link instructions Chapter 4 of User s Manual Application File transfer FTP server function Reads writes in file units using the FTP command from the external device Chapter 5 of User s Manual Application Communication using the Web function Reads writes the PLC CPU data via the Internet using a commercially available Web browser 2 Additional functions of the Ethernet module The following table lists the additional functions of the Ethernet module that can be used Function MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communication Description In a network system on which an Ethernet and a
427. on Precautions for using the E mail function Section 2 3 of the User s Manual Application The e mail settings from GX Developer Section 2 5 of the User s Manual Application 11 55 11 55 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 4 6 Receiving errors during e mail communication Receiving error Was the e mail successfully stored MELSEC Q Is the e mail receiving error log normal NO Fix the content according to the e mail receiving error log see Section 11 3 Was the dedicated MRECV instruction executed Execute the dedicated MRECV instruction Correct the executing condition of the dedicated MRECV instruction Was the dedicated MRECV instruction normally Correct the error according to the error code in the MRECV instruction complete status area For details on the MRECV instruction refer to Section 2 6 4 of the User s Manual Application completed Can the receive data be stored in the device Receiving stops in the middle of process NO Check the following items Whether or not the mail server s system is down Whether or not there is an error in the communication path The interval for inquiring the server is too long No attached file Set the inquiry interval shorter Check if there is any error in the communication path No mail in the mail server C
428. on delay time control system CPU scan time tracking time 2 x1 The timing of the time from when the Ethernet module receives the request data from the personal computer until it completes processing is shown below External device personal computer T Command ack Response _ 1 ACK message 1 TCP only message i TCP only Ethernet module Step0 END ce END PLC CPU scan time ie dt 4 n 1 1 gt i 1 x2 When data is relayed via the tracking cable of the redundant system add the tracking time For the data transfer time in the tracking cable refer to the QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 B2 Communication using Communication using Communication using Communication using TCP IP UDP IP TCP IP UDP IP Ke Kat Data communication using 0 009 i 24 0 012 19 0 011 Batch binary code ASCII code Batch binary code ASCII code App 11 App 11 APPENDIX App 12 MELSEC Q Calculation example 1 Calculate the time the QJ71E71 B5 takes to complete the processing of a data request from a PC after receiving it when the QU71E71 B5 and the PC perform TCP IP communication and read 100 points of ASCII code data from the data register D of the local station unit ms using the MC protocol communication e Assume that the scan time of the station in which QU71E71 B5 is installed is 10 ms 37 64 ACK processing time of the externa
429. on explains the buffer memory used for the remote password check function Application Buffer memory for the remote password check function Seating Setting 20486 50061 Remote password status userpor TO 20487 50071 Remote password status system por 20488 5008H System port use prohibited designation O 20592 5070 Remote password mismatch notification accumulated count designation _20593 50711 _ Remote password mismatch notification accumulated count designation 20594 5072 a a a a ee ee n 20674 50C2x Connection for 20676 50C4H automatic open Accumulated count lock process normal completion 20677 50C5x UDP port Accumulated count lock process abnormal completion 20678 50C6x Accumulated count of lock process based on close GX Developer communication for UDP IP communication Connection for GX Developer communication for TCP IP communication Connection for FTP communication 20679 50C7H Connection for Accumulated count unlock process normal completion 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 1 Remote password status storage area address 20486 to 20487 5006H to 5007h a The current unlock lock status of the remote password for each connection is stored The unlock lock status for connection No 1 to No 16 that use the user port is stored in the address 20486 The unlock lock status for connections that use the system port is sto
430. on from other devices is allowed until a time out is generated by the Ethernet module existence confirmation function For this reason always specify the following as to the settings from GX Developer for the applicable connection e When performing initial settings set the start interval timer value and the interval timer value for the existence confirmation function as small as possible e Regarding the open settings select Confirm for the Existence confirmation item The existence confirmation is automatically performed when the connection for data communication using the automatic open UDP port is set as a target for the remote password check As much as possible use TCP IP communication to perform communication from GX Developer using an Ethernet connection 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 5 9 3 Data communication procedure This section explains the procedure when the external device performs data communication using the connection for which a remote password check is performed 1 Set the target connection for the remote password check in the Remote password detail settings through GX Developer and write the parameters in the QCPU See Section 5 9 5 After booting the QCPU write the setting values to the following buffer memory in the Ethernet module as necessary See Section 5 9 6 3 Accumulated count designation area for remote password mismatch notification Address 20592 to 20593 5070H to 5
431. on status of the control system CPU is switched from STOP to RUN check the error status of the standby system CPU and if an error has occurred set the error code 6010H to SD50 and then turn on SM50 to clear the error 10 When using dedicated instruction If system switching occurs during execution of the dedicated instruction the dedicated instruction may not be completed In this case execute the dedicated instruction again from the new control system CPU after system switching 5 111 5 111 6 COMMUNICATION USING THE MC PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 6 COMMUNICATION USING THE MC PROTOCOL This chapter explains an overview of the MELSEC communication protocol hereinafter referred to as the MC protocol See the following manual for details on the data communication function using the MC protocol MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual SH 080008 6 1 Data Communication Function The MC protocol is the abbreviated name of the MELSEC protocol that is a communication system for the Q series PLCs Using this protocol the external devices can read or write device data and programs from to the PLC CPUs via the Q series Ethernet module or Q series serial communication module Any external devices on which application programs can be installed and which can send and receive data in accordance with the MELSEC PLC protocol can communicate with the PLC CPUs using the MC protocol 6 1 1 Accessing the PLC CPUs using the MC protocol
432. on status time check and when a disconnection status continues for the period of cable disconnection timeout setting the Ethernet module issues a system switching request to the control system CPU 3 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q From previous page External device 3 After system switching System A operates as a standby system m and system B as a control system 55 wewa Standby system System A Control system System B fae gl E poy gl a i a B Ay E g P HIE Tracking cable x1 When the cable is not connected from the start the Ethernet module does not regard it as disconnection Disconnection is detected only when normal status turns to abnormal x2 System switching timing at disconnection detection The timing of issuing a system switching request to the control system CPU at disconnection detection is shown below Disconnection Disconnection occurrence Cable connection occurrence Link down Link up Link down Disconnection detection start Disconnection after initial i processing i i Disconnection Ethernet module completion P l gt SERTE Cable disconnection Cable disconnection timeout timeout System switching request issu
433. on with OPS The Ethernet module can communicate with the OPS using the user connection for OPS connection Set the user connection for OPS connection in the open setting of GX Developer Refer to Section 5 5 The module can also be mounted on the MELSECNET H remote I O station of the redundant system Since there are restrictions on the available functions however refer to Section 2 6 when mounting the module on the MELSECNET H remote I O station OPS _ AnACPU AnUCPU AnNCPU Normal Normal station Normal station MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 as PLC to PLC network Communication with other stations i QCPU QnACPU Q4ARCPU Normal station Normal station Normal station control station Tracking cable CC Link I O control communication with outside Remote I O Remote Intelligent station device station device station MELSECNET H remote I O network I O control communication with outside Remote I O station Remote I O Remote I O station station 1 11 1 11 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 1 3 Additional Functions in Function Version B or Later The following table shows the functions that have been added to the Ethernet modules of function version B and later Refer to Section 2 7 for the function versions serial numbers and software versions of the Ethernet modules tha
434. oper when using Q Series Ethernet modules e Network Parameters Setting the number of MNET 10H Ethernet cards screen Ethernet operational setting screen On Q Series Ethernet modules there are no setting switches for making the operating mode settings and communication condition settings like there were on QnAVA Series Ethernet interface modules The Q Series Ethernet module cannot cancel an open request before completing the open processing once the passive open processing is executed Perform the close processing after the open processing is complete App 8 App 8 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 3 Installing the Ethernet Module on Existing Systems The Ethernet module and the QnA A series Ethernet interface module can coexist on the same Ethernet The Ethernet module can be installed on the existing system s Ethernet using the existing wiring for the QnA A series Ethernet interface module Appendix 4 Processing Time Calculate the minimum processing time for each function using the expressions below Note that the processing time may become longer depending on the load factor on the network how congested the line is the window size of each connected device the number of connections used concurrently and how the system is configured Use the values obtained from the expressions below as a guideline for the processing time when communication is performed using only one connection 1 Minimum processing time of commun
435. or that makes the PLC CPU stop processing occur NO Check the status of the applicable Ethernet module Is the Ethernet module s NO RUN LED on YES Is the connection cable NO securely connected YES NO Is the mode setting Online YES Is the data code binary ASCIl setting of the communication data correct NO 11 42 YES Refer to the troubleshooting section in the applicable PLC CPU s user s manual and fix the problems Rest the PLC CPU If the RUN LED does not turn on even after resetting the Ethernet module s hardware may be faulty Replace the Ethernet module and restart all the external devices that communicate with the local station Lock the cable securely Set Network parameters Setting the number of MNET 10H Ethernet cards Mode to Online using GX Developer See Section 4 6 Data cannot be sent received because the data code is different in sending node and receiving node and the command can therefore not be successfully decoded Change the setting in Communicational data code of Operational settings using GX Developer See Section 4 7 x2 11 42 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Perform initial processing See Section 5 1 1 Is initial processing NO X19 OFF If the initial processing parameters set normally completed with GX Developer and the sequence X19 ON program for initial processing overlap delete
436. or handling Background For Ethernet communications the TCP socket functions are used inside the personal computer However these functions do not have any limits Therefore when the send function is executed once to transmit data the receiving end node needs to execute the recv function once or more in order to read the data send and recv is not proportional to 1 1 execution For this reason the receiving procedure explained above is required App 20 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 2 When the transmission target does not support the receive processing flow chart shown in section 1 If the transmission target does not support the receive processing shown in Section 1 the following results will occur when communicating with the TCP Maximum Segment Size Option transmission is set to enable e Incorrect data read when batch read is executed from the transmission target using MC protocol e Incorrect data read after replacing the Ethernet module which does not support the TCP Maximum Segment Size Option transmission function with the alternative module supporting the function e Data is not received even though the value of Number of packet reception area Address 1B8 1B9 in the buffer memory was changed If this occurs change the TCP Maximum Segment Size Option transmission setting to disable Appendix 8 1 Program example for communication using the MC protocol 1 The following explains a progr
437. ork module 46 cards Set the common items of the modules ria These settings are required for initial O O O O O oO ae processing Set the data communication timer Section values 4 A A 5 2 Initial settings oe Set the DNS server s IP address A A Applicati on Set up the open processing for Open settings connection in order to perform data o o Section communication with the external O 5 5 device Routerirelay Set the router relay of Ethernet Section parameter 5 3 Perform settings so that Ethernet can be treated equivalent to a Chapter 3 Station No lt gt IP MELSECNET H or MELSECNET 10 of information network system in order to A gt A A Applicati communicate with PLCs of other on stations Chapter s 5 of FTP parameters Perform settings for file transfer FTP O applicati on Perform settings for sending receiving E mail settings e mail and for using the automatic O O Chapter2 notification function of Send mail REAR Applicati Address setting Set the destination mail address O O an News setting Set the notification conditions O Set the control number SI on the Section Interrupt settings Ethernet module side when requesting A A 73 an interrupt to the PLC CPU Section Redundant setting Perform settings for using the Ethernet 5 11 3 Group settings module in a redundant system Seaton Perform settings of the relay station so that Ethernet can be treated equivalent Chapter
438. orrective actions 1 Check using the display LED on the front of the Ethernet module See Section 11 1 The display LED on off status can be used to check whether an error is occurring in the Ethernet module 2 Check through GX Developer GX Developer can be used to check various conditions of the Ethernet module as well as the error code corresponding to the contents of the error occurring and to perform tests a Ethernet diagnostics using the dedicated screen 1 Monitor for the status of various settings See Section 11 2 PING test See Section 5 4 1 3 Loop back test See Section 5 4 2 4 COM ERR off See Sections 11 1 2 and 11 2 1 N b System monitor using the dedicated screen see Section 11 2 2 1 Module s detailed information Module status error code etc 2 H W information LED on off status switch status etc c Buffer memory batch monitor The error code can be checked by monitoring the buffer memory of the Ethernet module 3 Check the contents of the error using the error code See Section 11 3 The contents of the error can be checked using the error code confirmed on the above dedicated screen or by monitoring the buffer memory by referring to Section 11 3 If line errors and other errors occur when connecting devices of multiple manufacturers the users needs to isolate the malfunctioning parts using line analyzers etc 11 1 11 1 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q
439. ory address and the bit position of the Ethernet module that store a setting value entered from GX Developer For details on the buffer memory see Section 3 8 List of Applications and Assignments of the Buffer Memory Continued from the previous page Address Decimal Hexadecimal PEE Initial value Hexadecimal Status of settings with GX Developer Communication data code settin 61 lt J 0 Communication in binary code 4 Communication in ASCII code Initiavopen method setting b2 0 No parameter setting start up according to the sequence program 1 Parameter setting start up according to the parameters TCP Existence confirmation setting b4 0 Use the KeepAlive Module status 1 Use the Ping area Send frame setting b5 0 Ethemet frame 1 IEEE802 3 frame Setting of write enable disable at RUN time b6 0 Disable 1 Enable Initial timing setting b8 0 Do not wait for OPEN Communication status storage arpa Communications impossible at STOP time 1 Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time Bits other than above are reserved for system use GX Developer setting applicability Reference section Section 4 7 System area RECV instruction execution request Chapter 4 of Application System area Area for sending receiving Execution result of ZNRD instruction Chapter 4 of Application instructions Data link System area instru
440. ot be checked EN Existence check Communication error detection There is no ACK response from the external device within the TCP ULP timer value The cable connected to the Ethernet module was Disconnection detection disconnected QJ71E71 100 only ULP timeout 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q When any of the system switching request issuing conditions indicated in 2 of this section is satisfied the system is switched between the control system and standby system In either of the following cases however the system will not be switched if the system switching request is issued from the Ethernet module The standby system is already in a faulty status e g power off reset or stop error For the reasons for system switching refer to the QNPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System The network module redundant group settings have been mode for Ethernet modules and either one is operating normally For the network module redundant group setting refer to the QNPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 3 Issue of system switching request at communication error The Ethernet module mounted on the main base unit of the control system CPU monitors communication with the external device on each connection When detecting a communication error is it issues a system switching request to the control system CPU a Communication error at which system switching request is issued When either of the following co
441. ote password Remote password lock processing lock processing e E E Remote password lock processing Close processing See Section 5 6 x1 When accessing the PLC of other station access to the other station may not be allowed if a remote password is set in the QCPU of the relay station on which the Ethernet module is mounted and the station to be accessed See Section 5 9 1 1 and 3 1 In TCP IP communication if the connection is closed without performing the remote password lock processing the Ethernet module automatically performs the lock processing when the connection is closed 2 In UDP IP communication be sure to close the connection after performing the remote password lock processing When the connection is closed the Ethernet module does not perform the remote password lock processing 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 5 9 4 When the remote password unlock processing or lock processing is completed abnormally This section explains the procedures to be performed by the user when the remote password unlock processing or lock processing is completed abnormally 1 2 3 4 Perform the unlock lock processing again after checking the remote password set in the QCPU The Ethernet module performs the following when the number of occurrence times for an unlock processing lock processing abnormal completion is greater than the accumulated notification c
442. ote password unlock lock processing for the applicable connection has been completed normally abnormally up to present is stored b The user should clear the value stored in each of the accumulated count storage areas Write 0 to the applicable area from the QCPU 5 Storage area for accumulated count of lock process based on close Address 20598 5076H a When the user closes the applicable connection without performing the remote password lock processing the Ethernet module will automatically perform the lock processing The accumulated number of times the Ethernet module performed the lock processing automatically is stored in this area b The user should clear the value stored in this accumulated count storage area Write 0 to the applicable area from the QCPU The maximum value that can be stored in the areas indicated in 4 and 5 above is FFFFH An accumulated count that exceeds FFFFH 65535 is not stored 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 5 9 7 Data communication when the remote password check is set The following describes data communication that uses a connection for which the remote password check is set Function User open port Communication using the MC protocol Automatic open UDP port There isa procedure Communication using the fixed buffer Non procedure Communication using the random access buffer Sending receiving of e mail Communication using We
443. ount 1 set in the buffer memory a The COM ERR LED lights up b The code C200 is stored in the error code and end code storage area of the buffer memory error log area address 227 to 372 E3H to 174h 1 This is the count set from the QCPU in the remote password mismatch notification accumulated count designation area address 20592 5070H 20593 5071H when the Ethernet module starts up Count is set with TO instruction etc Monitor the above buffer memory when the COM ERR LED of the Ethernet module lights up If the error code C200h is stored monitor the storage area for abnormal completion accumulated count in the buffer memory address 20595 5073h 20597 5075h and check for which connection the unlock processing or lock processing has been completed abnormally The user performs the following as required a Close the applicable connection b Write 0 in the storage area for abnormal completion accumulated count in the buffer memory x If the accumulated count is not cleared by writing 0 the process in 2 above is performed each time an abnormal completion in excess of the accumulated notification count occurs c If the number of times an unlock processing lock processing abnormal completion occurred for the applicable connection is greater than the above accumulated notification count this could indicate improper access from the external device Disable the use of the applicable connection us
444. oup No 1 Station No 1 Mode On line X X Operational settings ri setings oo A Ee atsatings Pd Ss ey aT Redundant settings ii 4 Necessary setting No setting Aleadyset Setifitisneeded Nosetting Already set 7 Valid module M Statt 170 No during other station access 1 Interlink transmission parameter Please input the starting 1 0 No of the module in HEX 16 bit form Acknowledge XY assignment Routing parameter Assignment image Group Settings Check End Cancel 2i Description of setting Setting range selection r Select the module by which the access is made when the access request does not Valid unit during other station access i 1to8 specify the network number roup No Station No Online Offline Self refrain test HW test Operational settings nitial settings Settings for using the MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communication function interrupt settings Settings for disabling system switching if an error occurs in one communication path when the redundant communication paths are used for the external device and Ethernet module in a redundant system Refer to the QnNPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System Settings for using the MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communication Routing parameters fonction Mode Select the operation mode of the module Station No lt gt IP information Group settings 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 1 Valid mod
445. packets may be congested on the line Check that the connection cable is not dislocated Check that connections to the transceiver and terminator are not faulty Conduct a self diagnosis test to see whether or not the Ethernet module is faulty 11 27 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC O Storage destination Error code abnormal Description of error code Error handling instruction D ne S S 8 S oO 2 3B e WA 5 i 8 O N m I A TCP ULP timeout error occurred in the TCP IP communication An external device does not return ACK C033 An external device side with the set i IP address does not exist The existence of an external vi Id ni infirm C035u de ce could not be co ed within the response monitoring timer value C0324 Send processing cannot be C0364 executed because a cable is not yet connected or disconnected Not all the data could be received within the response monitoring timer value Sufficient data for the data length C0401 could not be received The remaining part of a message divided at the TCP IP level could not be received within the response monitoring timer value When TCP is used the checksum C0414 g feat of the receive data is incorrect When UDP is used the checksum C0424 iat of the receive data is incorrect The checksum in header of IP C043 ae packet received is incorrect 11 28 Check the operation of the external device Co
446. parameters area o 54 to 60 Connection 61 to 67 Connection 68 to 74 Connection Same as connection No 1 De A Es Section 5 5 Section 5 5 Section 5 5 x 75 to 81 Connection l 4B to 514 No 6 Same as connection No 1 82 to 88 Connection 52 to 58x No 7 Same as connection No 1 89 to 95 Connection 59 to 5Fu No 8 Same as connection No 1 Poe System area 60 to 66x y AE System area 67 to 68x y Initial error code an e oa 69x Section 11 3 6A to 6Bx 6C to 6Ex mies 111 to 115 Communication 116 area f os 117 118 l 119 N EN Local station group number N N Continues on the next page 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Continued from the previous page anal GX Developer not Decimal Application nitial value setting eference Hexadecimal so At section Hexadecimal applicability as a a 124 y 7Cx Open error code x Section 11 3 125 i 7D Fixed buffer sending error code x Section 11 3 126 7Ex Connection end code x Section 11 3 127 TEn Maximum value x 128 Fixed buffer onnectio time 129 information area 81h 130 to 139 ion Same as connection No 1 82 to 8Bu k 140 to 149 ion z Reet Same as connection No 1 150 to 159 ion Same as connection No 1 96 to 9Fx zs Current value Ou AO to AQx AA to B3x No 6 180 to 189 Connection Same as connection No 1 B4 to BD No 7 Same as connectio
447. password check oie hs Request the remote password lock The device is different from the one q j p gt processing from the opposite device that C2041 requesting the remote password has requested the remote password unlock unlock processing When accessing another station do not When another station was set a remote password in the relay C205 accessed the remote password station or station to be accessed or set could not be unlocked so they are not subject to the remote password check C206n System error The OS detected any error Check the operation of the external A response could not be received sf an cra device C3004 within the response monitoring timer x val e Review and correct the response monitoring timer value F000 Errors detected by the Refer to the MELSECNET H to MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET 10 Network System Reference FFFFuH network system Manual for details on error handling x1 Take corrective action in the following procedure 1 Check whether the Ethernet module power supply module and CPU module are mounted correctly on the base unit 2 Check whether the operating environment of the Ethernet module is within the general specifications range of the CPU module 3 Check whether the power supply capacity is sufficient or not 4 Check whether the hardware of the Ethernet module power supply module and CPU module are normal according to the manuals of the correspondi
448. pec e HEX C IP address Host name C IP address Host name Option specification Option specification I Display the host name Default I Display the host name Default Specify the data size 32 bytes Specify the data size 32 bytes Specify the time of the communication time check 1 seconds Specify the time of the communication time check 1 seconds Specify the number of transmissions Specify the number of transmissions Specify the number of times 4 times Specify the number of times hd 4 times Result Result Pinging 10 97 85 221 with 32 bytes of data Pinging 10 97 85 221 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 10 97 85 221 bytes 32 time 8ms TTL 250 a Request timed out Reply from 10 97 85 221 bytes 32 time 4ms TTL 250 Request timed out Reply from 10 97 85 221 bytes 32 time 5ms TTL 250 Request timed out Reply from 10 97 85 221 bytes 32 time 5ms TTL 250 Request timed out Packets transmitted 4 Received 4 Lost 0 Packets transmitted 4 Received 0 Lost 4 Round trip ms Min 4 Max 8 Avg 5 Round trip ms Min 0 Max 0 Avg 0 success transmissions 4 4 Close success transmissions of 4 Close Example of normal completion Example of abnormal completion Display contents Hostname Specify the hostname forthe PING test target staton J o o o y y O Display the host Results are displayed using the host name corresponding to the IP address in name the result display field 1 to 8192
449. per setting Set the PLC CPU parameters as follows a Operational settings Ethernet operations x Communication data code Initial timing Do not wait for OPEN Communications impossible at STOP time ASCII code Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time C Binary code IP address Send frame setting Input format DEC w Ethemet 2 0 IP address 192 0 1 C IEEE8023 I Enable Write at RUN time TCP Existence confirmation setting Use the KeepAlive Use the Ping End Cancel Local station IP address C0 00 01 FDH 192 00 01 253 b Open settings igi Network parameter Ethernet open setting Module No 1 Protocol Open system Fixed buffer Fixed buffer Pairing Existence Local station Destination Were sot Sa open el Port No IP address pasty he confirm 2000 Local station Port No 2000H App 22 App 22 APPENDIX App 23 MELSEC Q 4 Program on the external device side The program example of the external device shown below accesses the Q25HCPU of the station in which the Ethernet module is installed When this program is executed the contents of the following communication messages are displayed in sequencer 1 Batch write command message in word units 2 Batch write response message in word units 3 Batch read command message in word units 4 Batch read response message in word units 1 The following explains an outline of
450. pletion count 5B3An lock 1 Dedicated instruction normal completion count 23355 i ET Emal status Number of mails normally completed 5B3Bx storage area 23356 5B3Cx Attached file sending count 23357 Section 11 3 5B3Di Sending to the server count 23358 j 5B3En Number of mails abnormally completed 23359 l 5B3F 23360 j 5B40x Error log write pointer 23361 23362 5B42n 23363 to 23370 aa estes 5B43 to 5B4An ection 11 23371 to 23374 ar 5B4B to 5B4Ex ate 23375 to 23404 Suea 5B4F to 5B6Cu ubjec Continues on the next page 3 26 3 26 3 SPECIFICATIONS Application Hexadecimal 5C1D to 5048 5C49 to 5074n E mail status storage area 5C75 to 5CAOn 5CA1 to SFFFu 6000n 6001 to 63FFu 6400 to 67FFu 6800 to 6BFFu Fixed buffer data 6C00 to 6FFFx area 7000 to 73FFu 7400 to 77FFu 7800 to 7BFFu 31744 to 32767 7C00 to 7FFFH No 9 Fixed buffer data No 10 No 11 No 12 o o 1 o 1 Fixed buffer No 14 Fixed buffer No 16 MELSEC Q Continued from the previous page GX Developer setting applicability Reference section Initial value Hexadecimal Same as error log block 1 Same as error log block 1 Same as error log block 1 Same as fixed buffer No 9 Same as fixed buffer No 9 Same as fixed buffer No 9 Same as fixed buffer No 9 Same as fixed buffer No 9 Same as fixed buffer No 9 Sa
451. ponse format Subheader End code Abnormal code 004 _______ When an abnormal code is stored the end code is 58H Error code Error Description of error Corrective action hexadecimal 184 20H 11 24 A station with the specified PC number does not exist PC number error 1 The PC number designated with a command is neither FF of the PLC number error local station nor any of the station numbers designated with the MELSECNET link parameters Poor communication between the Ethernet module and the PLC CPU 1 After the Ethernet module receives a request successfully from an external device the Ethernet module and the PLC CPU could not communicate for some reason noise etc Intelligent function module error 1 The intelligent function module with the buffer memory that can be 1 Change the data content designated in the communicated with does not exist at the location designated by control procedure or change the installation the intelligent function module number For example the location of the intelligent function module and corresponding place is for an input output module or an empty communicate again slot P 1 Check whether or not other module has Remote RUN STOP not accessible 1 executed remote STOP PAUSE If one of Remote error Another module other Ethernet module etc has already executed these commands has been executed cancel it remote STOP PAUSE and communicate again
452. pport for encoding decoding Communication using data link instructions Target station CPU type specification File transfer FTP server function Communication using the Web function MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communication Router relay communication router relay function Existence check of remote devices existence check function Checking by PING Checking by KeepAlive Communication via pairing open Communication via automatic open UDP port Simultaneous broadcast Support for the QCPU remote password function App 1 Remote password check Communication using the MC protocol GX Developer Unlock processing File transfer FTP server lock processing function O JO JOJOJOJO gt O l0lO0 oloIe ole Olo O JO JOJOJOJO o Ol0jl0 o0lolIe oloolo gt IP gt IPJOJOJO e oOloOloOIe oOo e gt Communication using the Web function O O gt App 1 App APPENDIX MELSEC Q Function QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 B2 Mounting to multiple CPU system stations Communication using the Support for multiple CPU MC protocol edited ae tonon contro GX Developer File transfer FTP server function O O gt Mounting an Ethernet module to redundant system Mounting an Ethernet module to the MELSECNET H remote I O station Setting parameters to use Ethernet module functions
453. r 1 l l Les 5 90 3 54 11 5 No 45 al ro l ZI QU71E71 B2 RUN ERR INIT COM ERR OPEN sD RD QJ71E71 B2 27 4 1 08 MELSEC Q Unit mm in App 19 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 8 Program Examples App 20 The program examples presented in this section test the connection between the Ethernet module and an external device IBM PC AT that is connected to the same Ethernet For each program only the minimum programming that is required to perform the communication test is done Modify the IP address port number and other values according to your system configuration In addition abnormal handling may be added 1 Receive processing of target device A receive processing example on the target device side is shown below Communication processing on the external device side Request message transmission processing Response message reception processing The TCP connection is closed Is the TCP connection open Receive remaining response messages Timeout of monitoring timer as the reception data received within the time allotted by the monitoring timer Insufficient size of data received Check the size of the received data If a response message to the next request was received Response message processing Have all the received essages been processed y End Err
454. r write the same data to the control system and standby system 6 When using e mail function a Receive of e mail 1 After receiving an e mail by the Ethernet module send a reply mail to the mail transmission source so that the mail transmission source confirms that it received the e mail If receipt cannot be confirmed send the e mail again 2 After the MRECYV instruction is executed the read e mail is deleted from the mail server Therefore when system switching occurs during execution of the MRECV instruction the mail may not be received by the new control system CPU after system switching if the MRECV instruction is re executed The e mail has been deleted from the mail server 5 106 5 106 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE x21 b MELSEC Q E mail receive program example In the following program turning on X21 causes the Ethernet module mounted in the position of I O signal X Y00 to X Y1F to receive an e mail by execution of the MRECV instruction and then send a reply mail to the transmission source by execution of the MSEND instruction For the e mail function refer to Chapter 2 in the User s Manual Application M71 SET M60 M60 U0 G9858 F ety 1 H H200 DO Specifies inquiry to server KO D2 Specifies read of first mail KO D9 Specifies matching to data length of received mail Ko D10 Specifies matching to head data length of received mail D100 MO Reads received mail
455. r No 1 send instruction complete status D3001 Receive program QCPU 2nd station side 1 Connection No 1 is used for processing the fixed buffer receiving 2 The Ethernet module is loaded in slot 0 of the basic base unit 3 The Network parameters Setting the number of MNET 10H Ethernet cards parameters are assumed to have been set with GX Developer as follows See Section 4 6 e Network type Ethernet Head I O No 0000 Network No 1 e Group No 1 e Station No 2 4 The Operational settings parameters are assumed to have been set with GX Developer as follows Ethernet operations Communication data code Initial timing Binary code c Do not wait for OPEN Communications impossible at STOP time ASCII code ce Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time IP address Send frame setting Input format DEC bd Ethemet 2 0 3l IP address 10 97 85 223 e IEEE802 3 I Enable Write at RUN time TCP Existence confirmation setting Use the Keep live Use the Ping End Cancel Local station IP address 0A 61 55 DFH 10 97 85 223 8 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE NO PROCEDURE CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q 5 The Open settings parameters are assumed to have been set with GX Developer as follows E Network parameter Ethernet open setting Module No 1 _ ox Protocol Open system Fixed buffer Fixed buffer Pairing Existence Local station Destination communica
456. r interrupt program 7 Fixed buffer No 1 receive data Stored in D500 to D503 8 Fixed buffer No 2 receive data Stored in D700 to D703 9 Fixed buffer No 1 receive instruction complete device M500 10 Fixed buffer No 1 receive instruction abnormal complete device M501 Fixed buffer No 1 send instruction complete status D5001 Fixed buffer No 1 receive status signal M40 The parameter settings to start up the interrupt program are assumed to have been set with GX Developer as described in the screen settings in Section 7 3 2 Receive processing with an interrupt program Fixed buffer No 2 interrupt pointer 150 SI No 0 11 lt 12 lt lt 2 POINT Secure sufficient device memory according to the maximum length of data sent from the source in order to prevent device areas used for other purposes from being overwritten by the reception data 7 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE PROCEDURE EXIST CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q 2 Outline of the program example a Send program QCPU 1st station side 1 After setting each parameter with GX Developer and write to PLC CPU reset the PLC CPU and confirm that the initial processing is completed 2 Perform open processing Active open of connection No 1 1 3 Communicate data from the PLC CPU using fixed buffer communication procedure exist sending 4 After the data sending is completed perform close processing of co
457. r to start the interrupt program The setting screen and setting method are the same as for the fixed buffer communication procedure exist See Section 7 3 2 1 2 Control method The control method when the interrupt sequence program starts up is explained using fixed buffer No 2 and the area corresponding to connection No 2 as an example The interrupt settings with GX Developer for reading the receive data using the interrupt program example below is illustrated in the screen display shown in Section 7 3 2 1 lt lt Data receiving using the dedicated BUFRCVS instruction interrupt program gt gt FEND SM400 Iso Z BUFRCVS U0 K2 D200 Receive data D100 Byte count for receive data storec From D101 Receive data IRET Initial processing Open processing Data receiving 1 i Initial normal completion signal X19 Open completion signal T Address 5000n b1 i i 1 1 BUFRCVS instruction i 1 ue i 5 lso interruput processing t x C 2 Q s ACK 8 only TCP 3 Cycle Cycle END23 r a oy a a OET END Sequence program Scan f Scan 1 Scan processing processing Data receiving processing Interrupt program 8 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE NO PROCEDURE CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q Confirm the normal completion of the initial processing Confirm the normal completion of the open processing for connec
458. re MELSOFT products are started up from one personal computer in order to perform TCP IP communication and UDP IP communication with one Ethernet module It is not necessary to use different station numbers for TCP IP and UDP IP x2 GT SoftGOT and GOT support UDP IP communication only 3 Dedicated connections will be used to connect MELSOFT products for data communication These dedicated connections cannot be used to perform data communication with external devices other than MELSOFT product 4 Itis possible to access other stations without performing Conversion setting Network No Station No and IP address if they are accessed from a MELSOFT product via the Ethernet module using the Communication with MELSECNET H or MELSECNET 10 relay See Chapter 3 of User s Manual Application for the relay function of MELSECNET H and MELSECNET 10 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 7 Functions supporting Multiple CPU systems Details are explained in the Reference Manual a When performing the following data communication with QCPUs in a multiple CPU system it is possible to perform data communication such as reading writing device data or reading writing files by specifying the QOPU to be accessed 1 Communication by MC protocol 2 Communication by GX Developer 3 When using the file transfer function FTP server x When using the Ethernet module in a multiple CPU system a QCPU controlling the Ethernet module hereinafter referred to a
459. red in the address 20487 b The remote password status for each connection is indicated in bits as follows 1 ON Lock status 0 OFF Unlock status no remote password check setting b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO Buffer memory address 20486 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 EEEE EEEE EEEIEE EEE EEE Status of connection No 1 Status of connection No 16 Status of connection No 2 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 al b2 bi b0 Buffer memory address 20487 For the system 110 1 0 1 0 1 0 Status of the FTP communication port i me of the automatic open UDP port Status of the GX Developer communication port For TCP IP communication Status of the GX Developer communication port For UDP IP communication 2 System port use prohibited designation area address 20488 5008h a The opposite device is allowed prohibited from performing the following data communication using the port provided by the Ethernet module system e Communication using the automatic open UDP port communication using the MC protocol e Communication from GX Developer using the Ethernet connection b This designation is determined by the user 1 ON Use prohibited 0 OFF Use allowed default b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi b0 Buffer memory address 20488 For the system 1 0 1 0 1 0 Daa open UDP port GX Developer commun
460. red in the error log storage area Designate the actual data size of the text field for data length specified in the application data field of a message sent from the external device to the Ethernet module The Ethernet module never sends a text whose size is different from the specified data length to the external device 2 When communication is performed using fixed buffer non procedure Since no message data length is specified in non procedure communication the data received is stored in the receive buffer area as is It is recommended to set up some method of checking that the data is received correctly This can for instance be achieved by including the data length and data type code in the application data of the message so that the number of bytes and data type of application data can be identified on the receiving side 11 41 11 4 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 4 Troubleshooting Flowchart MELSEC Q This section explains some simple troubleshooting procedures when the Ethernet module and an external device have communication problems in a flowchart format 1 If trouble occurs when using the Ethernet module check the module status error status and others for the Ethernet module using the Ethernet diagnostic function of GX Developer described in Section 11 2 Data cannot be communicated Check whether or not an error occurred in the PLC CPU to which the Ethernet module is installed Did an err
461. redundant system The following indicates the system switching time required when the Ethernet module mounted on the main base unit of the control system CPU in the redundant system issues a system switching request to the control system CPU at communication error or disconnection detection The system switching time is the time from when a communication error or disconnection is detected until the control system CPU is switched to the standby system CPU a When communication error is detected 1 When ULP timeout occurs Tne Ttu St Tec Tne System switching time Ttu TCP ULP timer value St 1 scan time Tsw CPU system switching time Refer to the QNPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System The following shows the system switching operation timing when a ULP timeout occurs External device Standby system QJ71E71 100 fal W QJ71E71 100 Station No 1 B g Station No 2 3 i i al H E System switching Tracking cable request No response from external device QJ71E71 100 Control system Standby system Station No 1 operation operation i Tu System switching request is issued System A CPU scan time i l System A Control sy
462. response in random access buffer communication e Normal completion OOH e Abnormal completion Value other than OOH see Section 11 3 1 End codes are stored in the communication status storage area of the buffer memory 9 COMMUNICATION USING THE RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER MELSEC Q 9 2 3 Examples of the command response formats This section explains examples of the command response formats during communication using the random access buffer 1 Writing to the random access buffer by a write request from an external device a Communication using binary code 1 Command format external device to the Ethernet module Head Data Subheader address length Text 10 words dH OD H L H L H L H L H e e pe e oe nar e er as pe ener Ethernet module random access buffer Physical address H L Logical address 2680 H 9856 2681 H 9857 2682 H 9858 2689 H 9865 Howors words to 3E7F H 15999 2 Response format Ethernet module to the external device Subheader End code 9 COMMUNICATION USING THE RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER MELSEC Q b Communication using ASCII code 1 Command format external device to the Ethernet module Subheader Head address Data length 7 H 0 Q IE 32H 30H 30H 00H OOH OOH OOH OOH OOH OOH ain Text 20 words HW H D HW D 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H 38H 39H 41H 42H 43H eoeeeeeeee 99 41H 42H 43H
463. rget check starting existence existence interval timer check interval check interval value timer value timer value a a S a E 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE 5 2 3 Re initial Processing MELSEC Q Re initial processing is performed in order to place the Ethernet module into its startup status without actually restarting the PLC e g resetting the PLC CPU Re initial processing of the Ethernet module can be performed in a sequence program The purposes of and how to program the re initial processing of the Ethernet module are explained below 1 Purposes of performing re initial processing a b c To update address information of an external device maintained by the Ethernet module The Ethernet module maintains the IP address of the external device with which it has been communicating and the corresponding Ethernet address MAC address This is done in order to prevent other devices from accessing the PLC illegally using the IP address of an external device with which communication was performed normally 1 For this reason it is necessary to perform a re initial processing in order to clear the address information of the external device maintained by the Ethernet module in case a module or board on the external device side has been replaced due to failure x1 Ethernet address is unique to a device No devices share the same Ethernet address To change the IP address of the Ethernet module of the l
464. rmally 2 All data communication currently being performed with external devices is terminated and close processing will be performed on all connections 3 Dedicated instruction UINI is executed Initial normal completion signal X19 ON Open completion signal address 5000H 20480 All OFF 0u The Ethernet module is initialized after the parameters local station IP address operation settings have been specified via the control data of the dedicated instruction 4 When the re initial processing is completed the re initial specification address 1FH bit 15 becomes 0 and the initial processing completion signal X19 turns on If the re initial processing is completed abnormally the error code is stored in the following area Initial error code storage area address 69H 105 3 Precautions for combination with the MELSOFT products when the setting is changed to Enable TCP Maximum Segment Size Option transmission in re initial processing a MELSOFT series products supporting the TCP Maximum Segment transmission function For setting the Enable TCP Maximum Segment Size Option transmission use the following MELSOFT products GX Developer Version8 07H or later MX Component Version3 03D or later MX Links Version3 08J or later b MELSOFT series products not listed above a When using a MELSOFT product that is not listed above a to make communication via Ethernet set it to Disable TCP Maximum Segme
465. rminator are not faulty When other than above the Ethernet module hardware may be faulty Consult your nearest dealer with the details of the errors e Check the address of the DNS server Check whether or not it is possible to communicate with the DNS server using the Ping command e Check that the IP addresses of the local station and DNS server are in the same class If the class is different check the router setting e Check that the SMTP server name is registered in DNS Delete the SMTP server name change to the IP address setting and check the operation Check whether or not it is possible to communicate with the SMTP server using the Ping command e Check cable hub etc e Check whether or not it is possible to communicate with the DNS server using the Ping command e Check that the POP3 server name is registered in DNS Delete the POP3 server name change to the IP address setting and check the operation Check whether or not it is possible to communicate with the POPS server using the Ping command Connection D O 2 2 o 2 e183 uw 11 34 instruction 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code abnormal code Description of error An e mail was received that did not have an attached file It will generate when the attached file is not read normally An e mail was received whose attached file name was invalid System error e The OS detected any error
466. rol method is selected in the fixed buffer communication procedure setting see Section 5 5 using a connection where the Ethernet open completion signal address 5000h corresponding bit is on 2 Communication using the random access buffer is performed asynchronously with the sequence program When it is necessary to synchronize use the fixed buffer communication function 9 COMMUNICATION USING THE RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER MELSEC Q 9 1 2 Control method by write requests from an external device The following diagram illustrates the control method when an external device writes data to the random access buffer of the Ethernet module External device T a ACK ACK 8 only TCP only TCP f oc 3 g r Se ea Saree os Y 5 Se Ethernet module Random access buffer eads with the FROM instruction R PLC CPU NY 1 The external device writes data to the random access buffer of the Ethernet module The Ethernet module side command receiving 2 The Ethernet processes the write request from the external device and returns the writing result to the external device that sent the write request The Ethernet module side response sending 3 Asynchronously with the processing of 1 and 2 above the data written to the random access buffer is read with the FROM instruction of the sequence program In random access buffer communication
467. rrect the TCP ULP timeout value and execute the initial processing again Send after an arbitrarily selected time has elapsed because packets may be congested on the line Check that the connection cable is not dislocated Check that connections to the transceiver and terminator are not faulty Review and correct the external device s IP address and the Ethernet address If the external device has the ARP function set the default value If not set the Ethernet address of the external device Check the operation of the external device Send after an arbitrarily selected time has elapsed because packets may be congested on the line Check that the connection cable is not dislocated Check that connections to the transceiver and terminator are not faulty Check the operation of the external device Review and correct each setting value for the existence confirmation Check that the connection cable is not dislocated Check that connections to the transceiver and terminator are not faulty Check that the connection cable is not dislocated Check that connections to the transceiver and terminator are not faulty Conduct a loopback test to see that the line is not faulty Conduct a self diagnosis test to see that the Ethernet module is not faulty Review and correct the data length of the communication data Review and correct each setting value at the initial processing because the packets may be congested on the l
468. rred Example of access to control system CPU External device 1 The external device connects to the E QnA compatible 3E frame Request destination Ethernet module mounted on the main module I O No 03D0H 3 Network No 00H base unit of the control system CPU and PLC No FFH makes access to the control system CPU Standby system System B pm 3 5 li a 8 BLE w fel el el H B GGICE ar J Fe e Tracking cable estrito Ff 1 a 4 System switching occurrence External device i i z ona compalible SE frame 2 If system aeng Dun the external Access to control en leh device automatically continues access to system is continued Network No 00 i i via tracking cable Network Na on the control system via the tracking cable However when the communication line i with the connection destination is faulty or Eie the standby system is powered off for i example the connection destination must Standby system System A Control system be changed on the external device side i Tracking cable 2 For access to the system that is
469. rror Error handling code Connectio E mail log Dedicated instruction Check if the DNS server s IP address setting is correct or not Check if the mail server name setting SMTP server name POP server name An error is returned from DNS server is correct or not Check with the network administrator or similar person that the DNS function of the server set in the DNS setting is being performed Execute again If the same error occurs the Ethernet An illegal request was made module s hardware may be faulty Consult your nearest dealer with the details of the error C1A2 A response to a request could not be e Review and correct the response wait i received time A request or subrequest was C1A4n Correct the request or subrequest incorrect CIAS The designation of the target station e Correct the designated value of the target j or clear target were incorrect station or clear target C1A6 Incorrect connection number was Designate the connection number within H designated the range of 1 to 16 CIA7 Incorrect network number was Correct the designated value of the E designated network number C1A8 Incorrect station number was Correct the designated value of the i designated station number C1A9 Incorrect device number was Correct the designated device value of i designated the device number Incorrect device name was Correct the designated value of the C1AAn f designated device number In
470. rror code Check Issue system switching request at communication error Refer to Section 5 11 3 Check System switching settings when communication error occurs Refer to Section 5 11 3 Write the Ethernet parameters again and simultaneously reset the redundant CPUs 11 58 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 59 Check the hub connection status area buffer memory address C9 NO Is disconnection detected Check the Ethernet parameters Check the cable disconnection timeout setting Refer to Section 5 11 3 system switching request at disconnection detection checked in the redundant setting Check the Issue system switching request at disconnection detection status storage area Buffer memory address 5200n Are the settings of GX Developer consistent with the contents of the buffer memory Write the Ethernet parameters again and simultaneously reset the redundant CPUs Check the cable disconnection timeout setting Buffer memory address 52014 Is the setting of the cable disconnection timeout setting correct Review the cable disconnection timeout setting Refer to Section 5 11 3 MELSEC Q 11 59 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Is the communication target in the error status Check the Ethernet parameters Is the TCP ULP timer setting value of the init
471. rs Intelligent function module interrupt pointer setting are required 7 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE PROCEDURE EXIST CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q b PLC parameters Interrupt pointer settings The interrupt pointer settings using GX Developer are explained below Start the Intelligent function module interrupt pointer setting screen by selecting PLC parameters PLC system settings Interrupt pointer settings Intelligent function module interrupt pointer setting Interrupt pointer Interrupt pointer Start No No of module PLC side i Intelli module side a Start 1 0 No Start SI No SETTLES Ertst i Check Cancel Description of setting Setting range option PLC side Interrupt pointer Start No Set the interrupt pointer Start No on the PLC CPU side 50 to 255 Interrupt pointer No of module Set the interrupt pointer count on the PLC CPU side to 16 i Start I O No Set the module s starting I O No 0000 to OFEOx Intelli module side 7 3 F Start SI No Set the interrupt pointer SI starting No on the PLC CPU Oto 15 1 PLC side Interrupt pointer Start No e Set the start No 50 to 255 of the interrupt pointers Ixx used in the sequence program 2 PLC side Interrupt pointer No of module e Set the number 1 to 16 of interrupt pointers Ixx used in the sequence program 3 Intelli module side Start I O No e Set the start I O No of the Ethernet module 4 Intell
472. rsion B e Error code 50H in the case of a QnA series Ethernet module of function version A or A series Ethernet module 2 After checking the contents of the error and taking corrective actions for an Ethernet module in which the loop back test has been completed abnormally reboot the station on which the Ethernet module is mounted With rebooting the initial processing for the Ethernet module will be performed Check the completion of the initial processing for the Ethernet module using the PING test The PING test can also be performed on the Loop back test screen f an error code is displayed due to abnormal completion of the loop back test check the contents of the error corresponding to the error code then take corrective actions by referring to Section 11 3 3 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 5 4 4 PING command Personal computer Ethernet module The following example illustrates how to confirm the completion of the initial processing by issuing the PING command to the local station s Ethernet module from an external device connected on the same Ethernet In the example the confirmation is made between devices whose IP address class and sub net address are identical lt Designation method gt ping IP address lt Example gt IP address of the Ethernet module 192 0 1 254 Example of screen at normal completion C sping 192 0
473. rsonal computer in order to perform TCP IP communication and UDP IP communication with one Ethernet module The Ethernet diagnostic function of GX Developer enables the following diagnoses Ethernet diagnostic function of GX e Monitoring the module status and error status of the Ethernet module Developer e Confirming the completion of the Ethernet module s initial processing by performing the PING test and loop back test Sendingilesin CSV Sends a file in CSV format as attachment to e mail from the Ethernet module format as attachment When using the Sending main text Sends main text of up to 960 words from the Ethernet module Chapter 2 of User s The following encoding decoding is supported Support for Encode the Subject using 7 bits encoding and send it from the Ethernet module encoding decoding Decode and receive an e mail encoded with Quoted Printable by the Ethernet module using a commercially available Web browser Function In data communication via the connection set up using the parameters for the QCPU sotonso Overview of function this function enables data communication after unlock processing from the external Section 5 9 device is completed normally for the remote password set in the QCPU Communication using the Section 3 18 of emote MC protocol Unlocks locks the remote password of the QCPU The unlock processing enables Reference Manual password check Eie transfer FTP server access to the QCPU using various command
474. rt Tool MX Component cscceceeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeesaeseeseeeeeseeseeeeateaes App 44 Appendix 9 1 Overview of MX Component ccccecceceeeeeeeceeceseeaeceeceeeeaesaesaeseeeeaesaesaeseaeeaeeaeeeseneeaneas App 44 Appendix 9 2 Usage Procedure of MX COMpone nt c cceccecceseeeeceeeeeeeseeaeeeeeaesaesaeeeeeeaeeaesaeseeeeateaes App 47 Appendix 10 Differences between the Ethernet and the IEEE802 3 0 0 eee entree tenets App 51 Appendix 11 ICMP Protocol Supported by the Ethernet Module c cesceeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeteseeseeeeaeeaes App 51 Appendix 12 Setting Value Recording Sheets cccccceccsseeeceeceeeeeeeeceeeeeesaeeaecaeseesseceeseeesaesaeseseeeeaaeats App 52 INDEX Index 1 to Index 3 Related Manual 1 Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Application 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 Overview 1 2 Additional Functions in Function Version B or Later 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION 2 1 E mail Function 2 2 Configuration and Environment of the Applicable System 2 3 Precautions for Using the E mail Function 2 4 E mail Specifications 2 5 Processing Procedure of the E mail Function 2 6 E mail Setting from GX Developer 2 7 Sending Receiving E mail Attached Files by the PLC CPU 2 8 Sending E mail Main Text by the PLC CPU 2 9 Sending E mails Using the PLC CPU Monitoring Function 3 WHEN COMMUNICATING WITH MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 RELAY 3 1 MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 Relay Communication
475. s 5005n corresponding bit Ignore discard the receive data because it is not addressed to the local station x1 If the bits in the range that indicates the host address of the receive data request destination IP address are all 1 s the processing is performed by the YES side 8 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE NO PROCEDURE CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q 8 5 3 Precautions when using the simultaneous broadcast function The following precautions should be observed when broadcasting simultaneously in the no procedure communication using the fixed buffers 1 The user needs to determine the port No dedicated to the sending and receiving by simultaneous broadcasting after which simultaneous broadcasting can be performed by designating these port No 2 The send message by simultaneous broadcasting is sent to all external devices on the same Ethernet to which the Ethernet module is connected If the messages received by simultaneous broadcasting are not needed the external devices that are connected to the same Ethernet should discard them The external devices should discard the message received if it is not needed Also do not return a response even if the external device is the station to which the message received is addressed The Ethernet module performs these processes automatically 3 Amaximum of 2046 bytes of data in the application data field can be processed per sending receiving When i
476. s Section 5 6 of User s function Manual Application Web function while accessing the QCPU Function MC protocol Reference Manual Oe This function enables access to the control PLC non control PLC specified by the user systems GX Developer when performing data communication with a multiple CPU system Operating Manual File transfer FTP server Chapter 5 of User s function Manual Application When an Ethernet module is mounted to the MELSECNET H remote I O station access to the local station station on which the Ethernet module is mounted or other stations is Section 2 6 enabled from the external device Support for IEEE802 3 frames ion 4 7 Appendix 9 Re initial processing of the Ethernet module Section 5 2 3 Section 1 2 6 Manual of each MELSOFT product Sections 5 4 and 11 2 e mail function Manual Application Mounting an Ethernet module to the MELSECNET H remote I O station 1 12 1 12 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 2 Functions added to function version D The Ethernet modules can be mounted and used on the main base units of the redundant system Redundant Ethernet modules When a communication error or disconnection is detected a system switching request can be issued to the control system CPU Redundant system support function Section 5 11 F In the buffer memory the connection status of the Ethernet module and hub and Hub connection status monitor function ake Section 5 10 the curre
477. s 1 to 8 addresses 20H to 27H b1 connection numbers 9 to 16 addresses System area is used a This setting selects whether or not the Ethernet module should confirm that an external device still operates normally when there is no communication for a fixed period of time The open processing for the connection with the external device must have been completed Name of setting Description of setting Do not confirm the existence of the external device Confirm the existence of the external device For details on the settings of the existence confirmation time and others see Section 5 2 Initial Settings b When an error occur in the existence confirmation the Ethernet module performs the following processing e Forcefully closes the line and stores the error information in the error log area addresses EOH to 1FFx of the buffer memory Turns off the open completion signal address corresponding bit of 5000 and turns on the open abnormal detection signal X18 c Ifthe external device will be changed while a UDP IP connection is open No confirm should be selected If Confirm is selected the Ethernet module will confirm the existence of the first destination after the UDP IP connection is opened Existence confirmation is not performed for the changed destination i e the newly selected external device d Select No confirm when transmitting data in simultaneous broadcast in the no procedure fixed buffer
478. s possible to send and receive data which match to the message format of the external device At data sending subheader data length etc are not included in the application data field of a message only the data in the fixed buffer is sent At data receiving all the data in the message excluding the header is stored in the fixed buffer A response to data receiving is not sent Communication is performed using binary code regardless of the communication data that is set with a GX Developer parameter code see Section 4 7 Operational Settings The maximum application data area is 2046 bytes per communication The applicable connection is dedicated to the no procedure fixed buffer communication As with the procedure fixed buffer communication random access buffer communication and communication using the MC protocol cannot be performed at the same time as the no procedure fixed buffer communication 8 1 Control Method The following explains how communication is performed using the fixed buffers and the no procedure control method In the communication processing using the fixed buffers data transmission from the PLC CPU and the external device is executed using the no procedure control method 1 The data flow in the communication processing is as follows External device BUFSND instruction Fixed buffer PLC CPU BUFRCV instruction 8 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE NO PROCEDURE CONTROL METHOD
479. s set in the operation settings Bit 15 oa ba b15 b8 b6 b5 b4 b1 Buffer memory address 1FH 1 Communication data code setting b1 0 Communication in binary code 1 Communication in ASCII code 2 TCP Existence confirmation setting b4 0 Use the Ping 1 Use the KeepAlive 3 Send frame setting b5 0 Ethernet frame 1 IEEE802 3 frame 4 Setting of write enable disable at RUN time b6 0 Disable 1 Enable 5 Initial timing setting b8 0 Do not wait for OPEN communication impossible at STOP time 1 Always wait for OPEN communication possible at STOP time 6 Re initial specification b15 0 Re initial processing complete reset by the system 1 Re initial processing request set by the user c Once the re initial processing is complete the re initial specification address 1Fh bit 15 is set to 0 The initial processing completion signal X19 also turns ON If the re initial processing completed abnormally an error code will be stored in the following area Initial error code storage area address 69H 105 Sample Program The following figure shows a sample program that performs a re initial processing by writing directly to buffer memory Create a program that contains contacts user flags etc indicating the conditions shown below within a sequence program e A contact where the initial processing completion signal X19 is ON e Open completion signal storage area address 5000H 20480 5 COMM
480. s the control PLC should be specified through GX Developer It is also possible to mount an Ethernet module of function version A on a multiple CPU system and access to the only control PLC the PLC No 1 External device Communication through GX Developer Communication using the MC protocol File transfer FTP server function Ethernet module control PLC O 1 PLC No 1 2 PLC No 2 10113 3 4 i 2 1 3 PLC No 3 4 PLC No 4 1 Module controlled by PLC No 1 Eases 2 e a by i non control PLCs LEl Soning Mom NOR Ethernet module PLC No 2 b When the Ethernet module of function version B or later is used in a multiple CPU system the following data can be transferred to from the Ethernet module 1 Communication using the fixed buffer communication using data link instructions and sending receiving of e mail are possible from the control PLC 2 Itis possible to read the buffer memory from non control PLCs Input output signals can be used as contacts Non control PLC Control PLC Ethernet module External device i FROM TO i instruction Buffer memory Dedicated Data communication FROM instruction instruction Use the input output Use the input output signal as a contact signal as a contact It should be output y to an output signal 1 OVERVIEW
481. s unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior
482. sage is sent to the external device The Ethernet module determines that the close procedure is completed and turns off the open completion signal regardless of the status of the external device REMARK 1 When the procedure above is performed the Ethernet module determines that the closing of the external device is executed normally thus the close processing result is not stored in the error log area 2 The procedure described above is a special function of the Ethernet module it is not available for general TCP IP protocols 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q Program example This example explains a program for open processing close processing when Active open is selected in the Open system setting 1 Execution environment for the program example a The Ethernet module is installed in the 0 slot of the basic base unit b The Network Parameters Setting the number of MNET 10H Ethernet cards settings are assumed to have been set using GX Developer as follows e Network type Ethernet e Starting I O No 0000 e Network No 1 e Group No 21 e Station No I c The Operational settings are assumed to have been set using GX Developer as follows Ethernet operations x r Communication data code Initial timing Binary code Do not wait for OPEN Communications impossible at STOP time ASCII code Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time IP
483. sary to set the timer values when communicating using the default timer values 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 Open settings Details are explained in Section 5 5 10 This screen is for connection open processing settings and settings related to buffer memory usage when using fixed buffer communication to communicate data with an external device Router relay parameter Routing information Details are explained in Section 5 3 The following settings for data communication with external devices are performed on this screen e Communicating data with external devices connected to other Ethernet via a router Classifying each device connected to the Ethernet into groups and communicating data with an external device in an arbitrary group using the data link instructions Station No lt gt IP information MNET 10 routing information Details are explained in Chapter 3 of the User s Manual Application This setting is for communicating with PLC CPUs on other stations via the Ethernet or MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 FTP Parameters Details are explained in Chapter 5 of the User s Manual Application This setting is for using the file transfer FTP server function By using the file transfer function an external device can read write data from to the files in the QCPU to which the Ethernet module is installed E mail settings Details are explained in Chapter 2 of t
484. ser connection for OPS connection Set the user connection for OPS connection in the open settings of GX Developer Refer to Section 5 5 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 2 Example of redundant system support application operation at occurrence of communication error The following provides an example of redundant system support application operation performed when an error occurs during communication with the control system CPU External a imisi 1 During normal communication equnaan i i R system support Station No 1 is operating as a control application system and station No 2 as a standby system m The redundant system support application is communicating with the control system CPU CADICE LCAIDICAIG Tracking cable External device 2 At communication error occurrence Redundant if system support Station No 1 is operating as a control application system and station No 2 as a standby system NET Without system switching 1 Operation of redundant system support application Since a communication error occurred Standby system Station No 24 between the redundant system support Je application and the Ethernet module A mounted on
485. setting range from 1 to 32 for the MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 b By designating a group number data can be communicated with multiple QCPU stations using the same group number 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 6 Station No a Set the station number of the target Ethernet module setting range from 1 to 64 for the MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 b Do not set the number to a value already assigned to existing systems and other Ethernet modules 7 Mode address CAH a Select the operating mode of the Ethernet module Name of setting Description of setting Communicate with the external device in normal operation mode Offline Disconnecting the local station from the network Self refrain test Execute a self refrain test for self diagnostics HM test Execute tests of RAM and ROM 1 See Section 4 8 Self Diagnostic Tests b When the operation mode is changed reset the PLC CPU 8 Operational settings through Routing parameters Set the parameters from operational settings through routing settings according to the explanations in Section 4 5 Both the Setting the number of MNET 10H Ethernet cards and Operational setting parameters must always be specified If the settings are changed the QCPU PLC No 1 when used in a multiple CPU system must be reset Write the network parameters in the control PLC of the Ethernet module when the module is used in a multiple CPU
486. sic Abbreviation for the Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Application Abbreviation for the Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Basic User s Manual Web function Abbreviation for the Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Web function Product Configuration The following lists the product configuration of the Ethernet interface modules Model Item name Quantity QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 100 Ethernet interface module QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 B5 Ethernet interface module QJ71E71 B2 QJ71E71 B2 Ethernet interface module 1 OVERVIEW 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q This manual provides information on the specifications of the Ethernet interface modules models QU71E71 100 QU71E71 B5 and QU71E71 B2 hereinafter called the Ethernet module as well as the procedures prior to starting the operation the control procedures and data communication method for communicating with external devices maintenance inspection and troubleshooting When applying the following program examples to the actual system make sure to examine the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems 1 1 Overview of the Ethernet Module CF oe a Q 2 gt 5 a gt 228 c aj od u Q2 5s o ol 2 oj ojo z me me a T ja Local station External device The Ethernet module is an interface module on the PLC side for connecting the Q series PLC with th
487. ssing to be performed with the main program using an example in which the fixed buffer No 1 and the area corresponding to connection No 1 lt lt Data receiving using the dedicated BUFRCD instruction main program gt gt direction ZP BUFRCV U0 K1 DO D100 M100 Receive data D100 Word count of receive data stored From D101 Receive data M100 M101 Processing for normal completion M101 H Processing for abnormal completion H Initial processing Open processing Data receiving Response sending l l l l l I l l 1 Initial normal completion signal X19 l Open completion signal Address 5000 b0 BUFRCYV instruction I I I l l I I I 6 BUFRCV instruction complete device I gt One scan l leg I l 1 BUFRCOV instruction complete device 1 T 3 Fee n I l I l Fixed buffer receiving status signal l l Li address 5005n b0 i D lt ACK P ACK 8 only TCP amp only TCP 3 5 7 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE PROCEDURE EXIST CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q 1 Confirm the normal completion of the initial processing 2 Confirm the normal completion of the open processing of connection No 1 3 Upon receiving data from the designated external device set in the open processing the Ethernet module processes the following e Stores the receive data to the fixed buffer No 1 area
488. st from the other station again e In the Station No lt gt IP information setting set the IP address of the target device for MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communication e Provide sufficient time between request intervals Reduce the number of request nodes Wait for a response to the request and issue the next request after receiving the response Review the time out value Review the content of the request Correct the network number and PC number Review the content of the request Cancel the current request MELSEC Q Storage destination Dedicated instruction c xe ki oO fad lt o O amp 3 E mail log COB6 A channel number is outside the Designate the channel number in the i allowable range range from 1 to 8 COB7x 11 31 A channel number currently in use was designated Change the channel number Execute after the current communication is completed 11 31 11 TROUB OUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Storage destination Error code abnormal Description of error Error handling code Network number and PC number A Correct the network number and PC are outside the allowable range i A response from the PLC CPU is it P Check the operation of the PLC CPU faulty The open processing of the Execute the open processing COB9x applicable connection is has not Check the operation of the external been completed device Cannot acknowledge sending COBA req
489. station CPU type 3D0n when the target station is in the standby system data is relayed to the control system CPU via the tracking cable to read the data of the control system CPU O O ICAINIECANNA 5 109 Processing at error completion In case that the data link instruction is executed for the specified station control system CPU standby system CPU in the redundant system and that target station causes system switching the data link instruction may result in error completion Error code 4244H 4248H If the data link instruction results in error completion due to the above error execute the data link instruction again 5 109 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE c d 5 110 MELSEC Q SEND instruction 1 2 Execution of SEND instruction When the target station is in a redundant system the communication request source station must identify that the target station is the control system to execute the SEND instruction When the target station is the standby system the target station storage channel cannot be used since the RECV instruction is not executed at the target station after data is sent by the SEND instruction Channel being used When performing broadcast When a redundant system exists on the network where a broadcast is performed the storage channel can
490. stem Standby system i Tsw i i e a System B Standby system Control system System B CPU scan time QJ71E71 100 Standby system operation Control system operation gt Station No 2 k Tne App 14 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 2 When existence check error occurs Tne Tsi Tix Tr St Tecc Tne System switching time Tsi Existence check starting interval timer value Ti Existence check timer value Tr Existence check resend count St 1 scan time Tsw CPU system switching time Refer to the QNPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System The following shows the system switching operation timing when an existence check error occurs External device Communication error occurrence QJ71E71 100 a al E QJ71E71 100 Station No 1 eZ Fe l E p Station No 2 l Tracking cable System switching request No communication with external device for predetermined period Tr 3 QJ71E71 100 Control system operation Standby system operation Station No 1 System A CPU scan time l System A Control system Standby system i Tsw i lt System B Standby system Control system System B CPU scan time Fy QJ71E71 100 Standby system operation Control system operation Station No 2 i Tne I lt gt App 15 App 1
491. structions for the functions that are explained in this manual among those dedicated commands available for the Ethernet module that can be used by the QCPU 10 1 Dedicated Instruction List The following table lists the dedicated instructions explained in this chapter Application Dedicated instruction Description of function Reference section Ear owenina and cosina conneci ns open Establishes a connection a connection Section 10 8 10 8 I I ji none 9 CLOSE Disconnects a connection Section 10 5 BUFRCV Reads received data Section 10 2 For main program For fixed buffer communication BUERCVS Reads received data ction 10 3 For a program BURSND lSendsdata sd data Section 10 4 For foadind and eleanna error intorfation ERRCLR Clears error information ction 10 6 i i i pasate 9 ERRRD Reads error information e 10 7 Reinitializes the Ethernet For reinitialization UINI ees Section 10 9 module 1 The user should not change any data control data request data etc that is specified with a dedicated instruction until the execution of that dedicated instruction is completed 2 All dedicated instructions must be executed online If any of the dedicated instructions is executed offline no error will occur but the execution of the dedicated instruction will not be completed 10 1 10 1 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 10 2 BUFRCV Instruction This instruction reads data received from an external
492. sts from an external device codes see Section 11 3 2 e Communication time between the Ethernet module and the PLC Increase the CPU monitoring timer CPU exceeded CPU monitoring timer value value Perform fixed buffer communication after unlocking the remote password In fixed buffer communication the remote password status of the using the MC protocol port for the destination Ethernet module is in the lock status Do not set the port for fixed buffer communication as a target for the remote password check Designate the appropriate values within the range that are allowed for each processing The content of the error and the error handling for each end code are the same as for the error codes from A0 to FFFF that are stored in the buffer memory Take a necessary action by referring to the description of the applicable error code shown in Section 11 3 3 11 23 11 23 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 2 Abnormal codes returned during communication using A compatible 1E frames This section explains the abnormal codes error codes that are added to responses when communicating using the MC protocol and A compatible 1E frames An abnormal code is added only when an end code is 5B For more details on the end codes error codes that re added to responses see Section 11 3 1 For more details on the end codes error codes that are stored in the buffer memory of the Ethernet module see Section 11 3 3 Res
493. subheader contains a code that is not recognized by the Ethernet module the Ethernet module will send a response notifying about abnormal completion to the external device Data sent by an external device Data determined by the Ethernet module First data Second data se TT header header This section is processed as a subheader At this point the Ethernet module returns a response containing a code obtained by changing the most significant bit of the code processed as subheader to 1 For example if the subheader field of a command is 65h the subheader of the response will become E5h 11 40 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q b If the data length specified immediately after the subheader is larger than the amount of text data received 1 The Ethernet module waits for the reception of the remaining missing data 2 If the remaining data could be received within the time allotted by the response monitoring timer the Ethernet module performs processing according to the code in the subheader 3 If the remaining data could not be received within the time allotted by the response monitoring timer the Ethernet module performs the following processing Sends the ABORT RST instruction to the external device and closes the line e Notifies about occurrence of an open error to the PLC CPU side via the open error detection signal X18 ON e Stores the error code in the open error code storage area The error code is not sto
494. system 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 7 Operational Settings This section explains how to set the operations parameters Start the Ethernet operations screen by selecting Setting the number of MNET 10H Ethernet cards Operational settings Ethernet operations Communication data code Initial timing if G Do not wait for OPEN Communications impossible at STOP time C ASCII code c Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time IP address Send frame setting Input format DEC hi Ethemet 2 0 IP address 192 0 1 254 C JEEE8023 l Enable Write at RUN time TCP Existence confirmation setting Use the KeepAlive C Use the Ping End Cancel Setting description of item Setting range selection Binary code Communication data code Select the communication data code ee e ASCII code hiama O Timin Perform the setting for openin Do not waitfor OPEN 9 g Pee Always wait for OPEN Decimal Input form he IP r nput form IP Address put format Select the IP address input format lt Hexadecimal Set the IP address of the local station Co ee Ethernet V2 0 Send frame setting Select the frame format to send IEEE 8023 Enable Write at RUN time Check mark enable Set to allow writing to the PLC CPU during RUN for the MC protocol No check mark disable e Use the KeepAlive TCP Existence confirmation setting Select the existence check method for TCP communicat
495. t can use added functions and of related products CPU modules GX Developer For function comparison by the function version of Ethernet modules see Appendix 1 1 1 Functions added to function version B Sends receives data using IEEE802 3 frames e When sending data selects and sends either an Ethernet frame or IEEE802 3 frame When receiving data receives either an Ethernet frame or IEEE802 3 frame Re initial processing is performed in the following cases When updating the Ethernet address of the external device with which data communication will be performed e When changing the data communication conditions function and waiting to see whether or not a response is received REMARK 5 Simultaneous connection of up to 17 Simultaneously connects up to 17 MELSOFT product such as GX Developer via Sections 1 2 6 and 5 5 MELSOFT products via TCP IP TCP IP communication This is achieved by using up to 16 user connections and one Applicable MELSOFT communication dedicated system connection product manual Simplifying access to It is possible to access other stations without performing conversion setting network Simplifying number station number and IP address if they are accessed from a MELSOFT connection with oner SaUanS product via the Ethernet module MELSOFT It is possible to use the same station number if two or more MELSOFT products are Access with the same Oy as products station number started up from one pe
496. t is necessary to send receive data that exceeds 2047 bytes divide it into smaller portions at the send source 4 When performing simultaneous broadcasting set the Existence confirmation setting to No confirm in the Open settings of the corresponding connection The size of the internal buffer for the operating system is approximately 40 k bytes and any received data that exceeds this size will be discarded 8 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE NO PROCEDURE CONTROL METHOD 8 6 Programming MELSEC Q This section explains the programming method when the Ethernet module and an external device communicate using the fixed buffers and the no procedure control method 8 6 1 Precautions when creating programs 1 2 In order to communicate using the fixed buffers the initial processing and the connection open processing must be completed The contents of the parameter settings have been loaded into the Ethernet module when the Ethernet module open completion signal address 5000n corresponding bit switches from off to on The data length in byte count is designated stored using the dedicated instruction for the no procedure communication If the send data length exceeds this range at data sending a communication error occurs and the data is not be sent Perform the fixed buffer communication using the following dedicated instructions e Data sending BUFSND instruction e Data receiving BUFRCV instruction
497. t module to be monitored using four digits Example Start I O signal Enter 0020 when monitoring modules of X Y0020 to 003F Step 3 Enter Buffer memory start address Enter the buffer memory address to be monitored using the selected input format decimal hexadecimal For a list of the buffer memory addresses where error codes are stored see Section 11 3 Error Code List Example When monitoring the initial abnormal code buffer memory storage address 69 Enter 69 hexadecimal Step 4 Click the Start Monitor button The contents of the buffer memory after the specified address are displayed In case of the above example the contents of 69H and succeeding addresses are displayed The display format can by modified as follows Monitor format Bits amp words Multiple bit points Multiple word points Display 16 bit integer 32 bit integer real number ASCII character Numerical value Decimal nexadecimal For details refer to the Operating Manual for GX Developer 11 12 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 Error Code List This section explains the error codes abnormal codes for the errors that may occur in each processing when communicating data between the Ethernet module and an external device as well as those generated by processing requests from the local station s QCPU The details of errors and error handling procedures are described NI Type of error Error code storage buffer memory
498. t number setting e Protocol type setting e Notification condition setting For more information on setting up Ethernet modules see Section 3 6 List of GX Developer Setting Items for Ethernet Modules and other applicable reference sections gt gt Q fs Q 2 2 L Q o g 2 2 lee a 2 53 hs Q og a O amp og 2 2 Nate eo Wa i m a a Local station External device b GX Developer Programming and monitoring function via the Ethernet By establishing an Ethernet connection programming and monitoring of PLCs can be performed using GX Developer as well as monitoring and testing of PLCs can be performed using GOT or GT SoftGOT In ether case remote operations utilizing long distance connection and high speed communication of Ethernet become possible Program monitor Monitor test GX Developer gt Q EJ To e D pa E5 E External device GOT GT SoftGOT 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q c Connecting multiple MELSOFT products GX Developer GT SoftGOT and MX Component or GOTs This product can be connected with one or more MELSOFT product GX Developer GT SoftGOT and MX Component or GOT simultaneously via TCP IP communication or UDP IP communication 2 1 Connection via TCP IP communication e The Ethernet module side can connect up to 17 units of MELSOFT product via TCP IP communication simultaneously by using one dedicated system connection and up
499. ta instruction Take the following actions and then execute the Ethernet diagnostics when executing data link instructions e Execute the COM instruction e Using the special register SD315 ensure the time for communication processing of 2 to 3 ms 11 7 11 7 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 2 System monitor The module status of the Ethernet module can be checked from the system monitor 1 Checking the module status and error codes on the detailed module information screen for the diagnostic functions Startup procedure GX Developer gt Diagnostics System monitor gt Module s Detailed Information r Module Module Name QU71E71 100 Product information 060610000000000 D 1 0 Address 0 Implementation Position Main Base 1Slot r Module Information Module access Possible 170 Clear Hold Settings Status of External Power Supply Noise Filter Setting Fuse Status Input Type Status of 1 0 Address Verify Agree Remote password setting status Nothing r Error Display Display format No EnorCode Present Eror C017 l HEX DEC Error History The display sequence of the error history is from the oldest error The latest error is displayed in the line as under rm Error contents Disposal Contents 4 TCP ULP timeout error occurred in the TCP IP communication An external device does not return ACK Disposal
500. ta link instructions using port numbers of the operating system of the Ethernet module The Ethernet module enables communication through the automatic open UDP port numbers after the initial processing is normally completed and waits for communication requests to the local station Ethernet module Automatic open It acknowledges and processes requests from anywhere as long as they are requests addressed to the Ethernet module itself When a communication request is acknowledged the applicable port number is occupied until the processing is completed Even if the next communication request is acknowledged during this time the communication processing has to wait The automatic open UDP port can be used in communication between Ethernet modules using the MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communication function Re initial processing is required to change the port number of the automatic port Refer to Section 5 2 3 for re initial processing 3 Accessible range The accessible range differs depending on the data communication function Reference Data communication function Accessible range section Communication using the MC e The QCPU of the Ethernet module installed station protocol QnA comparatible 3E PLC CPU in the network system containing the Ethernet module frame installed station PLC CPU in the Ethernet to which the Ethernet module is connected PLC CPU in the Ethernet connected via a router Chapter 4 of PLC CPU
501. tations in the PLC system Station 1 2 1 External device that can perform the unlock processing and lock processing 1 of station 1 1 By A station only 1 of station 2 2 By C station only 1 of station 3 2 By D station only A station acpy Ethernet module eel Network No 1 Ethernet m o e ma NG B station Ethernet Ethernet GX Developer module QCPU module Ethernet Network No 2 Network No 3 Ethernet Q Ol 0 O Station 2 1 1 Station 2 2 1 2 Station 3 1 1 password password acpy Ethernet w Password Hp Ak lacey Ethernet a module Beer eos 4 module E A Ethernet Ethernet QCPU module module Request destination Applicable PLC station Station 1 2 Station 2 1 Station 2 2 Station 3 1 Station 3 2 Request source QCPU QCPU QCPU QCPU QCPU QCPU aoe Aston o x x x xterna Bsttin OF Oo Oo x x x Oa Loseeemor e a a 1 er eae 3 C station Dstation o d o o o o Stations that can be accessed form the external device after the remote password unlock processing Stations that can be accessed from the external device without performing the remote password unlock processing X Stations that cannot be accessed from the external device 3 A station can access the stations after the remote password unlock processing for
502. tays off and does not change e Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the BUFRCV instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing Operation when the BUFRCV instruction is being executed END END END Sequence program Scan processing Scan processing processing i i i 1 Instruction execution BUFRCV instruction Complete device Prersssa Sasa 1 A H Complete device 1 EAE E VORA AAE L 4 4 Abnormal completion i i 1 cat Ses i 1 1 SI Receive data L i 1 1 1 T 1 3 The ZP BUFRCV instruction is executed when the read instruction indicated by a bit for the applicable connection in the fixed buffer receive status signal storage area address 50054 of the buffer memory switches from off to on 4 When reading receive data from the same connection this cannot be used together with BUFRCVS instructions for interrupt programs 10 3 10 3 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Errors MELSEC Q 1 When a dedicated instruction ends with an error the abnormal completion signal D2 1 turns on and the error code is stored in the complete status area S2 1 Refer to the following manuals regarding the error codes check the errors and take corrective actions lt Error codes gt A4FFFu or less QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection CO00H or higher Section 11 3 3 of this manual Program example A
503. tdata sin_addr s_addr sc my_addr s_ addr App 25 Create socket for TCP IP Error handling App 25 APPENDIX i MELSEC Q if bind socketno LPSOCKADDR amp hostdata sizeof hostdata SOCK_OkK Bind Sockerror ERROR_BIND Error handling return SOCK_NG aj71e71 sin_family AF_INET aj71e71 sin_port sc aj_port aj71e71 sin_addr s_addr sc aj_addr s_ addr if connect socketno LPSOCKADDR amp aj71e71 sizeof aj71e71 SOCK_OkK Connection Active open Sockerror ERROR_CONNECT Error handling return SOCK_NG Closeflag FLAG_ON Connection completion flag ON Set to non blocking mode ulCmdArg 1 ioctlsocket socketno FIONBIO amp ulCmdArg Set to non blocking mode strcpy s_buf O8FFO00A44200000000005001 12233445566778899AA DO to D4 batch write request 1E frame strcpy s_buf S500000FFO3FF00002C000A1 401 0000D 00000000051 12233445566778899AA DO to D4 batch write request 3E frame length strlen s_buf if send socketno s_buf length 0 SOCKET_ERROR Data sending Sockerror ERROR_SEND Error handling return SOCK_NG printf n send data n s n s_buf Perform receiving size check and receiving processing simultaneously rbuf_idx 0 Receive data storage head index initialization recv_size 0 Initialize the number of receive data while 1 length recv socketno amp r_buf rbuf_idx BUF_SIZE rbuf_idx 0 Response data rec
504. te pointer address 5B40n e This address stores the error log block area number where the latest sending error logging is registered 0 No error No registration of sending error log 1 or more Error log block number where the latest sending error logging is registered If the pointer value is 8 it means that the latest error logging is registered in the sending error log block 8 area When 9 or more sending errors occur the registration of sending error logging starts from sending error log block 1 area again POINT The sending error log block area consists of eight error log blocks that have the same order of data items 9 Error log block Error code address starting from 5B414 e This block stores the error codes that indicate the contents of errors See Section 11 3 10 Error log block Command code address starting from 5B42n e This block stores the system command codes for the error causing messages 11 Error log block To address starting from 5B43n e This block stores eight words from the beginning of the sending source mail address of an error causing e mail during communication with the mail server in ASCII code characters Example If the sending source mail address was use from add sample co jp use from add sam is stored as ASCII code characters 12 Error log block Date address starting from 5B4Bn This block stores the time and date on which the e mail is sent
505. te the parameters to the applicable station 3 The initial processing is completed when the PLC CPU restarts When the initial processing is completed normally the INIT LED of the Ethernet module lights up b Designating the GX Developer connection destination connecting to QCPU aio I L f Serial NET 10 H NETI CC Link Ethernet PLC AF ssc USB boad boad boad boad board board net del use PLC MNET AIOH MNET I CC Link Ethemet C24 Bus module module module module module module all PLC mode QCPU Qmode PLC side I F g el cp Connection channel list No specification Other station Sinale network Other station Co existence network PLC direct coupled setting Time out Sec 10 Retry times fi f ER AN z a a a z PLC ipe Detail C24 NET IOH NETO CCLik _ Ethemet 4 ite CPU seting System image J J J J Line Connected Q A6TEL C24 ty era ey ath SS C24 NET 10 H _NET II CC Link Ethernet OK Accessing host station Target PLC ee No Choice made Close c Executing the PING test through GX Developer 1 Select the PING test on the Ethernet diagnostics screen GX Developer Diagnostics Ethernet diagnostics PING test 2 Perform the settings indicated below then click the Execute button The execution results of the PING test are displayed Example The following shows the flow of the PING test when 4 is designated
506. tems Ethernet modules can be used with the following systems 1 Applicable modules and number of modules that can be mounted The following table lists the CPU module and network module for remote I O station where the Ethernet module can be mounted and the number of modules that can be mounted QOO0JCPU Q01CPU CPU module Can be mounted only in Q mode 1 Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU ee 2PRHCPU ee QU72LP25 25 ERENT remote W O station Network module QJ72LP25GE Maximum 4 2 3 QJ72BR15 x1 Refer to the Users Manual Function Explanations Program Fundamentals of the CPU module to be a x2 Refer to the Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote 1 O network x3 Use the Ethernet module of function version B or later x4 Use the Ethernet module of function version D or later Maximum 4 CN FA 2 Applicable base unit The Ethernet module can be mounted in any I O slot 1 of the base unit x1 Limited to within the I O point range of the CPU module and network module for remote I O station 3 Multiple CPU system When using the Ethernet module in a multiple CPU system first refer to the QCPU User s Manual Multiple CPU System a Applicable Ethernet module When using the Ethernet module in a multiple CPU system use the Ethernet module of function version B or later b Network parameter Network parameters must be written only to the control PLC of the Ethernet module 2 SYSTEM
507. terminals and connectors while the power is on Doing so may result in electric shocks and malfunctions e Make sure to turn off all phases of the external power supply before cleaning or re tightening the screws Failure to do so may cause damages or malfunctions of the module If the screws are loose it may cause the module to short circuit malfunction or fall off Tightening the screws excessively may damage the screws and or the module and cause the module to short circuit malfunction or fall off e Check the safety before performing control operations to the running PLC 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q CAUTION e To install the module securely insert the module fastening latch in the installation hole on the base unit while holding down the module installation lever on the lower part of the module If the module is not installed properly it may cause the module to malfunction fail or fall off Secure the module with screws especially when it is used in an environment where constant vibrations may occurs e Be careful not to let any foreign matter such as wire chips get inside the module They may cause fire as well as breakdowns and malfunctions of the module e Never disassemble or modify the module This may cause breakdowns malfunctions injuries or fire e Before mounting or dismounting the module make sure to switch all phases of the external power supply off Failure to do so may cause the
508. test are displayed Loop back test screen Loop back test x Setting Item Seat Network No 1 peat Starting node End node umber ol 3 confirmation node ul 3 PING test Check at 3 communication time 3 seconds Close Result Station No IP address Error code A k 7 10 97 85 221 IP address Change display 2 10 97 95 222 DEC HEX 3 Number of response nodes Display contents Description of item setting Setting range options Network No Specify the network No for the loop back test target module 1 to 239 Number of x P N if Specify the station number range for the loop back test target module 1 to 64 Setting item confirmation node Check at shes oS aes Bs Specify the response wait time for the loop back test 1to99s communication time 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE d MELSEC Q Network No 1 to 239 Specify the loop back test request destination network No Input range 1 to 239 Number of confirmation node 1 to 64 1 Specify the range starting node and end node of the Ethernet module subject to the loop back test using the station No Input range 1 to 64 2 The loop back test is performed in order from the starting node x Upon the reception of a response from the station performing the loop back test or after the time of the communication time check elapses the loop back test is performed for the next target station and so on in order until the end station
509. th an error the abnormal completion signal D1 1 turns on and the error code is stored in the complete status area S1 1 Refer to the following manuals regarding the error code check the errors and take corrective actions lt Error codes gt A4FFFu or less QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection CO00H or higher Section 11 3 3 of this manual Program example A program that clears the open abnormal code for connection 1 When the input output signals of the Ethernet module are X Y00 to X Y1F MO Connection 1 open completion signal Designate the ERRCLR instruction data MO M1 3 MOVP H1 D2 Designate to clear the connection 1 open abnormal code MOVE HO D3 Designate to turn off ERR LED and clear the error code SET M1 Set the ERRCLR instruction execution flag M1 7 7 Kr ERRCLR uo DO MLO Execute error information clearing M10 Mil P P MOV KO D100 Clear the retained error code at normal completion of the error information clear processing M11 s D1 D100 Retain the error code at abnormal completion of the error information clear processing RST ML Reset the ERRCLR instruction execution flag 10 16 10 16 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 10 7 ERRRD Instruction 10 17 This instruction reads the error information stored in the buffer memory of the Ethernet module Applicable device Setting Internal device ME SECNET H Index data System user File MELSECNET 1
510. the both redundant CPUs Note that different station numbers and IP addresses must be set to system A and system B Refer to Section 5 11 3 b When performing re initial processing Refer to Section 5 2 3 Do not change the local station IP address and operation settings If they are changed normal communication cannot be made 1 When using the UINI instruction Execute the instruction after specifying OH for the change target S1 2 of the control data 2 When directly writing to buffer memory Write 1 to bit 15 of the communication condition setting area address 1FxH without changing the set value of the buffer memory area c Initial processing by I O signal Since the output signal Y turns off in the standby system CPU initial processing by I O signal is unavailable Set the network parameters of GX Developer and perform initial processing Refer to Section 5 2 2 Open close processing a When making communication via TCP IP Place the Ethernet module in an open waiting status Passive open and perform open close processing from the external device When Active open processing is performed from the Ethernet module close processing is performed from the Ethernet module but if system switching occurs before execution of close processing close processing cannot be executed 5 100 5 100 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q b When using user connection to communicate with standby system For co
511. the communication function via MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 as well as the communication function 13JL89 using data link instructions and how to use file transfer FTP server etc sold separately Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Web function SH 080180 This manual explains how to use the Web function of the Ethernet module sold separately 13JR40 Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual This manual explains the communication methods and control procedures through the MC protocol for the SH 080008 external devices to read and write data from to the PLC CPU using the serial communication 13JF89 module Ethernet module sold separately Conformation to the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction For details on making Mitsubishi PLC conform to the EMC directive and low voltage instruction when installing it in your product please see Chapter 3 EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction of the User s Manual Hardware of the CPU module to use The CE logo is printed on the rating plate on the main body of the PLC that conforms to the EMC directive and low voltage instruction For information about conforming this product to the EMC directive and low voltage instruction please refer to Chapter 3 EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction section 3 1 3 Cable of the User s Manual Hardware for the CPU module to use The Manual s Usage and Structure How to use this m
512. the default value is used setting is not required d Timer setting setting value x 500 ms 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 5 Timer setting IP assembly timer address FH a Communication data may be divided on the IP level due to the restriction on the buffer on the sending or receiving station b Designate the setting value in a range from 1 to 32766 When the default value is used setting is not required c Timer setting setting value x 500 ms Timer setting Response monitoring timer address 10h a This timer setting sets the following times 1 The time to wait for a response after sending a command 2 Thetime to wait for the last message after receiving the first message when the message is divided b Designate the setting value in a range from 2 to 32767 When the default value is used setting is not required c Timer setting setting value x 500 ms Timer setting Destination existence confirmation starting interval address 11h a This timer sets the time interval before starting to confirm the existence of an external side when an open connection for which existence confirmation is set to confirm stops dead b Designate the setting value in a range from 1 to 32767 When the default value is used setting is not required c Timer setting setting value x 500 ms Timer setting Destination existence confirmation interval timer address 12h a This timer sets
513. the external device that are used for the AJ71E71 S3 and AJ71E71N hereinafter called the E71 can be utilized for communication with the Ethernet module However since the Ethernet module and the E71 have different response speeds these programs may not be used as is Make sure to test the operation first E71 gt Ethern Destination External device Ethernet module mernet y Ethernet module Program designed for E71 Ethernet module External device module Communication using the fixed buffer procedure exist function random access buffer a o PLC CPU 1 O Communication can be performed by utilizing the programs for the E71 of the external device 1 Only A compatible 1E frame commands can be used for data communication For details on the E71 commands see the MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual To perform data communication using other commands than A compatible 1E frame commands create a new program b Using the sequence programs designed for the local station s E71 The Ethernet module and the E71 have different buffer memory assignments thus the sequence programs designed for the E71 cannot be utilized for the Ethernet module Create a new program referring to the chapters that explain each of the applicable functions 2 Using the programs designed for the AJ71QE71 N a Using the programs designed for the external device The sequence programs of the external device that are desig
514. the module 1 of station 1 1 is completed The stations can be accessed if the communication line is open B station can access the stations if the communication line to those stations is open C station can access the stations after the remote password unlock processing for the module 1 of station 2 2 is completed The stations can be accessed if the communication line is open D station can access the stations after the remote password unlock processing for the module 1 of station 3 2 is completed The stations can be accessed if the communication line is open 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q To prohibit access to another station from the external device using the Ethernet module MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communication function place a check mark at the following setting items in the remote password setting for the relay station and station to be accessed GX Developer communication port UDP IP dedicated instructions MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communication port Set this on the remote password setting screen of GX Developer Other stations can be accessed if a check mark is not placed in the above setting items x x 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 5 9 2 Precautions when using the remote password check function The following are precautions when using the remote password check function for the Ethernet module 1 6 After a remote password is set in the QCP
515. the sequence program for initial processing Connected using 10BASE2 Check the contact status of the power supply module of the station in which the Ethernet module is installed LG and FG terminal grounding Ground the LG and FG terminals start up the Ethernet module and try communicating with an external device x3 Are the LG and FG NO terminal grounded Refer to POINT in this section and correct the error causing part Did it occur after replacing the Ethernet module NO Check and fix the faulty part for each communication processing Sending error in fixed buffer communication See Section 11 4 1 Receiving error in fixed buffer communication See Section 11 4 2 Error in random access buffer communication See Section 11 4 3 Error in the MC protocol communication See Section 11 4 4 Send error during communication by e mail See Section 11 4 5 Receive error during communication by e mail See Section 11 4 6 i Error in redundant system See Section 11 4 7 x1 See Section 11 1 when the I O signal X1C COM ERR LED ON confirmation signal is turned on or when the display LED COM ERR communication error detection display lights up Check the dedicated instruction control table for a processing during which an error occurred or the error code stored in the buffer memory then check the contents of the error and take corrective actions by ref
516. the time interval before reconfirming the existence of an external device on an open connection for which existence confirmation is set to confirm that does not respond b Designate the setting value in a range from 1 to 32767 When the default value is used setting is not required c Timer setting setting value x 500 ms Timer setting Destination existence confirmation resend timer address 13h a This timer sets the number of times to reconfirm existence when there is no response from an external device on an open connection for which existence confirmation is set to confirm b Designate the setting value in a range from 1 to 32767 When the default value is used setting is not required 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 10 DNS setting Input format 1 11 DNS setting IP address of DNS server n x1 1 The DNS setting is set when the e mail sending receiving function is used Refer to Chapter 2 E mail Function of the User s Manual Application 1 Designate the setting value of each timer on the Ethernet module side in such a way that the following relations are met Response TCP ST A TCP ULP TCP end IP assembly e motor timer gt lee as gt a A gt seg gt i valie value timer value ISE 2 TCP zero window x resend timer value timer value Furthermore when connecting a line using our products you should make sure that both nodes have the same settings 2 Designate
517. ther station QCPU See Section 5 9 1 2 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q Data communication procedure See Section 4 6 Network Parameters Setting the Number of MNET 10H Ethernet Cards lt See Section 4 7 Operational Settings See Section 5 2 Initial Processing See Section 5 3 Router Relay Parameter See Section 5 5 Open Settings Set parameters for the Ethernet module through GX Developer y See Section 5 9 5 How to set the target connection Start up the PLC CPU for the remote passowrd check Res Stes ais A _ Initial processing i Automatically processed Designate the Accumulated count for remote password mismatch notification from the QCPU See Section 5 9 6 Buffer memory for the remote password check function y Open processing See Section 5 6 Communication No 1 to 16 for user y Remote password unlock processing Communication for system Remote password Remote password unlock processing unlock processing i l Remote password unlock processing Y Y 4 Communication E mail MELSECNET H Communication i Communication Communication using random sending enrages fae data File transfer using Web using laccess buffer receiving communication instructions FTP function GX Developer 2 1 Remote password lock processing Rem
518. therefore execute only when needed b System areas The areas used by the Ethernet module Important Do not write data in the system areas of the buffer memory If data is written to any of the system areas the PLC system may not be operated properly Some of the user areas contain partially system areas Care must be taken when reading writing to the buffer memory 1 Use the FROM TO instructions or other applicable commands to access the buffer memory addresses shown in this section when the QnA series Ethernet module programs are used for the Q series Ethernet module see Section 2 in Appendix In the QCPU the buffer memory of an intelligent function module is accessed by dedicated instructions It is not necessary to access directly using the FROM TO or other instructions from the sequence program except when accessing the buffer memory as shown in the programming examples in each of function explanation sections 2 When the QnA series Ethernet module programs are used for the Q series Ethernet module it is also recommended to replace the instructions with the dedicated instructions shown in the corresponding function explanation section of each manual for the Q series Ethernet module 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Assignments of the buffer memory A buffer memory consists of 16 bits per address lt Bit configuration diagram gt b15 b14 b15 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 bT b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bl
519. this protective sheet during wiring work However be sure to remove the protective sheet before operating the module to allow heat radiation during operation e Make sure to install the attached terminal covers on the product before turning the power back on and starting the operation after wiring work Failing to install the terminal covers may result in malfunctions e Solder the coaxial cable connectors properly Incomplete soldering may result in malfunctions Setup and Maintenance Precautions A CAUTION e Never disassemble or modify the module This may cause breakdowns malfunctions injuries or fire e Before mounting or dismounting the module make sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply Failure to do so may cause the module to breakdown or malfunction e Do not mount remove the module onto from base unit more than 50 times IEC61131 2 compliant after the first use of the product Failure to do so may cause the module to malfunction due to poor contact of connector e Do not touch the terminals while the power is on Doing so may cause electric shocks or malfunctions e Before cleaning the module or retightening the terminal screws and the module mounting screws make sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply Failure to do so may cause the module to breakdown or malfunction If the screws are loose it may cause the module to short circuit malfunction or fall off If the screws are tighte
520. tial processing 1 or an external device Such as a personal computer with the designated IP address x1 The PING test can also be performed for the QnA A Series Ethernet modules However the PING test can be performed for the following A Series Ethernet modules starting with software version S AJ71E71 AJ71E71 B2 AJ71E71 B5 b The following can be checked by performing the PING test for the Ethernet module Whether a line has been properly connected to the test target Ethernet module e Whether the parameters for the Ethernet module have been correctly set Whether the initial processing for the Ethernet module has been completed normally 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q c The PING test can be performed for an Ethernet module in the same Ethernet as the local station Same sub net address d Ifthe external device subject to the PING test is an Ethernet module do not designate the UDP port for GX Developer of the Ethernet module as a valid port for the remote password check If it is designated as a valid port for the remote password check the PING test cannot be performed 2 Executing the PING test The example below explains the PING test methodology and GX Developer settings when performing a PING test for the Ethernet module in the same Ethernet from a peripheral device GX Developer Station No 3 10 97 85 223 Network No 1 Ethernet Q 4 E Station No 2 QCPU Ethernet QCPU Eth
521. tion No 2 Upon receiving data from the designated external device set in the open processing the Ethernet module processes the following e Stores the receive data in the fixed buffer No 2 area Area beginning from the head address of the target fixed buffer 1 e Stores the data length in the head address area of the target fixed address 1 e Request the PLC CPU to start up the interrupt program x1 The receive data length is expressed by a byte count When an odd number of data bytes is received the last received data is stored at the lower byte of the last data storage area The higher byte becomes a non constant value The interrupt program starts up Execute the dedicated BUFRCVS instruction and read the receive data length and receive data from the fixed buffer No 2 At normal completion e PLC CPU error flag SMO 2 OFF At abnormal completion e PLC CPU error flag SMO 2 ON e PLC CPU error code SDO 2 error code 2 For more details on the PLC CPU error flag SMO and error code SDO see the manual for the PLC CPU used The execution of the interrupt program is finished and the execution of the main program starts again 1 To start up an interrupt program create an interrupt enable disable program in the main program using the El and DI instructions 2 The programming for reading of receive data with an interrupt program is the same as that for communicating procedure exist by fixed
522. tion Operating System Version 4 0 Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System Web servers e Microsoft Internet Information Server 5 0 Microsoft Internet Information Server 4 0 Microsoft Peer Web Services 4 0 Microsoft Personal Web Server 4 0 Web browsers Internet Explorer 4 0 or later Microsoft Corporation Netscape Communicator 4 05 or later Netscape Communications Corporation Power supply CPU Ethernet Local station module HTTP MCprotocol HTTP Access to the PLC Web server External device Web browser Execution of Display of the ASP file requests results Communication library 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 6 Connecting GX Developer GT SoftGOT and GOT Details are explained in the Operating Manuals for GX Developer and GT SoftGOT and User s Manual for GOT Connection System Manual a Simplifying sequence programs using GX Developer GX Developer supports the parameter setting function to perform the Ethernet module initialization and the open processing with external devices By setting up the following parameters with network parameter settings of GX Developer access from the external device to the PLC is enabled It can also significantly simplify sequence programs used to perform communication by Ethernet modules IP address setting e Por
523. tion count Dedicated instruction abnormal completion count Number of mails normally completed Attached file sending count Sending to the server count Number of mails abnormally completed Error log write count Error code Command code Error log 2 to 16 Number of normal end dedicated instructions Number of error end of dedicated instructions Number of normal end mails Number of attached file sends Number of server sends Number of error end mails Sent e mail information Number of Error log writes Error code Command code Error log block 1 Send To fo Latest error log Send date Subject Subject Error log block 2 to 16 same as error log block 1 Error log 2 to 16 K1 Can be monitored on the System monitor screen of GX Developer See Section 11 2 2 11 11 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 4 Checking the error information by the buffer memory batch monitoring function 11 12 It is explained here how the Ethernet module errors can be checked from GX Developer Error codes stored in the buffer memory of the Ethernet module can be monitored using the Buffer memory batch monitoring function of GX Developer Operating procedure Step 1 Select Online Monitor Buffer memory batch from the GX Developer menu bar and start the Buffer memory batch monitoring screen Step 2 Enter Module start address For the module start address enter the start I O signal of the Etherne
524. tion for a No confirm Existence confirmation S connection should be confirmed or not Confirm 401s to 13874 or 138By to FFFE 1H to FFFFFFFFu FFFFFFFF Simultaneous Broadcast 4014 to FFFFH Dest Port No Set the port No of an external device FFFFu Simultaneous Broadcast can be set only when receiving Destination IP address Set the IP address of an external device 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 1 Protocol connection numbers 1 to 8 addresses 20H to 27H b8 connection numbers 9 to 16 addresses System area is used a Select the protocol for each connection Communicate using TCP IP Communicate using UDP IP b For protocols TCP UDP see 1 4 Software Configuration 2 Open system connection numbers 1 to 8 addresses 20H to 27H b15 b14 connection numbers 9 to 16 addresses System area is used a Select the connection open system for each connection for which TCP is selected in 1 Protocol If UDP is selected the specification of this item is not required Name of setting Description of setting A Perform active open processing to an external device that waits for a passive open Active N Fullpassive Unpassive on the TCP connection Perform passive open processing on the TCP connection addressing all the devices connected Unpassive to a network The local station is placed in the wait status to wait for an Active open request to be sent Perform passive
525. tion in data link instruction communication is currently in use There is an error in the IP address for the Station No lt gt IP information setting for MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communication Insufficient free space in receive buffer of the relay station for MELSOFT connection or data link instruction or the communication requested station Receive buffer full error A request that could not be processed from the PLC CPU was made Data that could not be processed by the PLC CPU Ethernet module was designated Error handling Correct the network number and PC number e Correct the content of the read write request e Set the Station No lt gt IP information for the Ethernet module Change the parameter conversion method for the MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 Execute the end processing of the Ethernet module after all communication is over e Check that the relay station external station operates normally If communication is continuing it is not necessary to take actions for the error Check whether or not the cable connection between the local station and external station is faulty If some load is applied to the line reduce the load e Check that the local station relay station and external station operate normally e Check whether or not the cable connection between the local station and external station is faulty e Increase TCP resend timer value Execute the reque
526. tion in progress 1 Refer to Section 11 1 1 for causes of error displays and the corresponding corrective actions 2 The OPEN LED turns on off depending on the open states of user connections 1 to 16 The open states of the system connections e g automatic open UDP port are not included x3 The ERR LED turns on in the following cases e When setting values in GX Developer mode station number and or network number are incorrect e When an error has occurred in the Ethernet module or PLC CPU and the operation is disabled due to the error 4 Refer to Section 11 1 2 for the time when COM ERR LED is on 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 4 Connecting to the Network CAUTION The following explains how to connect the Ethernet module to the 100BASE TX 10BASE T 10BASE5 and 10BASE2 networks Some precautions that should be observed while connecting the Ethernet module are also shown below Pay strict attention to the safety and use the Ethernet module properly 1 Sufficient safety precautions are required when installing the 100BASE TX 10BASE T 10BASE5 and 10BASE2 networks Consult a specialist when connecting cable terminals or installing trunk line cables etc 2 Use aconnection cable conforming to the standards shown in Section 2 2 3 The allowable bending radius for coaxial cable is preset When bending coaxial cables to connect them a space that is larger than the coaxial cables
527. tion oj confirmation Port No IP address Receive v No procedure No pairs v No confirm Unpassive 4f4j4j4j4jajajajajajajaaaaa Al44a alata lala aalayaiare Aaa alaiaiaraiaralaraiare Aaa al alalaralaralayaiara End Cancel Connection No 1 Local station Port No 2000H for main program 6 Fixed buffer No 1 receive data Stored in D500 to D503 7 Fixed buffer No 1 receive instruction complete device M500 8 Fixed buffer No 1 receive instruction abnormal complete device M501 9 Fixed buffer No 1 send instruction complete status D5001 10 Fixed buffer No 1 receive status signal M40 POINT Secure sufficient device memory according to the maximum length of data sent from the source in order to prevent device areas used for other purposes from being overwritten by the reception data 2 Outline of the program example a Send program QCPU 1st station side 1 After setting each parameter with GX Developer and write to PLC CPU reset the PLC CPU and confirm that the initial processing is completed 2 Perform open processing Active open for connection No 1 1 3 Communicate data from the PLC CPU using fixed buffer communication no procedure sending 4 After the data sending is completed perform close processing for connection No 1 1 1 Use the program example described in Section 5 6 1 Active open
528. to 20628 Connection 50904 to 50941 No 7 Same as connection No 1 20629 to 20633 Connection 5095H to 50991 No 8 Same as connection No 1 20634 to 20638 Connection 509Ax to 509E x No 9 Same as connection No 1 20639 to 20643 Connection 509Fx to 50A3 H No 10 Same as connection No 1 20644 to 20648 Connection 50A4n to 50A8 H No 11 Same as connection No 1 Continues on the next page 3 22 3 22 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Continued from the previous page Address ss GX Developer 7 a Initial value 4 Reference Decimal Application 2 setting Hexadecimal teats section Hexadecimal applicability 20649 to 2 i ae ee Same as connection No 1 H H i 20654 to 20658 50AEn to 50B2h Same as connection No 1 H H RER E Same as connection No 1 50B3x to 50B71 Co Same as connection No 1 50B8x to 50BC 20669 to 20673 50BDu to 50C1n Remote Same as connection No 1 d f 20674 to 20678 Monitoring area ae pe ner open i i PESOS monitoring area port 20679 to 20683 a 50C71 to 50CBu communication Same as connection No 1 UDP port 20684 to 20688 ere 50CC to 50D0x communication Same as connection No 1 TCP port FTP 20689 to 20693 nt communication Same as connection No 1 50D 14 to 50D5x 20694 to 20736 50D6 to 5100 20737 51014 20738 5102 er HTTP response code 100 to 199 207 0739 er HTTP response code 200 to 299 Stee Section 11 3 i
529. ts e Locations exposed to direct sunlight e Location exposed to strong electric or magnetic fields e Location where vibrations or impacts are directly applied to the main unit CAUTION e Use the PLC in the operating environment that meets the general specifications described in the user s manual of the CPU module to use Using the PLC in any other operating environments may cause electric shocks fires or malfunctions or may damage or degrade the module 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 2 Settings and Procedures Prior to Starting the Operation The following shows a flow of the procedure that is required prior to starting the operation Procedures prior to operation Install the Ethernet module to the base unit ee See Connect the Ethernet module to the Ethernet network sy See Section 4 4 Connecting to the Network eee Connect GX Developer and QCPU with a cable eee Set the network parameters for the Ethernet module with GX Developer reer cies abt See Section 4 5 Settings from GX Developer Perform self diagnostics tests with GX Developer sa eee See Section 4 8 Self Diagnostic Tests Set the operation mode to Online with GX Developer sd See Section 4 5 Settings from GX Developer Send the Ping command from an external device and See Section 5 4 Confirming the Completion confirm the completion of the Ethernet module initial processing a
530. tting Assigning the 1 0 address is not necessary as the CPU does it automatically Leaving this setting blank will not cause an error to occur Base setting Base mode Auto Detail 8 Slot Default 12 Slot Default Settings should be set as same when Import Multiple CPU Parameter Read PLC data using multiple CPU Acknowledge XY assignment Default Check End Cancel Base model name Power model name Extension cable Multiple CPU settings Display contents Setting for item Select Intelli Enter the module model name to be mounted Example QU71E71 100 Points Select 32 points Start XY Enter the start I O signal hexadecimal for the target module Select the control PLC of the Ethernet module when a multiple CPU system is Detailed setting employed See QCPU User s Manual 7 F A Multiple CPU System Multiple CPU setting Select when using a multiple CPU system 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 5 2 Other settings This section explains the names of the setting screens for various Ethernet module functions For setting contents see the sections that describe respective screens in detail 1 Network parameters Setting the number of MNET 10H Ethernet cards Details are explained in Section 4 6 This screen is for setting the Ethernet module as a network module It is also the main screen when setting the Operat
531. tus signal address 5005n b0 2 D amp 2 o O 3 s ACK 8 only TCP 8 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE NO PROCEDURE CONTROL METHOD POINT MELSEC Q Confirm the normal completion of the initial processing Confirm the normal completion of the open processing for connection No 1 Upon receiving data from the designated external device set in the open processing the Ethernet module processes the following e Stores the receive data to the fixed buffer No 1 area Area beginning from the head address of the target fixed buffer 1 e Stores the data length to the head address area of the target fixed address 1 e Fixed buffer receive status signal address 5005H b0 ON x1 The receive data length is expressed by a byte count When an odd number of data bytes is received the last received data is stored at the lower byte of the last data storage area The higher byte becomes a non constant value Execute the dedicated BUFRCV instruction and read the receive data length and receive data from the fixed buffer No 1 End the receive processing At normal completion e BUFRCYV instruction complete device ON e BUFRCV instruction complete device 1 OFF e BUFRCYV instruction complete status area 2 0000H At abnormal completion e BUFRCYV instruction complete device ON e BUFRCYV instruction complete device 1 ON e BUFRCYV instruction complete status
532. types of the parameter setting screens for GX Developer in order to use the Ethernet module e Section 3 6 describes the parameter settings required for each function to be used Confirm the required parameters set them according to the relevant section providing detailed explanation and save the setting values in the PLC CPU to which the Ethernet module is installed d To find out how to check for Ethernet module failures e Section 4 8 describes the self diagnostic test for the Ethernet module e To find out how to check for connection errors with the external devices e Sections 5 4 1 to 5 4 3 describe how to check for connection errors by performing the PING test and loop back test through GX Developer e Section 5 4 4 describes how to check for connection errors using the PING command e Section 5 4 5 describes how to check for connection errors by performing the loopback test through MC protocol based communication x For details of the loopback test commands through MC protocol refer to the Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual 3 To find out about the connection between the Ethernet module and the external devices a To find out about the communication procedures e Section 5 1 describes an outline of the communication procedures b To find out about the connections with the external devices e Section 5 6 describes the connections open and close processing for each of the communication method
533. ual Application RECV Reads data received from other stations for main program Section 6 5 of User s Manual Application RECVS Reads data received from other stations for interrupt programs Section 6 6 of User s Manual Application Reading writing clock data remote RUN STOP Runs stops other stations in remote mode Section 6 7 of User s Manual Application Reads writes the clock data of other stations Section 6 8 of User s Manual Application 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 6 List of GX Developer Setting Items for Ethernet Modules The following table lists the parameter setting items that are set using GX Developer Function and parameter setting requirement Refer ence Parameter setting item Description of setting Psa Bardo Data Automatic Section link notification 5 PLC parameter i Set the module mount information VO assignment This is set when an Ethernet module is Seran settings used in a multiple CPU system Set the relationship between the Interrupt pointer control number SI on the Ethernet Section settings module side and the interrupt pointer 7 3 used on the PLC CPU side Network parameters Setting the number of Perform settings for using the Ethernet Section MNET 10H Ethernet module as a netw
534. uest since the close processing Execute the open processing and make a H is being executed via the CLOSE sending request instruction System error COBB e The OS detected any error COBC Designated communication line is Open the communication line H closed e Review the target connection number f Check whether or not requests are made Cannot send by acknowledging a COBDu continuously without waiting for continuous requests responses COBEx System error COBFu e The OS detected any error The receiving completion confirmation signal was turned on COCOH or Review and correct the program when the receiving completion signal was not on The transmission interval of UDP is Check whether or not sending requests CoC1H too short are repeated i Make the sending interval longer System error e The OS detected any error Execute the initial processing by setting that the router relay function should be A sending request was made to adel an external device whose Set the correct data for the router relay class network address are param t r different from those of the local i COC5H Correct the IP address of the external station when the router relay P n device and execute the open processing function is not used j Check that the network address is e The setting of the router relay ae rameter is incorrect a its p When it is changed execute the initial processing again System error ee e
535. ule Data re retry some retry command ACK is not returned from external device TCP resend TCP resend TCP resend timer value pa Mer value piglimer value Issue of system switching request TCP ULP timer value to control system CPU A4 1 If ACK is not returned from the external device within the TCP ULP timer period at TCP opening or data transmission a transmission error occurs and the Ethernet issues a system switching request to the control system CPU Refer to Section 5 2 2 for the TCP ULP timer The above chart shows a setting example of two retries x3 Set whether the system switching request will be issued or not to the control system CPU in the redundant settings of GX Developer Refer to Section 5 11 3 5 92 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 4 Issue of system switching request at disconnection detection The Ethernet module mounted on the main base unit of the control system CPU monitors the connection status of the cable connected to the Ethernet module and on detection of disconnection it issues a system switching request to the control system CPU This function is available for the QJ71E71 100 only a Disconnection detection at which system switching request is issued Disconnection is detected in any of the following cases e Disconnection between Ethernet module and hub e Cable removal from hub side connector e Hub power off Cable removal from
536. ule during other station access a This item designates the network module to which the request is directed when the local station issues a data communication request and it cannot specify the network number of the access destination PLC station This should be one of the following e A network module for the MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 An Ethernet module 2 Network type a Select Ethernet then each setting item is displayed as shown in the above screen The following items must be set e Starting I O No e Network No e Group No e Station No e Mode e Operational settings e Initial settings Settings not required when using the default values 3 Starting I O No a Set the head I O number of the Ethernet module in units of 16 points hexadecimal b An example of the setting is shown below Example 1 CPUtype Q25 H CPU 2 Existing mounted module Serial communication module QJ71C24 3 I O usage status X Y000 to X Y01F used by QU71C24 X Y020 to X YOS3F used by the Ethernet module The head I O number is 0020 in the above environment 4 Network No a Set the network number of the target Ethernet module setting range from 1 to 239 for the MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 b Do not set the network number to a value already assigned to existing systems and other Ethernet and MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 network systems 5 Group No a Set the group number of the target Ethernet module
537. unctions 1 Perform the re initial processing of the Ethernet module specified in Un 2 Whether or not the UINI instruction has been completed can be checked by the complete bit devices D1 0 and D1 1 a Complete bit device D1 0 Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the UINI instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Complete bit device D1 1 Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the UINI instruction e Normal completion Stays off and does not change e Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the UINI instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing Operation when the UINI instruction is being executed END processing END processing Sequence program Scan Scan Scan END processing instruction execution i i UINI instruction Complete device Complete device 1 E EA Initialization of module Reinitialization request Please keep the following points in mind when reinitializing Ethernet module Failure to do so may cause errors in the data communication with the external devices Be sure to end all current data communication with external devices and close all connections before performing a re initial processing Do not mix a re initial processing done by writing directly into buffer memory for instance by using a TO instruction with
538. unctions of the module e Never disassemble or modify the module This may cause breakdowns malfunctions injuries or fire 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 9 2 Mounting and dismounting the module Before mounting or dismounting the Ethernet module make sure to read Section 4 1 Handling Precautions thoroughly secure the safety and handle the module properly according to the instructions The following explains the procedures when mounting dismounting the Ethernet module lt Operation procedure when replacing the Ethernet module gt Step 1 Turn off the power supply to the Ethernet module installed station Step 2 Remove the network cable and Ethernet module Step 3 Install and start up the new Ethernet module according to Section 4 2 Settings and Procedures Prior to Starting the Operation Step 4 Reset the external device 1 lt Operation procedure when replacing the QOPU gt Step 1 Read the parameters for the Ethernet module from the PLC CPU and save them using GX Developer 2 Step 2 Replace the QCPU See the applicable QCPU Users Manual Step 3 Load the parameters for the Ethernet module that have been saved in GX Developer to the new QCPU Step 4 Reset the external device x1 When the Ethernet module is replaced reset the external device as well If the external device retains the Ethernet address it may be impossible to continue the communication because a module is rep
539. us Communication function communhic Communication Communication Remote f MELSECNET 10 check of a R B Simultaneous ation router via pairing via automatic password TCP IP UDP IP relay external broadcast ner relay R open open UDP port check communication device function Communic QnA P i ation using compatible O O O 5 x O O O O O the MC 3E frame protocol A compatible x oO x x oO x O O 1E frame Communic Procedure O O O O o O ation using exist the fixed No 1 x x GE buffer procedure O O O O O 0 Communication using the x O O v a O x o O random access buffer Sending receiving e mail x x x x x x x O x Communication using o o X x o S o X o data link instructions File transfer X x x x x x FTP server function O O Communication using the o O x x x o o x Web function Available X Not available or this function does not correspond to any of the functions in the function column x1 Valid only for UDP 2 The automatic open UDP port is excluded 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 4 Ethernet Module Function List This section shows a list of Ethernet module functions 1 Basic functions of the Ethernet module The Ethernet module can perform the communications shown in the table below via the TCP IP or UDP IP communication Function QnA compatible 3E frame A compatible 1E frame Communication using the MC protocol Description Reads writes PLC CPU data fr
540. us area x2 Value other than 0000H e Response end code 3 Value other than 00H After the data transmission is abnormally completed execute the dedicated BUFSND instruction again to repeat the transmission processing x2 The status at completion is stored in the complete status area of the BUFSND instruction For details on the dedicated instructions see Chapter 10 Dedicated Instructions x3 The response end code is stored in the communication storage status area of the buffer memory For details on the response end code see Section 7 4 2 Application Data 5 End codes POINT The destination setting see Section 5 5 for a connection whose parameters are set with GX Developer becomes valid when the open completion signal address 5000 corresponding bit of the Ethernet module switches from off to on 7 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE PROCEDURE EXIST CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q 7 3 Receiving Control Method This section explains the control method when the Ethernet module receives data from an external device Fixed buffer communication employs the following receive processing methods e Receive processing with the main program dedicated instruction BUFRCV See Section 7 3 1 e Receive processing with an interrupt program dedicated instruction BUFRCVS See Section 7 3 2 7 3 1 Receive processing with the main program dedicated instruction BUFRCV This section explains about the receive proce
541. utions lt DANGER e Do not write any data in the system area of the buffer memory of the intelligent function module Also do not output turn on the use prohibited signal which is one of the output signals from the PLC CPU to the intelligent function module If data is written to the system area or the use prohibited signal is output there is a risk that the PLC system may malfunction A CAUTION e Do not bundle the control wires and the communication cables with the main circuit and the power wires and do not install them close to each other They should be installed at least 100 mm 3 94 in away from each other Failure to do so may generate noise that may cause malfunctions e When the status control remote RUN STOP etc of the PLC CPU is performed from the external device select the Always wait for OPEN parameter set by an user in advance Select with the initial timing setting in the operational setting If Do not wait for OPEN is selected the communication line at remote STOP is closed The communication line cannot be reopened on the PLC CPU side after that and the remote RUN from the external device cannot start either Installation Precautions lt gt DANGER e Use the PLC in the operating environment that meets the general specifications described in the user s manual of the CPU Module to use Using the PLC in any other operating environments may cause electric shocks fires or malfunctions
542. vice NO on the sending side operate normally Check the sending side If the sending side is also an Ethernet module see Section 11 3 The Ethernet module hardware on the receiving side may be faulty Consult your nearest dealer with the details of the errors MELSEC Q 11 49 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 4 3 Errors during random access buffer communication Communication error Check the open status of the connection with the external device Execute the open processing of the applicable connection For details see Section 5 6 Make sure that the open close processing using input output signals and the dedicated OPEN or CLOSE instruction are not executed simultaneously in the same connection If so modify the program Is the applicable connection open buffer memory address corresponding bit of 5000x Was a command sent form the external device Send the command to the Ethernet module Was a response returned to the device that sent the command NO Is the IP address designation of the command correct Does the communication protocol TCP UDP match with that of the external device The command may not be sent to the Ethernet module from the external device on the command sending side Check the sending side Fix the faulty part according to the description of the end code see Section 1
543. wide range of application development This section provides the overview of the functions provided by MX Component and explains the procedure up to creation of applications Refer to Operating Manual and Programming Manual of MX Component for the details Appendix 9 1 Overview of MX Component This section provides the overview of MX Component Different communication paths operating systems programming languages and functions are supported depending on the version of MX Component used 1 Support for a wide range of communication paths to PLCs MX Component supports a wide range of communication paths to PLCs It is possible to construct systems according to the needs of the users lt Example of communication using MX Component gt Ethernet communication 0 Gateway function communication Modem communication 2 Dramatic improvement of application development efficiency MX Component provides wizard style communication setting utilities The user only needs to select settings from menus displayed on the screen in an interactive manner to achieve the communication settings required to access the target PLC CPU Moreover once the communication setting has been performed it is possible to access the PLC CPU simply by specifying the logical station number that is stored via the communication setting utilities App 44 App 44 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 3 Support for wide choice of basic operating systems MX Co
544. x 9 for the overview of MX Component Supported basic operation systems Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System Microsoft Windows NT Workstation Operating System Version 4 0 Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System Depending on the version of MX Component used different operating systems are supported See the manual of MX Component for details Communication support tools e MX Component SWOD5C ACT E or later 7 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE PROCEDURE EXIST CONTROL METHOD MELSEC Q 7 FIXED BUFFER COMMUNICATION WITH THE PROCEDURE EXIST CONTROL METHOD This chapter explains how the PLC CPU and external device communicate in a 1 1 mode using the fixed buffers with the procedure exist control method of the Ethernet module 7 1 Control Method The following explains how communication is performed using the fixed buffers and the procedure exist control method In the communication processing using the fixed buffers data transmission from the PLC CPU and the external device is executed through handshaking 1 The data flow in the communication processing is as follows BUFSND External device Fixed buffer instruction PLC CPU cae BUFRCV instruction 2 Datacan be com
545. x when using the Web function or GX Developer 3 Remote password check performed by the Ethernet module a Communication in which a remote password check is performed 1 When the following parameters have been set for the Ethernet module mounted on the QCPU station the Ethernet module performs a remote password check for communication requests as indicated below e When a remote password is set in the QCPU e When the connection that is communicating data with the external device is set as a target for the remote password check 2 The Ethernet module performs a remote password check with respect to a communication request to the local station other station received from the external device 3 The Ethernet module performs transmission with respect to the following transmission requests without performing a remote password check e Transmission request from the local station QCPU such as transmission using the fixed buffer e Communication request from the external device including GX Developer connected to the local station QCPU to send to another station upon request from the QCPU 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q Ethernet module Remote password check applicable path PES Out of remote password check applicable path r Remotepassword check 1 BRS CE GX Developer rete eines 1 0 Gy 1 Remote password GX
546. y 0 Ethernet 1 On 1 ASCII 1 IEEE802 3 0 Off 2 Initial Open method 5 Write enable disable at 0 No parameter setting RUN time 1 With parameter setting 0 Disable 3 TCP existence confirmation 1 Enable 0 Ping 6 Initial timing 1 KeepAlive 0 Do not wait for OPEN 1 Always wait for OPEN 11 9 11 9 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 3 Buffer memory that can be monitored with the GX Developer diagnostic function The following is a list of the buffer memory addresses that can be displayed on the Ethernet diagnostics screen and System monitor screen of GX Developer The display screen and display contents are mentioned for the Ethernet diagnostics screen See Section 11 2 2 for how to display the System monitor screen Address F Ethernet diagnostics A Dec Hex Applicable buffer memory display screen Display contents Pairing open b7 Connection No 1 Destination existence confirmation A 3 b1 Existence confirmation 32 e0y Connection No Communication method protocol Status for each Protocol b8 connection Open system b15 b14 33 to 39 Connection No 2 to 8 214 to 271 same as connection No 1 105 69x Initial error code 106 to 107 6An to 6Bx Local station IP address Local station Ethernet address 6C x to 6En Parameter status 116 744 Automatic open UDP port number Automatic open UDP port number Network No 118 76H 1 Local station network number station number a Station No
547. ytes or less n 2 if the size of the message transmitted by the Ethernet module is greater than 536 bytes and no more than 1072 bytes n 3 if the size of the message transmitted by the Ethernet module is greater than 1072 bytes and no more than 1608 bytes 5 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE MELSEC Q 3 When communication errors occur due to noise or other factors the settings should be changed to increase the number of retries The number of retries is obtained by using the following equation In case of the default values 2 60 20 1 Number 2 TCP ULP timer value 1 of retries TCP resend timer value Example Assuming the values are set in such a way that the number of retries is two a data transmission error will occur at the timing shown in the figure below if data transmission fails when communicating using fixed buffer BUFSND instruction BUFSND instruction completion device 1 Ethernet module command A 1 A 1 A piq pi Data First retry Second retry te TCP ULP timeout value A TCP resend timer value The time after which the data should be retransmitted when an ACK is not returned after sending data 4 Perform the following setting in order to eliminate the retries explained in 3 i e to set the number of retries to 0 TCP ULP _ TCP end _ TCP resend timer value timer value timer value Each timer value should be identical 5 The target existence check

Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual(Basic)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents